(11.19) Owner’s manual Leon SEAT Leon SEAT · 2019. 10. 8. · Owner’s manual SEAT Leon 5F0012720BN Inglés 5F0012720BN (11.19) SEAT Leon Inglés ... SEAT Official Service: Service

Owner’s manualSEAT Leon

5F0012720BN

Ingl

és 5

F001

2720

BN (

11.19

)

SEA

T Le

on I

nglé

s (11

.19)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.19

Vehicle identification data

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

IntroductionThank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve-hicle.

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoya vehicle with state-of-the-art technologyand top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man-ual carefully to learn more about your vehicleso you can enjoy all its benefits in your dailydriving.

Information about handling is complementedwith instructions regarding the operation andmaintenance of the vehicle in order to ensureits safety and maintain its value. Moreover, wewant to give you valuable advice and tips todrive your vehicle efficiently and respectingthe environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNINGRead and always observe safety infor-mation concerning the passenger'sfront airbag ››› page 30, Fitting and us-ing child seats.

About this manualThis manual describes the features of the ve-hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some ofthe features described below will be intro-duced in the future or will only be available incertain markets.

Some of the features described here arenot included in all the types or variationsof the model and they can be varied ormodified based on technical or marketingrequirements without it being consideredmisleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary fromits vehicle and must be interpreted as astandard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,backwards) in this manual refer to the traveldirection of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant tohelp the users better understand some fea-tures of the car. It is not a replacement for theinstruction manual. Access the instructionmanual to see the complete information andwarnings.

The features marked with an asteriskare included by default only in certainversions of the model, supplied as op-tional only for certain versions or only of-fered in certain countries.

Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-sence of this symbol does not guaranteethat the term is not a trademark.It indicates that the section continues onthe next page.

You can access the information in this manualusing:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure.● Visual table of contents that uses graphicsto indicate the pages containing “essential”information, which is detailed in the corre-sponding chapters.● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNINGTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about safety and warn you aboutpossible accident or injury risks.

CAUTIONTexts after this symbol indicate possibledamage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about the protection of the environ-ment.

®

NoteTexts after this symbol contain addition-al information.

Printed and digital instruction man-ualThe printed instruction manual contains rele-vant information about the use of the vehicleand the Infotainment System.

The digital version of the manuals containsmore in-depth information. It is available onSEAT's official website.

To view the digital version of the manual:

Fig. 1 SEAT website

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1● OR enter the following address in the navi-gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your-seat/manuals-offline.html

and select your vehicle.

Related videosThe operation of some of the vehicle's fea-tures can be shown as an instruction video:

Fig. 2 SEAT website

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 2● OR enter the following address in the navi-gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your-seat/manuals-offline.html

choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”.

NoteVideo instructions are only available incertain languages.

Frequently Asked Ques-tions

Before driving

How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 133

How do you adjust the steering wheel?››› page 14

How do you adjust the exterior mirrors?››› page 130

How do you turn on the exterior lights?››› page 118

How does the automatic gearbox selector leverwork? ››› page 255

How do you refuel? ››› page 322

How do you activate the windscreen wipers andwindscreen washer system? ››› page 127

Emergency situations

A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What doesthis mean? ››› page 89

How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 332

How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 47

Where is the vehicle tool kit located?››› page 38

How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncturekit? ››› page 40

How do you change a wheel? ››› page 41

How do you change a fuse? ››› page 54

How do you change a light? ››› page 57

How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 49

Useful tips

How do you set the time? ››› page 80

When should the vehicle inspection should beperformed? ››› page 85

What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels onthe steering wheel perform? ››› page 95

How do you remove the luggage compartmentcover? ››› page 139

How do you drive in an economical and environ-mentally-friendly way? ››› page 267

How do you check and top up the engine oil?››› page 334

How do you check and top up the engine cool-ant? ››› page 338

How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid?››› page 340

How do you check and top up the brake fluid?››› page 339

How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val-ues? ››› page 348

Vehicle washing tips ››› page 359

Functions of interest

Easy Connect, Car menu ››› page 92

How does the START-STOP system work?››› page 251

What parking assistants are available?››› page 300

How does the rear assist work? ››› page 305

How does the adaptive cruise control work?››› page 276

How can the SEAT driving mode be adjusted?››› page 264

How does the lane departure warning systemwork? ››› page 284

How does tyre pressure monitoring work?››› page 352

How do you open the vehicle without a key (Key-less Access)? ››› page 104

Interior lighting and ambient light ››› page 126

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsGeneral views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Correct sitting position of vehicle occu-pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 15How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 18Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 46Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Instruments and warning/controllamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Using the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Easy Connect system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Multifunction steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Anti-theft alarm system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Sunroof* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Windscreen wiper and rear window wipersystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Seats and headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 138Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139Net partition* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Power sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Full Link* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179SEAT Media Control* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185WLAN access point* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Navigation in Offroad mode* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Vehicle Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 246Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear-box* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

5

Table of Contents

SEAT Driving modes (SEAT Drive Pro-file)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Emergency brake assistance system (FrontAssist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272ACC - Adaptive Cruise Control* . . . . . . . . . . . 276Lane Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Stabilisation and brake assistance sys-tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 300Parking aid parking and manoeuvring(ParkPilot) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Parking System Plus* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301Rear parking aid* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Reverse Assist (Rear View Camera)* . . . . . . . 305Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308Towing bracket device* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322Fuel types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Engine management and emissions controlsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345Tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 356Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Accessories and modifications to the ve-hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 364

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 367Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Information about the EU Directive2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Indications about the technical data . . . . 372Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

6

General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Rear lid– Opening from outside ››› page 112– Emergency opening ››› page 113Fuel tank– Fuel capacity ››› page 372– Open/Close cap ››› page 322Opening and closing– Doors ››› page 109– Central locking ››› page 100– Manual release ››› page 110

1

2

3

Bonnet– Unlocking lever ››› page 332– Open/close ››› page 332Levels control– Oil ››› page 334– Brake fluid ››› page 339– Battery ››› page 341Towing the vehicle– Towline anchorage ››› page 52– Tow start ››› page 50

4

5

6

Action in the event of a puncture– Anti-puncture kit ››› page 38– Wheel change ››› page 41

7

7


Overview (left hand drive)

Electric windows ››› page 114Central locking ››› page 100Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 130Open bonnet lever ››› page 332Headlight switch ››› page 119Turn signal and main beam lever››› page 121Cruise control ››› page 270Warning lamps ››› page 89

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Wipers and rear window wiper››› page 127Driver information system ››› page 87Easy Connect ››› page 92Front passenger airbag disconnectiondisplay ››› page 25Fuses ››› page 54Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 14Ignition lock ››› page 246Starter button ››› page 247

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

Air conditioning ››› page 155Hazard warning lights ››› page 124

15

16

8


Overview (right hand drive)

Open bonnet lever ››› page 332Easy Connect ››› page 92Hazard warning lights ››› page 124Turn signal and main beam lever››› page 121Cruise control ››› page 270Warning lamps ››› page 89Wipers and rear window wiper››› page 127Driver information system ››› page 87

1

2

3

4

5

6

Headlight switch ››› page 119Central locking ››› page 100Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 130Electric windows ››› page 114Air conditioning ››› page 155Starter button ››› page 247Front passenger airbag disconnectiondisplay ››› page 25Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 14Ignition lock ››› page 246

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Fuses ››› page 5416

9


Interior view

Armrest ››› page 146Isofix anchors ››› page 32Headrest adjustment ››› page 134Seat belts ››› page 15Panoramic roof ››› page 116Interior mirror ››› page 130Disconnecting the front passenger frontairbag ››› page 25

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Electronic parking brake ››› page 292Seat adjustment ››› page 133

8

9

10

Safe driving

Safety

Safe driving

Advice about driving

Safety first!

WARNING● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle,both for the driver and the passengers. Theother sections of the on-board documenta-tion also contain further information thatyou should be aware of for your own safetyand for the safety of your passengers.● Ensure that the on-board documentationis kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-pecially important when lending or sellingthe vehicle to another person.

Before driving

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Make sure all luggage is secured››› page 138.

– Make sure that no objects can interfere withthe pedals.

– Adjust front seat, headrest and mirrorsproperly according to your size.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seatsalways have the headrests in the in-use po-sition ››› page 134.

– Instruct passengers to adjust the headrestsaccording to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 28.

– Assume the correct sitting position. Instructyour passengers also to assume a propersitting position ››› page 12.

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct yourpassengers also to fasten their seat beltsproperly ››› page 15.

Factors influencing safety

As a driver, you are responsible for yourselfand your passengers.

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– When travelling long distances, take breaksregularly - at least every two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNINGDriving under the influence of alcohol,drugs, medication or narcotics may resultin severe accidents and even loss of life.● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcoticsmay significantly alter perception, affectreaction times and safety while driving,which could result in the loss of control ofthe vehicle.

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an acci-dent, the safety equipment may reduce the »

11

Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover partof the safety equipment in your SEAT1):

● three-point seat belts,● belt tension limiters for the front and rearside seats,● belt tensioners for the front seats,● front airbags,● knee airbags,● side airbags in the front seat backrests,● side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,● head-protection airbags,● “ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rearchild seat system● height-adjustable front headrests,● rear headrests with in-use position andnon-use position,● adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct sitting position ofvehicle occupants

Correct position on the seat

Fig. 3 The correct distance between the driverand the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm(10 inches).

Fig. 4 Correct belt web and headrest positions

The correct sitting positions for the driver andpassengers are shown below.

If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct sitting position,contact a specialised workshop for help withany special devices. The seat belt and airbagcan only provide optimum protection if a cor-rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom-mends taking your car in for technical serv-ice.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident or suddenbraking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend thefollowing positions:

Valid for all vehicle occupants:● Adjust the headrest so that its upper edge isat the same level as the top of your head, oras close as possible to the same level as thetop of your head and under no circumstancesbelow eye level. Keep the back of your neckas close as possible to the headrest ››› Fig. 4.● Short people must lower the headrest com-pletely, even if your head is below its upperedge.● Tall people must raise the headrest com-pletely.● Always keep your feet in the footwell whilethe vehicle is in motion.

1) Depending on the version/market.12

Safe driving

● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly››› page 18.

The following also applies to the driver:● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-right position so that your back rests com-pletely against it.● Move the steering wheel so it is at least25 cm (10 inches) away from the sternum››› Fig. 3 and you can hold it with both handson both sides, on the outer part, with yourarms slightly bent.● The steering wheel must always point to-wards the chest and never towards the face.● Move the seat in such a way that you canstep on the pedals with your knees slightlybent and with a distance between the kneesand the dashboard of at least 10 cm (4 in-ches) ››› Fig. 3.● Adjust the height of the seat so that youcan reach the top of the steering wheel.● Always keep both feet in the footwell sothat you have the vehicle under control at alltimes.

For the passenger, the following applies:● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-right position so that your back rests com-pletely against it.● Move the seat as far back as possible (mini-mum 25 cm between the chest and the dash-

board check translation). If you are sittingcloser than 25 cm, the airbag system cannotprotect you properly.

Number of seats

The vehicle has 5 seats, 2 in the front and 3 inthe rear. All seats are equipped with a safetybelt.

In some versions, your vehicle is approvedonly for 4 seats. 2 front seats and 2 rearseats.

WARNINGSitting in an incorrect position may in-crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries inthe event of sudden braking or manoeu-vring, in case of collision or accident and ifthe airbags deploy.● Before starting the car, all passengersmust be sitting in a correct position andstay like that for the entire journey. This al-so applies to a correct use of the seat belt.● The maximum amount of people in thevehicle is the same as the amount of seatswith seat belts.● For children, always use a certified pro-tection system, certified and suited for theirweight and height ››› page 28.● While driving, always keep your feet inthe footwell. Never place them over theseat or the dashboard, for example, or out-

side the window. Otherwise the airbag andseat belt may offer insufficient protectionand also increase the risk of injury in theevent of an accident.

Risks of sitting in an incorrect posi-tion

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases.Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrectsitting positions substantially reduce the pro-tective function of seat belts and, therefore,increase the risk of severe or even lethal inju-ries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is espe-cially heightened when a deploying airbagstrikes a vehicle occupant who has assumedan incorrect sitting position. The driver is re-sponsible for all people, particularly children,inside the vehicle.

The following list contains examples of incor-rect sitting positions that could be dangerousfor all vehicle occupants.

When the vehicle is in motion:● Never stand in the vehicle.● Never stand on the seats.● Never kneel on the seats.● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to therear. »

13

Safety

● Never lean against the dash panel.● Never lie on the rear seats.● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.● Never sit sideways.● Never lean out of a window.● Never put your feet out of a window.● Never put your feet on the dash panel.● Never place your feet on the bench or onthe backrest of the seat.● Never travel in a footwell.● Never sit on the armrests.● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.● Never travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNINGSitting in an incorrect position increasesthe risk of severe or fatal injuries in theevent of accidents and sudden braking ormanoeuvres.● All occupants must sit correctly duringthe journey and wear the seat belt correct-ly.● Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit-ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt orare not at a proper distance of the airbagrisk suffering very serious or lethal injuries,especially if the airbags deploy and strikethem.

Steering wheel position adjust-ment

Fig. 5 Lever in the lower left side of the steeringcolumn.

Adjust the steering wheel before your trip andonly when the vehicle is stationary.

● Pull the ››› Fig. 5 1 lever down, move thesteering wheel to the desired position and liftthe lever back up until it locks.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-ment function and an incorrect adjustmentof the steering wheel can result in severe orfatal injury.● After adjusting the steering column, pushthe lever ››› Fig. 5 1 firmly upwards to en-sure the steering wheel does not acciden-tally change position while driving.

● Never adjust the steering wheel while thevehicle is in motion. If you need to adjustthe steering wheel while the vehicle is inmotion, stop safely and make the properadjustment.● The adjusted steering wheel should befacing your chest and not your face so asnot to hinder the driver's front airbag pro-tection in the event of an accident.● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside of thering at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positionsto reduce injuries when the driver's frontairbag deploys.● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position or in any other manner(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). Insuch cases, if the driver's airbag deploys,you may sustain injuries to your arms,hands and head.

Pedal area

Pedals

– Ensure that you can always press the ac-celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim-paired to the floor.

– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-paired to their initial positions.

14

Seat belts

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-tened during the trip and do not obstructthe pedals ››› .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedalsclear and which are secured to prevent themfrom slipping. You can obtain suitable floormats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must bepressed down thoroughly in order to stop thevehicle.

Wear suitable footwearAlways wear shoes which support your feetproperly and give you a good feeling for thepedals.

WARNING● Restricting pedal operation can lead tocritical situations while driving.● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floorcoverings over the original floor mats. Thiswould reduce the pedal area and could ob-struct the pedals. Risk of accident.● Never place objects in the driver footwell.An object could move into the pedal areaand impair pedal operation.

Seat belts

The whys and wherefores ofseat belts

Control lamps

It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

The control lamp lights up to remind thedriver to fasten their seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

● Fasten your seat belt securely.● Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.● Protect children by using a child seat ac-cording to the child's height and weight››› page 28.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speedexceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and theseat belts are not fastened or are unfastenedwhile driving, a warning sound will be heardfor a few seconds. The warning light will alsoflash .

The lamp goes out when the driver andpassenger seat belts are fastened with theignition switched on.

Rear seat belts fastened display*

Fig. 6 Instrument panel: left rear seat occu-pied and corresponding seat belt fastened dis-play.

Depending on the model version, when theignition is switched on, the seat belt statusdisplay ››› Fig. 6 on the instrument panel in-forms the driver whether the passengers inthe rear seats have fastened their seat belts.

It indicates that the corresponding seatis empty.Indicates that the seat is occupied andthe occupant is wearing the seat belt.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seatsis unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. Anaudible warning will also be heard if the vehi-cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened whiledriving in some of the rear seats, the seat belt »

15

Safety

status is displayed for approximately 30 sec-onds. The indication can be hidden by press-ing the button on the dash panel.

The protective function of seatbelts

Fig. 7 Drivers with properly worn seat belts willnot be thrown forward in the event of suddenbraking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. They also help preventuncontrolled movements that may result inserious injury and reduce the risk of beingthrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability ofthe belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,the front part of your vehicle and other pas-sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-

tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-gy released in a collision. Taken together, allthese features reduce the releasing kineticenergy and consequently, the risk of injury.This is why it is so important to fasten seatbelts before every trip, even when "just drivingaround the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of injury andimproving the chances of survival when in-volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are onlytriggered in some cases of head-on collision.The front airbags will not be triggered duringminor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-sions, overturns or accidents in which the air-bag trigger threshold value in the control unitis not exceeded.

Important safety instructions forthe use of seat belts

– Always wear the seat belt as described inthis section.

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastenedat all times and are not damaged.

WARNING● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not atall, the risk of severe injuries increases. Theoptimal protection from seat belts can beachieved only if you use them properly.● Never allow two passengers (even chil-dren) to share the same seat belt.● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.● The seat belt should never lie on hard orfragile objects (such as glasses or pens,etc.) because this can cause injuries.● Do not allow the seat belt to be damagedor jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.● Never wear the seat belt under the arm orin any other incorrect position.● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such asan overcoat over a sweater) impairs theproper fit and function of the seat belts, re-ducing their capacity to protect.● The slot in the seat belt buckle must notbe blocked with paper or other objects, asthis can prevent the latch plate from en-gaging securely.● Never use seat belt clips, fastening ringsor similar items to alter the position of thebelt webbing.● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage tothe connections, belt retractors or parts of

16

Seat belts

the buckle could cause severe injuries inthe event of an accident. Therefore, youmust check the condition of all seat beltsat regular intervals.● Seat belts which have been worn in anaccident and have been stretched must bereplaced by a specialised workshop. Re-newal may be necessary even if there is noapparent damage. The belt anchorageshould also be checked.● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.● The belts must be kept clean, otherwisethe retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws ofphysics

Fig. 8 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrownforward violently.

Fig. 9 The unbelted passenger in the rear seatis thrown forward violently, hitting the driverwho is wearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the caseof a head-on collision are easy to explain: themoment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting onboth the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and on the weight ofthe vehicle and of its passengers. The higherthey are, the more energy there is to be “ab-sorbed” in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-gy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle inour example do not have their seat belts fas-tened, in the event of a collision the entire

amount of the passengers' kinetic energy willbe only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces areeven higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is notpossible to brace oneself with one's hands. Ina frontal collision, unbelted passengers arethrown forward and will make violent contactwith the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-screen or whatever else is in the way››› Fig. 8.

It is also important for rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could other-wise be thrown forward violently through thevehicle interior in an accident. Passengers inthe rear seats who do not use seat belts en-danger not only themselves but also the frontoccupants ››› Fig. 9.

17

Safety

How to properly adjust yourseat belt

Fastening and unfastening the seatbelt

Fig. 10 Insert the latch plate of the seat beltinto the buckle.

Fig. 11 Release the seat belt's buckle.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-cupants in the position that most protectsthem in the event of an accident or suddenbraking ››› .

Fastening the seat beltFasten your seat belt before each trip.

● Adjust the front seat and headrest correctly››› page 12.● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat inan upright position ››› .● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web-bing evenly across your chest and lap. Donot twist the seat belt when doing so ››› .● Engage the latch plate in the buckle of thecorresponding seat ››› Fig. 10.● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

Releasing the seat beltOnly unfasten the seat belt when the vehiclehas come to a standstill ››› .

● Press the red button on the buckle››› Fig. 11. The latch plate is released from thebuckle.● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim will not be damaged.

WARNING● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-tion unless the seat backrest is in an up-right position and the seat belt is worn cor-rectly, according to your size.● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion can cause severe or fatalinjuries in the event of an accident or sud-den braking.● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,can cause severe injuries if the belt movesfrom hard areas of the body to soft areas(e.g. the stomach).

18

Seat belts

Correct seat belt position

Fig. 12 Correct seat belt and headrest posi-tions, viewed from front and the side.

Fig. 13 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Seat belts offer their maximum protection inthe event of an accident and reduce the riskof sustaining severe or fatal injuries only whenthey are properly positioned. Furthermore, ifthe webbing is correctly positioned, the seat

belt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op-timum position to ensure the airbag providesthe maximum protection. The seat belt musttherefore always be worn and the webbingcorrectly positioned.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severeor even fatal injuries ››› page 12, Correct sit-ting position of vehicle occupants.

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or the arm, under the arm or behindthe shoulder.● The lap part of the seat belt must lie acrossthe pelvis, never across the stomach.● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take upany slack.

In the case of pregnant women, the seat beltmust lie evenly across the chest and as lowas possible over the pelvis, never across thestomach and must be worn properly at alltimes during the pregnancy ››› Fig. 13.

Adapting the position of the belt webbingto your sizeThe seat belt can be adapted using the fol-lowing equipment:

● Belt height adjustment for the front seats.

WARNINGAn incorrectly worn seat belt web cancause severe or fatal injuries in the event ofan accident.● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or the arm.● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-ably on the torso● The lap part of the seat belt must lieacross the pelvis, never across the stom-ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight ifnecessary to take up any slack.● For pregnant women, the lap part of theseat belt must lie as low as possible overthe pelvis and always lie flat, “surrounding”the stomach››› Fig. 13.● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-tened.● Once the seat belt is positioned correct-ly, don't pull it away from your body withyour hand.● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid orfragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.● Never use seat belt clips, retaining ringsor similar instruments to alter the positionof the belt webbing.

NoteIf your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct position of the »

19

Safety

belt webbing, contact a specialised work-shop for help with any special devices toensure the optimum protection of the seatbelt and airbag. SEAT recommends takingyour car in for technical service.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works

The seat belts for the occupants in the frontseats are equipped with belt tensioners.

The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,although only in severe head-on, lateral andrear-end collisions. This retracts and tightensthe seat belts, reducing the forward motion ofthe occupants.

The belt pre-tensioners work in combinationwith the airbag system. In case of overturn,the pre-tensioners do not activate unless thehead airbags are deployed.

Note● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, afine dust is produced. This is normal and itis not an indication of fire in the vehicle.● The relevant safety requirements must beobserved when the vehicle or componentsof the system are scrapped. Specialisedworkshops are familiar with these regula-tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of seatbelt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of theseat belts that are installed in the seats ofyour vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-ers or remove and install parts of the systemwhen performing other repair work, the seatbelt may be damaged. The consequencemay be that, in the event of an accident, thebelt tensioners function incorrectly or maynot function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-sioner is not reduced and that removed partsdo not cause any injuries or environmentalpollution, regulations, which are known to thespecialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING● Improper use or repairs not carried out byqualified mechanics increase the risk of se-vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensionersmay fail to trigger or may trigger in thewrong circumstances.● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.● Any work on the belt tensioners and seatbelts, including the removal and refitting ofsystem parts in conjunction with other re-pair work, must be performed by a special-ised workshop only.

● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-tection for one accident and must bechanged if they have been activated.

For the sake of the environmentAirbag modules and belt tensioners maycontain perchlorate. Observe the legal re-quirements for their disposal.

20

Airbag system

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Related video

Fig. 14 Vehicle interior

Why is it so important to wear aseat belt and to sit correctly?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the bestprotection, the seat belt must always be wornproperly and the correct sitting position mustbe assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seatbelts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle'soverall passive safety system. Please bear inmind that the airbag system can only workeffectively when the vehicle occupants arewearing their seat belts correctly and haveadjusted the headrests properly. Therefore, itis most important to properly wear the seatbelts at all times, not only because this is re-quired by law in most countries, but also for

your safety ››› page 15, The whys andwherefores of seat belts.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, soif you are not properly seated when the air-bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicleoccupants assume a correct sitting positionwhile travelling.

Sharp braking before an accident may causea passenger not wearing a seat belt to bethrown forward into the area of the deployingairbag. In this case, the inflating airbag mayinflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant.This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-tance between yourself and the front airbag.This way, the front airbags can completelydeploy when triggered, providing their maxi-mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering theairbag are the type of accident, the angle ofimpact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-pends primarily on the vehicle decelerationrate resulting from the collision and detectedby the control unit. If the vehicle decelerationoccurring during the collision and measuredby the control unit remains below the speci-fied reference values, the front, side and/orhead-protection airbags will not be triggered.Take into account that the visible damage ina vehicle involved in an accident, no matter

how serious, is not a determining factor forthe airbags to have been triggered.

WARNING● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-suming an incorrect sitting position canlead to critical or fatal injuries.● All vehicle occupants, including children,who are not properly belted can sustaincritical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-gered. Children up to 12 years old shouldalways travel on the rear seat. Never trans-port children in the vehicle if they are notrestrained or the restraint system is not ap-propriate for their age, size or weight.● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-erly ››› page 15.

Description of the airbag system

The airbag system offers additional protec-tion for the occupants in combination with theseat belts.

The airbag system comprises the follow-ing modules (as per vehicle equipment):● Electronic control unit● Front airbags for driver and passenger● Knee airbag for the driver● Side airbags »

21

Safety

● Head airbag● Airbag control lamp on the instrumentpanel ››› page 23● Key-operated switch for front passengerairbag● Control lamp for disabled/enabled statusof the front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on ››› page 23,● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition isswitched on,● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on,● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:● the ignition is switched off● there is a minor frontal collision● there is a minor side collision● there is a rear-end collision● the vehicle turns over.

WARNING● The seat belts and airbags can only pro-vide maximum protection if the occupantsare seated correctly ››› page 12.● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-tem, have the system checked immediatelyby a specialised workshop. Otherwisethere is a danger that during a collision, thesystem may fail to trigger, or not triggercorrectly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousands of a second, to provide additionalprotection in the event of an accident. A finedust may develop when the airbag deploys.This is normal and it is not an indication of firein the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factorsThe conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-

alised. Some factors play an important role,such as the properties of the object the vehi-cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehiclespeed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit theairbags will not be triggered, even though theaccident may cause extensive damage to thecar.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous head-on collisions:● Driver airbag.● Front passenger front airbag● Knee airbag for the driver.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous side-on collisions:● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-cident.

22

Airbag system

In an accident with airbag activation:● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);● the hazard warning lights switch on;● all doors are unlocked;● the fuel supply to the engine is cut.

Operation of the airbags

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-instru-ment

Fault in the airbag system and seat belt tensioners .Have the system checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag deactivated.Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated

It lights up on the dash panel

Front passenger front airbag activated.The control lamp turns off automatically 60 secondsafter the ignition is switched on

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is being

verified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner systemcontrol lamp remains on or flashes, it indi-cates a malfunction in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system ››› . Have the systemchecked immediately by a specialised work-shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,the warning lamp re-mains lit on the dash panel to remind you thatthe airbag is deactivated. If, with the frontpassenger airbag deactivated, this lampdoes not remain lit or if it is lit along with thecontrol lamp on the instrument panel,there is a fault in the airbag system ››› . Ifthe control lamp is flashing, there is a fault inthe disabling of the airbag system ››› . Havethe system checked immediately by a speci-alised workshop.

WARNINGIn the event of a fault in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system, the airbags and seatbelts may not trigger correctly, may fail totrigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-taining severe or fatal injuries. Have thesystem checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.● Do not mount a child seat in the frontpassenger seat or remove the mountedchild seat! The front passenger front airbag

may deploy during an accident in spite ofthe fault.

CAUTIONAlways pay attention to any lit controllamps and to the corresponding descrip-tions and instructions to avoid damage tothe vehicle or harm to the occupants.

23

Safety

Front airbags

Fig. 15 Driver airbag located in steeringwheel.

Fig. 16 Front passenger airbag located indash panel.

The front airbag for the driver is located in thesteering wheel ››› Fig. 15 and the airbag forthe front passenger is located in the dashpanel ››› Fig. 16. Airbags are identified by theword “AIRBAG”.

When the driver and front passenger airbagsare deployed, the covers remain attached tothe steering wheel and dashboard, respec-tively ››› Fig. 15 ››› Fig. 16.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the front occupants ad-

ditional protection for the head and chest inthe event of a severe frontal collision ››› .

Their special design allows the controlled es-cape of the propellant gas when an occu-pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, thehead and chest are protected by the airbag.After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-ciently to allow visibility.

WARNING● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not inany case be occupied by other passenger,pets and objects.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● It is also important not to attach any ob-jects such as cup holders or telephonemountings to the surfaces covering the air-bag units.

24

Airbag system

Activate and deactivate front pas-senger front airbag*

Fig. 17 Front passenger front airbag switch.

Fig. 18 Dash panel: control lamp for the deac-tivation of the front passenger front airbag.

Deactivate the front passenger front airbagonly if you have to use a rear-facing childseat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in therear seat to avoid having to deactivate thefront passenger airbag.

When the front passenger airbag is deacti-vated, this means that only the front passen-ger front airbag is deactivated. All the otherairbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Deactivate and activate the front passen-ger front airbag● Switch the ignition off.● Open the glove compartment on the frontpassenger side.● Insert the key into the slot of the switch fordeactivating the front passenger airbag››› Fig. 17. About 3/4 of the key should enter;this is as far as it will go.● Turn the key gently to change its position to (deactivate) or to (activate). If you havedifficulty, ensure that you have inserted thekey as far as it will go.● Close the glove compartment.● When deactivating the airbag, switch theignition on and check that the control lamp remains lit where it says in the central part of thedashboard ››› Fig. 18.● When reactivating the airbag, check thatwhen the ignition is switched on, the control lamp does not light up and the

lamp lights up for 60 seconds and then turnsoff.

WARNING● The driver of the vehicle is responsible fordisabling or switching on the airbag.● Always switch off the ignition before dis-abling the front passenger airbag! Failureto do so could result in a fault in the airbagdeactivation system.● Never leave the key in the airbag disa-bling switch as it could get damaged or en-able or disable the airbag during driving.● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,reactivate it as soon as possible so that itcan fulfil its protective function.

25

Safety

Knee airbag*

Fig. 19 On the driver side: location of the kneeairbag

Fig. 20 On the driver side: airbag action radiusfor the knees.

The knee airbag is located on the driver sidebelow the dash panel ››› Fig. 19. Airbags areidentified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The area framed in red (deployment area)››› Fig. 20 is covered by the knee airbag

when it is deployed. Objects should never beplaced or mounted in this area.

WARNING● The knee airbag is deployed in front ofthe driver's knees. Always keep the deploy-ment areas of the knee airbags free.● Never not fix objects to the cover or in thedeployment area of the knee airbag.● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is adistance of at least 10 cm (4 inches) be-tween your knees and the location of thethis airbag. If your physical constitutionprevents you from meeting these require-ments, make sure you contact a special-ised workshop.

Side airbags*

Fig. 21 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 22 Illustration of completely inflated sideairbags on the left side of the vehicle.

The side airbags are located in the driver'sseat and front passenger seat backrests››› Fig. 21.

The locations are identified by the text “AIR-BAG” in the upper region of the backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-bag system provides additional protection forthe upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› .

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce therisk of injury to passengers to the areas of thebody facing the impact. In addition to theirnormal protection, the seat belts also holdthe passengers in the event of a side collision;this is how these airbags provide maximumprotection.

26

Airbag system

WARNING● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you leanforward, or are not seated correctly whilethe vehicle is in motion, you are at a greaterrisk of injury if the side airbag system istriggered in an accident.● In order for the side airbags to providetheir maximum protection, the prescribedsitting position must always be maintainedwith seat belts fastened while travelling.● In a side-on collision the side airbags willnot work if the sensors do not correctlymeasure the pressure increase on the inte-rior of the doors, due to air escapingthrough the areas with holes or openings inthe door panel.● Never drive if the interior door panelshave been removed or if the panels havenot been correctly fitted.● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-ers in the door panels have been removed,unless the holes left by the loudspeakershave been closed properly.● Always check that the openings areclosed or covered if loudspeakers or otherequipment are fitted inside the door pan-els.● Occupants of the outer seats must nevercarry any objects or pets in the deploy-ment space between them and the airbags,or allow children or other passengers totravel in this position. It is also importantnot to attach any accessories (such as cup

holders) to the doors. This would impair theprotection offered by the side airbags.● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets.● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-ster because the system may be damaged.In this case, the side airbags would not betriggered.● Under no circumstances should protec-tive covers be fitted over seats with sideairbags unless the covers have been ap-proved for use in your vehicle. Because theairbag deploys from the side of the back-rest, the use of conventional seat coverswould obstruct the side airbag, seriouslyreducing the airbag's effectiveness.● Any damage to the original seat uphols-tery or around the seams of the side airbagunits must be repaired immediately by aspecialised workshop.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● Any work on the side airbag system or re-moval and installation of the airbag com-ponents for other repairs (such as removalof the front seat) should only be performedby a specialised workshop. Otherwise,faults may occur during the airbag systemoperation.

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 23 Location of head-protection airbags.

The head-protection airbags are located onboth sides in the interior above the doors››› Fig. 23 and are identified with the text “AIR-BAG”.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-protection airbag system gives the vehicleoccupants additional protection for the headand upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› .

The area framed in red is covered by thehead-protection airbag when it is deployed››› Fig. 23 (deployment area). Therefore, ob-jects should never be placed or mounted inthis area ››› .

In the event of a side collision the head-pro-tection airbag is triggered on the impact sideof the vehicle. »

27

Safety

The head-protection airbags reduce the riskof injury to passengers in the front and rearside seats facing the impact.

WARNING● In order for the head-protection airbagsto provide their maximum protection, theprescribed sitting position must always bemaintained with seat belts fastened whiletravelling.● For safety reasons, the head-protectionairbag must be disabled in those vehiclesfitted with a screen dividing the interior ofthe vehicle. See your technical service tomake this adjustment.● There must be no other persons, animalsor objects between the occupants of theouter seats and the deployment space ofthe head-protection airbags so that thehead-protection airbag can deploy com-pletely without restriction and provide thegreatest possible protection. Therefore,sun blinds which have not been expresslyapproved for use in your vehicle may not beattached to the side windows● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets. Please, do not hang the clothes oncoat hangers.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.

● Any work on the head-protection airbagsystem or removal and installation of theairbag components for other repairs (suchas removal of the roof lining) should onlybe performed by a specialised workshop.Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-bag system operation.● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior ofthe front doors. To ensure the correct oper-ation of the side and head-protection air-bags neither the doors nor the door panelsshould be modified in any way (e.g. fittingloudspeakers). If the front door is dam-aged, the airbag system may not work cor-rectly. All work carried out on the front doormust be done in a specialised workshop.

Transporting childrensafely

Safety for children

Related video


Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned fromaccident statistics, we recommend that chil-dren under 12 years of age travel in the rearseats. Depending on their age, height andweight, children travelling in rear seats mustuse a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-sons, the child seat should be installed in therear seat, behind the front passenger seat orin the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forcesacting in a collision apply also to children››› page 17. But unlike adults, children do not

28

Transporting children safely

have fully developed muscle and bone struc-tures. This means that children are subject toa greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-ways use special child restraint systemswhen travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-gramme, which includes systems for all agesmade by “Peke” (not for all countries) (seewww.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de-signed and approved, complying with theECE-R44. regulation.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats. Always readand note ››› page 30.

We recommend you always carry the manu-facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-gether with the on-board documentation.

Child seats group classification

Fig. 25 Examples of child seats.

Use only child seats that are officially ap-proved and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco-nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

Child seats by weight groupThe child seats are grouped into 5 catego-ries:

Age group Weight of the child

Group 0 Up to 10 kg

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg

Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg



Child seats that have been tested and ap-proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 orECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circlewith the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include themanufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manualtogether with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats fromthe Original Accessories Catalogue. Thesechild seats have been designed and testedfor use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the rightchild seat for your model and age group atSEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval categoryChild seats may have the approval categoryof universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

● Universal: child seats with universal appro-val can be installed in all vehicles. There is noneed to consult any list of models. In the caseof universal approval for ISOFIX, the childseat is additionally provided with a Top Tetherbelt.● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,in addition to the standard requirements of »

29

Safety

universal approval, requires safety devices tolock the child seat, which require additionaltesting. Child seats with semi-universal ap-proval include a list of vehicle models forwhich they can be installed.● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approvalrequires a dynamic test of the child seat foreach vehicle model separately. Child seatswith vehicle-specific approval also include alist of vehicle models for which they can beinstalled.● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval mustmeet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-R 129 standard in relation to installation andsafety. Child seat manufacturers can tell youwhich seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-cle.

Fitting and using child seats

Fig. 26 Airbag sticker: on the passenger’s sunvisor

Fig. 27 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of thepassenger side door

Warnings about fitting a child seatTake the following general warnings into ac-count if you are going to fit a child seat. Theyare valid for all child seats regardless of theirattachment system.

● Please read and follow the child seat man-ufacturer's operating instructions.● The child seat should preferably be fitted tothe rear seat behind the front passenger seatso that the child can exit the vehicle on thepavement side.● Set the height of the seat belt such that itadapts to the child seat naturally, withouttwisting. The lowest position of the seat beltheight regulator must be used with rear-fac-ing child seats.● To correctly use a child seat in the back,the front backrest must be adjusted so thatthere is no contact with the child seat in theback in the case that it goes opposite to thedirection of the car. In the case of front facingrestraint systems, the front backrest must beadjusted so that there is no contact with thechild's feet.● If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-led, in which the method of attachment to thecar is through the seat belt and support

30


bracket, it should never be installed in thecentral rear seat as the ground clearance islower than in other places and the supportbracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-ciently stable.● When fitting a child seat on the front pas-senger seat, the seat must be moved back-wards as far as possible and placed in thehighest position. The backrest must also beput in a vertical position1).

Important information about the front pas-senger front airbagA sticker with important information about thepassenger airbag is located on the passeng-er's sun visor and/or on the passenger sidedoor frame ››› Fig. 26.

Read and always observe the safety informa-tion included in the following chapters:

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› page 21.● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 24.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena-bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facingbackward since the airbag can strike the seat

with such force that it can cause serious orfatal injuries. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you totransport children on the rear seats. This isthe safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 25.When transporting children, use a child seatsuitable for the age and size of each child››› page 29.

WARNING● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and projectit with great force against the door, the roofor the backrest.● Never install a child seat facing back-wards on the front passenger seat unlessthe front passenger front airbag has beendisabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries tothe child! However, if necessary, the frontpassenger front airbag must be deactiva-ted ››› page 25. If the passenger seat has aheight adjustment option, move it to the

highest, most upright position. If you have afixed seat, do not install any child restraintsystem in this location.● For those vehicles that do not include akey lock switch to deactivate the airbag,the vehicle must be taken to a technicalservice. Do not forget to reconnect the air-bag when an adult wants to sit in the frontpassenger seat.● Never allow a child to be transported in avehicle without being properly secured, orto stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-ling. In an accident, the child could be flungthrough the vehicle, causing possibly fatalinjuries to themselves and to the other vehi-cle occupants.● Never leave a child alone in the child seator in the vehicle.● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tallmust not wear a normal seat belt without achild seat, as this could cause injuries tothe abdominal and neck areas during asudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-dent.● When a child seat is mounted in the rearseats, the door child-proof lock should beactivated ››› page 111.

1) Compliance with current national legislationand the manufacturer's instructions is requiredwhen using or installing child seats.

31

Safety

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach-ment systems are used for safely installingchild seats.

Attachment systems overview● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-ment system allowing quick and safe attach-ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-tachment establishes a rigid connection be-tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,called connectors. These connectors are fit-ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings foundbetween the seat cushion and the backrestof the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-FIX attachment systems are used mainly inEurope ››› page 33. If necessary, ISOFIX at-tachment may have to be supplemented witha Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

● Automatic three-point seat belt. When-ever possible, it is preferable to attach thechild seats with the ISOFIX system rather thanattaching them with an automatic three-pointseat belt ››› page 36.

Additional attachment:

● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guidedover the back of the rear seat and attachedto an anchor point with a hook. Anchor pointsare located at the back of the rear seat back-rest on the boot side ››› page 35. The ringsfor retaining the Top Tether belt are markedwith an anchor symbol.● Support bracket: some child seats rest onthe floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.The support bracket prevents the child seatfrom tipping forward in the event of impact.Child seats fitted with a support bracketshould only be used in the passenger seatand side rear seats ››› . For the assembly of

this type of seat you should also consult thelist of approved vehicles for this assembly,available in the instructions for child restraintsystems.

Recommended systems for attachingchild seatsSEAT recommends attaching child seats asfollows:

● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-site direction of travel: ISOFIX and supportbracket or i-Size.● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-FIX and Top Tether.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the support bracket cancause serious or fatal injury.● Make sure the support bracket is correct-ly and safely installed.

32


Fix a child seat with the ISOFIX and Top Tether* system

Fig. 28 Rear seat: ISOFIX securing rings. Fig. 29 Rear seats: fitting a child seat with theISOFIX system.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easilyand safely on the rear side seats with the“ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on eachrear side seat. In some vehicles, the rings are

secured to the seat frame and, in others, theyare secured to the rear floor. The “ISOFIX”rings are located between the rear seatbackrest and the seat cushioning ››› Fig. 28.The Top Tether* rings are located on the rearpart of the backrests of the rear seats (be-

hind the seat backrest or in the boot)››› page 35.

To understand the compatibility of the “ISO-FIX” systems in the vehicle, check the tablebelow.

Weight group Size classa) Electricalequipment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seatRear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Baby carrierF ISO/L1 X X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer'svehicle list into account.X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class. »

33

Safety

Weight group Size classa) Electricalequipment

Vehicle Isofix positions

Front passenger seatRear side seat Rear central seat

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg --- --- X X --- X

Group III 22 to 36 kg --- --- X X --- X

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this weight group.IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer'svehicle list into account.X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

a) The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the classaccording to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat.

Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX”systemYou are obliged to follow the seat manufac-turer's instructions.

● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX/iSize”retaining rings until it is heard to engage se-curely ››› Fig. 29. If the child seat is equippedwith Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to

the correspondent ring ››› page 35. Ob-serve the manufacturer's instructions.● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensurethat it is properly anchored.

34


Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*attachment system are available from Tech-nical Services.

WARNINGThe retaining rings are designed only foruse with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* systemchild seats.● Never secure other child seats that donot have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys-tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas-tening rings - this can result in potentiallyfatal injuries to the child.● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*securing rings.

Top Tether* securing belts

Fig. 30 Rear seats: adjustment and assemblyaccording to the Top Tether belt.

Fig. 31 Back of the rear seats: Top Tether se-curing rings.

Child seats with the Top Tether system comewith a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-cle anchor point, located at the back of therear seat backrest and provide greater re-straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for-ward movements of the child seat in a crash,to reduce the risk of injuries to the head fromhitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-ted seatsCurrently, there are very few rear-facing childsafety seats that have Top Tether. Pleasecarefully read and follow the seat manufac-turer instructions to learn the proper way toinstall the Top Tether strap. »

35

Safety

Securing the retainer strap● Follow the manufacturer's instructions todeploy the child seat Top Tether retainingstrap.● Place the belt under the headrest of theback seat ››› Fig. 30 (depending on the in-structions of the chair itself, lift or remove theheadrest if necessary).● Slide the strap and secure it properly withthe anchorage of the backrest ››› Fig. 31.

● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-er's instructions.● Push the lock and release it from the an-choring support.

WARNINGAn undue installation of the safety seat willincrease the risk of injury in the event of acrash.● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook inthe luggage compartment.● Never secure or tie luggage or otheritems to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) orthe upper ones (Top Tether).

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

If you want to fit a universal approval catego-ry (U) child seat in your vehicle, you mustcheck that the seat is approved for your vehi-

cle. You will find any necessary informationon the child seat’s orange ECE approval la-

bel. The following table shows the differentfitting options.

36


Weight group

Seating position

Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

Airbag activated airbag disabledc)

Group 0 to 10 kg X U U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X U U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X U U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UF UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UF UF UF

X: Not compatible for the installation of seats install chairs in this configuration.U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group.UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats.b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat.c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt● Set the height of the seat belt such that itadapts to the child seat naturally, withouttwisting. The lowest position of the seat beltheight regulator must be used with rear-fac-ing child seats.● Put the seat belt in place and pass itthrough the child seat according to the in-structions of the child seat manufacturer.● Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.● Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckleuntil you hear the engagement click.

WARNINGWhen travelling, children must be securedin the vehicle with a restraint system suita-ble for age, weight and size.● Read and always observe informationand warnings concerning the use of childseats ››› page 30.

37

Emergencies

Emergencies

Self-help

Emergency equipment

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 32 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-gage compartment: vehicle tool kit.

The vehicle tool kit is located under the floorpanel in the luggage compartment. To ac-cess the vehicle tools ››› page 139.

The tool kit includes:

Adapter for the anti-theft bolt*Towing eye, removableWheel spanner*Crank handle for jack

1

2

3

4

Jack*Hook for extracting the central wheeltrims*

Some of the items listed are only provided incertain model versions, or are optional extras.

WARNINGWhen the vehicle tool kit, tyre mobility setand spare wheel are loose in the interiorthey can be violently thrown in case of asudden manoeuvre or braking and espe-cially in accidents, causing serious injury.● Ensure that the vehicle tool kit, the tyremobility set and the spare wheel or tempo-rary spare wheel are safely secured in theluggage compartment.

WARNINGUnsuitable or damaged vehicle tools cancause injury or accidents.● Never work with inappropriate or dam-aged tools.

NoteThe jack does not generally require anymaintenance. If required, it should begreased using universal type grease.

5

6Tyre repairs

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)will reliably seal punctures caused by thepenetration of a foreign body of up to about4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreignobjects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,you must again check the tyre pressureabout 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if thevehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-miliar with the procedure and you have thenecessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, youshould seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the followingcases:● If the wheel rim has been damaged.● In outside temperatures below -20°C(-4°F).● In the event of cuts or perforations in thetyre greater than 4 mm.● If you have been driving with very low pres-sure or a completely flat tyre.● If the sealant bottle has passed its use bydate.

38

Self-help

WARNINGUsing the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre atthe roadside. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-rounding traffic to fill the tyre.● Ensure the ground on which you park isflat and solid.● All passengers and particularly childrenmust keep a safe distance from the workarea.● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.● Use the tyre mobility system only if youare familiar with the necessary procedures.Otherwise, you should seek professionalassistance.● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-porary emergency use only until you canreach the nearest specialised workshop.● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyremobility set as soon as possible.● The sealant is a health hazard and mustbe cleaned immediately if it comes intocontact with the skin.● Always keep the tyre mobility set out ofthe reach of small children.● Always stop the engine, apply the handbrake and put it in gear when using a man-

ual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk ofinvoluntary movement of the vehicle.

WARNINGA tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.● Never drive faster than 80 km/h(50 mph).● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering.● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then checkthe tyre.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of used or expired sealant observ-ing any legal requirements.

NoteA new bottle of sealant can be purchasedat SEAT dealerships.

NoteTake into account the separate instructionmanual of the tyre mobility set* manufac-turer.

Anti-puncture kit contents*

Fig. 33 Standard representation: anti-punc-ture kit contents.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneaththe floor covering in the luggage compart-ment. It includes the following components››› Fig. 33:

Valve insert removerA sticker to be adhered to the instrumentcluster, within the driver's visual field, toremind that the maximum advisablespeed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”Filler tube with capAir compressorON/OFF switchAir bleed screw (it can also be integratedin the inflator tube). »

1

2

3

4

5

6

39

Emergencies

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-toring system (it can also be integrated inthe inflator tube).Tube for inflating tyres12 volt connectorBottle of sealantSpare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap atthe lower end for a valve insert. The valve in-sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in thisway. This also applies to its replacement part11 .

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing the tyre● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Usethe ››› Fig. 33 1 tool to remove the insert.Place it on a clean surface.● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously››› Fig. 33 10 .● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 33 3 intothe sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will breakautomatically.● Remove the lid from the filling tube››› Fig. 33 3 and screw the open end of thetube into the tyre valve.● With the bottle upside down, empty all ofthe contents into the tyre.

7

8

9

10

11

● Remove the bottle from the valve.● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-ing the tool ››› Fig. 33 1 .

Inflating the tyre● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube››› Fig. 33 8 into the tyre valve.● Check that the air bleed screw is closed››› Fig. 33 6 .● Start the engine and leave it running.● Insert the connector ››› Fig. 33 9 into thevehicle's 12-volt socket ››› page 154.● Turn the air compressor on with theON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 33 5 .● Keep the air compressor running until it rea-ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa).A maximum of 8 minutes.● Disconnect the air compressor.● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant isdistributed throughout the tyre.● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into thevalve.● Repeat the inflation process.● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stopand request assistance from an authorisedtechnician.

● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrewthe tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding80 km/h (50 mph).● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 33 2 to the instru-ment cluster, within the driver's visual field.● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes››› page 41.

WARNINGWhen inflating the wheel, the air compres-sor and the inflator tube may become hot.● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tubeor hot air compressor on flammable mate-rial.● Allow them to cool before storing the de-vice.● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to atleast 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre istoo badly damaged. The sealant is not in agood condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTIONSwitch off the air compressor after a maxi-mum of 8 operational minutes to avoidoverheating! Before switching on the aircompressor again, let it cool for several mi-nutes.

40

Self-help

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 33 5 againand check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot besealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:● Set the tyre pressure to the correct valueagain.● Carefully resume your journey until youreach the nearest specialised workshop with-out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).● Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNINGDriving with an unsealed tyre is dangerousand can cause accidents and serious in-jury.● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.● Seek specialist assistance.

Changing a wheel

Related video

Fig. 34 Wheels

What to do first

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface andin a safe place as far away from traffic aspossible.● Apply the electronic parking brake.● Switch on the hazard warning lights.● Manual transmission: select the 1st gear.● Automatic transmission: Move the selectorlever to position P.● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it fromyour vehicle.● Have the vehicle tool kit ››› page 38 andthe spare wheel* ready ››› page 354.● Observe the applicable legislation for eachcountry (reflective vest, warning triangles,etc.).

● All occupants should leave the vehicle andwait in a safe place (for instance behind theroadside crash barrier).

WARNING● Always observe the above steps and pro-tect yourself and other road users.● If you change the wheel on a slope, blockthe wheel on the opposite side of the carwith a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-cle from moving.

Integral wheel trim

Fig. 35 Remove the wheel cover.

The wheel covers must be removed for ac-cess to the wheel nuts.

Removing● Take the wheel brace and the wire hookfrom the vehicle tool kit ››› page 38. »

41

Emergencies

● Hook the wire through one of the grooves ofthe trim.● Insert the box spanner through the hook,rest it on the tyre and remove the wheel trim››› Fig. 35.

Fitting● Press the trim against the wheel so that thehole for the valve fits over the tyre valve.● Make sure that the trim is correctly fitted allthe way around the wheel. If you are using ananti-theft wheel lock, screw it in the oppositeposition to the valve.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 36 Wheel: wheel nuts with caps.

Removal● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools ››› Fig. 32)over the cap until it clicks into place››› Fig. 36.● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

The caps protect the wheel nuts and shouldbe remounted after changing the tyre.

The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has aspecial cap. This only fits on anti-theft lockingbolts and is not for use with standard wheelnuts.

Anti-theft wheel nuts

Fig. 37 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap andadapter.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.

● Insert the special adapter ››› Fig. 37 1 (ve-hicle tools ››› page 38) onto the anti-theftwheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) ontothe adapter as far as it will go.● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 43.

NoteMake a note of the code number of the an-ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safeplace, but not in your vehicle. If you need anew adapter, you can obtain it from theSEAT Official Service, indicating the codenumber.

42

Self-help

Loosening wheel nuts

Fig. 38 Wheel change: loosen the wheel nuts.

Fig. 39 Wheel change: tyre valve 1 and thecorrect position for the anti-theft wheel lockingbolt 2 or 3 .

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to thecar to loosen the wheel nuts.

Loosen the wheel nuts only about one turnbefore raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully pushon the end of the wheel wrench with yourfoot. Hold on to the vehicle for support andtake care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel nuts● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go››› Fig. 38.● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate thebolt approximately one turn anticlock-wise ››› .

Important information about wheel nutsFactory-fitted rims and wheel nuts are spe-cially matched during construction. There-fore, if different rims are fitted, the correctwheel nuts with the right length and headsmust be used. This ensures that wheels arefitted securely and that the brake systemfunctions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not evenuse wheel nuts from vehicles of the samemodel.

In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theftlocking bolt must be threaded onto positions››› Fig. 39 2 or 3 , taking the tyre valve’s po-sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not bepossible to mount the hubcap.

WARNINGIf the wheel nuts are not properly tight-ened, they could come loose while driving

and cause an accident, serious injury andloss of vehicle control.● Use only wheel nuts which correspond tothe rim in question.● Never use different wheel nuts.● Wheel nuts and threads should be clean,free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-sible to screw them easily.● To loosen and tighten wheel nuts, onlyuse the wheel wrench that came with thecar from the factory.● The wheel nuts should only be loosenedslightly (about one turn) before raising thevehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!● Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts orto the wheel hub threads. Even if the boltshave been tightened to the prescribed tor-que, they could come loose while driving.● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheelrims with bolted ring trims.● If wheel nuts are tightened below theprescribed torque, the bolts and rims couldcome loose while driving. If tightening tor-que is too high, the wheel nuts or threadscan be damaged.

43

Emergencies

Raise the vehicle

Fig. 40 Jack position points.

Fig. 41 Cross member: positioning the jack onthe vehicle.

● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firmground. If necessary use a large, strongboard or similar support. If the surface is slip-pery (for example tiles) place the jack on arubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-ping ››› .

● Find the support point on the strut (sunkenarea) closest to the wheel to be changed››› Fig. 40.● Turn the jack* crank handle, located belowthe strut support point, to raise it until thetab 1 ››› Fig. 41 is below the housing provi-ded.● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” ontothe housing provided on the strut and the mo-bile base 2 is resting on the ground. Thebase plate 2 should fall vertically with re-spect to the support point 1 .● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel isslightly lifted off the ground.

WARNINGThe factory-supplied jack* is only de-signed for changing wheels on this model.On no account attempt to use it for liftingheavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in-jury.● Make sure that the jack* remains stable.If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-sultant risk of injury.● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks,even those approved for other SEAT mod-els could slip, with the consequent risk ofinjury.● Only mount the jack* on the supportpoints designed for this purpose on thestrut, and always align the jack correctly. If

you do not, the jack* could slip as it doesnot have an adequate grip on the vehicle:risk of injury!● You should never place a body limb suchas an arm or leg under a raised vehicle thatis solely supported by the jack.● If you have to work underneath the vehi-cle, you must use suitable stands addition-ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk ofaccident!.● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to oneside or the engine is running.● Never start the engine when the vehicle israised. The vehicle may come loose fromthe jack due to the engine vibrations.

CAUTIONThe vehicle must not be raised on thecrossbar. Only place the jack* on thepoints designed for this purpose on thestrut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam-aged.

Removing and installing a wheel

Change the wheel after loosening the wheelnuts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim mayhit and damage the brake disc. For this rea-son, please take care and get a second per-son to assist you.

44

Self-help

Taking off the wheel● Unscrew the wheel nuts using the boxspanner and place them on a clean surface.● Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheelCheck the direction of rotation of the tyre››› page 45.

● Place the spare wheel or temporary sparewheel into position.● Screw on the wheel nuts in position andtighten them loosely with a box spanner.● To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel nutsuse the corresponding adaptor.● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.● Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of thewheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di-agonal pairs (not in a circle).● Put the caps, trim or full hubcap back on››› page 41.

The wheel nuts should be clean and turneasily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspectthe wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-ting the wheel.

Tightening torque of the wheel nutsThe recommended tightening torque forwheel nuts for steel and alloy wheels is120 Nm. After changing a wheel, have the

tightening torque checked immediately with atorque wrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have anyrusty wheel nuts that are difficult to screw re-placed and clean the wheel hub threads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel nuts or tothe wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts havebeen tightened to the prescribed torque, theycould come loose while driving.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern havebeen designed to operate best when rotatingin only one direction. An arrow on the tyresidewall indicates the direction of rotation ontyres with directional tread. Always observethe indicated direction of rotation in order toguarantee optimum grip and help avoidaquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite directionof rotation, drive with extreme caution, as thetyre is no longer being used correctly. This isof particular importance when the road sur-face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos-sible or remount it with the correct directionof rotation.

Works after changing a wheel

● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap .● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-tion.● If the replaced wheel does not fit in thespare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-gage compartment ››› page 138.● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-ted tyre as soon as possible.● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory››› page 352.● Have the tightening torque of the wheelnuts checked as soon as possible with a tor-que wrench ››› page 45. Meanwhile, drivecarefully.● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly aspossible.

45

Emergencies

Changing the windscreenwiper blades

Wiper service position

Fig. 42 Wipers in service position.

Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen.

The wiper arms can be raised when the wip-ers are in service position ››› Fig. 42.

● Close the bonnet ››› page 331.● Switch the ignition on and off.● Press the windscreen wiper lever down-wards briefly ››› page 127 4 .

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-tion.

Note● The windscreen wiper arms can bemoved to the service position only whenthe bonnet is properly closed.● You can also use the service position, forexample, if you want to fix a cover over thewindscreen in the winter to keep it clear ofice.

Changing the wiper rear wiperblades

Fig. 43 Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Fig. 44 Changing the rear wiper blade

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied asstandard with a layer of graphite. This layer isresponsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise ofthe water as it is wiped across the windscreenwill be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-ularly. If the wipers scrape across theglass, they should be changed if they aredamaged, or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .

If this does not produce the desired results,the setting angle of the windscreen wiperarms might be incorrect. They should bechecked by a specialised workshop and cor-rected if necessary.

Damaged windscreen wiper blades shouldbe replaced immediately. These are availa-ble from qualified workshops.

46

Self-help

Raising and lowering windscreen wiperarms● Place the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition ››› page 46.● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade'sfastening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades● Raise the wiper arms.● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirtfrom the windscreen wiper blades.● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge ordamp cloth may be used ››› .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades● Lift and unfold the wiper arms.● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 43 1and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-rection of the arrow.● Fit a new wiper blade of the same lengthand design on to the wiper arm and hook itinto place.● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.

Changing the rear wiper blade● Lift and fold the wiper arm.● Turn the blade slightly ››› Fig. 44 (arrow A ).

● Hold down the release button 1 while gen-tly pulling the blade in the direction of arrowB .● Insert a new blade of the same length andtype in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-rection to the arrow B and hook into placebutton 1 .● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

WARNINGWorn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-duce visibility and increase the risk of acci-dent and serious injury.● Always replace damaged or worn wind-screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-ger clean the windscreen properly.

CAUTION● Damaged or dirty windscreen wiperscould scratch the glass.● If products containing solvents, roughsponges or sharp objects are used to cleanthe blades, the graphite layer will be dam-aged.● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paintthinner or similar products to clean the win-dows.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position ››› page 46.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the bonnet and thewiper arms, only leave them in the serviceposition.● Before driving, always lower the wiperarms.

Jump start

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wirecross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery can be connec-ted to the battery of another vehicle to startthe engine.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-tions). The wire cross section must be at least25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least35 mm2 for diesel engines.

Note● The vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.● The discharged battery must be properlyconnected to the on-board network.

47

Emergencies

Jump start: description

Fig. 45 Diagram of connections for vehicleswithout Start Stop system

Fig. 46 Diagram of connections for vehicleswith Start Stop system

Jump lead terminal connectionsSwitch off the ignition of both vehicles››› .

1.

Connect one end of the red jump lead tothe positive + terminal of the vehiclewith the flat battery A ››› Fig. 45.Connect the other end of the red jumplead to the positive terminal + in the ve-hicle providing assistance B .In vehicles without a Start-Stop system:connect one end of the black jump leadto the negative terminal – of the vehicleproviding the current B ››› Fig. 45.In vehicles with a Start-stop system:connect one end of the black jump leadX to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-

id piece of metal in the engine block, orto the engine block itself ››› Fig. 46.Connect the other end of the black jumplead X to a solid metal component bol-ted to the engine block or to the engineblock itself of the vehicle with the flatbattery. Do not connect it to a point nearthe battery A .Position the leads in such a way thatthey cannot come into contact with anymoving parts in the engine compart-ment.

StartingStart the engine of the vehicle with theboosting battery and let it run at idlingspeed.

2.

3.

4a.

4b.

5.

6.

7.

Start the engine of the vehicle with theflat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutesuntil the engine is running.

Removing the jump leadsBefore you remove the jump leads,switch off the dipped beam headlights ifthey are switched on.Turn on the heater blower and heatedrear window in the vehicle with the flatbattery. This helps minimise voltagepeaks which are generated when theleads are disconnected.When the engine is running, disconnectthe leads in reverse order to the detailsgiven above.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficientmetal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-minals.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-onds, switch off the starter and try again afterabout 1 minute.

WARNING● Please note the safety warnings referringto working in the engine compartment››› page 331.● The battery providing assistance musthave the same voltage as the flat battery

8.

9.

10.

11.

48

Self-help

(12V) and approximately the same capaci-ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com-ply could result in an explosion.● Never use jump leads when one of thebatteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!Even after the battery has thawed, batteryacid could leak and cause chemical burns.If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-plosion. Failure to comply could result in anexplosion.● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.● Do not connect the negative cable fromthe other vehicle directly to the negativeterminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-ted from the battery could be ignited bysparks. Danger of explosion.● Never attach the negative cable to fuelsystem components or the brake lines inthe other vehicle.● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thejump lead attached to the positive batteryterminal must not touch metal parts of thevehicle, this can cause a short circuit.● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.● Do not lean on the batteries. This couldresult in chemical burns.

NoteThe vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.

Tow start and towing

Introduction

Tow-starting means starting the engine ofthe vehicle while another pulls it.

Towing means one vehicle pulling anotherthat is not roadworthy.

Always consider the legal provisions relatingto tow-starting and towing.

For technical reasons, towing a vehiclewith a discharged battery is not allowed.The jump start should be used instead››› page 47.

If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Accesssystem, towing is only allowed with the igni-tion on!

The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle istowed with the engine switched off and theignition connected. Depending on the batterycharge status, the drop in voltage may be solarge, even after just a few minutes, that noelectrical device in the vehicle may work e.g.the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the

Keyless Access system, the steering wheelcould lock ››› .

WARNINGA vehicle with no power should never betowed.● When towing, never remove the ignitionkey or disconnect the ignition with the startbutton. Otherwise, the electronic lock ofthe steering column could suddenly be-come blocked and it would be impossibleto steer the vehicle. This could cause anaccident, serious injury and loss of controlof the vehicle.● If during towing the vehicle runs out ofpower, stop towing immediately and re-quest the assistance of specialist person-nel.

WARNINGVehicle handling and braking capacitychange considerably during towing. Pleaseobserve the following instructions to mini-mise the risk of serious accidents and in-jury:● As the driver of the vehicle being towed:– You should depress the brake much

harder as the brake servo does not op-erate. Pay the utmost attention to avoidcrashing into the towing vehicle.

– More strength is required at the steer-ing wheel as the power steering does »

49

Emergencies

not operate when the engine is switch-ed off.

● As the driver of the towing vehicle:– Accelerate with particular care and

caution.– Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.– Brake earlier than usual and more

smoothly.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the vehicle, for exam-ple the paint, remove and replace the lidand towing eye carefully.● Unburnt fuel could enter the catalyticconverter and damage it during towing.

Instructions for tow-starting

Vehicle's should not generally be tow-started. The jump start should be used in-stead ››› page 47.

For technical reasons, towing the followingvehicles is not allowed:

● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox.● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause in vehicles with the Keyless Accesslocking and ignition system the steering re-mains locked and the electronic parkingbrake cannot be deactivated nor can the

electronic lock of the steering column be re-leased if they are activated.● If the battery is flat, it is possible that theengine control units may not operate correct-ly.

However, if the vehicle must absolutely betow-started (in the case of manual gear-boxes):● Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear.● Keep the clutch pressed down.● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-ing lights of both vehicles.● Once both vehicles are moving, release theclutch.● Once the engine starts, press the clutchand disengage the gear to avoid collidingwith the towing vehicle.

CAUTION● When tow-starting, unburnt fuel couldenter the catalytic converter and damageit.● Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 min attempt to start it. There is risk of dam-age to the catalytic converter.

NoteThe vehicle can only be tow-started if theelectronic parking brake and, if appropri-ate, the electronic lock of the steering col-

umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has nopower supply or there is an electric systemfault, the engine must be tow-started to de-activate the electronic parking brake andthe electronic lock of the steering column.

Towing instructions

Towing requires some expertise and experi-ence, especially when using a tow rope. Bothdrivers should be familiar with the difficultiesinvolved in towing. For this reason, inexper-ienced drivers should abstain from towing.

During towing, it should be ensured that noimpermissible tractive forces or shocks aregenerated. When towing on an unpavedroad, there is always a risk of overloading anddamaging the anchorage points.

During towing, the towing vehicle can signalthe change of direction even with the hazardwarning lights turned on. To do so, at thesame time, the turn signal lever must be oper-ated with ignition switched on. Meanwhile, thehazard warning lights will go off. When theturn signal lever is returned to the rest posi-tion, the hazard warning lights will be auto-matically reactivated.

Notes for the driver of the towed vehicle● Leave the ignition on, so that the steering isnot blocked, and the electronic parking brake

50

Self-help

may be deactivated and the turn signals andwash/wipe operated.● More strength is required at the steeringwheel as the power steering does not oper-ate when the engine is switched off.● You should depress the brake much harderas the brake servo does not operate. Avoidhitting the towing vehicle.● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the vehicle to be towed.

Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion. Avoid sharp manoeuvres.● Brake earlier than usual and smoothly.● Bear in mind the information and instruc-tions in the manual of the towed vehicle.

Tow rope or tow barIt is safer for the vehicle to be towed using atow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. Atow rope should only be used if a tow bar isnot available.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoiddamage to both vehicles. It is advisable touse a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-ilarly elastic material.

Only attach the tow rope or the tow bar tothe towing eyes provided or a towing bracket.

If the vehicle has a factory-fitted towing de-vice, towing with a tow bar is only permittedif it has been specially designed to be instal-led on a tow hitch ››› page 308.

When the vehicle has to be towed:Check whether the vehicle may be towed››› page 51, Cases where towing the vehi-cle is not permitted.

The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar ortow rope in the normal way, with all fourwheels on the road; it can also be towed witheither the front or rear wheels lifted off theroad.

● Switch the ignition on.● Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se-lector lever in the N ››› page 254 position.● Do not allow the vehicle to be towed atspeeds of over 50 km/h (30 mph).● The vehicle must not be towed further than50 km (30 miles).● If a breakdown lorry is used, vehicles withautomatic transmission are only allowed tobe towed with the front wheels suspended.

Towing vehicles with four-wheel drive(4Drive)Four-wheel drive vehicles (4Drive) can betowed using a tow bar or tow rope. If the vehi-cle is towed with the front or rear axle sus-

pended, the engine must be switched off,otherwise the transmission may be damaged.

Cases where towing the vehicle is not per-mitted● If, due to a fault, the gearbox is out of lubri-cant.● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be-cause the steering remains locked and, if ap-propriate, the electronic parking brake can-not be deactivated or the electronic lock ofthe steering column released.● If a distance above 50 km needs to be trav-elled.● When, for example, after an accident, thesmooth rotation of the wheels or the steeringoperation cannot be guaranteed.

When the vehicle is to tow another vehicle:● Observe legal requirements.● Keep in mind the instructions in the manualon towing vehicles.

CAUTIONIf there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri-cant in the automatic transmission the carmay only be towed with the driven wheelslifted clear of the road, or transported on aspecial car transporter or trailer. »

51

Emergencies

NoteThe vehicle can only be towed if the elec-tronic parking brake and the electroniclock of the steering column are deactiva-ted. If the vehicle has no power supply orthere is an electric system fault, the enginemust be tow-started ››› page 47 to deacti-vate the electronic parking brake and theelectronic lock of the steering column.

Front towline anchorage

Fig. 47 On the right side of the front bumper:remove the cover.

Fig. 48 Right side of the front bumper: towlineanchorage in position.

The housing of the removable towline an-chorage is on the right side of the front bump-er underneath a cover ››› Fig. 47.

The towing eye should always be kept in thevehicle.

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 50.

Fitting the towline anchorage● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 38.● Remove the cover by pressing down on itsleft-hand side and leave it hanging from thevehicle ››› Fig. 47.● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it as far as it will go anticlock-wise ››› Fig. 48 ››› . Use a suitable object

that can completely and securely tighten thetowing eye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Replace the cover and tighten on its rightside until the tab snaps into the bumper.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

CAUTIONThe towing eye must always be completelyand firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could bereleased while towing and tow-starting.

52

Self-help

Rear towline anchorage

Fig. 49 On the right side of the rear bumper:remove the cover.

Fig. 50 Right side of the rear bumper: towlineanchorage in position.

The housing of the screw towing eye is on theright side of the rear bumper behind a lid››› Fig. 49.

Vehicles equipped as standard with a towingbracket do not have any housing for the

screw towing eye behind the lid. In this case,the tow hitch needs to be extracted or instal-led and used for towing ››› page 308, ››› .

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 50.

Assemble the rear towing eye (cars with-out a factory-equipped towing bracket)● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 38.● Press the top right hand side of the cover››› Fig. 49 to unclip it.● Remove the lid and let it hang from the ve-hicle.● Screw the towline anchorage into the hous-ing by turning it as far as it will go anticlock-wise ››› Fig. 50››› . Use a suitable objectthat can completely and securely tighten thetowing eye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

CAUTION● The towing eye must always be com-pletely and firmly tightened. Otherwise, itcould be released while towing and tow-starting.

● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with atowing bracket, it is only allowed to towwith a tow bar if this has been specially de-signed to be installed with a tow hitch. If anunsuitable tow bar is used, both the towhitch and the vehicle may be damaged. In-stead, a tow rope should be used.

53

Emergencies

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electricalcomponent can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNINGThe high voltages in the electrical systemcan give serious electrical shocks, causingburns and even death!● Never touch the electrical wiring of theignition system.● Take care not to cause short circuits inthe electrical system.

WARNINGUsing unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

perage (same colour and markings) andsize.● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-ple or similar.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec-tric system, before replacing a fuse alwaysturn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-trical elements and remove the key fromthe ignition.● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre-vent the entry of dust or humidity as theycan damage the electrical system.

Note● One component may have more than onefuse.● Several components may run on a singlefuse.● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter.

Fuses inside the vehicle

Fig. 51 On the driver's side dashboard: fusebox cover.

Opening and closing the fuse box situatedbelow the dash panel● Open: fold the cover down ››› Fig. 51.● Close: push back the cover it in until it clicksinto place.

Identifying fuses below below the dash-board by colours

Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

54

Fuses and bulbs

Colour Amp rating

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

CAUTION● Always carefully remove the fuse boxcovers and refit them correctly to avoidproblems with your vehicle.● Protect the fuse boxes when open toavoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt andhumidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-age to the electrical system.

Fuses in the engine compartment

Fig. 52 In the engine compartment: fuse boxcover.

To open the engine compartment fuse box● Open the bonnet ››› page 331.● Press the locking tabs to release the fusebox cover ››› Fig. 52.● Then lift the cover out.● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.Push the locking tabs down until they clickaudibly into place.

Replace a blown fuse

Fig. 53 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparations● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-cal equipment.● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 54, ››› page 55.

Recognise a blown fuseA fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured››› Fig. 53.

● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it hasblown.

To replace a fuse● Remove the fuse.● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size. »

55

Emergencies

● Replace the cover again or close the fusebox lid.

Fuse placement

Only replace fuses with a fuse of the sameamperage (same colour and markings) andsize.

Fuses in the vehicle interior

No. Consumers/Amps

1 SCR, Adblue 20

4 Alarm horn 7.5

5 Gateway 7.5

6 Automatic gearbox lever 7.5

7Air conditioning and heating con-trol panel, rear window heating, AAcompressor

10

8Diagnosis, handbrake switch, lightswitch, reverse light, interior light-ing, lit-up door sill

7.5

9 Steering column 7.5

10 Radio display 7.5

11 Left lights 40

12 Radio 20

13 Taxis 5

No. Consumers/Amps

14 Air conditioner fan 40

15 KESSY 10

16 Connectivity Box 7.5

17 Instrument panel 7.5

18 Rear camera 7.5

19 KESSY 7.5

20 SCR, engine relay, 1.5 10/15

21 4x4 Haldex Control Unit 15

22 Trailer 15

23 Sunroof 20

24 Right lights 40

25 Left door 30

26 Heated seats 20

27 Interior light 30

28 Trailer 25

32 Parking aid control unit, front cam-era, radar 7.5

33 Airbag 7.5

34 Reverse switch, clima sensor, elec-trochromic mirror 7.5

35 Diagnosis, headlight control unit,headlight adjuster 7.5

No. Consumers/Amps

36 Right LED headlight 7.5

37 Left LED headlight 7.5

38 Trailer 25

39 Right door 30

40 12V socket 20

42 Central locking 40

43 Beats Audio CAN and MOST. 30

44 Trailer 15

45 Electric driver's seat 15

47 Rear window wiper 15

49 Starter motor; clutch sensor 7.5

52 Driving mode. 15

53 Heated rear window 30

Fuse arrangement in engine compartment

No. Consumers/Amps

1 ESP control unit 25

2 ESP control unit 40/60

3 Engine control unit (diesel/pet-rol) 30/15

4 Engine sensors 7.5/10

5 Engine sensors 7.5/10

56

Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumers/Amps

6 Brake light sensor 7.5

7 Engine power supply 7.5/10

8 Lambda probe 10/15

9 Engine 10/20

10 Fuel pump control unit 15/20

11 PTC 40

12 PTC 40

13 Automatic gearbox pump 30

15 Horn 15

16 Fuel pump control unit 7.5/20

17 Engine control unit 7.5

18 Terminal 30 (positive refer-ence) 7.5

19 Front windscreen washer 30

21 Automatic gearbox control unit 15/30

22 Engine control unit 7.5

23 Starter motor 30

24 PTC 40

31 Pressure pump 1.0 15

32 Front electronic differential 15

In-line fuse Amperes

Rear power sockets 7.5

Note● In the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter. Theseshould only be changed by a specialisedworkshop.● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-pear in the following tables.● Some of the equipment listed in the ta-bles below pertain only to certain versionsof the model or are optional extras.● Please note that the above lists, whilecorrect at the time of printing, are subjectto change.

Changing bulbs

Introduction

Changing bulbs requires a certain degree ofpractical skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recom-mends that you consult a technical service orrequest assistance from a specialist. In gen-eral a specialist is needed if, in addition to thebulbs, other vehicle components require re-moval.

If you choose to change the engine compart-ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a

dangerous area ››› in Working in the en-gine compartment on page 331.

Always use identical bulbs with the samedesignation. The name can be found on thebase of the bulb holder.

Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,there are different sets of headlights and taillights:

● Halogen headlights.● Full-LED main headlights*● Halogen headlights with LED daytime run-ning lights*● Rear bulb light● LED rear light*

Full-LED headlight system*Full-LED headlights handle all light functions(daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beamand route light) with light emitting diodes(LEDs) as a light source.

Full-LED headlights are designed to last thelifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot bereplaced. In case of headlight failure, go to anauthorised workshop to have it replaced.

Bulbs (12 V)Depending on the level of equipment fitted inthe vehicle, LEDs may be used for part or allof the interior and/or exterior lighting. LEDshave an estimated life that exceeds that of »

57

Emergencies

the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an au-thorised workshop for its replacement.

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Daytime running light/sidelight P21W SLL

Dipped beam headlights H7 LL

Main beam headlights H7 LL

Turn signal PY21W LL

Full-LED main head-lights

Type

No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are withLEDs

Front fog light Type

Fog/cornering lights* H8

Rear lights Type

Brake light/tail light P21W LL

Side lights 2x W5W LL

Turn signal PY21W LL

Retro fog light H21W

Reverse lights P21W LL

LED rear lights Type

Reverse lights W16W

The remaining functions work with LEDs

WARNING● Take particular care when working oncomponents in the engine compartment ifthe engine is warm. Risk of burns.● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. Theglass can break when you touch the bulb,causing injury.● When changing bulbs, please take carenot to injure yourself on sharp edges, inparticular on the headlight housing.

CAUTION● Remove the ignition key before workingon the electric system. Otherwise, a shortcircuit could occur.● Switch off the lights and the parking lightbefore changing a bulb.● Take good care to avoid damaging anycomponents.

For the sake of the environmentPlease ask your specialist retailer how todispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note● Please check at regular intervals that alllighting (especially the exterior lighting) onyour vehicle is functioning properly. This isnot only in the interest of your own safety,but also that of all other road users.● Before changing a bulb, make sure youhave the correct new bulb.● Do not touch the glass part of the bulbwith your bare hands, use a cloth or papertowel instead, since the fingerprints left onthe glass will vaporise as a result of theheat generated by the bulb, they will bedeposited on the reflector and will impairits surface.● Depending on the level of equipment fit-ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used forpart or all of the interior and/or exteriorlighting. LEDs have an estimated life thatexceeds than that of the car. If an LED lightfails, go to an authorised workshop for itsreplacement.

58

Fuses and bulbs

Dipped beam headlight bulb

Fig. 54 Dipped beam headlights.

Fig. 55 Dipped beam headlights.

– Raise the bonnet.

– Move the loops ››› Fig. 54 1 in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove the cover.

– Remove connector ››› Fig. 55 2 from thebulb.

– Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 55 3pressing inwards to the right.

– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement sothat the lug on the base fits into the recesson the reflector.

Daytime running light bulb

Fig. 56 Day light bulb.


– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 56 1 anti-clockwise and pull.

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turning it anti-clockwise at thesame time.

– Installation involves all of the above steps inreverse sequence.

Turn signal bulb

Fig. 57 Turn signal bulb.

Fig. 58 Turn signal bulb.


– Move the loop ››› Fig. 57 1 in the directionof the arrow and remove the cover.

– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 58 2 anti-clockwise and pull. »

59

Emergencies

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turning it anti-clockwise at thesame time.


Main beam headlight bulb

Fig. 59 Main beam headlight bulb.

Fig. 60 Main beam headlight bulb.


– Move the loop ››› Fig. 59 1 in the directionof the arrow and remove the cover.

– Slide connector ››› Fig. 60 2 to the left orright and pull.

– Remove the bulb by disconnecting the con-nector.


Front fog light bulb*3 Valid only for versions with incandescent bulbs

Fig. 61 Front fog light: remove the grille.

60

Fuses and bulbs

Fig. 62 Front fog light: remove the bulb holder

Follow the steps indicated:

– Remove the screw ››› Fig. 61 1 from thefog light grille using a screwdriver and ex-tract the grille.

– Remove the 3 screws ››› Fig. 61 2 .

– Remove the metal clip situated on the up-per part of the fog light by pulling awayfrom the vehicle 3 and extract the foglight.

– Remove the connector ››› Fig. 62 1 fromthe bulb.

– Turn the bulb holder 2 anti-clockwise andpull.

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulbholder and turning it anticlockwise at thesame time.


– Check that the bulb works properly.

Note● Due to the difficulty of accessing foglight bulbs, have them replaced at a Tech-nical Service or specialised workshop.● LED fog lights should only be replaced byspecialised personnel.

Tail light bulbs located in the body-work

Fig. 63 Luggage compartment: location of thebolt securing the tail light unit. Remove the rearlight unit from side panel. »

61

Emergencies

Fig. 64 Retaining tabs on reverse side of taillight.

– Check which of the bulbs is defective.

– Open the rear lid.

– Remove the cover by prying the flat side ofa screwdriver into the recess and removethe cover from the opening ››› Fig. 63 1 .

– Carefully loosen the screw located behindthe cover with a screwdriver, turning it anti-clockwise (arrows) ››› Fig. 63 2 .

– Tilt the light in the direction of the arrowsuntil it comes out of its housing (positions 3and 4 ) ››› Fig. 63.

– Remove the bulb holder ››› Fig. 64 unlock-ing the retaining tabs 1 .

– Change the damaged bulb.

– To refit follow the steps in reverse order, tak-ing special care when fitting the bulb hold-er. The securing tabs must click into place.

CAUTIONTake care when removing the rear light unitto make sure there is no damage to thepaintwork or any of its components.

NoteMake sure you have a soft cloth ready toplace under the glass on the rear light unit,to avoid any scratches.

Tail lights bulbs located in the rearlid

Fig. 65 Remove the cover from the boot lid anddetach the bulb holder.

62

Fuses and bulbs

Fig. 66 Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder

The rear lid must be open to change thebulbs.

– Remove the rear lid cover in the directionindicated ››› Fig. 65 .

– Unlock the retaining tabs A of the bulbholder, following the direction of arrows 1and 2 ››› Fig. 65 .

– Remove the bulb holder, moving it in the di-rection of arrow 3 ››› Fig. 65 .

– Lightly press the defective bulb into thebulb holder 1 , then turn it to the left 2 andremove it ››› Fig. 66.

– Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulbholder and turn it to the right as far as it willgo.

– Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints fromthe glass part of the bulb.

– Check that the new bulb works properly.

– Reinstall the bulb holder, making sure thatlocking clips A ››› Fig. 65 are properlyclipped on.

– Replace the cover of the rear lid lining.

LED tail light bulbs located in therear lid

Fig. 67 Remove the cover from the rear lid

Fig. 68 Remove the bulb holder.

The rear lid must be open to change thebulbs.

– Remove the rear lid cover in the directionindicated ››› Fig. 67.

– Turn the reverse lights bulb holder anti-clockwise in the direction of the arrow 1››› Fig. 68.

– Remove the bulb holder from its housing 2 .

– Change the defective bulb and reinstall thebulb holder in its housing, following theseinstructions in reverse order.

– Check that the new bulb works properly.

63

Emergencies

Changing the number plate bulbs

Fig. 69 In the rear bumper: Number plate light.

Fig. 70 number plate light: remove the bulbholder.

Follow the steps indicated:

– Press the number plate light in the directionof the arrow ››› Fig. 69.

– Detach the number plate light.

– Turn the connector lock ››› Fig. 70 in the di-rection of arrow 1 and pull on the connec-tor.

– Rotate the bulb holder in the direction ofthe arrow ››› Fig. 70 2 and extract it to-gether with the bulb.

– Replace the faulty bulb with a new identicalbulb.

– Insert the bulb holder into the number platelight and rotate all the way in the oppositedirection to the arrow ››› Fig. 70 2 .

– Plug the connector into the bulb holder.

– Insert the number plate light carefully intothe opening on the bumper. Ensure that thenumber plate light is in the correct position.

– Insert the number plate light into the bump-er until it audibly clicks into place.

Side turn signals

Fig. 71 Turn signal integrated in the rear viewmirror

The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-grated in the rear view mirrors.

In case of failure, go to an authorised work-shop to have it replaced.

Additional brake light

Taking into account that it consists of LEDbulbs, the change should be made at a tech-nical service centre.

64

Operation

Fig. 72 Instruments and controls.

66

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

Interior view

Overview

Door handleCentral locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Electric control to adjust exteriormirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Control lever for:– Turn signals and main beam

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121– Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 270– Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . 89According to features, lever for:– Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . . . 276Steering wheel with horn and– Driver airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24– On-board computer controls . . . . . 87– Controls for radio, telephone,

navigation and speech dialoguesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

– Paddle levers for tiptronic gear-shift (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 257

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Control lever for:– Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 127– Wipe and wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 127– On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74According to features: radio or dis-play for Easy Connect (navigation,radio, TV/video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Depending on the equipment, but-tons for:– SEAT driving modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264– Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251– Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300– Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124– Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352– Airbag off display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Depending on the equipment, glovecompartment with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152– CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 206Tyre pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . . 25Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Front passenger seat heating con-trol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Depending on the equipment, con-trols for:– Heating and ventilation system or

manual air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

– Automatic air conditioner . . . . . . . . . 157Depending on the equipment:– USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244– Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg-

er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244– Storage compartmentDepending on equipment fitted,gear lever or selector lever for:– Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254– Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Electronic parking brake switch . . . . . 292Auto Hold switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Start-up push button (Keyless Ac-cess closing and start-up sys-tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Driver's seat heating control . . . . . . . . 162Ignition lock (vehicles without Key-less Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Knee airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Adjustable steering column. . . . . . . . . . 14Storage compartmentBonnet lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 »

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

67

Operation

Note● Some of the equipment listed in this sec-tion is only fitted on certain models or areoptional extras.● The arrangement of switches and con-trols on right-hand drive models* may beslightly different from the layout shown in››› page 66. However, the symbols used toidentify the controls are the same.

Instruments and warn-ing/control lamps

Instrument panel

Introduction

Fig. 73 Related video:Dash panel

The vehicle can be fitted with a instrumentpanel digital lap timer or one Digital (SEATCockpit).

After switching the engine on with a 12-voltbattery that is heavily discharged or newlychanged some system settings (such as thetime, the date, the personalised comfort set-tings and the programming) might be alteredor deleted. Check and correct these settingsonce the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury.● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.● To reduce the risk of accident and injury,only make adjustments to the instructionson the screen of the instrument panel andto the instructions on the screen of the Info-tainment system when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

68

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 74 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 74:

Revolution counter (with the engine run-ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi-nute) ››› page 82.

1

Engine coolant temperature display››› page 85 or natural gas gauge invehicles with natural gas engine (CNG)››› page 84Displays on the screen ››› page 72.

2

3

Adjuster button and display.Speedometer.Fuel gauge ››› page 82.

4

5

6

69

Operation

Digital dashboard (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 75 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrumentpanel (classic view).

Details of the instruments:Engine coolant temperature display››› page 85Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi-nute the engine is running ››› page 82.Gear engaged or position of the selec-tor lever currently selectedScreen display ››› page 72SpeedometerDigital speed displayFuel gauge ››› page 82.Information Profile ››› page 70.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrumentpanel digital with monochrome screen in col-our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi-ble using the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel. By selecting different infor-mation profiles, indications other than theclassic circular instruments can be displayed,such as navigation data, multimedia informa-tion or travel data.

The 3 views are:

Classic ViewDigital maps (no information profiles)Semicircular watches

–––

All views will display information on thescreen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi-cle status, navigation1) and driving aids1).

In Classic View and Semicircular watches it ispossible to customise the information dis-played under Information Profiles››› Fig. 75 8 .

Information profilesWith the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER option (info-tainment button > Vehicle > View> Instrument cluster) you can choose

1) Depending on the version.70


between the different information display op-tions that will be shown in the SEAT DigitalCockpit.

Classic ViewThe revolutions per minute and speedometerneedles appear along the entire length››› Fig. 75.

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*1)

Personalisation of the information that ap-pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 ofthese items of information can be displayedat the same time, but the user chooses whichto display, and in what order, by moving thefinger vertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can bememorised by exiting the menu or keepingthe View button pressed.

● Consumption. Graphic representation ofthe current consumption and digital displayof the average consumption.● Audio. Digital display of the current audioplayback.● Altitude. Digital display of the current alti-tude above sea level.● Compass. Digital display of the compass.

● Information about the final destination.Digital display of the remaining travellingtime, distance to the destination and the esti-mated time of arrival.● Operating range. Digital display of the re-maining range.● Travel time.● Route guidance.● Journey. Digital display of the distancetravelled.● Assistance systems. Graphic representa-tion of different assistance systems.● Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec-ted.● Navigation. Graphical representation ofthe navigation with arrows.

It may vary based on the features, the num-ber and the contents of the selectable infor-mation profiles..

Navigation map in the SEAT DigitalCockpit*

Fig. 76 Infotainment system:: map transfer key

Depending on the features, the SEAT DigitalCockpit can display a detailed map. To dothis, select the Navigation option in themenu menu on the instrument panel››› page 74.

Depending on the features or the navigationmap, it can be shown in the Digital SEATCockpit or on the Infotainment system or onboth at the same time. If it is displayed only inthe Infotainment system, the SEAT DigitalCockpit will only display the arrows for ma-noeuvres. »

1) Pre-set information depending on the “Drivingmode” selected.

71

Operation

Transfer of navigation mapUsing the map transfer key ››› Fig. 76, themap is transferred from the Infotainment sys-tem to the Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice ver-sa.

Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu,you can transfer the map back to the Info-tainment System.

Status display

Possible indications on the instrumentpanel displayDifferent pieces of information can be dis-played on the screen of the instrument panel,depending on the features of the vehicle.● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open● Warning and information messages● Odometer● Time ››› page 80● Indications of the radio and navigation sys-tem● Indications of the phone● Outside temperature● Indications of the compass● Selector lever positions● Gear-change recommendation››› page 262

● Display of travel data (multifunction dis-play) and menus for different settings››› page 74● Service interval display ››› page 85● Speed warning ››› page 74● Speed warning for winter tyres● Start-Stop system status display››› page 251● Signs detected by the traffic signal detec-tion system ››› page 78● Indication of active cylinder managementstatus (ACT®) ››› page 267● Low consumption driving ● Identifying letters on engine (LDM)● Driver assistance system display››› page 270● Copyright

Doors, bonnet and rear lid openWhen the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-ing, the instrument panel display shows if anyof the doors, the bonnet or rear lid areopened and, in some cases, it is also indica-ted by an audible warning. The display mayvary according to the type of instrument pan-el fitted.

Selector lever positions (DSG® dual clutchshift)The current position of the selector lever isshown on the side of the lever and on the in-strument panel display. When the lever is inthe D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, insome cases, the gear engaged in each caseis shown on the instrument panel display .

Outside temperature indicatorIf the outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +4 °C (+39 °F), the “ice crystalsymbol” on the outside temperature dis-play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-til the outside temperature exceeds +6 °C(+43 °F) ››› .

When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux-iliary heater is switched on or when driving atvery low speeds, the outside temperature in-dicated may be higher than the actual tem-perature due to the heat produced by the en-gine.

The margin of measurement ranges from-45 °C (-49 °F) to +76 °C (+169 °F).

Gear-change recommendationWhile driving, the instrument panel of certainvehicles may indicate a gear recommenda-tion for saving fuel ››› page 262.

72


OdometerThe odometer registers the total distancetravelled by the car.

The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis-tance travelled since the last time it was resetto zero.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:● Briefly press the button ››› Fig. 74 4to reset the trip recorder to 0.● Keep the button 4 pressed forabout 3 seconds and the previous value willbe displayed.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel:● Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain-ment system or the multifunction steeringwheel ››› page 74.

Speed warning for winter tyresIf the maximum speed set is exceeded, this isdisplayed on the instrument panel››› page 74.

Speed warning settings can be changed inthe infotainment system, by pressing the info-tainment button > Vehicle > SET-TINGS > Driver assistance ››› page 92.

Indications of the compassDepending on the equipment, when the igni-tion is on, the instrument panel display indi-

cates the direction in which you are drivingwith a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest.

When the Infotainment system is on and thereis no route guidance active, the graphic rep-resentation of a compass is also shown.

Low consumption driving *Depending on the equipment, when driving,the display appears on the instrumentpanel when the vehicle is in low consumptionstatus due to active cylinder management(ACT®)* ››› page 267.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)Vehicles with analogue instrument panel:● Switch the ignition on, but do not start theengine.● Hold the button ››› Fig. 74 4 downfor more than 15 seconds to display the iden-tifying letters of the vehicle engine (MKB).

CopyrightLegal text about the property rights andcopyrights of the instrument cluster.

WARNINGEven when the outside temperature is high-er than freezing temperature, some roadsand bridges could be frozen.● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates thatthere may be a risk of freezing.

● At outside temperatures above +4 °C(+39 °F), there may be ice even when the“ice crystal symbol” is not on.● The outside temperature sensor takes aguideline measurement.

Note● There are different instrument panels andtherefore the versions and instructions onthe display may vary. In the case of dis-plays without warning or information texts,faults are indicated exclusively by the con-trol warning lamps.● Some indications on the instrument panelscreen may be concealed by a suddenevent, e.g. an incoming call.● Depending on the equipment, some set-tings and instructions can be carried out ordisplayed on the infotainment system aswell.● If there are several warnings at the sametime, the symbols will be displayed one af-ter the other for a few seconds. The sym-bols will stay on until you remove thecause.● If when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

73

Operation

Instrument panel menus

The number of menus and information itemsavailable will depend on the vehicle’s elec-tronics and features.

A specialised workshop can programme ormodify additional functions, according to thevehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visitinga SEAT dealership for this.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is stationary.■ Driving data ››› page 74■ Assistance systems■ Lane Assist On/Off ››› page 284■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 272■ ACC (only display) ››› page 276

■ Navigation■ Audio■ Telephone■ Vehicle status ››› page 76■ Lap timer* ››› page 81

Service Menu3 Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display(Digital SEAT Cockpit)

In the Service menu various settings can beadjusted depending on the features.

Open the Service menuTo open up the Service menu, select theRange information profile while in the Driv-ing data menu, and keep the key press-ed on the multifunction steering wheel for ap-proximately 4 seconds. When it is released,the Service menu will be displayed. Nowyou can browse through the menu using thekeys on the multifunction steering wheel asusual.

Restart the service interval displaySelect the Service menu and follow the in-structions on the screen of the instrumentpanel.

Restart the oil serviceSelect the Restore Oil service menu andfollow the instructions on the instrument pan-el display.

Restart journey dataSelect the Reset trip menu and follow theinstructions on the instrument panel displayto reset the value.

Identifying letters on engine (LDM)Select the menu Engine code. The identify-ing letters of the engine will be shown on theinstrument cluster display at the bottom left.

Setting the clockSelect the Time menu and set the correcttime by turning the right thumbwheel of themultifunction steering wheel.

Driving data indicator (multifunc-tion display)

The display of the travel data (multifunctiondisplay) shows different values about thejourney and the consumption.

Change from one display to anotherVehicles without multifunction steering wheel:● Press the rocker switch on the wiperlever ››› page 87.

Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc-tion steering wheel ››› page 88.

Changing memoryVehicles with analogue instrument panel:● Press the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button of the multifunc-tion steering wheel.

74


Vehicles with digital instrument panel:● While in Travel data > General infor-mation press on the multi-function steer-ing wheel to switch between the 3 memo-ries1):

Since start: The memory is deleted ifthe journey is interrupted for more than 2hours.Since refuelling: Display and stor-age of the journey data and the con-sumption values collected. When refuel-ling, the memory is deleted.Long-term: This memory contains trav-el data up to a maximum of 19 hours and59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes,or up to a maximum of 1999.9 km or9999.9 km. When one of these values isexceeded (varies depending on the ver-sion of the instrument panel), the memo-ry is deleted.

Delete journey data presets● Select the memory that you wish to erase.● Hold the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel or the button of the multi-

–

–

–

function wheel pressed down for about 2seconds.

Select the instructionsIn the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi-cle settings, you can display different traveldata ››› page 92.

Current consumption: The currentfuel consumption display operatesthroughout the journey, in litres/100 km;and with the engine running and the ve-hicle stopped, in litres/hour.Average consumption: The averagefuel consumption is displayed after driv-ing for approximately 300 metres.Travelling time: This indicates thehours (h) and minutes (min) since the ig-nition was switched on.Range: Approximate distance in km thatcan still be travelled if the same drivingstyle is maintained.AdBlue range or : Approximatedistance in km that can still be travelledwith the current level of the AdBlue® tankwith the same driving style. The indica-

–

–

–

–

–

tion appears from a range of less than2,400 km and cannot be deactivated.2)

Distance: Distance covered in km (m)after switching on the ignition.Average speed: The average speedwill be shown after driving for approxi-mately 100 metres.Digital speed display: Currentspeed displayed in digital format.Convenience consumers: Displays alist of the connected comfort systemsthat increase energy consumption, e.g.air conditioning.

Setting a speed warning● Select the display Warning at --- km/hor Speed warning at --- mph.● Press the button on the windscreenwiper lever or the button on the multifunc-tion steering wheel to store the current speedand activate the warning.● Activate: adjust to the desired speed within5 seconds using the rocker switch on thewindscreen wiper lever or by turning thethumbwheel on the multifunction steeringwheel. Next, press the button or »

–

–

–

–

1) This will show all data on the display at thesame time: distance travelled, average con-sumption, average speed and autonomy.2) Not available in all countries.

75

Operation

again or wait several seconds. The speed isstored and the warning activated.● Deactivate: press button or button . The stored speed is deleted.

The warning can be adjusted for speeds be-tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h(155 mph).

Display Oil temperatureThe engine reaches its operating tempera-ture when, under normal driving conditions,the oil temperature is between 80°C (176°F)and 120°C (248°F). If a great effort is requiredfrom the engine and the outside temperatureis high, the engine oil temperature may in-crease. This does not present any problem aslong as the warning lamps or ››› page 335 do not appear on the display.

Warning and information messages(Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.Faults displayed on the instrument panel asred and yellow warning symbols accompa-nied with messages and, depending on thecase, even an audible warning ››› page 89.The representation of the messages and

symbols may vary depending on the versionof the instrument panel.

Existing faults can also be checked manually.To do so, open the menu Vehicle status orVehicle ››› page 74.

Priority 1 warning (red)The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-companied by audible warnings). Stopdriving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi-nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio-nal assistance.

Priority 2 warning (yellow)The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-companied by audible warnings). Operatingfaults or the lack of operating fluids cancause damage to the vehicle or a fault.Check the faulty function as soon as possible.If necessary, seek professional assistance.

Information messageIt provides information about processes in thevehicle.

Driver alert system (break recom-mendation)*

Fig. 77 On the instrument panel display: driveralert system symbol.

Function and operationFatigue detection determines the driving be-haviour of the driver when starting a journey,making a calculation of tiredness. This is con-stantly compared with the current driving be-haviour. If the system detects that the driver istired, an audible warning is given with asound and an optic warning is shown with asymbol and complementary message on theinstrument panel display ››› Fig. 77. The mes-sage on the instrument panel display isshown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-pending on the case, is repeated. The systemstores the last message displayed.

The message on the instrument panel displaycan be switched off by pressing the button on the windscreen wiper lever or the

76


button on the multi function steeringwheel ››› page 87.

The message can be recalled to the instru-ment panel display using the multifunctiondisplay ››› page 74.

Conditions of operationDriving behaviour is only calculated onspeeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up toaround 200 km/h (125 mph).

Switching on and offDrowsiness detection can be activated or de-activated in the Easy Connect system withthe key > Vehicle > SETTINGS >Driver assistance ››› page 92. A markindicates that the adjustment has been acti-vated.

System limitationsThe Fatigue detection has certain limitationsinherent to the system. The following condi-tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-vent it from functioning.

● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)● At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)● When cornering● On roads in poor condition

● In unfavourable weather conditions● When a sporty driving style is employed● In the event of a serious distraction to thedriver

Fatigue detection will be restored when thevehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,when the ignition is switched off or when thedriver has unbuckled their seat belt andopened the door.

In the event of slow driving during a long peri-od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-tem automatically re-establishes the tired-ness calculation. When driving at a fasterspeed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-ted.

WARNINGDo not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-gue detection system tempt you into takingany risks when driving. Take regular breaks,sufficient in length when making long jour-neys.● The driver always assumes the responsi-bility of driving to their full capacity.● Never drive if you are tired.● The system does not detect the tirednessof the driver in all circumstances. Consultthe information in the section ››› page 77,System limitations.

● In some situations, the system may incor-rectly interpret an intended driving ma-noeuvre as driver tiredness.● No warning is given in the event of the ef-fect called microsleep!● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.

Note● Fatigue detection has been developedfor driving on motorways and well pavedroads only.● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

77

Operation

Road signs detection system*1)

Fig. 78 On the instrument panel display: ex-amples of speed limits or overtaking prohibi-tions with their respective additional signs.

The traffic sign detection system records thestandard traffic signs in front of the vehiclewith a camera located on the base of the in-terior mirror and provides information aboutspeed limits and overtaking prohibitions.

Within its limitations, the system also displaysadditional signals, such as time-specific pro-hibitions, signs for vehicles towing trailers››› page 308 or limitations that only apply inthe event of rain. Even on journeys withoutsigns, the system may display any applicablespeed limits.

The traffic sign detection system does notwork in all countries. Keep this in mind whentravelling abroad.

Shown on the displayIn Germany, on motorways and vehicleroads, besides speed limits and overtakingprovisions the system also displays the end ofprohibition signs. The valid speed limit at thetime in other countries is always shown.

The traffic signs detected by the system aredisplayed on the dash panel display››› Fig. 78 and, depending on the navigationsystem fitted in the vehicle, on the infotain-ment system as well ››› page 92.

Road sign detection system messages:There are no traffic signs available● The system is in its start-up phase.● OR: the camera has not recognized anymandatory or prohibitive sign.

Error: Dynamic Road Sign Display● There is a fault in the system. Have the sys-tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Speed warning currently unavailable● The speed warning function of the roadsign detection system is faulty. Have the sys-tem checked by a specialised workshop.

Dynamic Road Sign Display: pleaseclean the windscreen.● The windscreen is dirty in the camera area.Clean the windscreen.

Dynamic Road Sign Display currentlyrestricted.● The navigation system is not transmittingdata. Check if the navigation system has up-dated maps.● OR: the vehicle is in a region not includedon the navigation system's map.

No data available● The traffic sign detection system does notwork in the current country.

Activate and deactivate the road sign dis-play on the instrument panelThe permanent display of road signs on theinstrument panel can be activated or

1) System available depending on the country.78


deactivated in the infotainment system usingthe > Vehicle > SETTINGS >Driver assistance button.

Display of traffic signsWhen the traffic sign detection system is con-nected, a camera located on the base of theinterior rear-view mirror records the trafficsigns in front of the vehicle. After checkingand evaluating the information from the cam-era, the navigation system and the currentvehicle data, up to three valid road signs aredisplayed, ››› Fig. 78 with their additionalsigns.

● First: The sign that is currently valid for thedriver is shown in the left side of the screenFor example, a maximum speed limit of130 km/h (100 mph) ››› Fig. 78 .● Second: A sign valid only in certain circum-stances, e.g. 100 km/h (60 mph) is shown sec-ond, together with the additional rain sign.● Additional sign: If the windscreen wiper isworking while you are driving, the signal withthe additional rain sign will be shown first, onthe left, as it is the one that is applicable atthe time.● Third: A sign valid only with restrictions, e.g.No overtaking at certain times, will be dis-played in third place ››› Fig. 78 .

Speed warningIf the system detects that the permittedspeed is exceeded, it may warn the driverwith a “gong” and visually with a message onthe dash panel display.

The speed warning can be adjusted or deac-tivated completely in the infotainment systemusing the > Vehicle > SETTINGS >Driver assistance ››› page 92 button.The speed is adjusted in steps of 5 km/h(3 mph) within a range of between 0 km/h(mph) and 20 km/h (12 mph) above the maxi-mum speed permitted.

Trailer modeIn vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory and a trailer that iselectrically connected to the vehicle, it ispossible to activate or deactivate the displayof specific traffic signs for vehicles with trailer,such as speed limits or overtaking prohibi-tions. Activation or deactivation is performedin the infotainment system using the > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Driver assis-tance ››› page 92 buttons.

For trailer mode, the display of speed limitsapplicable to the type of trailer or to the legalprovisions can be adjusted. The speed is ad-justed in steps of 10 km/h (5 mph) within arange of between 60 km/h (40 mph) and130 km/h (80 mph). If it is adjusted to a speedgreater than that which is permitted in the

country in question for driving with a trailer,the system automatically displays the usualspeed limits, e.g. in Germany 80 km/h(50 mph).

If the speed warning for the trailer is deacti-vated, the system displays the speed limits asif there were no trailer hitched.

Limited operationThe traffic sign detection system has certainlimitations. The following cases may lead thesystem to operate with limitations or not atall:

● In the case of poor visibility, e.g. in snow,rain, fog or intense mist.● In cases of dazzling, e.g. caused by head-on traffic or by the sun.● When driving at high speeds.● If the camera is covered or dirty.● If the traffic signs are out of the camera'sfield of vision.● If the traffic signs are partially or totallycovered, e.g. by trees, snow, dirt or other vehi-cles.● In the case of traffic signs that do not fulfilthe regulations.● In the case of damaged or bent trafficsigns. »

79

Operation

● In the case of variable messages on over-head or gantry signs (LED-based variabletraffic signs or other lighting units).● If the maps on the navigation system arenot up-to-date.● In the case of adhesives affixed to vehiclesthat depict traffic signs, e.g. speed limits onlorries.

WARNINGThe technology in the traffic sign detectionsystem cannot change the limits imposedby the laws of physics and only works with-in the system's limits. Do not let the extraconvenience afforded by the traffic signdetection system tempt you into taking anyrisks when driving. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and driving style to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Poor visibility, darkness, snow, rain andfog may lead to the system failing to dis-play traffic signs or not displaying themcorrectly.● If the camera's field of vision is dirty, cov-ered or damaged, system operation maybe impaired.

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the traffic sign detec-

tion system may differ from the actual cur-rent traffic situation.● The system may not detect or correctlyshow all the traffic signs.● Traffic signs and traffic regulations havepriority over the recommendations and dis-plays provided by the system.

WARNINGIf messages are ignored, the vehicle maystall in traffic and cause accidents and se-vere injuries.● Never ignore the messages displayed.● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

NoteTo avoid affecting the correct operation ofthe system, take the following points intoconsideration:● Regularly clean the area of vision of thecamera and keep it in a clean state, withoutsnow or ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of thecamera.● Always replace damaged or worn bladeswhen required to avoid lines on the cam-era's field of vision.● Check that the windscreen is not dam-aged in the area of the camera's field of vi-sion.

● The use of outdated maps on the naviga-tion system may cause the system to showtraffic signs incorrectly.● In the waypoints mode of the navigationsystem, the traffic sign detection system isonly partly available.● Failure to heed the control lamps andcorresponding text messages when theylight up may result in damage to the vehi-cle.

Time

Setting the time on the infotainment sys-tem● Press the infotainment button.● Press the Vehicle > SETTINGS > Dateand time function button to adjust the time››› page 92.

Setting the time on analogue the instru-ment panel● To set the time (for all vehicle clocks), pressand hold the button on the instrumentpanel until the Time is displayed.● Release the button . The time is dis-played on the instrument panel display andthe hours field is highlighted.● Afterwards, press the button until thedesired time is displayed. To scroll quickly,hold the button .

80


● When they have finished setting the hour,wait until the minute field is marked on the in-strument panel display.● Afterwards, press the button until thedesired time is displayed. To scroll quickly,hold the button .● Release the button in order to finishsetting the time.

Adjusting the time in the SEAT DigitalCockpit● While in the Driving data menu, selectthe Range function (infotainment button > Vehicle > View > Drivingdata > Range).● Press the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel until the Service menu is dis-played on the instrument panel display››› page 74.● Select the menu Time.● Adjust the correct time by turning the rightthumbwheel of the multifunction steeringwheel.

Lap timer*

You can access the timer via the selectionmenu ››› page 74.

It allows you to manually time lap times on aracing circuit, memorise them and comparethem to the vehicle's previous best times.

The following menus can be displayed:

● Stop● Lap● Pause● Partial time● Statistics

Change from one menu to another● Vehicles without multifunction steeringwheel: press the rocker switch on thewindscreen wiper lever ››› page 87.● Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:turn the right thumbwheel ››› page 88.

Menu “Stop”

Start

Start the timing.If you have previously done lapsand they are included in the statis-tics, it will start with the appropriatelap number.It is only possible to start a new firstlap if the statistics have previouslybeen set to zero in the Statis-tics menu.

Sincestart

Timing starts when the vehiclemoves off.If the vehicle is already moving, thetimer begins once the vehicle hasstopped.

Statis-tics

The Statistics menu is dis-played on the screen.

Menu “Lap”

New lap

The timer of the current lap stopsand a new lap starts immediately.The time for the lap you have justcompleted is included in the statis-tics.

Partialtime

For approx. 5 seconds a partial timeis displayed. The timer continues inparallel.

StopThe current lap timer will be inter-rupted. The lap does not end. ThePause menu is displayed.

Menu “Pause”

Continue The interrupted timer continues.

New lapA new timer starts. The halted lapends and is included in the statis-tics.

Interr.lap

The timer of the current lap endsand is cancelled. It is not included inthe statistics.

End The current timer ends. The lap is in-cluded in the statistics.

Menu “Partial time”

Partialtime

For approx. 5 seconds a partial timeis displayed. The timer continues inparallel. »

81

Operation

Menu “Partial time”

New lap

The timer of the current lap stopsand a new lap starts immediately.The time for the lap you have justcompleted is included in the statis-tics.

StopThe current lap timer will be inter-rupted. The lap does not end. ThePause menu is displayed.

Menu “Statistics”

View of recent lap times:– total time– best lap time– worst lap time– average duration of the lapsA maximum of 10 laps is possible, aswell as a total duration of 99 hours,59 minutes and 59 seconds.If one of the 2 limits is reached, newtiming can only be started by firstsetting the statistics to zero.

Back This returns to the previous menu.

Resettingto zero

All the memorised statistical dataare reset.

WARNINGDo your best to avoid handling the timerwhile driving.● Only set the timer or consult statisticswhen the vehicle is stationary.

● While driving, do not handle the timer incomplicated driving situations.

Revolution counter

The rev counter indicates the number of en-gine revolutions per minute.

Together with the gear-change indicator, therev counter offers you the possibility of usingthe engine of your vehicle at a suitablespeed.

The beginning of the red zone of the revcounter indicates the maximum speed in anygear after running-in and with the engine hot.However, it is advisable to change up a gearor move the selector lever to D (or lift yourfoot off the accelerator) before the needlereaches the red zone ››› .

We recommend that you avoid high revs andthat you follow the recommendations on thegear-change indicator. Consult the addition-al information in ››› page 262, Selecting theoptimal gear.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the engine, the revcounter needle should only remain in thered zone for a short period of time.● When the engine is cold, avoid high revsand heavy acceleration and do not makethe engine work hard.

For the sake of the environmentChanging up a gear early will help you tosave fuel and minimise emissions and en-gine noise.

Fuel gauge

Fig. 79 Analogue instrument panel: fuel gauge

Fig. 80 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge.

82


Control lamps

It lights up, and in addition, thelower diode lights up in red

Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level hasbeen reached ››› . Refuel as soon as you have theopportunity.When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-es red.

It lights up yellow

Presence of water in diesel.Turn off the engine and seek professional assistance.

The display only works when the ignition isswitched on.

The fuel range is displayed on the instrumentpanel.

You can consult the tank capacity of your ve-hicle in the ››› page 372 section.

WARNINGWhen driving with low fuel, the vehicle maystall in traffic and cause accidents and se-vere injuries.● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel couldreach the engine irregularly, particularlywhen driving up or down slopes.● The steering system and the driver assis-tance systems and brakes do not workwhen the engine is running irregularly orswitches off due to lack of fuel or an irregu-lar supply thereof.● Always refuel when there is only onequarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicleto stop due to lack of fuel.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry. Anirregular fuel supply can cause misfiringand unburnt fuel could enter the exhaustsystem. The catalytic converter or the par-ticulate filter may get damaged!

NoteThe small arrow on the fuel gauge next tothe fuel pump symbol points out towardsthe side of the vehicle with the fuel tankflap.

83

Operation

Natural gas level (CNG)3 Valid in vehicles equipped with natural gas engine (CNG)

Fig. 81 Analogue instrument panel: natural gasgauge

Natural gas gaugePetrol gauge

Control lamp

It lights up green ››› Fig. 81 1

The vehicle is running on natural gas.The lamp goes off when the natural gas runs out. Theengine changes to operate with petrol.

It lights up, and in addition, thelower diode lights up in red

The fuel reserve level has been reached.When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash-es red.

A

B

The display only works when the ignition isswitched on.

Things to noteIf the vehicle is left parked for a long time im-mediately after refuelling, the natural gas lev-el indicator may not accurately indicate thesame level shown after refuelling when thevehicle is started up again. This is not due to aleak in the system, but to a drop in pressure inthe gas tank for technical reasons after acooling phase just after refuelling.

NoteIn vehicles with natural gas engines, thepetrol tank fuel level gauge may display

the refuelled amount with a slight delay(depending on the refuelled amount).

84


Engine coolant temperature indica-tor

Fig. 82 Analogue instrument panel: enginecoolant temperature indicator.

Fig. 83 Digital instrument panel: engine cool-ant temperature indicator.

Cool zone. The engine has not reachedoperating temperature yet. Avoid highspeeds and stressing the engine if it hasnot reached operating temperature.

A

Normal zone. At high outside tempera-tures and when making the engine workhard, the diodes may continue lighting upand reach the upper zone. This is nocause for concern, provided the controllamp does not light up Warning area. When the engine is work-ing hard, especially at high outside tem-peratures, the diodes may light up in thewarning area.

The coolant temperature gauge only workswhen the ignition is switched on.

Control and warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving!Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature toohigh.

Flashes red

Fault in the engine coolant system.

● Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine andlet it cool down.● Check the engine coolant level››› page 338.● If the warning lamp does not switch off evenif the coolant level is correct, request assis-tance from specialised personnel.

B

C

CAUTION● To ensure a long useful life for the engine,avoid high revs, driving at high speed andmaking the engine work hard for approxi-mately the first 15 minutes when the engineis cold. The phase until the engine is warmalso depends on the outside temperature. Ifnecessary, use the engine oil temperature*››› page 74››› page 76 as a guide.● Additional lights and other accessories infront of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef-fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-atures and high engine loads, there is a riskof the engine overheating.● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-tribution of the cooling air when the vehicleis moving. If the spoiler is damaged this canreduce the cooling effect, which couldcause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-cialist assistance.

Service intervals

The service interval indication appears on theinstrument panel display and the Infotain-ment system.

There are different versions of instrumentpanels and infotainment systems, so the ver-sions and instructions on the screens mayvary.

SEAT distinguishes between services with en-gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and »

85

Operation

services without engine oil change (e.g. In-spection).

In vehicles with Services established bytime or mileage, the service intervals are al-ready pre-defined.

In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-vals are determined individually. Thanks totechnological progress, maintenance workhas been greatly reduced. Because of thetechnology used by SEAT, with this serviceyou only need to change the oil when the ve-hicle so requires. To calculate this variation(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of useand individual driving styles are considered.The advance warning first appears 20 daysbefore the date established for the corre-sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-maining until the next service are alwaysrounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) andthe time is given in complete days. The cur-rent service message cannot be viewed until500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-ly lines are visible on the display.

Inspection reminderIf a service or an inspection has to be carriedout soon, a service reminder will be dis-played when the ignition is switched on.

The figure displayed are the kilometres thatcan still be travelled or the time until the nextservice.

Service dueWhen the time for a service or an inspec-tion comes, an audible warning will be emit-ted when the ignition is switched on and thefixed key symbol may appear on the in-strument panel for a few seconds, along withone of the following messages:

● Service now!● Please have your vehicle inspec-ted.● Oil change service due!● Oil change service and inspectiondue!

Inspection of compressed natural gastanks (CNG) reminderWhen less than 90 days for the review of thecompressed natural gas tanks (CNG), whenthe ignition is switched on, the instrumentpanel display will a reminder for review ofthe gas tanks and an audible warning will beemitted.

As approaches the service date of inspectionof the gas tanks, the message and the audi-ble warning will stop modify accordingly.

Consult a service notificationWith the ignition switched on, the engine offand the vehicle at a standstill, the currentservice notification can be read:

Check the date of the current service on theinfotainment system● Press the infotainment button .● Press the function button Vehicle > SET-TINGS ››› page 92.● Select the Service menu option to displayinformation about the services.

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel● Press and hold the button ››› Fig. 74 4 for more than 5 seconds to con-sult the service message

Vehicles with digital instrument panel● The date of the service can only be readthrough the Service menu ››› page 74.

Resetting service interval displayIf the service was not carried out by a SEATdealership, the display can be reset as fol-lows:

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel● Switch off the ignition, press and hold but-ton ››› Fig. 74 4 .● Switch ignition back on.● Release the button and press itagain for the next 20 seconds.

Vehicles with digital instrument panel● The service interval display can only be re-set through the Service menu ››› page 74.

86


Do not restart the indicator between theservice intervals, otherwise the informationdisplayed will be incorrect.

If the oil change service is reset manually, theservice interval display changes to a fixedservice interval, also in vehicles with Flexibleoil change service.

Note● The service message disappears after afew seconds, when the engine is started orwhen button is pressed on the wiperlever, or the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.● In vehicles with the LongLife system inwhich the battery has been disconnectedfor a long period of time, it is not possible tocalculate the date of the next service.Therefore the service interval display maynot be correct. In this case, bear in mind themaximum service intervals permitted››› page 356.● If you reset the display manually, the nextservice interval will be indicated as in vehi-cles with fixed service intervals. For thisreason we recommend that the service in-terval display be reset by a SEAT author-ised Dealer.● If the period of 48 months for an inspec-tion at a specialised workshop of com-pressed natural gas tanks (CNG) is excee-ded, the vehicle may not working in thismode.

Using the instrument panel

Introduction

With the ignition switched on, it is possible toread the different functions of the display byscrolling through the menus.

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,the multifunction display can only be operat-ed with the steering wheel buttons.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is at a standstill.

WARNINGDistracting the driver in any way can leadto an accident and cause injuries.● Never use the menus on the instrumentpanel display while the vehicle is in motion.

NoteAfter loading or changing the 12-volt bat-tery, check the system settings. If the pow-er supply is interrupted, the system settingsmight be incorrect or deleted.

Operation with the wiper lever

Fig. 84 Wiper lever: control keys.

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 76 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed andhidden with the button ››› Fig. 84 1 .

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,press button 1 ; if necessary, several times.● To display the menus ››› page 74 or to re-turn to the selection of menus from a menu orfrom an informative display, hold down therocker button 2 .● To change from one menu to another, pressthe upper or lower part of the rocker switch.● To open the menu or the informative displayshown, press button 1 or wait a few seconds »

87

Operation

until the menu or the informative displayopens automatically.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, press the upper orlower part of the rocker switch 2 until the re-quired menu option is checked. The optionappears framed.● Press button 1 to make the required modi-fications. A mark indicates that the system orfunction is activated.

Back to menu selectionSelect Back on the corresponding menu toexit.

NoteIf when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

Operation using the multifunctionsteering wheel

Fig. 85 Right side of the multifunction steeringwheel: buttons to the menus and informationdisplays on the instrument panel.

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 76 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed andhidden with the button of the multifunctionsteering wheel ››› Fig. 85.

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed,press the button ››› Fig. 85; if necessary,several times.● To change menus, use buttons or ››› Fig. 85.● To open the menu or the information dis-played, press the button ››› Fig. 85 or wait

a few seconds until the menu or the informa-tive display opens automatically.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb-wheel of the multifunction steering wheel››› Fig. 85 until the desired option of the menuis highlighted. The option appears framed.● Press the button ››› Fig. 85 to make therequired modifications. A mark indicates thatthe system or function is activated.

Back to menu selectionPress the button or ››› Fig. 85.

88


Button for the driver assistancesystems*

Fig. 86 On the turn signal and main beam lev-er: button for driver assistance systems (de-pending on versions).

With the turn signal and main beam headlightlever button, you can activate or deactivatethe driver assistance systems displayed in theAssistance systems menu .

Activate or deactivate a driver assistancesystem● Press ››› Fig. 86 1 or 2 briefly to open theDriving aids menu.

● Select the driver assistance system and ac-tivate or deactivate it ››› page 87. A mark in-dicates that driver assistance system isswitched on.● Afterwards, mark or confirm the selectionwith button on the windscreen wiperlever or button on the multifunction steer-ing wheel .

The driver assistance systems can also beswitched on and off in the infotainment sys-tem, in the menu Vehicle settings››› page 92.

Control lamps

Control and warning lamps

Fig. 87 Related video

The control and warning lamps are indicatorsof warnings ››› , faults or certain functions.Some control and warning lamps come onwhen the ignition is switched on, and switchoff when the engine starts running, or whiledriving.

Depending on the model, additional textmessages may be viewed on the instrumentpanel display. These may be purely informa-tive or they may be advising of the need foraction ››› page 68, Instrument panel.

Depending upon the equipment fitted in thevehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-times a symbol may be displayed on the in-strument panel.

When certain control and warning lamps arelit, an audible warning is also heard.

Red warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Parking brake on ››› page 290.

Fault in the brake system ››› page 290.

Fault in the steering system ››› page 263.

Driver or passenger has not fastened seatbelt ››› page 15.

Press the foot brake ››› page 277.

AdBlue level too low, OR fault in the SCRsystem ››› page 328.

Yellow warning lamps

Notification central lamp: additional infor-mation on the instrument panel display

Front brake pads worn ››› page 290. »89

Operation

Fault in ESC or disconnection caused bythe system; OR ESC or ASR in operation››› page 296.

ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC inSport mode ››› page 296.

Fault in the ABS ››› page 296.

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 118.

Fault in the emission control system››› page 329.

Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR faultin the management of the diesel engine››› page 329.

Fault in the petrol engine management››› page 329.

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 329.

Fault in the steering system ››› page 263.

Tyre monitor system ››› page 352.

Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 82.

Adblue level low, OR fault in the SCR sys-tem ››› page 328.

Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-sioners ››› page 23.

Front passenger front airbag is disa-bled ››› page 23.

The front passenger front airbag is activa-ted ››› page 23.

Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)››› page 284.

Error in the lane assist warning system››› page 284.

Fault in the lighting of the vehicle››› page 118.

Low engine oil level ››› page 335.

Fault in the gearbox ››› page 261.

Windscreen cleaning fluid too low››› page 127.

Other warning lamps

Turn lights or emergency lights on››› page 118.

Trailer turn signals ››› page 118.

Press the foot brake ››› page 255.

Speed regulator ››› page 270; OR Adap-tive Cruise Control (ACC) ››› page 277.

Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)››› page 284.

Natural gas operating mode ››› page 84.

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 118.

Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or notproperly closed ››› page 72.

Engine cooling fluid ››› page 85.

Engine oil pressure ››› page 335.

Fault in the battery ››› page 342.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)››› page 118.

Service interval display ››› page 85.

Mobile telephone is connected via Blue-tooth® ››› page 233.

Mobile telephone battery charge status››› page 233.

Risk of freezing ››› page 72.

Start-Stop system activated ››› page 251.

Start-Stop system unavailable››› page 251.

Low consumption driving status››› page 73.

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and messages are ig-nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, itmay stall in traffic, or accidents and seri-ous injuries may occur.● Never ignore the warning lamps or textmessages.

90


● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble.● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users.If necessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle toadvise other drivers.● Before opening the bonnet, switch off theengine and allow it to cool.● In any vehicle, the engine compartment isa hazardous area and could cause severeinjuries ››› page 331.

91

Operation

Easy Connect system

Introduction

The infotainment system brings together im-portant vehicle functions and systems into asingle central control unit, e.g. menu settings,radio equipment and the navigation system.

General operating informationThe following section contains all of the rele-vant information for changing the settings inthe Vehicle Settings menu. General infor-mation on the operation of the infotainmentsystem, as well as on the warning and safetyinstructions that must be taken into account,is found in ››› page 163

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury. Operating the EasyConnect system while driving could dis-tract you from traffic.

Vehicle menu settings

Fig. 88 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 89 Easy Connect: Vehicle Menu.

Open the Vehicle settings menu● Switch the ignition on.● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on.● Press the Infotainment button andthen the Vehicle ››› Fig. 88 function button.

● OR: Press the infotainment button to goto the Vehicle ››› Fig. 89 menu.● Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe Vehicle settings menu.

● To select a function in the menu, press thedesired button.

92


Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system –Activation and deactivation of the traction control system (ASR) and the elec-tronic stability control (ESC) system, selecting the Sport / Off-road* mode of theelectronic stability control (ESC Sport)

››› page 296

TyresTyre monitor system Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 352

Winter tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning, adjusting the speed warningvalue ››› page 350

Vehicle lightsLight assistance

Dynamic Light Assist, Light Assist, motorway function, turning-on time, headlamprange adjustment, automatic lights when raining, one-touch signalling, travelmode.

››› page 118

Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls ››› page 126

Coming/Leaving home function Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions ››› page 123

Driver assis-tance

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Activation and deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. ››› page 276

Front Assist (ambient trafficmonitoring system)

Activation and deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning dis-play ››› page 272

Lane Assist (lane departurewarning assistance) Activation and deactivation of lane departure warning, adaptive lane guidance ››› page 284

Dynamic Road Sign Display Display on the instrument panel, activation and deactivation of the speed warn-ing ››› page 78

Trailer detection Trailer recognition (display of traffic signs for vehicles with trailer), use to calcu-late the route, maximum speed for trailer ››› page 79

Driver alert system Activation and deactivation ››› page 76 »

93

Operation


Parking and ma-noeuvring

ParkPilot Automatic activation, front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear soundtreble, adjust Infotainment volume

››› page 301,››› page 304

Auto Hold Switching on and off when starting off ››› page 294

Electric parking brake Switching on and off automatically ››› page 292

Manoeuvre braking Switching on and off ››› page 304

Displaying the parking space Switching on and off

Ambient lighting – Switching on and off, selecting brightness, colour, area or total ››› page 126

Mirrors andwindscreen wip-ers

Rear view mirrors Synchronous adjustment, lower the passenger side mirror while reversing (kerbfunction), fold in after parking, exterior mirrors heating, dim when dark ››› page 130

Windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic wipers if raining, rear window wiping in re-verse gear ››› page 127

Opening andclosing

Electric windows Convenience opening, automatic closure in case of rain, automatic closure withcentral locking ››› page 114

Central lockingDoor unlocking, lock/unlock automatically when driving,audio confirmation“Easy Open”, “Easy Entry” access assistance, automatic opening of the rear lid,interior monitoring

››› page 100

Instrument panel Multifunction displayCurrent consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Ad-vice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed display,speed warning, oil temperature, coolant temperature, reset data “when settingoff”, reset data for “total calculation”, traffic signal detection

››› page 74

Date and time – Time source, time, select time zone, time format, date, date format ››› page 80

Units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, GNC consumption,electric consumption, pressure –

Service – Vehicle ID number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil changeservice ››› page 85

94



Factory settingsRestore all settings and data Restore all settings –

Restore settings/data sepa‐rately

Lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring, background lighting, rearview mirrors and windscreen wipers, opening and closing, instrument panel –

When the function button check box is activa-ted , the function is active.

Pressing the menu button will always takeyou to the last menu used.

Any changes made using the settings menusare automatically saved on closing thosemenus.

The actual number of menus available andthe name of the various options will dependon the vehicle’s electronics and equipment.

Multifunction steering wheel*

Operation of the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 90 Controls on the steering wheel.

The steering wheel includes a multifunctionmodule from where it is possible to control

the audio, telephone and radio/navigationfunctions without needing to distract the driv-er. »

95

Operation

Applies to vehicles with analogue instrument panel

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

ATurn Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn announcement volume

up/down.

APress Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute voice navigation

B a) Activate/deactivate voice control.b)

This function can be used from any mode, except in the case of an active call.

C / D Search for the previous/nextstationc).

Short press: Switch to theprevious/next track.Long press: Fast rewind/for-wardd).

No function– No active call: Radio/Me-dia functionality (exceptAUX)– Active call: no function

No function for the other modes(navigation, assistants, vehiclestatus, travel data).

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).

G Colour instrument panel: switch to the previous menu.Monochrome instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

HTurn

Coloured instrument panel:List of stations available(only if the instrument panelis in audio menu).

Coloured instrument panel:next track (only if the instru-ment panel is in audiomenu).

No function

– There is no active call: Re-cent calls list.– Active call: go to the calloptions list (call in standby,hang up, mute microphone,private number, etc.).

– Active route: access the view tostop route guidance.– No active route: list last destina-tions.

HPress Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

96


Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit)

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

ATurn Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn volume up/down. Turn announcement volume

up/down.

APress Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Mute voice navigation.

B a) Enable/disable voice controlb).This function can be used from any mode, except in the case of an active call.

C / D Search for the previous/nextstationc).

Short press: Switch to theprevious/next track.Long press: Fast rewind/for-wardd).

No function– No active call: Radio/Me-dia functionality (exceptAUX)– Active call: no function

No function for the other modes(navigation, assistants, vehiclestatus, travel data).

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.b)

G Short press b): Change views Classic Info / Digital Maps / Semicircular dialsLong press b): access the “Personalised Profiles” configuration view.

HTurn

List of sources available(audio/media).

List of sources available(audio/media). No function

– There is no active call: Re-cent calls list.– Active call: go to the calloptions list (call in standby,hang up, mute microphone,private number, etc.).

If there is a map on the DigitalScorecard: Zoom in-out (with andwithout active route).If there is no map on the DigitalPanel: the map is transferred fromthe infotainment System displayto the Digital Panel (with andwithout active route).

HPress No function No function No function No function Auto/Manual Zoom Zoom if the

map on the DigitScorecard.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package.b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data).c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

97

Operation

Opening and closing

Set of vehicle keys

Related video

Fig. 91 Opening andclosing

Vehicle key

Fig. 92 Assignment of buttons on the remotecontrol key.

Fig. 93 Vehicle key with alarm button.

Key to the ››› Fig. 92, ››› Fig. 93Unlock the vehicleLock the vehicleUnlock only the rear lid. Press the buttonuntil all the turn signals on the vehicleflash briefly. You have 2 minutes to openthe rear lid. Once this time has passed, itwill lock again. In addition, the lamp onthe key flashes.Folding the key shaft in and outAlarm button*. Only press in the event ofan emergency! When the alarm button ispressed, the vehicle's sounds and the turnsignals light up for a short time. Pressagain to disconnect.

With the vehicle key the vehicle may belocked or unlocked remotely ››› page 100.

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-

1

2

3

4

5

cle. The range of the vehicle key with remotecontrol and new battery is several metresaround the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicleusing the remote control key, this should bere-synchronised ››› page 100 or the batterychanged ››› page 99.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle maybe used.

Control lamp on the vehicle keyWhen a button on the vehicle key is pressed,the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 92 (arrow)once briefly, but if the button is held down fora longer period the control lamp flashes sev-eral times, such as in convenience opening.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not lightup when the button is pressed, replace thekey's battery ››› page 99.

Spare keyTo obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,the vehicle ID number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip whichmust be coded with the data from the vehicleelectronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will notwork if it does not contain a microchip or themicrochip has not been encoded. This is alsotrue for keys which are specially cut for thevehicle.

98

Opening and closing

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can beobtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-cialised workshop or an approved key servicequalified to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronisedbefore use ››› page 100.

WARNING● Never leave children or disabled personsin the vehicle. In case of emergency, theymay not be able to leave the vehicle ormanage on their own.● An uncontrolled use of the key could startthe engine or activate any electric equip-ment (e.g. electric windows), causing riskof accident. The doors can be locked usingthe remote control key. This could becomean obstacle for assistance in an emergen-cy situation.● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle.An unauthorised use of your vehicle couldresult in injury, damage or theft. Thereforealways take the key with you when youleave the vehicle.● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, thesteering could suddenly block and it wouldbe impossible to steer the vehicle.

CAUTIONAll of the vehicle keys contain electroniccomponents. Protect them from damage,impacts and humidity.

Note● Only use the key button when you requirethe corresponding function. Pushing thebutton unnecessarily could accidentallyunlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It isalso possible even when you are outsidethe radius of action.● Key operation can be greatly influencedby overlapping radio signals close to thevehicle working in the same range of fre-quencies, for example, radio transmitters ormobile telephones.● Obstacles between the remote controland the vehicle, bad weather conditionsand discharged batteries can considerablyreduce the range of the remote control.● If the buttons of the vehicle key arepressed or one of the central locking but-tons ››› page 103 is pressed repeatedly inshort succession, the central locking brief-ly disconnects as protection against over-loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lockit if necessary.● Spare remote control keys are availableat your Technical Service, where they mustbe matched to the locking system.● Up to five remote control keys can beused.

To change the battery

Fig. 94 Vehicle key: opening the battery com-partment cover.

Fig. 95 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialisedworkshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-cle key, under a cover. »

99

Operation

Changing the battery● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 98.● Remove the cover from the back of the ve-hicle key ››› Fig. 94 in the direction of the ar-row ››› .● Extract the battery from the compartmentusing a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 95.● Place the new battery in the compartmentas shown ››› Fig. 95, pressing in the oppositedirection to that shown by the arrow ››› .● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 94, pressing itonto the vehicle key casing in the opposite di-rection to that shown by the arrow until itclicks into place.

CAUTION● If the battery is not changed correctly,the vehicle key may be damaged.● Use of unsuitable batteries may damagethe vehicle key. For this reason, always re-place the dead battery with another of thesame voltage, size and specifications.● When fitting the battery, check that thepolarity is correct.

For the sake of the environmentPlease dispose of your used batteries cor-rectly and with respect for the environ-ment.

Synchronize the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outsideof the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-synchronised as described below:

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 98.● If necessary, remove the cover from thedriver door lever ››› page 110.● Press the button on the vehicle key. Forthis, it must remain with the vehicle.● Open the vehicle within one minute usingthe key blade. The key has been synchron-ised.● If necessary, fit the cap.

Central locking

Introduction

Central locking functions correctly when allthe doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. Ifthe driver door is open, the vehicle cannot belocked with the key.

If the vehicle has the Keyless Access lockingand ignition system, it may only be lockedwith the ignition off and the driver's doorclosed.

The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked fora long period (e.g. in a private garage) mayrun down and fail to start the motor.

WARNINGThe incorrect use of the central lockingsystem may cause serious injuries.● The central locking system will lock alldoors. A vehicle locked from the inside canprevent any non-authorised individual fromopening the doors and accessing the vehi-cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency oraccident, locked doors will complicate ac-cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas-sengers.● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the vehicle. The central lockingbutton can be used to lock all the doorsfrom within. Therefore, passengers will belocked inside the vehicle. Individuals lockedin the vehicle can be exposed to very highor very low temperatures.● Depending on the time of the year, tem-peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-cle can be extremely high or extremely lowresulting in serious injuries and illness oreven death, particularly for young children.● Never leave individuals locked in a closedand locked vehicle. In case of emergency,they may not be able to exit the vehicle bythemselves or get help.

100

Opening and closing

Description

Central locking allows all doors, the rear lidand the tank flap to be unlocked centrally:

● From outside, using the vehicle key››› page 102.● From outside with the Keyless Access››› page 104 system,● From inside, by pushing the central lockingbutton ››› page 103.

Various functions are available to improve thevehicle safety:

● Security system “Safe” ››› page 106● Self-locking system to prevent involuntaryunlocking● Selective unlocking system● Automatic speed dependent locking andunlocking system (Auto Lock)● Emergency unlocking system

Self-locking system to prevent involuntaryunlockingIt is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve-hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in-cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec-onds, it re-locks automatically.

Unlocking one side of the vehicle onlyWhen you lock the vehicle with the key, thedoors and the rear lid are locked. When youopen the door, you can either unlock only thedriver door, or all the vehicle doors. To selectthe required option, use Easy Connect*››› page 101.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)*The Auto Lock function locks the doors andthe rear lid when the vehicle exceeds a speedof about 15 km/h (9 mph).

The vehicle is unlocked again when the igni-tion key is removed. Alternatively, the vehiclecan also be unlocked via the central lockingswitch or by pulling one of the inside doorhandles.

The Auto Lock function can be activated anddeactivated in the radio or in the Easy Con-nect* ››› page 101 system.

In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, the doors will be automaticallyunlocked to facilitate access and assistance.

Turn signalsThe turn signals will flash twice when the ve-hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicleis locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one ofthe doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is notclosed correctly.

Accidental lock-outThe central locking system prevents you frombeing locked out of the vehicle in the follow-ing situations:

● If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannotbe locked with the central locking switch››› page 103.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,when all the doors and the rear lid have beenclosed. This prevents the accidental lockingof the vehicle.

Note● Never leave any valuable items in the ve-hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle isnot a safe.● If the LED on the driver door sill lights upfor about 30 seconds when the vehicle islocked, the central locking system or anti-theft alarm* is not working properly. Youshould have the fault repaired at a SEATOfficial Service or specialised workshop.● The vehicle interior monitoring of the an-ti-theft alarm* system will only function asintended if the windows and the sunroof*are closed.

Central locking settings

Central locking settings can be changed inthe Easy Connect* system. »

101

Operation

Unlocking doors● Select: key > Vehicle > SET-TINGS > Opening and closing > Cen-tral locking > Unlocking the doors.

You can choose to unlock all the doors oronly the driver door when you unlock thevehicle. In all the options, the fuel tank flap isalso unlocked.

With the Driver setting, when you press the button on the remote control key once, onlythe driver door is unlocked. If that button ispressed twice, the rest of the doors and therear lid will be unlocked.

If the button is pressed, all the vehicledoors are locked. At the same time, a confir-mation signal* is heard.

Automatic locking (Auto Lock)Vehicles with Easy Connect● Select: button > Vehicle >SETTINGS > Opening and closing >Central locking > Lock automaticallywhen driving.

Vehicles with radio● Select: button > control button Central locking > Lock while driv-ing.

If the function is activated, all the vehicledoors are locked at speeds above 15 km/h (9mph).

The doors unlock automatically when the keyis removed from the ignition. In addition, youcan unlock the doors by pressing centrallocking key ››› page 103 or, individually, byoperating the internal door handle (e.g. sothat a passenger can get out).

Unlock and lock from the outside

Fig. 96 Remote control key: buttons.

● Lock: press the ››› Fig. 96 button.● Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se-curity system: push the button again andhold for 2 seconds.● Unlock: press the button.● Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the button for at least 1 second.

The vehicle will be locked again automatical-ly if you do not open one of the doors or therear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking the

car. This function prevents the vehicle fromremaining unlocked if the unlocking button ispressed by mistake. This does not apply if youpress the button for at least one second.

Selective unlocking systemThe selective unlocking system allows you toonly unlock the driver door and the fuel tankflap. All other doors and the rear lid remainlocked.

Unlocking the driver's door and tank flap:● Press (once) the button on the remotecontrol key or turn the key once in the open-ing direction.

Unlocking all the doors, the rear lid and thetank flap simultaneously:● Within 5 seconds, press (twice) the but-ton on the remote control key, or turn the keytwice within 5 seconds in the opening direc-tion.

The Safe* security system and the anti-theftalarm* deactivate immediately when onlythe driver door is opened.

In vehicles with Easy Connect*, you can pro-gramme the security central locking systemdirectly ››› page 101.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Lock-ing system “Safe” on page 107.

102

Opening and closing

Note● Do not use the remote control key untilthe vehicle is visible.● Other functions of the remote control key››› page 114, Convenience open/closefunction.

Unlocking and locking from the in-side

Fig. 97 Driver's door: central locking switch.

● Lock: press the ››› Fig. 97 button.● Unlock: press the ››› Fig. 97 button.

Please note the following when using thecentral locking switch to lock your vehicle:

● It is not possible to open the doors or therear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).

● The LED in the central locking switch lightsup when all the doors are closed and locked.● You can open the doors individually fromthe inside by pulling the inside door handle.● In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, doors locked from the inside willbe automatically unlocked to facilitate ac-cess and assistance.

WARNING● The central locking switch also workswith the ignition switched off, except whenthe “safe” system is activated.● The central locking switch does not oper-ate if the vehicle is locked from the outsideand the security system is switched on.● Locked doors could delay assistance inan emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe-cially children, in the vehicle.

NoteYour vehicle will lock automatically when itreaches a speed of about 15 km/h (9 mph)(Auto Lock) ››› page 101. You can unlock thevehicle again using the button on thecentral locking switch.

Related video Keyless Access

Fig. 98 Technology

103

Operation

Unlock and lock the vehicle withKeyless Access*

Fig. 99 Keyless Access: proximity zones.

Fig. 100 Door handle: sensor surfaces

››› Fig. 100Unlocking sensor surface on the inside ofthe door handle.Locking sensor surface on the outside ofthe door handle.

A

B

Depending on the equipment, the vehiclemay have the Keyless Access system.

Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-tion system to unlock and lock the vehiclewithout actively using its key. To do this, allthat is required is to have a valid vehicle key inthe detection area where you are attemptingto access the vehicle ››› Fig. 99 and to touchone of the sensor surfaces on the door han-dles ››› Fig. 100 ››› .

The vehicle can be unlocked and locked viathe front doors only. When doing so, the re-mote control key must be no further than ap-prox. 1.5 m away from the door handle.

It does not matter where you carry the key,e.g. in your jacket pocket.

Once the doors have been locked, they can-not be opened again immediately. This willenable you to check that the doors are prop-erly closed.

If you wish you may unlock only the corre-sponding door or the entire vehicle. The nec-essary adjustments can be made in vehicleswith a driver information system››› page 92››› page 74.

General informationIf a valid key is in the proximity of the car››› Fig. 99, the Keyless Access locking andstarting system gives the key entry as soon as

one of the sensor surfaces on the front doorhandles is touched.

The following features are then availablewithout having to use the vehicle key actively:

● Keyless Entry: unlocking the vehicle usingthe handles of the front doors or the soft-touch/handle on the rear lid.● Keyless Exit: locking the vehicle using thesensor of the driver or passenger door han-dle.● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the enginewith the starter button ››› page 246.

The central locking and locking systems op-erate in the same way as a normal lockingand unlocking system. Only the controlschange.

Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with adouble flash of the indicator lights; locking bya single flash.

If the vehicle is locked and then all doors andthe rear lid are closed leaving the last keyused inside the vehicle and none outside, thevehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve-hicle's indicator lights will flash four times.The vehicle will lock after a few seconds ifyou do not open any door or the rear lid.

The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to openany door or boot hatch.

104

Opening and closing

Unlocking and opening the doors(Keyless-Entry)● Grip one of the front door handles. Whenyou do this, you touch the sensor surface››› Fig. 100 A (arrow) of the handle and thevehicle unlocks.● Open the door.

On vehicles with selective opening or info-tainment system configuration, pulling thedoor handle twice will unlock all doors.

In vehicles without the “Safe” security sys-tem: closing and locking the doors(Keyless-Exit)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface››› Fig. 100 B (arrow) on one of the frontdoor handles. The door that is used must beclosed.

In vehicles with the “Safe” security sys-tem: closing and locking the doors(Keyless-Exit)● Switch the ignition off.● Close the driver's door.● Touch (once) the sensor surface ››› Fig. 100B (arrow) on one of the front door handles.

The vehicle locks with the “Safe” security sys-tem ››› page 106. The door that is used mustbe closed.

● Touch (twice) the sensor surface››› Fig. 100 B (arrow) of one of the front doorhandles to lock the vehicle without activatingthe “Safelock” security system ››› page 106.

Unlocking and locking the boot hatchWhen the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto-matically unlocks on opening if there is a val-id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 99.

Open or close the rear lid normally.

After closing, the hatch locks automatically. Ifthe complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lidwill not lock automatically after closing it.

What happens when locking the vehiclewith a second keyIf there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle andit is locked from the outside with a second ve-hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blockedfor engine ignition ››› page 246. In order toenable engine ignition, press the button onthe key inside the vehicle.

Automatically disabling sensorsIf the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for along period of time, the proximity sensors onthe passenger doors are automatically disa-bled.

If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-dles is often activated in an unusual mannerwith the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches

of a bush rubbing against it), all proximitysensors are disabled for a certain period oftime.

Sensors will again be enabled:

● After a time.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-ton on the key.● OR: if the boot is opened.● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually withthe key.

Keyless Access temporary disconnectionfunction*You can deactivate the vehicle's KeylessAccess unlocking for one locking and unlock-ing cycle.

● Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-wise the vehicle cannot be locked.● Close the door.● Push the central locking button on the re-mote control and touch the locking sensorsurface of the driver door handle››› Fig. 100 B within the following 5 seconds.Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise thevehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is alsopossible if the vehicle is locked through thedriver’s door lock.● To check that the function has been deacti-vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull »

105

Operation

on the door handle. The door should notopen.

The next time the door can only be unlockedvia the remote control or the lock cylinder.The next time the door is locked/unlocked,Keyless Access will be active again.

Convenience functionsTo close all the electric windows and the sun-roof using the comfort function, keep a fin-ger for a few seconds on the locking sensorsurface ››› Fig. 100 B (arrow) of the doorhandle until the windows and roof haveclosed.

How the doors open when touching the sen-sor surface on the door handle will dependon the settings that have been activated inthe infotainment system, using the button > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Open-ing and closing.

CAUTIONThe sensor surfaces on the door handlescould engage if hit with a water jet or highpressure steam if there is a valid vehiclekey in the proximity. If at least one of theelectric windows is open and the sensorsurface ››› Fig. 100 B (arrow) on one of thehandles is activated continuously, all win-dows will close.

Note● If the vehicle battery has little or nocharge, or the vehicle key battery is almostor entirely out of charge, you will probablynot be able to lock or unlock the vehiclewith the Keyless Access system. The vehi-cle can be unlocked or locked manually››› page 110.● To control the proper locking of the vehi-cle, the release function is disabled for ap-prox. 2 seconds.● If the message Keyless access systemfaulty is displayed on the screen of thedash panel, abnormalities may occur in theoperation of the Keyless Access system.Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT rec-ommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis.● Depending on the function set on the in-fotainment system for the mirrors, the exte-rior mirrors will unfold and the surroundlighting will come on when unlocking thevehicle using the sensor surface on thedriver and passenger door handles››› page 130.● If there is no valid key inside the vehicleor the system fails to detect one, a warningwill display on the dash panel screen. Thiscould happen if any other radio frequencysignal interferes with the key signal (e.g.from a mobile device accessory) or if the

key is covered by another object (e.g. analuminium case).● If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have alayer of salt, the correct functioning of thesensors on the door handles may be affec-ted. In this case, clean the vehicle.● If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic gearbox, it may only be locked in thegear stick is in position P.● To improve the safety of your vehicle, theremote control of the system is equippedwith a position sensor. If this remote controldoes not detect movement for a certainlength of time, the system will concludethat the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. ona night table) so it will be disabled.

Locking system “Safe”1)

When the vehicle is locked, the “Safe” securi-ty system puts the door handles out of opera-tion and makes it difficult for unauthorizedpeople to enter. The doors cannot be openedfrom inside ››› .

Depending on the vehicle, when switching theignition off, a warning may be displayed onthe control panel screen stating that the“Safe” security system is activated.

1) Available depending on market and version.106

Opening and closing

Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe”security system.● Press the locking button once on the ve-hicle key.

Lock the vehicle without activating the“Safe” system.● Press the locking button on the vehiclekey twice.● On vehicles with the Keyless Access lockingand ignition system: touch the sensor surfaceon the outside part of the door handle twice.

When the “Safe” security system is disa-bled, the following needs to be taken intoaccount:● The vehicle can be opened and unlockedfrom the inside using an inside door handle.● The anti-theft alarm is activated.● The vehicle interior monitoring system andthe anti-tow system are disabled.

“Safe” statusThe flashing frequency of the diode in thedoor sill immediately confirms the process.Initially, the diode flashes in a fast sequencefor a brief period, then it stops for approxi-mately 30 seconds and, lastly continuesflashing slowly.

WARNINGDo not leave anyone (especially children)in the vehicle if it is locked from the outsideand the “Safe” security system* is activa-ted, as the doors and windows cannot thenbe opened from the inside. Locked doorscould delay assistance in an emergency.

Anti-theft alarm system*

Description

The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult tobreak into the vehicle or steal it. The systemwill initiate acoustic and optical warning sig-nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced.

The anti-theft alarm is automatically turnedon when the vehicle is locked with the key.The system is immediately activated and theturn signal light located on the driver door willflash along with the turn signals, indicatingthat the alarm and the locking security sys-tem (double lock) have been turned on.

If any of the doors or the bonnet are open,they will not be included in the protectionzones of the vehicle when the alarm is con-nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse-quently closed, they will be automatically in-cluded in the protection areas of the vehicleand the turn signals will flash accordinglywhen the doors close.

● The turn signal light will flash twice onopening and deactivating the alarm.● The turn signal light will flash once on clos-ing and activating the alarm.

When does the system trigger an alarm?The anti-theft alarm siren will be triggered forabout 30 seconds alongside a sound andoptical (flashing) warning signals and will berepeated about ten times when the vehicle islocked and the following unauthorised ac-tions are attempted:

● Opening a door that is mechanically un-locked using the vehicle key without switchingon the ignition in the next 15 seconds (in cer-tain markets, such as the Netherlands, there isno 15 second waiting time and the alarm isactivated immediately on opening the door).● A door is opened.● Opening the bonnet.● The rear lid is opened.● When the ignition is switched on with a non-authorised key.● Undue manipulation of the alarm.● Disconnection of the vehicle battery.● Movement inside the vehicle (in vehicleswith interior monitoring ››› page 108).● When the vehicle is towed (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 108). »

107

Operation

● When the vehicle is raised (in vehicles withanti-tow system ››› page 108).● When the vehicle is transported on a ferryor by rail (vehicles with an anti-tow system orvehicle interior monitoring ››› page 108).● When a trailer connected to the anti-theftalarm system is disconnected.

How to turn OFF the alarm● Unlock the vehicle with the unlock button of the key.● OR: turn the ignition on with a valid key.

If the driver’s door is unlocked mechanicallyusing the key, the key must be inserted intothe ignition, and the ignition must be turnedon within 15 seconds of opening the door.

Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec.and the ignition will be blocked.

CAUTIONIf the anti-theft security system is switchedoff, the vehicle interior monitoring and thetow-away protection are automaticallydisconnected.

Note● After 28 days, the indicator light will beswitched off to prevent the battery from ex-hausting if the vehicle has been left parkedfor a long period of time. The alarm systemremains activated.

● If, after the audible warning goes off, an-other monitored area is accessed (e.g. therear lid is opened after a door has beenopened), the alarm is triggered again.● The anti-theft alarm is not activatedwhen the vehicle is locked from within usingthe central locking button .● If the driver door is unlocked mechanical-ly with the key, only the driver door is un-locked, the rest of the doors remain locked.Only when the ignition has been turned onwill the other doors be available - but notunlocked - and the central locking buttonwill be activated.● If the vehicle battery is run down or flatthen the anti-theft alarm will not operatecorrectly.● Vehicle monitoring remains active even ifthe battery is disconnected or not workingfor any reason.● The alarm is triggered immediately if oneof the battery cables is disconnected whilethe alarm system is active.

Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system*

It is a monitoring or control function incorpo-rated in the anti-theft alarm* which detectsunauthorised vehicle entry by means of ultra-sound.

The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-towsensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch-ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switchedon. In order to activate it, all the doors andthe rear lid must be closed.

If the “Safe” security system* ››› page 106 isswitched off, the vehicle interior monitoringand the tow-away protection are automati-cally disconnected.

Activation● It is automatically switched on when theanti-theft alarm is activated.

Deactivation● Open the vehicle with the key, either me-chanically or by pressing the button on theremote control. The time period from whenthe door is opened until the key is inserted inthe contact should not exceed 15 seconds,otherwise the alarm will be triggered.● Press the button on the remote controltwice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sensorswill be deactivated. The alarm system re-mains activated.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system are automatically switched onagain next time the vehicle is locked.

If you wish to switch off the vehicle interiormonitoring and the anti-tow system, it must

108

Opening and closing

be done each time that the vehicle is locked;if not, they will be automatically switched on.

The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti-tow system should be switched off if animalsare left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise,their movements will trigger the alarm) orwhen, for example, the vehicle is transportedor has to be towed with only one axle on theground.

Deactivation through the infotainmentsystem● Turn off the ignition and select: key > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Opening andclosing> Central locking > Interiormonitoring.● When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicleinterior monitoring and the tow-away protec-tion are switched off until the next time thedoor is opened.

False alarmsInterior monitoring will only operate correctlyif the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob-serve related legal requirements.

The following cases may cause a falsealarm:● Open windows (partially or fully).● Panoramic/tilting sunroof open (partially orcompletely).

● Movement of objects inside the vehicle,such as loose papers, items hanging from therear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc.

Note● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm isactivated without the volumetric sensorfunction, relocking will activate the alarmwith all its functions, except the volumetricsensor. This function is reactivated whenthe alarm is switched on again, unless it isdeliberately switched off.● If the alarm has been triggered by thevolumetric sensor, this will be indicated bya flashing of the warning lamp on the driverdoor when the vehicle is opened. The flashis different to the flash indicating the alarmis activated.● The vibration of a mobile phone left in-side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in-terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as bothsensors react to movements and shakes in-side the vehicle.● If on activating the alarm, any door or therear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti-vated. The vehicle interior monitoring andthe anti-tow system will only be activatedonce all the doors are closed (including therear lid).

Doors

Introduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked man-ually and partially opened, for example if thekey or the central locking is damaged.

WARNINGOpening and closing doors carelessly cancause serious injury.● If the vehicle is locked from outside, thedoors and windows cannot be opened fromthe inside.● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the car. They could be trapped inthe car in an emergency and will not beable to get themselves to safety.● Depending on the time of the year, tem-peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-cle can be extremely high or extremely lowresulting in serious injuries and illness oreven death, particularly for young children.

WARNINGGetting in the way of the doors and the rearlid is dangerous and can lead to serious in-jury.● Open and close the doors and the rear lidonly when there is nobody in the way. »

109

Operation

CAUTIONWhen opening and closing in an emergen-cy, carefully disassemble components andthen reassemble them carefully to avoiddamage to the vehicle.

Emergency unlocking or locking ofthe driver’s door

Fig. 101 Driver door handle: Concealed lockcylinder.

Fig. 102 Driver door handle: lever the cover off

If the central locking system should fail to op-erate, the driver door can still be locked andunlocked by turning the key in the lock.

As a general rule, when the driver door islocked manually all other doors are locked.When it is unlocked manually, only the driverdoor opens. Please observe the instructionsrelating to the anti-theft alarm system››› page 107.

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 98.● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening inthe cover on the driver door handle››› Fig. 102 then remove the cover upwards.● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder tounlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics● The anti-theft alarm will remain activewhen vehicles are unlocked. However, thealarm will not be triggered ››› page 107.● After the driver door is opened, you have 15seconds to switch on the ignition. Once thistime has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.● Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo-bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-activates the anti-theft alarm system.

NoteThe anti-theft alarm is not activated whenthe vehicle is locked manually using thekey shaft ››› page 100.

Emergency lock of doors withoutlock cylinders

Fig. 103 Locking the door manually.

110

Opening and closing

If the central locking system should fail towork at any time, doors with no lock cylinderwill have to be locked separately.

The emergency lock is located on the front ofthe front passenger's door and the reardoors. It can only be seen if the door is open.

● Pull the cap out of the opening.● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it tothe right as far as it will go (if the door is onthe right side) or to the left (if the door is onthe left side).● Replace the cap.

Once the door has been closed it can no lon-ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte-rior door handle once to unlock and open thedoor.

Childproof locks

Fig. 104 Childproof lock on the left hand sidedoor.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doorsfrom being opened from the inside. This sys-tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicleelectronic opening and locking systems. Itonly affects rear doors. It can only be activa-ted and deactivated manually, as describedbelow:

Activating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childprooflock.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in thedoor using the ignition key, clockwise forthe left hand side doors ››› Fig. 104 and an-ti-clockwise for the right hand side doors.

Deactivating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti-vate.

– With the door open, rotate the groove in thedoor using the ignition key, anti-clockwisefor the left hand side doors ››› Fig. 104 andclockwise for the right hand side doors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, thedoor can only be opened from the outside.

Rear lid

Introduction

WARNINGCareless and unsuitable locking, openingand closing of the rear lid can cause acci-dents and serious injury.● The rear lid must not be opened when thereverse or rear fog lights are lit. This maydamage the tail lights.● Do not close the rear lid by pushing itdown with your hand on the rear window.The glass could smash. Risk of injury!● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closingit. If not, it may open unexpectedly whiledriving. »

111

Operation

● Closing the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear could cause seriousinjury to you and to third parties. Make surethat no one is in the path of the rear lid.● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate intothe interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-soning!● Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-low children to play inside or next to it, es-pecially if the rear lid is open. Childrencould enter the luggage compartment,close the rear lid and become trapped. Alocked vehicle can reach extremely highand low temperatures, depending on thetime of year, thus causing serious injuries,illness or even death.

CAUTIONBefore opening or closing the rear lid, makesure that there is enough space to open orclose it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in agarage.

NoteBefore closing the rear lid, make sure thatthe key has not been left inside the luggagecompartment.

Opening and closing the rear lid

Fig. 105 Rear lid: opening from outside.

The rear lid opening system operates electri-cally. It is activated by using the insignia sha-ped handle on the rear lid ››› Fig. 105.

To lock or unlock the rear lid, press the or buttons of the vehicle key.

A warning appears on the instrument paneldisplay if the rear lid is open or not properlyclosed.* An audible warning is also given if itis opened while the vehicle is moving fasterthan 6 km/h (4 mph)*.

Opening and closing● To open: pull on the handle and lift it up››› Fig. 105. The rear lid opens automatically.● Close: hold the gate by one of the handlesfitted to the inner lining and close it by movingit downwards.

If the doors are locked, the rear lid is alsolocked.

112

Opening and closing

Emergency unlocking of the rear lid

Fig. 106 Detail of the luggage compartment:emergency unlocking (LEON model).

Fig. 107 Detail of the luggage compartment:emergency unlocking (Leon Sportourer STmodel).

The rear lid can be unlocked from inside inthe event of an emergency (e.g. no battery).

There is a groove in the luggage compart-ment allowing access to the emergencyopening mechanism.

Unlocking the rear lid from inside the lug-gage compartmentValid for the model: Leon● Insert the key blade into the slot and movethe key in the direction of the arrow until thelock unlocks ››› Fig. 106.

Valid for the model: Leon Sportourer ST● Remove the cover by inserting a screwdriv-er into the slot ››› Fig. 107 .● Insert the key into the opening and turn it inthe direction of the arrow until the latch is re-leased ››› Fig. 107 .

113

Operation

Window controls

Electrically opening and closingthe windows

Fig. 108 Detail of the driver's door: windowcontrols.

● Opening the window: press the button .● Closing the window: pull the button .

Buttons on the driver doorWindow on the front left doorWindow on the front right doorWindow on the rear left doorWindow on the rear right doorSafety switch for deactivating the electricwindow buttons in the rear doors.

1

2

3

4

5

The front and rear electric windows can beoperated by using the controls on the driverdoor. The other doors each have a switch fortheir own window.

Always close the windows fully if you park thevehicle or leave it unattended ››› .

You can use the electric windows for approx.10 minutes after switching off the ignition ifneither the driver door nor the front passen-ger door has been opened and the key hasnot been removed from the ignition.

Safety switch *The safety control ››› Fig. 108 5 on the driverdoor can be used to disable the electric win-dow buttons on the rear doors.

Safety switch not pressed: buttons on reardoors are activated.

Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doorsare deactivated.

The safety control symbol lights up in yel-low if the buttons on the rear doors areswitched off.

Convenience open/close functionThe electric windows can be opened orclosed from outside using the vehicle key:

Convenience opening:● Press and hold the button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows and the sun-roof* have reached the desired position.● OR: First unlock the vehicle using the but-ton on the remote control key and then keepthe key in the driver door lock until all the win-dows and the sunroof* have reached the re-quired position.

Convenience closing:● Press and hold button on the remotecontrol key until all the windows and the sun-roof* are closed ››› .● OR: Keep the key in the driver door in the"lock" position until all the windows and thesunroof* are closed.

During convenience closing, first the windowsand then the sliding sunroof will be closed.

Different settings can be changed using theEasy Connect system. Select: key >Vehicle > SETTINGS > Opening andclosing > Window operations > Con-venience opening.

One-touch opening and closingThe one-touch automatic opening and clos-ing is used to open or close the windowscompletely. It will not be necessary to holdthe button of the corresponding electric win-dow.

114

Opening and closing

For the automatic raising function: pull thebutton for the corresponding window up-wards until it reaches the second position.

For the automatic lowering function: pullthe button for the corresponding window up-wards until it reaches the second position.

Stop automatic movement: push or pull onthe button of the corresponding window.

Resetting one-touch opening and closingThe one-touch opening and closing functionis not active after the vehicle battery hasbeen disconnected or is flat and will have tobe reset.

● Pull the button of the corresponding win-dow and hold it for one second in this posi-tion.● Release the button and pull upwards andhold again. The one-touch function is nowready for operation.

The automatic one-touch electric windowscan be reinitialised individually or several at atime.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 109.● Incorrect use of the electric windows canresult in injury.

● Never close the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear, to do otherwisecould cause serious injury to you and thirdparties. Make sure that no one is in the pathof a window.● If the ignition is switched on, the electricequipment could be activated with risk ofinjury, for example, in the electric windows.● The doors can be locked using the re-mote control key. This could become anobstacle for assistance in an emergencysituation.● Therefore always take the key with youwhen you leave the vehicle.● The electric windows will work until theignition has been switched off and one ofthe front doors has been opened.● If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-able the rear electric windows. Make surethat they have been disabled.● For safety reasons, you should only usethe remote control open and close func-tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on thewindows when pressing the button to closethem. The windows stop moving as soon asthe button is released.

NoteIf the window is not able to close because itis stiff or because of an obstruction, thewindow will automatically open again››› page 115. If this happens, check why the

window could not be closed before at-tempting to close it again.

Window anti-trap function

The roll-back function reduces the risk of in-jury when the electric windows close.

● If a window is obstructed when closing au-tomatically, the window stops at this pointand lowers immediately ››› .● Next, check why the window does not closebefore attempting it again.● If you try within the following 10 secondsand the window closes again with difficulty orthere is an obstruction, the automatic closingwill stop working for 10 seconds.● If the window is still obstructed, the windowwill stop at this point.● If there is no obvious reason why the win-dow cannot be closed, try to close it again bypulling the tab within ten seconds. The win-dow closes with maximum force. The roll-back function is now deactivated.● If more than 10 seconds pass, the windowwill open fully when you operate one of thebuttons. One-touch closing is reactivated. »

115

Operation

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Elec-trically opening and closing the windowson page 115.● The roll-back function does not preventfingers or other parts of the body gettingpinched against the window frame. Risk ofaccident.

Sunroof*

Introduction

The sunroof only works when the ignition isswitched on. Once the ignition has beenswitched off, you can still open or close thesunroof for a few minutes provided the driverdoor and the front passenger door are notopened.

WARNINGIf the sunroof is used negligently or withoutpaying due attention, it can cause seriousinjury.● Open or close the sunroof and the sunblind only when no one is in their path ofmovement.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting.● Never leave a child or any other personwho may need help in the vehicle, espe-

cially if they have access to the vehiclekey. If using they key unattended, theycould lock the vehicle, start the engine,switch on the ignition and activate the sun-roof.● After switching off, it is still possible toopen or close the sunroof during a shortspace of time provided that neither thedriver nor passenger door is opened.

CAUTION● To prevent damage, during winter tem-peratures remove any ice or snow thatmight be on the car roof before opening thesunroof or adjusting the tilt position.● Before leaving the vehicle or in case ofrainfall, always close the sunroof. With thesunroof open or in a tilted position, watercan enter the interior and can cause con-siderable damage to the electrical system.As a result, other damage can occur in thevehicle.

Note● Leaves and other loose objects that ac-cumulate on the sunroof rails should beregularly cleaned away either by hand orwith a vacuum.● If the sunroof does not work correctly, theanti-trap function will not work either. Con-tact a specialised workshop.

Opening and closing the sunroof

Fig. 109 On the interior roof lining: turn theswitch to open and close.

Fig. 110 On the interior roof lining: press theswitch and pull on it to raise and lower the roof.

To open the sunroof, the switch must be in theposition 1 .

● Open: turn the switch to position ››› Fig. 1093 .

116

Opening and closing

● Comfort position: turn the switch to position››› Fig. 109 2 .● Close: turn the switch to position››› Fig. 109 1 .● Lift: Push the switch to position ››› Fig. 1104 . For an intermediate position, hold down

the switch until you reach the desired posi-tion.● Lower: pull the switch to position ››› Fig. 1105 . For an intermediate position, hold down

the switch until you reach the desired posi-tion.

Opening and closing the sunshadeblind

3 Valid for vehicles: with sun blinds

Fig. 111 On the interior roof lining: sunshadeblind buttons.

Once the ignition has been switched off, youcan still open or close the sun blind for a fewminutes provided the driver door and thefront passenger door are not opened.

Opening completely (automatic function)● Press button ››› Fig. 111 1 briefly.

Closing completely (automatic function)● Press the button 2 briefly.

Stop automatic operation● Press button 1 or button 2 briefly.

To set the intermediate position● Press button 1 or button 2 until the cor-rect position is set.

Convenience function to open orclose the sunroof*

Fig. 112 Door handle: sensor surface.

The sunroof can be opened and closed withthe convenience function, just like the win-dows.

Using the door lock*● Hold the key in the door lock of the driverdoor in either the unlocking or locking posi-tion to open or close the roof in the tilted po-sition. Release the key to interrupt this func-tion.

Using the remote control● Keep the locking or unlocking button press-ed to open or close the roof. If you release thebutton is the opening or closing will stop. »

117

Operation

Using the Keyless Access* system (onlyclosing)● Press and hold the locking sensor surface››› Fig. 112 (arrow) on the door handle toclose the sunroof. If you release the sensorsurface, the closing movement stops.

Anti-trap function of the panoramicsunroof and sunshade

The anti-trap function can reduce the risk ofinjury when closing the sunroof and the sunblind ››› . If the sunroof or sun blind encoun-ter resistance or an obstacle when closing,they reopen immediately.

● Check why the sunroof or sun blind do notclose.● Try to close the sunroof or sun blind again.● If the sunroof or sun blind cannot be closeddue to an obstacle or some resistance, itstops at the corresponding position and thenopens. For automatic closing, a new closingattempt might take place.● If the sunroof or sun blind is still unable toclose, close it without the anti-trap function.

Closing the sunroof or sun blind withoutthe anti-trap function● The switch ››› Fig. 109 should be in the“closed” position 1 .

● Glass roof: within approx. 5 seconds of theactivation of the anti-trap function, keep thecontrol pulled backwards ››› Fig. 110 (arrow5 ) until the roof is completely closed.● Sunshade blind: within approximately5 seconds of having activated the anti-trapfunction, press button ››› Fig. 111 2 until thesun blind closes completely.● The sunroof or sun blind close withoutthe anti-trap function intervening!● If the sunroof or sun blind will still not close,visit a specialised workshop.

WARNINGClosing the sunroof or sun blind without theanti-trap function can cause serious inju-ries.● Always be careful when closing the sun-roof and sun blind.● No person should ever remain in the wayof the sunroof or sun blind, especially whenclosing without the anti-trap function.● The anti-trap function does not preventfingers or other parts of the body from be-coming trapped against the roof frame andinjuries occurring.

Lights

Vehicle lighting

Related video

Fig. 113 Lights and visi-bility

Control lamps

It lights up

Driving light totally or partially faulty.

Fault in the cornering light system.

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 120.

It lights up

Left or right turn signal.The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turnsignal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on ››› page 124.

118

Lights

It lights up

Trailer turn signals

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 121.

It lights up

The Light Assist system is on ››› page 122.

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Con-trol and warning lamps on page 90.

Headlight switch

Fig. 114 Dash panel: lights control.

● Turn the switch to the required position››› Fig. 114.

Sym-bol

Ignition switch-ed off

Ignition isswitched on

Fog lights, dippedbeam and sidelights off.

Light off or day-time driving lighton.

The “Cominghome” and “Leavinghome” guide lightsmay be switchedon.

Automatic controlof dipped beamand daytime run-ning light.

Side light on.

Dipped beam head-light off

Dipped beamswitched on.

The driver is personally responsible for thecorrect use and adjustment of the lights in allsituations.

Automatic dipped beam headlight control*The automatic dipped beam control is merelyintended as an aid and is not able to recog-nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , thevehicle lights and the instrument panel andswitch lighting switch on automatically in thefollowing situations ››› :

● The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex-ample, when driving through a tunnel. Theyswitch off when adequate lighting is detec-ted.● The rain sensor detects rain and activatesthe wipers. They switch off when the wipershave not been activated for a few minutes.

Daytime running lightsThe daytime running lights consist of individu-al lights, integrated in the front headlights.These lights come on when the daytime run-ning lights are switched on. On vehiclesequipped with LED tail lights, the rear sidelight is switched on as well ››› .

The daytime running lights turn on every timethe ignition is switched on, if the switch is in »

119

Operation

position or , according to the level of ex-terior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a lightsensor automatically switches dipped beamon and off (including the control and instru-ment lighting) or the daytime running lightsdepending on the level of exterior lighting.

Motorway light*The motorway light is available on vehiclesequipped with full-LED lights.

The function is connected and disconnectedvia the corresponding Easy Connect systemmenu.

● Activation: when going above 110 km/h(68 mph) for more than 30 seconds, the dip-ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv-er's visibility distance.● Deactivation: when reducing the speed ofthe vehicle below 100 km/h (62 mph), thedipped beam immediately returns to its nor-mal position.

Audible warnings to advise the driver thatthe lights have not been switched offIf the key is not in the ignition and the driverdoor is open, an audible warning signal isheard in the following cases: this will remindyou to turn the light off.

● When the parking light is on ››› page 121.

● When the light switch is in position or .

WARNINGIf the road is not well lit and other roadusers cannot see the vehicle well enoughor at all, accidents may occur.● The automatic dipped beam control( ) only switches on the dipped beamwhen there are changes in light conditionsbut not, for example, when it is foggy.

WARNINGThe side lights or daytime running lightsare not bright enough to illuminate the roadahead and to ensure that other road usersare able to see you.● Always use your dipped beam headlights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.● Never drive with daytime lights if the roadis not well lit due to weather or lightingconditions.● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,when activating the daytime running lightthe rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-cle which does not have the rear lights onmay not be visible to other drivers in thedarkness, in the case of heavy rain or inconditions of poor visibility.

WARNINGIf the headlights are set too high and notused correctly, there is a risk of dazzling or

distracting other road users. This could re-sult in a serious accident.● Always make sure that the headlights arecorrectly adjusted.

Note● The legal requirements regarding the useof vehicle lights in each country must beobserved.● The dipped beam headlights will onlywork with the ignition on. The side lightscome on automatically when the ignition isturned off.

Fog lights

Fig. 115 Dash panel: lights control.

The warning lamps or also show, on thelight switch or instrument panel, when thefront fog lights are on.

120

Lights

● Turning on the front fog lights* : pull thelight switch out to its first click position››› Fig. 115 1 , from positions , or .● Turning on the rear fog light : pull thelight switch fully out 2 from position , or.● To switch off the fog lights, press the lightswitch or turn it to position .

NoteThe rear fog light can dazzle drivers behindyou. You should use the rear fog light onlywhen visibility is very poor.

Turn signal and main beam lever

Fig. 116 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn light or right-hand parking light(ignition switched off).

1

Left turn light or left-hand parking light(ignition switched off).Main beam on: control lamp lit up onthe instrument panel.Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con-trol lamp lit up.

Push the lever all the way down to turn off thecorresponding function.

Convenience turn signalsWhen the ignition is switched on, move thelever as far as possible upwards or down-wards and release the lever. The turn signalwill flash three times.

The convenience turn signal can be activatedand deactivated in the Easy Connect systemusing the key > Vehicle > SET-TINGS > Lighting > Light assistance> Convenience turn signal ››› page 92.

In vehicles that do not have the correspond-ing menu, this function can be deactivated ina specialised workshop.

Parking light The parking lights will only work with the igni-tion off. If said light is on, an audible warningwill sound while the driver door is open.

● Switch the ignition off.● Move the turn signal lever up or down.

2

3

4

When the parking light is switched on, thefront side light and the tail light on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle turn on.

Parking light on both sides● Switch the ignition off.● Place the light switch in position .● Lock the vehicle from the outside.

In doing so, only the side lights of both head-lights light up, and additionally the tail lightswill do so partially.

WARNINGImproper or lack of use of the turn signals,or forgetting to deactivate them can con-fuse other road users. This could result in aserious accident.● Always give warning when you are goingto change lane, overtake or when turning,activating the turn signal in good time.● As soon as you have finished changinglane, overtaking or turning, switch the turnsignal off.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the headlights may causeaccidents and serious injury, as the mainbeam may distract or dazzle other drivers. »

121

Operation

Note● If the turn signal lever is left on after thekey has been taken out of the ignition lock,an acoustic signal sounds when the driverdoor is opened. This is intended as a re-minder to switch off the turn signal, unlessyou wish to leave the parking light on.● If the convenience turn signals are oper-ating (three flashes) and the other conven-ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-tive part stops flashing and only flashesonce in the new part selected.● The turn signal only works when the igni-tion is switched on. The hazard warninglights also work when the ignition is switch-ed off.● If a trailer turn signal malfunctions, thecontrol lamp will stop flashing (trailer turnsignals) and the vehicle turn signal willflash at double speed.● The main beam headlights can only beswitched on if the dipped beam headlightsare already on.● In cold or damp weather conditions, theheadlights, tail lights and turn signals maymist up inside temporarily. This is normaland in no way effects the useful life of thevehicle lighting system.● The parking light does not activate auto-matically if the left- or right-hand turn sig-nal is left on and the ignition is disconnec-ted.

Main beam assist (Light Assist)*

The main beam assist acts within the limits ofthe system and depending on environmentaland traffic conditions. Once switched on, thesystem is activated as of a speed of about 60km/h (37 mph) and is deactivated belowabout 30 km/h (18 mph) ››› .

When the system is activated and the cam-era detects other vehicles that may be daz-zled, the main beam is automatically switch-ed off. Otherwise, the main beam is automati-cally switched on.

The main beam assist generally detects illu-minated areas and deactivates the mainbeam when passing through a town, for ex-ample.

Switching the main beam assist on ● Turn on the ignition and turn the light switchto the position .● From the base position, press the turn signaland main beam headlights lever forwards››› Fig. 116 3 When the lamp is displayedon the instrument panel display, the mainbeam assist is switched on.

Switching the main beam assist off ● Turn the light switch to a position other than ››› page 119.

● OR: while the main beam is on, pull the turnsignal light and main beam headlights leverforwards ››› Fig. 116 4 .● OR: push the turn signal and main beamheadlight lever forwards to manually turn onthe main beam. The main beam assist willthen be deactivated.

MalfunctionsThe following conditions may prevent themain beam headlight control from turning offthe headlights in time or from turning off alto-gether:

● In poorly lit towns with highly reflectivesigns.● Other insufficiently lit road users (such aspedestrians or cyclists).● On tight bends and steep slopes (bumps)and when oncoming vehicles are partiallyobscured.● When the drivers of other oncoming vehi-cles (such as a truck) can see over a guardrail in the centre of the road.● If the camera is damaged or the powersupply is cut off.● In fog, snow and heavy rain.● With dust and sand turbulence.● With loose gravel in the field of vision of thecamera.

122

Lights

● When the field of vision of the camera ismisted up, dirty or covered by stickers, snow,ice, etc.

WARNINGThe convenience features of the mainbeam assist should not encourage the tak-ing of risks. The system is not a replace-ment for driver concentration.● You are always in control of the mainbeam and adapting it to the light, visibilityand traffic conditions.● It is possible that the main beam head-light control does not recognise all drivingsituations and is limited under certain cir-cumstances.● When the field of vision of the camera isdirty, covered or damaged, operation ofthe main beam control may be affected.This also applies when changes are madeto the vehicle lighting system, for example,if additional headlights are installed.

CAUTIONTo avoid affecting the operation of the sys-tem, take the following points into consid-eration:● Clean the field of vision of the cameraregularly and make sure it is free of snowand ice.● Do not cover the field of vision of thecamera.

● Check that the windscreen is not dam-aged in the area of the field of vision of thecamera.

NoteMain beam and headlight flasher can beturned on and off manually at any time withthe turn signal and main beam lever››› page 121.

Fog lights with cornering light func-tion*

The cornering light function is an additionalfunction to the dipped beam headlights toimprove lighting of the side of the road whentaking a sharp turn at low speed.

The cornering light function works when thedipped beam headlights are already on andit is activated when driving at speeds belowapproximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

● If the steering wheel is turned or the turnsignal is switched on, the front fog light grad-ually turns on. After the turn, the corneringlight function is gradually switched off.● When engaging reverse gear, both front foglights turn on.

“Coming home” and “Leav-ing home” function

The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”function lights up the vehicle’s immediateproximity when getting into and out of it in thedark. When switched on, the front positionand dipped beam lights, tail lights and li-cense plate light come on.

The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a photo-sensor.

In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain-ment system you can adjust the duration ofthe light switch-off delay, and activate anddeactivate the function.

Activating the “Coming Home” functionFor vehicles with light and rain sensors.● Switch off the engine and remove the keyfrom the ignition with the light switch in posi-tion ››› page 119.● The automatic “Coming Home” function isonly active when the light sensor detectsdarkness.

For vehicles without light and rain sensors.● Switch the ignition off.● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-mately 1 second.

When the driver door is opened, the “ComingHome” lighting comes on. The delay in »

123

Operation

switching off the headlights is counted fromwhen the last door or boot hatch is closed.

The “Coming Home” lighting turns off inthe following cases:● Automatically, once the headlight turn offdelay has elapsed.● Automatically, when a vehicle door or therear lid is still open 30 seconds after startingthe engine.● When the rotary light switch is turned to po-sition ››› page 119.● With the ignition is switched on.

Activating the “Leaving Home” function● Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.● The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-ted when the light switch is in position and the light sensor detects darkness.

The “Leaving Home” lighting switches offin the following cases:● Automatically, when the “Leaving Home”delay period ends (default 30 sec).● When the vehicle is locked using the remotecontrol.● When the light switch is turned to position .● With the ignition is switched on.

NoteTo activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav-ing Home” function, the rotary light switchmust be in position and the light sensormust detect darkness.

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 117 Dash panel: hazard warning lightsswitch

The hazard warning lights are used to drawthe attention of other road users to your vehi-cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance frommoving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazardwarning lights ››› .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear;for an automatic gearbox, move the gearlever to P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when thehazard warning lights are switched on. Thetwo turn signal turn signal lamps and theturn signal lamp in the switch will flash atthe same time. The simultaneous hazardwarning lights also work when the ignition isswitched off.

Emergency braking warningIf the vehicle brakes suddenly and continu-ously at a speed of more than 80 km/h (50mph), the brake light flashes several times persecond to warn the vehicles driving behind. Ifyou continue braking, the hazard warninglights will come on automatically when thevehicle comes to a standstill. They switch offautomatically when the vehicle starts tomove again.

WARNING● The risk of an accident increases if yourvehicle breaks down. Always use the haz-ard warning lights and a warning triangle to

124

Lights

draw the attention of other road users toyour stationary vehicle.● Due to the high temperatures that thecatalytic converter can reach, never parkin an area where the catalytic convertercould come into contact with highly inflam-mable materials, for example dry grass orspilt petrol. This could start a fire.

Note● The battery will run down if the hazardwarning lights are left on for a long time,even if the ignition is switched off.● The use of the hazard warning lights de-scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-utory requirements.

Light range control

Fig. 118 Next to the steering wheel: headlightrange control.

The headlight range control ››› Fig. 118 ismodified according to the value of the head-light beam and the vehicle load status. Thisoffers the driver optimum visibility and theheadlights do not dazzle oncoming drivers››› .

The headlights can only be adjusted whenthe dipped beam is switched on.

To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 118:

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Two front occupants, luggage compart-ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment full. With trailer and minimumdrawbar load.

Driver only, luggage compartment fullWith trailer and maximum drawbar load.

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to thoseshown in the table, it is possible to select intermediarypositions.

OR:Through the Easy Connect system, with thebutton > Vehicle > SETTINGS >Lighting > Light assistance > Head-light height adjustment ››› page 92).

Setting 0 Two front occupants, luggage com-partment empty

Setting 1 All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment empty

Setting 2All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment full. With trailer and minimumdrawbar load.

Setting 3Driver only, luggage compartment fullDriving with trailer and maximumdrawbar load.

Dynamic headlight range controlThe control is not mounted in vehicles withdynamic headlight range control. The head-light range is automatically adjusted accord-ing to the vehicle load status when they areswitched on.

WARNINGHeavy objects in the vehicle may meanthat the headlights dazzle and distract oth-er drivers. This could result in a serious ac-cident.● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle loadstatus so that it does not blind other driv-ers.

125

Operation

Driving abroad

The light beam of the dipped beam lights isasymmetric: the side of the road on whichyou are driving is lit more intensely.

When a car that is manufactured in a countrythat drives on the right travels to a countrythat drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-mally necessary to cover part of the head-light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad-justment of the headlights to avoid dazzlingother drivers.

In such cases, the regulations specify certainlight values that must be complied with fordesignated points of the light distribution. Thisis known as “Tourist light”.

The light distribution of the halogen and full-LED headlights allows the specific “touristlight” values to be met without the need forstickers or changes in the settings.

Note“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. Ifyou are planning a long stay in a countrythat drives on the other side, you shouldtake the vehicle to an Authorised TechnicalService to change the headlights.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel,displays and switches

Depending on the model, the lighting of theinstrument panel and switched can be adjus-ted in the Easy Connect system, using thebutton > Vehicle > SETTINGS››› page 92.

With the ignition on and without light activa-tion, the analogue instrument panel lightingremains activated in daytime light conditions.The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di-minishes. In some cases, e.g. when drivingthrough a tunnel without the function ac-tive, the instrument panel lighting may evenswitch off. The objective of this function is toprovide the driver with a visual indication thathe or she should activate the dipped beam.

If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in-strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), thefollowing message will appear Turn on thelights on the instrument panel.

Interior and reading lights

Fig. 119 Detail of roof lining: front lighting ofthe passenger compartment.

Knob Function

Turns off the interior lights.

Turning the interior lights on or off.

Central po-sition

or

a)

The interior lights come on automati-cally when you unlock the vehicle,open a door or remove the key fromthe ignition.The light goes out a few seconds afterclosing all the doors, when locking thevehicle or connecting the ignition.

/ Turning the reading light on and off

a) Depending on version.

126

Visibility

Glove compartment and luggage com-partment lighting*When opening and closing the glove com-partment on the front passenger side and therear lid, the respective light will automaticallyswitch on and off.

Footwell lighting*The lights in the footwell area below the dash(driver and front passenger sides) will switchon when the doors are opened and will de-crease in intensity while driving. This intensitysetting can be changed through the infotain-ment system menu (key > Vehicle> SETTINGS > lIGHTING > Interiorlighting ››› page 92).

Ambient light*The ambient light lights up the area of thecentre console and the footwell area and,depending on the version, the front door pan-els as well.

The brightness of the ambient light can beadjusted through the Easy Connect menu, ascan colour, in versions with lighting on thefront door panel (button > Vehicle> SETTINGS > Ambient lighting››› page 92).

Note● Depending on the features fitted in thevehicle, LEDs can be used for the following

interior lights: front vanity mirror light, rearvanity mirror light, footwell light, sun blindand glove compartment light.● The reading lights switch off when the ve-hicle is locked using a key or after severalminutes if the key is removed from the igni-tion. This prevents the battery from dis-charging.

Visibility

Windscreen wiper and rearwindow wiper systems

Window washer lever

Fig. 120 Operating the windscreen wiper andrear wiper.


0 Windscreen wipers off.

1

Wiper intervals.Use control ››› Fig. 120 A to set the in-terval (vehicles without rain sensor), orthe sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe. »

127

Operation


4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.Hold the lever down for more time to in-crease the wipe frequency.

5

Windscreen washer. The windscreenwasher function is activated by push-ing the lever towards the steeringwheel, and the wipers operate simulta-neously.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-er will wipe the window approximatelyevery six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is acti-vated by pressing the lever, and therear wiper starts simultaneously.

WARNINGIn cold conditions you should not use thewash/wipe system unless you havewarmed the windscreen with the heatingand ventilation system. The windscreenwasher fluid could otherwise freeze on thewindscreen and obscure your view of theroad.

CAUTIONIf the ignition is switched off with the wind-screen wipers active, they complete theirwipe before returning to the rest position.When switching the ignition back on, thewindscreen wiper will continue to operateat the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-

er obstacles on the windscreen may dam-age the wiper and the windscreen wipermotor.● If necessary, remove snow and ice fromthe windscreen wipers before starting yourjourney.● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip-ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-icer spray for this operation.● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers ifthe windscreen is dry. Cleaning with thewindscreen wipers while dry can causedamage.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position ››› page 46.

Note● The windscreen and window wipers onlyfunction when the ignition is switched onand the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, areclosed.● The interval wipe speed varies accordingto the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicleis moving, the more often the windscreen iscleaned.● The rear wiper is automatically switchedon when the windscreen wiper is on and thecar is in reverse gear.

Wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ-ent situations● If the vehicle is stopped, the activated posi-tion temporarily moves to the previous posi-tion.● The air conditioner comes on for approxi-mately 30 seconds in air recirculation modewhen the windscreen washer is activated, to prevent the smell of the windscreen wash-er fluid entering the inside the vehicle.● When wiping at intervals, the intervals varyaccording to the speed. The higher the vehi-cle speed the shorter the intervals.

Heated windscreen washer jets*The heating only thaws the frozen jets, it doesnot thaw the water in the washer hoses.When the ignition is switched on the heatedwindscreen washer jets automatically adjustthe heat depending on the ambient tempera-ture.

Headlight washer system*The headlight washer cleans the glass of theheadlights and only works when the dippedbeam headlights are on. After switching onthe ignition, the headlights are also washedwhen the automatic wiper is activated for thefirst time and then every fifth time.

128

Visibility

Regularly clean dirt that has become encrus-ted on the headlights, e.g., remains of insects.

To ensure the headlight washers work cor-rectly in winter, clean away any snow thatmay be present on the jet covers located onthe bumper. If necessary, remove ice with ananti-ice spray.

Note● The wiper will try to wipe away any ob-stacles that are on the windscreen. Thewiper will stop moving if the obstacleblocks its path. Remove the obstacle andswitch the wiper back on again.● If you stop the vehicle with the wind-screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto-matically change to a lower positionspeed. The set speed will be resumed whenthe vehicle pulls away.● The windscreen will be wiped again ap-proximately 5 seconds after the wind-screen washer has been activated, provi-ded the vehicle is moving (“drip” function).If you activate the wipers less than 3 sec-onds after the “drip” function, a new washsequence will begin without performing thelast wipe. For the “drip” function to workagain, you have to turn the ignition off andthen on again.

Rain sensor*

Fig. 121 Wiper lever: adjust the rain sensor A.

Fig. 122 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of thewindscreen wiper intervals, depending on theamount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of the rainsensor can be adjusted manually. Manualwipe ››› page 127.

Move the lever to the required position››› Fig. 121:

Rain sensor off.Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-sary.Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor– Set control to the right: high sensitivity.– Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and thenback on, the rain sensor stays on and startsoperating again when the windscreen wipersare in position 1 and the vehicle is travellingat more than 16 km/h (10 mph).

Modified behaviour of the rain sensorPossible causes of faults and mistaken read-ings on the sensitive surface ››› Fig. 122 of therain sensor include:

● Damaged wipers: a film of water on thedamaged blades may lengthen the activa-tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-sult in a fast and continuous wipe.● Insects: insects on the sensor may triggerthe windscreen wiper.● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread onthe roads may cause an excessively longwipe when the windscreen is almost dry.● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotuseffect) or traces of detergent (car wash) mayreduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor ormake it react more slowly, later or not at all. »

0

1

A

129

Operation

● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stonewill trigger a single wipe cycle with the rainsensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-duction in the sensitive surface area andadapts accordingly. The behaviour of thesensor will vary with the size of the damagecaused by the stone.

WARNINGThe rain sensor may not detect enough rainto switch on the wipers.● If necessary, switch on the wipers man-ually when water on the windscreen ob-structs visibility.

Note● Clean the sensitive surface of the rainsensor regularly and check the blades fordamage ››› Fig. 122 (arrow).● To remove wax and coatings, we recom-mend a window cleaner containing alco-hol.● Do not put stickers on the windscreen infront of the rain sensor*. This may causesensor disruption or faults.

Mirrors

Interior mirror anti-dazzle function

Rear view mirror with automatic anti-daz-zle function*The anti-dazzle function is activated everytime the ignition is switched on.

When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, theinterior rear vision mirror will darken auto-matically according to the amount of light itreceives. The anti-dazzle function is cancel-led if reverse gear is engaged.

WARNINGIn the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-id may leak. This could cause irritation tothe skin, eyes and respiratory organs. If youcome into contact with this liquid, it mustbe rinsed with large quantities of water. Ifnecessary, get medial help.

CAUTIONIn the event that an automatic anti-dazzlerear vision mirror breaks, an electrolyte flu-id may leak. This liquid attacks plastic sur-faces. Clean it with a wet sponge as soonas possible.

Note● If the light incident in the interior rear vi-sion mirror is obstructed (e.g. with the sunblind*), the anti-dazzle rear vision mirrorwith automatic setting will not operate per-fectly.● When the interior lights are on or reversegear engaged, the mirrors do not darkenwith automatic adjustment for anti-dazzleposition.● If you have to stick any type of sticker onthe windscreen, do not do so in front of thesensors. Doing so could prevent the anti-dazzle function from working well or evenfrom working at all.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

Fig. 123 Detail of the driver's door: control forthe exterior mirror.

130

Visibility

Turn the control to the corresponding posi-tion:

Turning the knob to the desired position,adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L,left) and the passenger side (R, right) tothe direction desired.Depending on the equipment fitted onthe vehicle, the mirrors may be heatedaccording to the outside temperature.Folding in mirrors.

Synchronized regulation of the exteriormirrorsSelect in the Easy Connect system menu > Vehicle > Settings > Mir-rors and wipers > Mirrors if the exteriormirrors have to be adjusted in a synchronisedmanner.

● Turn the knob to position L1).● Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror. Theright exterior mirror will be adjusted at thesame time (synchronised).● If necessary, correct the right-hand rear-view mirror: rotate the control to position R1).

L/R

Tilt function for front passenger exteriormirror*When parking backwards, and in order to beable to see the kerb, the passenger side mir-ror can be automatically tilted towards thepassenger to provide a better view of thekerb. The control must be in the position R1)

for this feature to be operational.

The mirror returns to its original position assoon as you drive forward at over 15 km/h(9 mph) or switch off the ignition. It also re-turns to its original position if the position ofthe control is adjusted.

Storing the rear view mirror settings for thetilt function● Switch the ignition on.● Using the Easy Connect system, button > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Mir-rors and wipers > Mirrors select Lowerwhile reversing ››› page 92.● Select the R1) position on the control.● Select reverse gear.● Adjust the front passenger exterior mirror sothat you can see, for example, the kerb areawell.● Release the reverse gear.

● The adjusted position for the rear view mir-ror is stored.

Fold the rearview mirrors when locking thevehicle*Using the Easy Connect system, button > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Mir-rors and wipers > Mirrors can be se-lected to fold the outside mirrors when park-ing and to lock the vehicle ››› page 92.

When the vehicle is locked with the remotecontrol, the exterior mirrors are retracted au-tomatically. When the vehicle is opened withthe remote control, the exterior mirrors aredeployed automatically.

WARNINGConvex or wide-angle* exterior mirrorsgive a larger field of vision. However, theymake objects look smaller and furtheraway than they really are. If you use thesemirrors to estimate the distance to vehiclesbehind you when changing lane, you couldmisjudge the distance. Risk of accident!

WARNINGFold and unfold the exterior mirror, takingcare to avoid injuries. »

1) Regulation in right-hand drive vehicles is sym-metrical.

131

Operation

● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirrorwhen there is no-one in the way of the mir-ror.● When moving the mirror, take care not totrap fingers between the mirror and themirror bracket.

CAUTION● If one of the mirror housings is knockedout of position (e.g. when parking), the mir-rors must first be fully retracted with theelectric control. Do not readjust the mirrorhousing by hand, as this will interfere withthe mirror adjuster function.● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to re-tract the exterior mirrors to prevent themfrom being damaged. Electrically retracta-ble exterior mirrors must not be folded in orout by hand. Always use the electricalpower control.

Note● If the electrical adjustment should fail tooperate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge ofthe mirror glass.● The fold-in function on the exterior mir-rors will not activate at speeds over40 km/h (25 mph).

Sun protection

Sun blind

Fig. 124 Sun visor

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-senger sun visors● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-screen.● The sun visor can be pulled out of itsmounting and turned towards the door››› Fig. 124 1 .● Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-tudinally backwards.

There is a vanity mirror on the sun visor, with acover. When the cover is opened 2 a lightcomes on.

The lamp goes out when the vanity mirrorcover is closed or the sun visor is pushedback up.

WARNINGFolded sun blinds can reduce visibility.● Always store sun blinds and visors in theirhousing when not in use.

NoteThe light above the sun visor automaticallyswitches off after a few minutes in certainconditions. This prevents the battery fromdischarging.

Sunshade blind*3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 125 Rear window: sunshade blind.

Rear lid sunshade blind*– Pull out the blind and hook it into the hooks

in the centre of the top of the door frame››› Fig. 125.

132

Seats and headrests

Seats and headrests

Adjusting seats

Related video


Manual adjustment of the frontseats

Fig. 127 Front seats: manual seat settings.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever andmove the seat. The seat must engagewhen the lever is released!Raise/lower: pull the lever up or pushdown (several times if necessary) from itshome position.Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel.Lumbar support: move the lever until therequired position is achieved.

WARNINGIncorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac-cidents and severe injuries.● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle isstationary, as the seats could move unex-pectedly while the vehicle is in motion andyou could lose control of the vehicle. Fur-thermore, an incorrect position is adoptedwhen adjusting the seat.● Adjust the height, position and inclinationof the front seats only when their move-ment area is empty.● Make sure there are no objects in thatarea.● Make sure that the movement and lock-ing areas of the seats are clean.

WARNINGIncorrectly using upholstery and seat cov-ers might cause an accidental activation ofthe electrical seat adjustment system andmake it move unexpectedly while driving.

1

2

3

4

This might cause loss of control of the vehi-cle and thus accidents or injuries. More-over, the electrical components of the frontseats might be damaged.● Never attach or place seat upholstery orcovers on the electric controls.● Never use upholstery or seat covers thathave not been explicitly authorised for theseats of the vehicle.

Electric driver's seat adjustment*

Fig. 128 Driver's seat: electric seat settings.

Adjust the lumbar support: press the but-ton according to the desired position.Seat forwards/backwards: press the but-ton forwards/backwards. »

A

B

133

Operation

Seat up/down: Press the rear part of thebutton up/down. To adjust the angle ofthe seat cushion, press the front of thebutton up/down.Backrest further upright/further reclined:press the button forwards/backwards.

WARNING● If the electric front seats are used negli-gently or without paying due attention, itcan cause serious injury.● The front seats can also be electricallyadjusted when the ignition is switched off.Never leave a child or any other personwho may need help in the vehicle.● In the event of an emergency, electricaladjustment can be stopped by pressingany control.

CAUTIONTo avoid damaging the electrical compo-nents of the front seats, please refrain fromkneeling on the seat or applying sharppressure at a single point to the seat cush-ion and backrest.

Note● It may not be possible to electrically ad-just the seat if the vehicle battery is verylow.

C

● If the engine is started while the seats arebeing electrically adjusted, the adjustmentwill stop.

Headrest

Introduction

The possibilities for the adjustment and disas-sembly of the headrests are described below.Always make sure that the seats are correctlyadjusted ››› page 12.

All seats are equipped with a headrest. Thecentral rear headrest is only intended for thecentral seat of the rear bench. Therefore, donot install it on any other seat.

Correct adjustment of headrestAdjust the headrest so that its upper edge isat the same level as the top of your head andunder no circumstances below eye level.Keep the back of your head always as closeto the headrest as possible.

Adjusting the headrest for short peopleLower the headrest completely, even if yourhead is below its upper edge. In the lowestposition, there may be a small distance be-tween the headrest and the backrest.

Adjusting the headrest for tall peoplePush the headrest up as far as it will go.

WARNINGIf travelling with the headrests removed orimproperly adjusted, the risk of severe orfatal injuries in the event of accidents andsudden braking or manoeuvres increases.● Always travel with the headrest correctlyinstalled and adjusted.● To decrease the risk of cervical injuries inthe event of an accident, adjust the head-rest correctly based on your height, alwaysmaking sure that its upper edge is at thesame height as the top of the head, butnever below eye level. Keep the back ofyour head always as close to the headrestas possible and centred.● Never adjust the headrest while the vehi-cle is in motion.● Under no circumstances should the rearpassengers travel while the headrests arein the non-use position.

CAUTIONWhen assembling and disassembling theheadrests, do not let them meet the top lin-ing of the vehicle, the back rest of the frontseat or other parts of the vehicles. If not,this could damage the vehicle.

134

Seats and headrests

Adjusting the headrests

Fig. 129 Front seat: headrest adjustment.

Fig. 130 Rear headrest: headrest adjustment.

Adjusting the height of the headrests● Grab the sides of the headrests with bothhands and push upwards to the desired posi-tion. To lower it, repeat the same action,pressing the 1 ››› Fig. 129 ››› Fig. 130 buttonon the side.

● The headrest must lock correctly in one po-sition.

Removing and fitting the headrests

Fig. 131 Rear headrest: removal.

Removing and fitting the front headrests● Move the headrest upwards until it arrivesto the top.● Press the side button ››› Fig. 129 1 and re-move the headrest.● To refit, insert the headrest into the holes inthe backrest, pushing it down until it engages.

Removing the rear headrestsTo remove the headrest, the correspondingbackrest must be partially folded forward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 136.

● Move the headrest upwards until it arrivesto the top.● Press button ››› Fig. 131 1 , while simultane-ously pressing on the security hole 2 with aflat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide,and remove the headrest.● Move the backrest until it engages properly››› in Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest on page 136.

Fitting the rear headrestsTo mount the external headrests, the corre-sponding backrest must be partially foldedforward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 136.● Insert the headrest bars into the guides untilthey perceptibly engage. It should not bepossible to remove the headrest from thebackrest.● Move the backrest until it engages properly››› in Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest on page 136.

WARNINGRemove the rear headrests only when it isnecessary to fit a child seat. After removinga child seat, refit the headrest immediately.

135

Operation

Seat functions

Folding the backrest of the frontpassenger seat*

Fig. 132 Front passenger seat: lever to folddown the backrest.

The front passenger seat can be folded downto increase the storage space.

● Pull lever 1 ››› Fig. 132 and push the seatbackrest 2 until the backrest is horizontal.

WARNINGWhen the front passenger seat is foldeddown it cannot be occupied.

Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest

Fig. 133 Rear seat: clip to hold the seatbelt inplace.

Fig. 134 Rear seat: folding the backrest.

The rear seat backrest is split and each partbe lowered separately to extend the luggagecompartment.

Folding the backrest forwards● Place the side seat belts in the trim clip››› Fig. 133.● Completely lower the rear headrests››› page 135.● Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 134 1 for-wards and at the same time fold the backrestdown. The rear seat backrest is not engagedwhen the red marking of the button 2 is visi-ble.

Converting the table to a seat● Raise and lock in the back rest. The redmarking on the tab 2 should no longer bevisible when the backrest is properly secured.

WARNINGSerious injuries can be caused if the rearseat backrest is lowered or lifted withoutdue care and attention.● Never lower or lift the rear seat backrestwhile driving.● Do no trap or damage the seat belt whenraising the rear seat backrest.● When lowering or lifting the rear seatbackrest, keep your hands, fingers, feetand other body parts out of its path.● For the rear seat belts to offer the neces-sary protection all the parts of the rearbackrest must be properly engaged. This isparticularly important in the case of thecentre rear seat. If someone is seated in a

136

Seats and headrests

seat whose backrest is not properly engag-ed they will fly forward, along with thebackrest, during an accident or a suddendriving or braking manoeuvre.● A red signal on the button 2 warns thatthe backrest is not engaged. Always checkthat the red marking is not visible when thebackrest is in the upright position.● When the rear seat backrest is lowered oris not properly engaged nobody else cantravel in the corresponding seats (not evena child).

CAUTIONSerious damage can be caused to the vehi-cle and other objects if the rear seat back-rest is lowered or lifted without due careand attention.● Before lowering the rear seat backrest,always adjust the front seats so that nei-ther the headrests nor the cushions of therear backrest can hit them.

Lowering the rear seat backrestwith the remote release lever

3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 135 In the luggage compartment: leversfor remote release of the left part 1 and rightpart 2 of the rear seat backrest.

● Lower the headrest properly.● Open the rear lid.● Pull the remote release lever of the left part››› Fig. 135 1 or right part 2 of the backrestin the direction of the arrow. The releasedpart of the rear seat backrest is folded auto-matically down and forwards.● If this occurs, close the rear lid.

The rear seat backrest is not engaged whenthe red marking of the button ››› Fig. 134 2 isvisible.

Front centre armrest

Fig. 136 Front centre armrest

To lift the central armrest, lift it upwards in thedirection of the arrow ››› Fig. 136, setting bysetting.

To lower the armrest, first lift it to its highestposition. Then lower it down.

To move the armrest horizontally, move it for-ward ››› Fig. 136 or backward as much aspossible in the direction of the correspondingarrow.

WARNINGThe front centre armrest may obstruct thedriver's arm movements, which couldcause an accident and severe injuries.● Keep the storage compartments of thecentre armrest closed at all times while thevehicle is in motion. »

137

Operation

● Never let anyone sit on the centre arm-rest while the vehicle is in motion, not evena child. This position is incorrect and maycause severe injuries.

Transport and practicalequipment

Storing objects

Positioning the luggage and cargo

It is possible to carry objects and luggage inthe vehicle, in a trailer ››› page 308 and onthe roof ››› page 149. When doing so, pleaseconsider all legal provisions.

Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely● Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenlyas possible.● Always place equipment and heavy ob-jects in the boot ››› .● Position heavy items in the boot as far for-ward as possible.● Take into account the maximum authorisedweight per axle, as well as the maximum au-thorised weight of the vehicle ››› page 372.● Secure the objects to the fastening rings ofthe boot using appropriate chains or belts››› page 144.● Also place small objects safely.● Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take intoaccount the pressure adhesive of the tyres››› page 348.

● In vehicles equipped with tyre control sys-tem, adjust to the new load status if necessa-ry ››› page 352.

WARNINGLoose or unsecured objects can cause seri-ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvringor braking or in case of an accident. Partic-ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy-ing and they are thrown across the inside ofthe vehicle. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Place all objects inside the vehicle safe-ly.● Secure all objects, little and large.● Place the objects in the cabin in such away that they can never reach the airbagdeployment areas while the vehicle is inmotion.● Keep the storage compartments closedat all times while the vehicle is in motion.● Place the objects in such a way that theynever force any occupant of the vehicle tosit in an incorrect position.● When transporting objects that take up aseat, never let anyone use that seat.● Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objectsloose in open storage compartment of thevehicle, on the cover behind the rear seator on the dashboard.● Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objectsfrom the fabrics and bags inside the cabinand store them safely.

138

Transport and practical equipment

WARNINGThe transport of heavy object changes ve-hicle handling and increases braking dis-tance. Heavy objects that are not properlyplaced or secured may cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries.● Never put too much load in the vehicle.Both the carrying capacity as well as thedistribution of the load in the vehicle haveeffects on the driving behaviour and brak-ing ability.● When transporting heavy objects, thedriving behaviour of the vehicle varies dueto the displacement of the centre of gravi-ty.● Always distribute the load in the vehicleas evenly and horizontally as possible.● Always place heavy objects in the bootbefore the rear axle and as far away from itas possible.● Objects in the luggage compartmentthat are unsecured could move suddenlyand modify the handling of the vehicle.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Brake earlier than usual.

WARNING● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-pecially when the rear lid is open. Childrencould climb into the luggage compartment,closing the door behind them; they will betrapped and run the risk of death.● Close and lock all the doors and the rearlid when you leave the vehicle. Before youlock the vehicle, make sure that there areno adults or children in the vehicle.

CAUTIONElectrical wires or, depending on the fea-tures, the antenna embedded into the rearwindows could be damaged, even irrepara-bly, if they are in contact with objects.

NoteStraps for securing the load to the fasten-ing rings are commercially available fromaccessory shops.

Luggage compartment

Luggage compartment shelf3 Valid for: Leon

Fig. 137 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing and fitting the shelf.

Fig. 138 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing and fitting the shelf. »

139

Operation

Removing● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 137 B fromtheir hooks A .● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup-ports ››› Fig. 138 by pulling it upwards andthen take it out.

If necessary, the rear shelf can be stored un-der the luggage compartment double floor››› page 141.

Fitting● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re-cess” fits onto the axis of the supports››› Fig. 138 and press down until it engages.● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 137 B to the rear lid.

WARNINGAnimals, loose or unsecured or objects car-ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-jury in case of sudden manoeuvring orbraking or in case of an accident.● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob-jects or in bags on the rear shelf.● Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTION● Before closing the rear lid, ensure thatthe rear shelf is correctly fitted.● An overloaded luggage compartmentcould mean that the rear shelf is not cor-

rectly seated and it may be bent or dam-aged.● If the luggage compartment is overloa-ded, remove the tray.

NoteEnsure that, when placing items of clothingon the luggage compartment cover, rearvisibility is not reduced.

Retractable shelf3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 139 In the luggage compartment: unroll-ing and rolling up the shelf.

140


Fig. 140 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing the shelf.

Extending the shelf● Pull evenly on the rear shelf using its handle››› Fig. 139 1 in a backwards direction un-til it audibly clicks into place.

Retracting the rear shelf● Press on the handle of the rear shelf in thedirection of the arrow to release it ››› Fig. 139.

The shelf will automatically move towardsthe end and will retract completely.

Removing the shelf● Press the rear shelf support ››› Fig. 140 1in the direction of the arrow.● Remove the rear shelf through the supportand upwards.

● The rear shelf can be stored under the lug-gage compartment variable floor when thelatter is in the top position (except for vehiclesequipped with natural gas engine CNG)››› page 142.

Fitting the shelf● Place the rear shelf in the housing providedin the left side cover.● Engage the support of the rear shelf››› Fig. 140 1 in the right housing.● Check that the support ››› Fig. 140 1 isproperly engaged.

WARNINGAnimals, loose or unsecured or objects car-ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-jury in case of sudden manoeuvring orbraking or in case of an accident.● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob-jects or in bags on the rear shelf.● Never carry animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTIONTo retract the rear shelf, press on its handlein a downwards only direction; if you pressit upwards it may lead to its axles breaking.

Store the rear shelf3 Valid for: Leon

Fig. 141 In the luggage compartment: coversfor storing the rear shelf.

Fig. 142 In the luggage compartment: fittingthe rear shelf.

Depending on the equipment, once the lug-gage compartment shelf has been removed,it can be stored under the boot floor.

● Remove the left and right covers ››› Fig. 141. »141

Operation

● Place the rear shelf in the correspondinghousing ››› Fig. 142.● Put the left and right covers in their originalposition.

Storing the retractable shelf3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 143 In the luggage compartment: spaceto store the retractable shelf.

Fig. 144 In the luggage compartment: spaceto store the retractable shelf.

The retractable shelf can be stored under theluggage compartment variable floor.

● Remove the left and right covers ››› Fig. 143A .● Press the head of the retractable shelf inthe direction of the arrow until it engages inits housing ››› Fig. 144.● Put the left and right covers in their originalposition.

Variable luggage compartmentfloor

3 Valid for: Leon

Fig. 145 Luggage compartment: adjustablefloor

Fig. 146 Luggage compartment: adjustablefloor

Variable floor in the tilted positionWhen the variable floor is tilted you can ac-cess the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

142


● Lift the variable floor using handle››› Fig. 145 1 , pull it back and push the back-rest of the rear seat until the movable part ofthe floor is resting on it.● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 146(arrows).

Variable luggage compartmentfloor


Fig. 147 Variable luggage compartment floor:positions.

Fig. 148 Variable luggage compartment floor:inclined slots.

Variable floor in high position● To move from the low position to the highposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 147 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .● Move the floor forward over the supports asfar as the rear seat backrest and then lowerthe floor with the handle 1 .

Variable floor in low position● To move from the high position to the lowposition, lift the floor using the handle››› Fig. 147 1 , and pull it back until the frontof the floor has fully passed the supports 2 .● Now let the front part fall to the floor andslide the floor forwards as far as the rear seatbackrest; lower the floor at the same timewith the handle 1 .

Variable floor in the tilted positionWhen the variable floor is tilted you can ac-cess the spare wheel or anti-puncture kitarea.

● Lift the variable floor using handle››› Fig. 147 1 and pull it back until the front ofthe floor has fully passed the tilted grooves››› Fig. 148 3 .● Run the floor through these grooves withthe help of handle 1 as the rear seat back-rest and until the floor is resting in thegrooves.

WARNING● Always secure objects, even when theluggage compartment floor is properly lif-ted.● Only objects that do not protrude morethan 2/3 the height of the floor may be car-ried between the rear seat and the raisedluggage compartment floor.● Only objects that do not weigh than ap-proximately 7.5 kg may be carried betweenthe rear seat and the raised luggage com-partment floor.

CAUTION● The maximum weight that can be loadedon the luggage compartment variable floorin the upper position is 100 kg (Leon model)and 125 kg (Leon Sportourer ST model). »

143

Operation

● Do not let the luggage compartmentfloor fall when closing it. Always carefullyguide it downwards in a controlled manner.Otherwise, the lining and the floor of theluggage compartment could be damaged.

Fastening rings*

Fig. 149 In the luggage compartment: fasten-ing rings (Leon model except versions withspare wheel and CNG).

Fig. 150 In the luggage compartment: fasten-ing rings (Leon Sportourer ST model).

There are fastening rings ››› Fig. 149,››› Fig. 150 on the front and rear of the bootto secure loose objects and luggage with fas-tening belts and cords.

WARNINGIf unsuitable or damaged belts or retainingstraps are used, they could break in theevent of braking or an accident. Objectscould then be launched across the passen-ger compartment and cause serious or fa-tal injuries.● Always use belts or straps that are suita-ble and in good condition.● Tighten the belts and straps in a crosslayout over the load placed on the bootfloor and secure them to the fastening ringssafely.

● Never exceed the maximum tensile loadof the fastening rings when securing ob-jects.● Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-jects, the upper edge of the load is higherthan the fastening rings.● Depending on the features, take into ac-count the instruction panels on the boot onhow to place the load.● Never secure a child seat to the fasteningrings.

Note● The maximum tensile load that the fas-tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.● Belts, straps and securing systems for theappropriate load can be obtained fromspecialised dealerships. SEAT recom-mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

144


Net bag*

Fig. 151 In the luggage compartment: net baghooked up at floor level (Leon Sportourer STmodel).

Fig. 152 In the luggage compartment: rings 1and hooks 2 for securing the net bag (LeonSportourer ST model).

The luggage compartment prevents lightluggage from moving. The net bag has a zipand can be used to store small objects.

The net bag can be hooked up to the lug-gage compartment in different ways.

Hooking the net bag into the luggagecompartment floorIf necessary, the front eyes must be unfoldedfirst ››› page 144.

● Secure the net hooks to the fastening rings1 and 2 ››› Fig. 151 ››› . The bag zip

should be facing upwards.

Hook the net bag next to the load thresh-old● Secure the short net hooks to the fasteningrings ››› Fig. 152 1 ››› . The bag zip shouldbe facing upwards.● Secure the straps in the bag hooks 2 .

Removing the net bagThe hooked up net bag is taut ››› .

● Release the net bag from the fasteningrings.● Store the net bag in the luggage compart-ment.

WARNINGTo secure the elastic net bag on the fasten-ing rings of the boot it must be stretchedout. Once hooked up it is taut. If the net bagis hooked up or unhooked incorrectly thehooks could cause injuries.

● Always secure the bag hooks properly sothat they do not suddenly release from thefastening rings when hooking or unhookingthem.● On hooking or unhooking them, protectyour eyes and face in case the hooks arereleased suddenly.● Always hook up the net bag hooks in thedescribed order. If a hook is unfastenedsuddenly, this may cause injuries.

145

Operation

Bag hooks

Fig. 153 In the luggage compartment: baghooks (Leon model).

Fig. 154 In the luggage compartment: baghooks (Leon Sportourer ST model).

There may be hooks for hanging bags onboth sides of the luggage compartment››› Fig. 153.

The retaining hooks have been designed tosecure light shopping bags.

WARNINGNever use the hooks to hang luggage orother objects. In case of sudden braking oran accident, the hooks could break.

Trapdoor for transporting long ob-jects*

Fig. 155 In the rear seat backrest: opening thetrapdoor.

Fig. 156 In the luggage compartment: open-ing the trapdoor.

On the rear seat, behind the central armrest,there is a tailboard for transporting long itemsin the interior, such as skis.

To avoid soiling the interior, dirty objectsshould be wrapped (e.g. in a blanket) beforethey are inserted through the tailboard.

When the armrest is down, nobody may trav-el in the centre rear seat.

Opening the tailboard● Lower the centre armrest.● Pull the release lever in the direction of thearrow and push the tailboard cover››› Fig. 155 1 down and forwards.● Open the rear lid.● Insert the long objects through the gapfrom the luggage compartment.● Secure the objects with the seat belt.

146


● Close the rear lid.

Closing the tailboard● Lift the tailboard cover until it engages. Thered mark on the luggage compartment sideshould never be visible.● Close the rear lid.● Lift the centre armrest if necessary.

NoteThe tailboard can also be opened from theluggage compartment. To do so, press therelease lever down, in the direction of thearrow, and the cover upwards ››› Fig. 156.

Net partition*

Using the separation net behindthe rear seat*


Fig. 157 In the luggage compartment: secur-ing the net partition.

Fig. 158 In the luggage compartment: remov-ing the net partition.

Pulling out and securing the net partition● Pull up handle ››› Fig. 157 2 to remove thenet from the casing 4 .● Hook in the net partition on the right side 3(magnified image).● Hook in the net partition in the left sidehousing 1 pulling the rod.

The net partition is properly assembled whenthe T-shaped ends are firmly secured in thecorresponding housings 3 and 1 .

Retracting the net partition● Unhook the rod from the housings 3 and

1 .● Roll up the net into the casing 4 lowering itwith your hand.

Removing the net partition● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.● Press the left or right release catch››› Fig. 158 in the direction of the arrow 1 .● Remove the casing from the support in thedirection of the arrow ››› Fig. 158 2 .

Fitting the net partition● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.● Fit the casing in the right and left supports.● Press the casing into the left and right sup-ports in the opposite direction to the arrow››› Fig. 158 2 until it engages. »

147

Operation

The red markings on the release buttonsshould no longer be visible.

WARNING● Always secure objects, even when thenet partition is properly assembled.● There should be nobody behind the as-sembled partition when the vehicle is mov-ing.

CAUTIONIncorrect handling of the net partitioncould cause damage.● Do not “release” the net partition whenlowering it, as the net and other vehicleparts could be damaged. Roll down the netpartition by hand.

Using the net partition while therear seat backs are folded down


Fig. 159 Assembling the net partition in therear seat backrests.

Fig. 160 In the luggage compartment: net par-tition hooked in place with the rear seat backsfolded down.

Fitting the net partition● Fold the rear seat backrests forward.● Remove the net partition from the side sup-ports.● Place the net casing in the rail slots in thedirection of the arrows ››› Fig. 159 1 .● Push the casing towards the left side of thevehicle in the direction of arrow ››› Fig. 159 2and as far as it will go.● Check that the net is secure.

Pulling out and securing the net partition● Pull up handle ››› Fig. 160 2 to remove thenet from the casing ››› Fig. 160 4 .● Hook in the net partition on the right side››› Fig. 160 3 (magnified image).● Hook in the net partition in the left sidehousing ››› Fig. 160 1 pulling the rod.

The net partition is properly assembled whenthe T-shaped ends are firmly secured in thecorresponding housings ››› Fig. 160 3 and

1 .

Retracting the net partition● Remove the rod from the housings in thetrims of the roof side members.● Roll up the net into the casing ››› Fig. 1604 lowering it with your hand.

148


Removing the net partition● Pull the net casing out approximately 5 cmin the opposite direction to the arrow››› Fig. 159 2 .● Remove the casing from the rails by pullingin the opposite direction to the arrows››› Fig. 159 1 .● Lift the rear seat backrests.

WARNINGDuring a sudden driving or braking ma-noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob-jects could be flung though the interior andcause serious or fatal injuries.● Always secure objects, even when thenet partition is properly assembled.● There should be nobody behind the as-sembled partition when the vehicle is mov-ing.

WARNINGThe rear seat backrests should only be lif-ted again once the net partition has beendisassembled.

CAUTIONIncorrect handling of the net partitioncould cause damage.● Do not “release” the net partition whenlowering it, as the net and other vehicle

parts could be damaged. Roll down the netpartition by hand.

Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-mise aerodynamics. For this reason, crossbars or conventional roof carrier systemscannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in theroof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-proved cross bars and roof carrier systemscan be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roofcarrier system should be disassembled.● When they are not used.● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or retaining straps that are suitableand in a good condition.● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have anegative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-tre of gravity and driving performance.

● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.

CAUTION● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri-er system before entering a car wash.● Vehicle height is increased by the instal-lation of cross bars or a roof carrier systemand the load secured on them. For this pur-pose, check that your vehicle's height doesnot surpass the headspace limit, for exam-ple, for underpasses or for entering garagedoors.● Cross bars, the roof carrier system andthe load secured on them should not inter-fere with the roof aerial or hamper the pathof the panoramic sun roof and the rear lid.● On opening the rear lid make sure that itdoes not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environmentWhen cross bars and a roof carrier systemare installed, the increased air resistancemeans that the vehicle uses more fuel.

149

Operation

Securing the crossbars and theroof carrier system

Fig. 161 Leon: attachment points for the roofrailings for the roof carrier system.

Fig. 162 Leon Sportourer ST: attachmentpoints for the roof railings for the roof carriersystem.

The crossbars are the basis of a series ofspecial roof carrier systems. For safety rea-sons, special fixtures must be used to safelytransport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boards

or boats on the roof. Suitable accessoriescan be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roofcarrier system properly. Always take the as-sembly instructions that come with the cross-bars and the roof carrier system in questioninto account.

LEON modelThe front and rear attachment points 1 and

2 are only visible when the doors are open››› Fig. 161.

Leon Sportourer ST modelThe crossbars are assembled on the roof rail-ings. The attachment points can be seen onbottom of the roof railing ››› Fig. 162.

WARNINGIncorrect attachment and use of the cross-bars and the roof carrier system may causethe whole system to detach from the roofand cause an accident and injuries.● Always take the manufacturer assemblyinstructions into account.● Check threaded joints and attachmentstravelling and if necessary tighten them af-ter you have travelled a short distance.When making long trips, check the threa-ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.● Do not modify or repair the crossbars orroof carrier system.

NoteAlways read the assembly instructions thatcome with the crossbars and the roof carri-er system carefully and keep them in thevehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbarsand the roof carrier system are properly in-stalled ››› .

Maximum authorised cargo on the roofThe maximum authorised cargo permitted tobe transport on the roof is 75 kg. This figurecomes from the combined weight of the roofcarrier, the cross bars and the load itself onthe roof ››› .

Always check the weight of the roof carriersystem, the cross bars and the weight of theload to be transported and weigh them ifnecessary. Never exceed the maximum au-thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrierwith a lower weight rating, you will not beable to carry the maximum authorised roofload. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-mum weight limit for the roof carrier which islisted in the fitting instructions.

150


Distributing a loadDistribute loads uniformly and secure themcorrectly ››› .

Check attachmentsOnce the cross bars and roof carrier systemhave been installed, check the bolted con-nections and attachments after a short jour-ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-cy.

WARNING● Never exceed the maximum authorisedload on the roof and on the axles or the ve-hicle's maximum authorised weight.● Never exceed the load capacity of thecross bars and the roof carrier system,even if the maximum authorised roof loadhas not been reached.● Secure heavy items as far forward aspossible and distribute the vehicle loaduniformly.

WARNINGIf the load is loose or not secured, it couldfall from the roof carrier system or causeaccidents and injuries.● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.

Storage compartment

Introduction

Use the storage compartments only for smallor light items.

WARNINGObjects inside the vehicle that are not se-cured could be thrown across the cabin inthe event of sudden braking or manoeu-vring. This may cause severe injuries aswell as loss of control of the vehicle.● Do not carry animals or sharp, hard orheavy items in open storage compartmentsof the vehicle, on the dashboard or on thecover behind the rear seats, or insidepieces of clothing or bags inside the vehi-cle.● Keep the storage compartments closedat all times while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell could diffi-cult the use of the pedals. This may causeloss of control of the vehicle and increasesthe risk of severe injuries.● Make sure that nothing prevents you fromusing the pedals at any time.● Always secure the mat in the footwell.● Never place other mats or other type ofcovers on the factory-fitted mat.

● Ensure that no objects can fall into thedriver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-tion.● When the vehicle is stationary, removethe objects in the footwell.

WARNINGIf you leave lighters inside the vehicle, theymight be damaged or lit inadvertently. Thiscould lead to severe burns and damage tothe vehicle.● Before moving a seat, make sure thereare no lighters in the moving part area ofthe vehicle.● Before closing a storage compartment,make sure there are no lighters in the clos-ing area.● Never leave a lighter inside a storagecompartment or any other surface of thevehicle as it could ignite due to the hightemperatures on such surfaces, particular-ly during the summer.

CAUTION● Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob-jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heatand cold could damage them or renderthem useless.● Objects made from transparent materi-als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses,magnifying glasses or transparent suction »

151

Operation

pads stuck to the windows can concentratesunlight and damage the vehicle.

Glove compartment

Fig. 163 On the front passenger side: glovecompartment.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, theCD player and SD card reader are located inthe glove compartment. Its operation is de-scribed in ››› page 197.

Opening and closing the glove compart-mentOpening: Pull the handle ››› Fig. 163 andopen the glove compartment.

Closing: Press the glove compartment up-wards.

WARNINGIf the glove compartment is left open, therisk of causing severe injuries in the eventof an accident, sudden braking or manoeu-vring increases.● Always keep the glove compartmentclosed while the vehicle is in motion.

Folding table3 Valid for: Leon Sportourer ST

Fig. 164 Front left seat: folding table.

Depending on the model version, at the rearof the front seats, there may be “plane-style”folding tables for passengers in the rearseats.

● To open the tray, open it up in the directionof the arrow ››› Fig. 164.● To fold it back, push the folding table downas far as possible.

A drink holder is built into the folding table››› page 153.

WARNINGThe table must always be closed whiledriving to decrease the risk of injuries.

Object holder under front seats*

Fig. 165 Storage compartment under the frontseats.

Opening: Press the tab on the drawer handleand take the drawer out.

Closing: Push the drawer under the seat untilit engages.

WARNINGIf the drawer is left open, it could preventuse of the pedals. This may cause seriousaccidents and injuries.

152


● Always keep the drawer closed while thevehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the drawerand any objects in it could fall into the driv-er's footwell and obstruct the pedals.

CAUTIONThe drawer can contain 1.5 kg at most.

Other object holders

You will find more object holders, compart-ments and supports in other parts of the vehi-cle:

● In the centre console.● In the top of the glove compartment in vehi-cles that do not have a CD reader. The loadof the compartment should not exceed 1.2 kg.● Below the instrument panel in the driver'sarea there is a removable box for access tofuses and relays. The load of the compart-ment should not exceed 0.2 kg.● Other storage compartments are found inthe rear seat, to the left and the right of theseats.

There are hangers on the struts of the doorsand the rear.

WARNINGHanging clothes may decrease the driver'svisibility, which may cause serious acci-dents and injuries.● Always hang clothes from hangers insuch a way that the driver's visibility is notaffected.● Only hang light pieces of clothing fromthe hangers of the vehicle. Never leaveheavy, hard or sharp objects in the pocketsof these pieces of clothing.● Do not use clothes hangers to hang upthe clothing, as this could interfere with thefunction of the head-protection airbags.

Drink holder

Introduction

The storage compartments of the driver andpassenger doors contain a bottle holder.

The folding tables of the front seats containmore bottle holders ››› page 152.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the bottle holders maycause injuries.● Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.In the event of sudden braking or an acci-

dent while driving, hot beverages in thebottle holders might spill and cause burns.● Ensure that no bottles or other objectsare dropped in the driver footwell whiledriving, as they could get under the pedalsand obstruct their working.● Never place glasses, food or other heavyobjects drink holders. These heavy objectsmay be thrown across the cabin in theevent of an accident and cause serious in-juries.

WARNINGClosed bottles may explode inside the ve-hicle due to cold or heat.● Never leave closed bottles in the vehicleif the temperature inside is very high or verylow.

CAUTIONDo not leave open cans in the drink holderswhen the vehicle is in motion. If the drink isspilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it maydamage the vehicle and its electrical sys-tem.

NoteThe inside elements of the drink holderscan be extracted for cleaning.

153

Operation

Front drink holders

Fig. 166 Centre console: front drinks holders.

There are two cup holders in the centre con-sole ››› Fig. 166.

Power sockets

Vehicle power sockets

Fig. 167 Centre console: 12 volt front powersocket Rear of the centre console: USB sock-ets.

Fig. 168 Detail of the side lining of the luggagecompartment: 12 volt power socket (valid onlyfor the Leon Sportourer ST model).

● Lift the power socket cover ››› Fig. 167,››› Fig. 168.● Insert the plug of the electrical applianceinto the power socket.

Electrical equipment can be connected tothe 12 volt power socket.

The appliances connected to each powersocket must not exceed a power rating of 120Watt.

USB power socketsDepending on the equipment and the coun-try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-tions exclusively for charging or as a powersocket.

These USB ports are located at the rear ofthe console, between the front seats

154

Air conditioning

››› Fig. 167 . These connectors can work ata maximum power of up to 10.5 W per port.

They are not intended for file playback.

WARNINGThe power socket works only when the igni-tion is on. Improper use may cause seriousinjury or even fire. Children should there-fore not be left in the vehicle unattended ifthe button is also left behind. Otherwisethere is a possibility that they may be in-jured.

CAUTIONAlways use the correct type of plugs toavoid damaging the sockets.

Note● The use of electrical appliances with theengine switched off will cause a batterydischarge.● Should the connected appliance over-heat, immediately switch it off and discon-nect it from the socket.● Before switching the ignition on or off, un-plug the appliances from the USB ports toprotect them from any damage caused byfluctuations in voltage.

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation andcooling

Related video

Fig. 169 Air conditioning

Introduction

Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, sever-al systems may have been fitted:

● The heating and ventilation heats andventilates the passenger compartment. Itcannot cool.● The manual air conditioning and the Cli-matronic cool and dehumidify the air. Theyoperate most effectively with the windowsand the sunroof closed.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-propriate button. Press the button again toswitch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicatethat the respective function of a control hasbeen switched on.

Dust and pollen filterThe dust and pollen filter with its activatedcharcoal cartridge serves as a barrieragainst impurities in the air taken into the ve-hicle interior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changedregularly so that air conditioner performanceis not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due touse in areas with very high levels of air pollu-tion, the filter must be changed more fre-quently than stated in the Service Schedule.

WARNINGReduced visibility through the windows in-creases the risk of serious accidents.● Always ensure that all windows are freeof ice and snow, and that they are not fog-ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-erything outside.● Only drive when you have good visibility.● Always ensure that you use the air condi-tioning, heater or rear window heating tomaintain good visibility to the outside.● Never leave the air recirculation on for along period of time. If the cooling system isswitched off and air recirculation mode »

155

Operation

switched on, the windows can mist oververy quickly, considerably limiting visibility.● Switch air recirculation mode off when itis not required.

WARNINGStuffy or used air will increase fatigue andreduce driver concentration possibly re-sulting in a serious accident.● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off oruse the air recirculation for long periods oftime; the air in the vehicle interior will notbe refreshed.

CAUTION● To replace the pollen filter, always visit aservice centre.● Switch the climate control or air condi-tioner off if you think it may be broken. Thiswill avoid additional damage. Have the cli-

mate control or air conditioning checkedby a specialised workshop.● Repairs to the climate control or air con-ditioning require specialist knowledge andspecial tools. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT Official Service.

Note● When the cooling system is turned off, aircoming from the outside will not be dried.To prevent fogging of the windows, SEATrecommends leaving the cooling system(compressor) turned on. To do this, pressthe button. The button lamp shouldlight up.● The maximum heat output required to de-frost windows as quickly as possible is onlyavailable when the engine has reached itsnormal running temperature.● Keep the air intake slots in front of thewindscreen free of snow, ice and leaves toensure heating and cooling are not im-paired, and to prevent the windows frommisting over.● The air from the vents flows through thevehicle interior and is extracted by slots in

the luggage compartment designed for thispurpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-structing these slots with any kind of ob-ject.● Do not smoke while air recirculationmode is on, as smoke drawn into the airconditioning system leaves residue on theevaporator, producing a permanent un-pleasant odour.● It is advisable to turn on the air condition-ing at least once a month, to lubricate thesystem gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-crease in the cooling capacity is detected,a Technical Service should be consulted tocheck the system.● When the engine is under extreme strain,switch off the compressor for a moment.

156

Air conditioning

Climatronic* controls

Fig. 170 In the centre console: Climatronic con-trols.

Automatic mode Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan,and air distribution. Automatic mode is disa-bled when the ventilation is modified manual-ly.

Cooling mode Press the button to switch on or off the cool-ing system.

Temperature 1 / 2

The temperature of the right and left sidescan be adjusted separately using the adjust-ers. The selected temperature is shown onthe display of the climate control panel.

Synchronisation: press button so thatsettings on the driver's side apply to the pas-senger side. Use the temperature regulator

for the passenger side to set a different tem-perature.

Blower The power of the fan is automatically adjus-ted.

The fan is also adjusted manually by turningthe control.

Air distribution / / The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort.It can also be manually distributed to the de-sired zone by pressing the correspondingbutton:

The airflow is directed towards the chestThe airflow is directed towards the foot-well.The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

Maximum cooling power The recirculation of air and the cooling sys-tem turn on automatically and air distributionadjusts automatically to the position .

Defrost/demist function The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is di-rected at the windscreen and air recirculationis automatically switched off. To defrost thewindscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidi-fied at temperatures over approximately+3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximumoutput.

Infotainment system: The climate control operation and settingsmenu will be displayed on the Easy Connectsystem screen. »

157

Operation

Heated rear window This only works when the engine is runningand switches off automatically after a maxi-mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glassis demisted. By saving electrical power youcan also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, anautomatic temporary disconnection of thisfunction is possible, coming back on whennormal operating conditions are re-establish-ed.

Air recirculation ››› page 161

Seat heating ››› page 162

Switching offPress button or manually set the fan to .

Manual air conditioning* controls / Heating and fresh air system

Fig. 171 In the centre console: controls for the manual air conditioning; heating and fresh air system controls.

Cooling mode Manual air conditioning: Press the button toswitch on or off the cooling system.

Temperature 1

Turn the control to adjust the temperature.

Heating and fresh air system: The tempera-ture cannot be lower than that of the exterior

air temperature, as this system cannot cool ordehumidify the air.

Blower Turning the regulator 2 sets the fan power.

At level 0 the fan and manual air conditioningare disconnected. Level 6 is the maximum.

Air distribution / / / / Turning regulator 3 distributes the air to thedesired zone:

The airflow is directed towards the chestThe airflow is directed towards the chestand the footwell area.The airflow is directed towards the foot-well.

158

Air conditioning

The airflow is directed towards the wind-screen and the footwell area.

Defrost/demist function Manual air conditioning: When control 3 is inposition the air flow is directed at the wind-screen and air recirculation is disconnectedautomatically or not activated. Increase thefan power to clear the windscreen of con-densation as soon as possible. To dehumidifythe air, the cooling system will automaticallyswitch on.

Maximum cooling power Manual air conditioning: When the control isin position air recirculation and thecooling system are connected automaticallyand the air flow is automatically adjusted toposition .

Heated rear window This only works when the engine is runningand switches off automatically after a maxi-mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glassis demisted. By saving electrical power youcan also save fuel.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, anautomatic temporary disconnection of thisfunction is possible, coming back on whennormal operating conditions are re-establish-ed.

Air recirculation ››› page 161

Seat heating ››› page 162

Operating the Climatronic throughthe Easy Connect system*

3 Valid for vehicles with a Media System Colour.

In the Easy Connect system it is also possibleto perform various adjustments to the Clima-tronic.

Open the air conditioner menu● Press the button on the Climatroniccontrol panel.● OR: press the button in Easy Con-nect. With the rotating switch select the airconditioner menu and open it.

On the touch screen you can see andchange the current settings, for example, thetemperature set for the driver and passengersides, the air distribution and the fan speed.

To switch a function on or off, or to select asubmenu, you must press the correspondingfunction button.

Function button: Function

OFF: Switch off and switch on the Climatronic.

SYNC: Synchronise driver and front passenger tem-peratures.

SETTINGS The air conditioning settings submenu isopened. The following settings can also be adjusted:

Air conditioning profile: Adjust thepower of the fan in AUTO mode. You can choosebetween low, medium and high.

Automatic air recirculation: Switchingautomatic air recirculation on and off››› page 161.

Operating the Climatronic throughthe Easy Connect system*

3 Applies to vehicles with Media System Plus /Navi System / Navi System Plus.

Fig. 172 Easy Connect screen: Climate controlmenu. »

159

Operation

In the Easy Connect system it is also possibleto perform various adjustments to the Clima-tronic.

Open the air conditioner menu● Press the button of the Climatroniccontrol panel.

On the screen you can view and change thecurrent settings, such as, for example, thetemperature set for the driver and passengersides. Temperatures up to +22°C (+72°F) areshown with blue arrows, and temperaturesover +22°C (+72°F) with red arrows.

To switch a function on or off, or to select asubmenu, you must press the correspondingfunction button.


OFF: Climatronic is switched off.

ON: Climatronic is switched on.

SYNC: Synchronise driver and front passenger tem-peratures.

SETTINGS The air conditioning settings submenu isopened. The following settings can also be adjusted:

Automatic supplementary heater: toactivate/deactivate the automatic activation ofthe auxiliary heating for colder countries (onlyfor engines with auxiliary heating). With the op-tion deactivated, depending on the outside tem-perature the heating may need more time thannormal to reach a comfortable temperature.


Air conditioning profile: Adjust thepower of the fan in AUTO mode. You can choosebetween low, medium and high.

Automatic air recirculation: to switchautomatic air recirculation on and off››› page 161.

Back : Close the submenu.

Climate control usage instructions

The interior cooling system only works whenthe engine is running and fan is switched on.

Economic use of the air conditioningWhen the air conditioning is switched on, thecompressor consumes engine power and hasinfluence on fuel consumption.

The air conditioner operates most effectivelywith the windows and the panoramic slidingsunroof closed. However, if the vehicle hasheated up after standing in the sun for sometime, the air inside can be cooled more quick-ly by opening the windows and the panoram-ic sliding sunroof briefly.

Change the temperature unit (Climatron-ic)The temperature display can be changedfrom Celsius to Fahrenheit on the screen of

the Infotainment system using the Infotain-ment button > Settings > Units.

The cooling system cannot be activatedIf the air conditioning system cannot beswitched on, this may be caused by the fol-lowing:

● The engine is not running.● The fan is switched off.● The air conditioner fuse has blown.● The outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +3°C (+38°F).● The air conditioner compressor has beentemporarily switched off because the enginecoolant temperature is too high.● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the airconditioner checked by a specialised work-shop.

Special characteristicsIf the humidity and temperature outside thevehicle are high, condensation can drip offthe evaporator in the cooling system andform a pool underneath the vehicle. This isnormal and does not indicate a leak!

NoteAfter starting the engine, any residual hu-midity in the air conditioner could mist over

160

Air conditioning

the windscreen. Switch on the defrost func-tion as soon as possible to clear the wind-screen of condensation.

Air vents

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents mustremain open.

● Turn the corresponding thumbwheel in therequired direction to open and close the airvents. When the thumbwheel is in the posi-tion, the corresponding air vent is closed.● Change the air direction using the ventila-tion grille lever.

There are other additional, non-adjustable airvents in the dash panel, in the footwells and inthe rear area of the passenger compartment.

NoteFood, medicine and other heat or cold sen-sitive objects should never be placed infront of the air outlets as they may be dam-aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambientair from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high,selecting manual air recirculation mode for ashort period refreshes the vehicle interiormore quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode isswitched off when the button is press-ed or the air distributor turned to .

Switching the manual air recirculationmode on and off● Press the button to connect or discon-nect manual air recirculation.

Climatronic automatic air recirculationmodeWith the automatic air recirculation mode ac-tivated, the entry of fresh air into the cabin in-terior is enabled. If the system detects a highconcentration of hazardous substances in theambient air, air recirculation mode is switchedon automatically. When the level of impuritiesdrops to within a normal range, recirculationmode is switched off.

The system is unable to detect unpleasantsmells.

● Automatic air recirculation is activated anddeactivated in the climate control menu››› page 159.

The air recirculation will not connect auto-matically in versions without humidity sensorand in the following external conditions:

● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C(+38°F).● The cooling system is switched off and theoutside temperature is below +10°C (+50°F).● The cooling system is switched off, the out-side temperature is below +15°C (+59°F) andthe windscreen wipers are switched on.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 156.● If the cooling system is switched off andair recirculation mode switched on, thewindows can mist over very quickly, con-siderably limiting visibility.● Switch air recirculation mode off when itis not required.

CAUTIONDo not smoke when air recirculation isswitched on in vehicles with an air condi-tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on thecooling system vaporiser and on the acti-vated charcoal cartridge of the dust andpollen filter, leading to a permanently un-pleasant smell.

NoteClimatronic: air recirculation mode is acti-vated to prevent exhaust gas or unpleasantodours from entering the vehicle interior »

161

Operation

when it is in reverse and while the automat-ic windscreen wiper is working.

Seat heating*

With the engine on, the seat cushion and theseat backrest can be heated electrically.

Control seat heating● Press buttons or on the control panelto turn on the seat heating as high as possi-ble.● Press buttons or repeatedly to adjust itto the required level.● To turn off the seat heating, press button or repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.

If the ignition is switched on again in approx.the next 10 minutes, the driver seat heating isautomatically turned on to the level set thelast time.

Cases in which the heat seating shouldnot be switched onDo not switch the seat heating on if any of thefollowing conditions are met:

● The seat is not occupied.● The seat has a cover.● A child seat has been installed on the seat.● The seat cushion is wet or damp.

● The outdoor or indoor temperature is great-er than +25°C (77°F).

WARNINGPeople who cannot perceive pain or tem-perature because of medications, paralysisor chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or havea limited perception of these, may sufferburns to the back, buttocks or legs whenusing seat heating.● People with limited pain and temperaturethresholds must never use seat heating.● If an abnormality in the device's temper-ature control is detected, have it checkedby a specialist workshop.

WARNINGIf the fabric of the cushion is wet, this canadversely affect the operation of the seatheating, increasing the risk of burns.● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior tousing the seat heater.● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that iswet or damp.● Do not leave clothing that is wet or dampon the seat.● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the heating elementsof the seat heaters, please do not kneel on

the seat or apply sharp pressure to a singlepoint on the seat cushion or backrest.● Liquids, sharps objects and insulatingmaterials (e.g. covers or child seats) candamage the seat heating.● In the event of smells, switch off the seatheating immediately and have it inspectedby a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe seat heating should remain on onlywhen needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces-sary fuel waste.

162

Introduction

Infotainment System

Introduction

Safety warnings

Safety warnings regarding the Info-tainment system

Only operate the infotainment system and itsvarious functions when the traffic situationreally permits this.

WARNING● Before starting the trip, you should famili-arise yourself with the different infotain-ment system functions.● High audio volume may represent a dan-ger to you and to others. Hearing may beimpaired if the volume is too high, even forshort periods of time.● Changes to the Infotainment system set-tings should be made when the car is stop-ped, or by a passenger.

WARNINGCurrent traffic requires maximum attentionfrom public road users. Distracting the driv-er in any way can lead to an accident andcause injuries. Operating the Infotainment

system can distract your attention from thetraffic.● Always drive carefully and responsibly.● Select volume settings that allow you tohear sounds from outside the vehicle at alltimes (e.g. emergency services sirens andhorns).

WARNINGThe volume level may suddenly changewhen you switch audio source or connect anew audio source.● Lower the base volume before connect-ing or switching audio sources.

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the navigation systemmay differ from the current traffic situation.● Traffic signs and traffic regulations havepriority over the recommendations and dis-plays provided by the navigation system.

WARNINGConnecting, inserting or removing a datamedium while driving can distract your at-tention from the traffic and cause an acci-dent.

WARNINGPlace the connecting cables of externalequipment so that they do not interferewith the driver’s mobility.

WARNINGExternal devices that are loose or not prop-erly secured could move around the pas-senger compartment during a sharp ma-noeuvre or accident.● Avoid placing external devices on thedoors, windscreen, steering wheel, dashpanel, the backs of the seats, on top of ornear the area marked “AIRBAG” or betweenthese areas and the occupants. They couldcause serious injury in an accident, espe-cially when the airbags inflate.

WARNINGThe armrest* must always remain closedduring the journey as it could restrict thedriver’s movements.

WARNINGOpening the CD or DVD player can lead toinjuries from invisible laser radiation.● Have CD or DVD repaired only by a spe-cialist workshop. »

163

Infotainment System

CAUTIONThe Infotainment system can be damagedby the incorrect insertion of a data storagedevice or the insertion of an incompatibledata storage device.● When inserting a data storage device,make sure it is correctly positioned.● Applying force may irreparably damagethe memory card slot locking mechanism.● Only use compatible memory cards.● When inserting and removing CDs andDVDs, always hold them at right angles tothe front of the CD/DVD drive without tilt-ing so as not to scratch them.● If a CD or DVD is inserted while another isalready in the unit or being ejected, theCD/DVD drive may be damaged. Alwayswait until the data medium is completelyejected.

CAUTIONForeign objects stuck to a CD or DVD, or if itis not round, the player may be damaged.● Only clean, standard 12 cm CDs or DVDsshould be used.– Do not affix stickers or other items to

the data medium. Stickers may peel offand damage the drive.

– Do not use printable data media. Prin-ted labels and coverings may peel offand damage the CD/DVD drive.

– Do not insert 8 cm single CDs or irregu-larly shaped CDs or DVDs.

– Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, DualDiscs or Flip Discs, as these are thickerthan normal CDs.

CAUTIONThe vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-aged if the volume is too high or the soundis distorted.

NoteFor the proper functioning of the Infotain-ment system it is important that the dateand time set in the vehicle are correct.

164

Introduction

Overview of the unit

Media System Colour

Fig. 173 Overview of the controls (this configura-tion depends on the version).

Radio Mode (change of band frequency››› page 189Touchscreen ››› page 170Telephone mode* / TP Settings››› page 233Media mode (audio sources)››› page 197

1

2

3

4

Volume and sound settings ››› page 174Vehicle settings ››› page 92,››› page 228Main menu ››› page 169Volume. Off/on ››› page 169Slot for memory cards ››› page 206

5

6

7

8

9

Settings button (search and selection)››› page 169

10

165

Infotainment System

Media System Plus / Navi System / Navi System Plus

Fig. 174 Overview of the controls

Main menu ››› page 169Full Link1) ››› page 179Volume. Off/on ››› page 169Touchscreen ››› page 170

1

2

3

4

1) If your vehicle does not have Full Link*, pressingthe key will bring up a message on the screentelling you that you can activate this function inan Official Service of your choice.

166

Introduction

Main menus

Fig. 175 Menu summary (these menus depend on the equipment in question). »

167

Infotainment System

Radio ››› page 189

RADIO main menu ››› page 189RDS radio data services ››› page 190Digital radio mode ››› page 191Memory buttons ››› page 192Save station logos ››› page 193Select, tune and save stations ››› page 193SCAN automatic playback ››› page 194TP traffic information ››› page 194Setup ››› page 195

Media ››› page 197

Data and file formats ››› page 197Playback order ››› page 200 ››› page 200Change the media source ››› page 203Change track ››› page 203Selecting an album by cover ››› page 204Selecting a track from a track list ››› page 204Data bank view ››› page 205Insert or remove a CD or DVD ››› page 206Memory card ››› page 206External data storage device connected to the USBport ››› page 207External audio source connected to the AUX-IN multi-media socket ››› page 208External audio source with Bluetooth® ››› page 208Images ››› page 213Setup ››› page 214

Navigation ››› page 214

New destination ››› page 217Route options ››› page 218 ››› page 218My destinations ››› page 219Special destinations (POI) ››› page 220View ››› page 221Split screen ››› page 221Map display ››› page 222Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide ››› page 222Predictive navigation ››› page 223Import vCards ››› page 224Navigation with images ››› page 224Road signs ››› page 224Route guidance in Demo mode ››› page 224Setup ››› page 225Offroad mode ››› page 226

Vehicle

Instrument panel ››› page 229Sport ››› page 229Offroad ››› page 230Consumers ››› page 230Driving data ››› page 231Ecotrainer ››› page 231Vehicle status ››› page 232

Traffic ››› page 222

Traffic information (TP) ››› page 194Traffic bulletins and dynamic guide ››› page 222

Telephone ››› page 233

Bluetooth® ››› page 234Tethering ››› page 235Function buttons ››› page 236Enter number ››› page 238Agenda ››› page 239Short messages (SMS) ››› page 240Call list ››› page 241Quick dial keys ››› page 242Setup ››› page 242

Sound ››› page 174

Full Link ››› page 179

Requirements ››› page 180Activation of Full Link ››› page 181Tethering of portable devices ››› page 182MirrorLink® ››› page 183Apple CarPlay™ ››› page 183Android Auto™ ››› page 184Frequently Asked Questions ››› page 185

SEAT Md. Climate ››› page 185

WLAN access point ››› page 186

Images ››› page 213

Control ››› page 159

Setup ››› page 173

168

Introduction

General instructions for use

Introduction


If the setup is changed, this may change thedisplay on the screen and the Infotainmentsystem may behave in a manner different tothat described in this manual.

Note● Just press a button or the screen to usethe infotainment system's functions.● The equipment’s software depends onthe market in question, so it is possible thatnot all of the function buttons or describedfunctions are available. The equipment isnot faulty if a function button is missing.● Due to country-specific legislation, cer-tain functions may not be available on thescreen when the vehicle is travelling abovea certain speed.● Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-cle may provoke noise in the speakers.● Restrictions on the use of devices usingBluetooth® technology may apply in some

countries. For further information, contactthe local authorities.● On vehicles with ParkPilot, the audio vol-ume is automatically lowered when reversegear is selected. The volume can be low-ered in the menu Sound > Volume.

Diagram of the menus

Fig. 177 Main menu

The Infotainment system touchscreen can beused to select the different main menus.

Press the Infotainment button toopen the menus summary .

The display of the touchscreen's main menucan be switched between “grid” and “carou-sel” and vice-versa using the menu Settings> Screen ››› page 173.

NoteDepending on the infotainment version,there may be more icons on the secondpage. In this case, to see the remainingicons press the function button ››› Fig. 177(arrow) or slide your finger horizontallyacross the screen.

Rotary push buttons and infotain-ment buttons

Rotary/push buttonsThe left rotary push button is the on/offbutton if pressed and the volume knob ifturned.

Infotainment buttonsThe buttons on the unit are shown in thismanual with the word “infotainment button”and their function within a rectangle, for ex-ample, the infotainment button .

The Infotainment buttons are used by press-ing them or pressing and holding.

Switching on and off

When the system is turned on, it starts up withthe volume at which it was turned off, as longas it does not exceed the preset maximumstart-up volume. Select Sound > Volume. »

169

Infotainment System

The unit will switch off automatically whenthe key is removed from the ignition or whenthe on/off button is pressed (depending onthe equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In-fotainment system is switched on again, it willswitch off automatically after approximately30 minutes (switch-off delay).

Note● The Infotainment system is a part of thevehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi-cle.● If the battery has been disconnected, theignition must be activated before switchingon the Infotainment system.

Changing the basic volume

Increasing or decreasing the volume ormuting the soundRaise the volume: turn the volume control clockwise or move the left thumbwheel onthe multifunction steering wheel upward .

Lower the volume: turn the volume control clockwise or move the left thumbwheel onthe multifunction steering wheel downward.

Changes in volume are indicated by a vol-ume bar on the screen. The volume can becontrolled using the steering wheel controls.In this case, the changes in volume are dis-

played on the instrument panel by a volumebar.

It is possible to preset certain volume settingsand adjustments. Select > Sound >Volume.

Muting the Infotainment system sound● Turn the volume control anti-clockwiseuntil it displays .● OR: press the left wheel of the multifunctionsteering wheel.

Playback is paused while in Media mode (ex-cept AUX). The screen displays .

Operation of the function buttonsand the instructions on the screen

Fig. 178 View of some of the function buttonson the screen.

Fig. 179 Sound setup menu

Active areas of the touchscreen that call up acertain function are called “function buttons”.These buttons are operated by pressing themon the screen or holding them down.

The function buttons appear in this manual asa “function button” and a button symbolinside a rectangle .

These activate functions or open submenus.The currently selected menu is displayed inthe title bar ››› Fig. 178 A of the submenus.

Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be se-lected.

Increase or decrease the size of the im-ages displayed on the screenThe size of the navigation map image and im-age views can be enlarged or reduced. To dothis, slide 2 fingers across the screen to sepa-rate them or bring them together.

170

Introduction

Overview of screen and function buttons

Display and function buttons: operationand effect

AThe title bar shows the selected menuand other function buttons.

B Press it to open another menu.

C

The scroll bar is shown on the right. Scrollthe bar by sliding your finger vertically onit ››› page 171, Open list entries andsearch in lists.

D

Movable cursor: Move the cursor by slid-ing your finger across the screen.

OR: Press a point on the screen whereyou want the sound to be directed.

Fixed crosshair: Press on the arrows tomove the sound around according to yourpreferences.

OR: Press the central button to centre thestereo sound in the centre of the passen-ger compartment

Press it on some lists to move up a level,one by one.

BACK

Button to return to the previous menu ormove up through the folder structure.

When pressed, a pop-up window opens(options window) which displays othersetup options.

/ Some functions are activated or deac-tivated by pressing this box.

Display and function buttons: operationand effect

OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.

× Press to close a pop-up window or an in-put window.

/ Press them to change the setup adjust-ments one at a time.

Move the scroll button across the screenby sliding your finger.

Open list entries and search in lists

Fig. 180 Entries on a setup menu list.

The entries on a list can be activated bypressing them on the screen or by using thesettings button.

Mark list entries using the setup buttonand open them● Turn the adjustment knob to search and se-lect from the list.● Press the setup button to activate themarked entry on the list.

Search lists (scrolling the screen)The scroll bar is shown on the right and itssize depends on the entries in the list››› Fig. 180 1 .

● On the bar: Press above or below the markor slide your finger vertically over the markuntil you reach the desired position.

Input window with on-screen key-pad

Fig. 181 Input window with on-screen keypad. »

171

Infotainment System

The on-screen keypad is used for functionssuch as entering an memory name, selectinga destination address or entering a searchterm for searching long lists.

The input line with cursor is located in the topbar of the screen. All inputs are displayedhere.

Input windows for “free text input”In the input masks for open text, you may en-ter letters, numbers and characters in anycombination.

Input windows for selecting a saved entry(e.g. selection of a destination address)It is only possible to enter a sequence of let-ters, numbers and characters that matches astored entry.

Matches are suggested on the input line››› Fig. 181 4 . In the case of compoundnames, it is necessary to enter a space.

Overview of the function buttons*

Function icon and text: operation and ef-fect

Letters anddigits

Press them to copy them into the inputline.

1

Press to change the keypad to anoth-er language. Keypad languages canbe selected from the menu Systemsettings > Speech.

Function icon and text: operation and ef-fect

2 Press to show symbols on the keypad.

3

If there are fewer than 99, it shows thenumber of entries that can be selec-ted. Pressing opens the list accordingto the entry.

4 Scroll bar, the size of which dependson the number of matching entries.

5

If the button is held down, specialcharacters based on that letter aredisplayed. Press the desired charac-ter to enter it. Some special charac-ters can be written out instead (e.g.“AE” for “Ä”).

Space bar

Deletes characters on the input linefrom right to left.

Press and hold to delete several char-acters.

BACK Close the input window.

Additional information and displayoptions

The displays appearing on the screen mayvary depending on the settings, and may dif-fer from those described here.

The status bar on the screen can display, forexample, the current time and outside tem-perature.

All displays can be viewed only after com-pletely restarting the Infotainment system.

Initial configuration wizard

Fig. 182 Initial configuration wizard

It will help you to set up your Infotainmentsystem the first time you switch it on.

Every time you switch on the Infotainmentsystem, the initial setup screen will appear››› Fig. 182 if any parameters have not beenset or if the NEVER function button has notbeen pressed.

172

Introduction

Function button: function

CLOSECloses the Configuration Wizard, andthe main menu or last mode in whichyou used the Infotainment system willappear.

NEVER

Disables the possibility of changingthe settings of the Infotainment sys-tem. To configure the system go to:System settings and select Con-figuration wizard.

START Starts up the Configuration Wizard.

AIf the system includes navigation, thedate and time are set automaticallyby the GPS.

BSearch and save the radio stationswith the best reception at that time inall available bands.

C Link your mobile phone to the Infotain-ment system.

D a)Add your home address using yourcurrent position or by manually enter-ing an address.

PREVIOUS NEXT

Previous or next parameter to config-ure.When a parameter has been config-ured, the only way to reconfigure it isby clicking on it on the main menu, notby using the Previous/Next buttons.When you configure a parameter, will be displayed over it.


FINISH

Once one or more settings have beenapplied, finalise the configuration inthe main menu of the wizzard.If you have not set all the parameters,the Initial Configuration Wizard willstart the next time you turn the Info-tainment system on.

a) Only valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus.

Menu and system settings

The settings that can be selected varies de-pending on the country and the equipment inquestion, and on the vehicle's equipment.

● Press the Infotainment button andthen press the SETTINGS function button.

Press the function button of the main menu orthe functions for which you want to changethe settings. All settings are automaticallyapplied when the menus are closed.


Screen : To change the screen settings.

Menu : To select the main menu display mode(Mosaic or Carousel).


Switch off screen (in 10 seconds) : If this function isactive and the infotainment system is not used,the screen will automatically switch off after ap-prox. 10 seconds. Pressing the screen or pressingone of the infotainment buttons will turn thescreen on again.

Brightness : To select the brightness level of thescreen.

Day / Night : To select the type of display (Day,Night or Automatic).

Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when afunction button is pressed is active.

Show clock in standby mode : In standby mode, thetime is displayed on the infotainment systemscreen.

Date and time : Change the time and date settings.

Clock time source : To select the time source (GPSor manual).

GPS : The time and date can be selected usingthe Time zone function button. In this case, theTime and Date function buttons for manual

entry will not be active.

Manual : The time and date can be set manual-ly using the Time and Date function buttons.

Time : To set the time manually.

Time zone : To adjust the desired time zone.

Time format : To select the time display format (12or 24 hours).

Date : To set the current date. »173

Infotainment System


Date format : To select the date display format(DD.MM.YYYY, YY-MM-DD or MM-DD-YY).

Language : To select the desired language for textsand phrases in the voice control system.

Additional keypad languages : To select additional key-board languages.

Units : To set the units of measurement of the vehi-cle's displays: distance, speed, temperature, volume,consumption and pressure.

Data transfer for SEAT apps

Data transfer for SEAT apps : This allows data to beexchanged between the vehicle and SEAT apps.They are not personal data.

Operation via apps : Change the level of interactionwith apps.

Deactivate : This limits specific functions thatrequire a higher level of security.Confirm : Allows 100% of functions of the app,

and certain specific actions on the Infotain-ment system have to be confirmed.Allow : Allows all available functions to be exe-

cuted from the app.

Voice control : To change the voice control settings››› page 175.

Remove safely : To eject the data medium (SD/USBcard) from the system. After correctly ejecting thedata storage device from the system, the functionbutton becomes inactive (grey colour).


Factory settings : When the original factory settingsare restored, all inputs and settings that are madeare deleted, depending on the selected settings.

Bluetooth : To change the Bluetooth® ››› page 243settings.

WLAN a): To change the WLAN access point settings››› page 211.

System information : Display of the system information(device number, hardware and software versions).

Update : To update the navigation data, do››› page 214 No remove the memory card whilethe navigation data are being installed.

Copyright : Information about copyright.

Configuration wizard : Opens the Infotainment system’sinitial configuration wizard.

a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus.

NoteFor the proper functioning of the Infotain-ment system it is important that the dateand time set in the vehicle are correct.

Volume and sound settings

The settings that can be selected varies de-pending on the country and the equipment inquestion, and on the vehicle's equipment.

● Press the Infotainment button andthen press the Sound function button.● Press the main menu function button for thesettings that have to be changed. All settingsare applied instantly.

Overview of screen and function buttons


Volume : To change the volume settings.

Warnings : To set the playback volume of warn-ings, such as traffic announcements.

Navigation announcements : To set the playbackvolume of audio driving recommendations.

Voice control : To set the playback volume ofvoice control.

Maximum switch-on volume : To set the equipment'smaximum switch-on volume.

Speed-dependent volume adjustment (GALA): To setthe extent to which the volume is adjusted de-pending on the speed. The volume of the audiowill increase automatically as the speed of thevehicle increases.

Entertainment fading when parking : To adjust thedesired reduction in audio volume when ParkPi-lot is active.

Entertainment fading (nav. announcements) : Adjuststhe playback volume when the navigator isspeaking.

174

Introduction


Volume : To set the playback volume of audiosources connected via the AUX-IN multimediajack (Low, Medium or High). Also see››› page 174, Overview of screen and functionbuttons.

Bluetooth audio : To set the playback volume ofthe audio sources connected by Bluetooth®

(Low, Medium or High). Also see ››› page 174,Overview of screen and function buttons.

Equaliser : To adjust the sound properties.

Balance - Fader : To adjust the sound distribution. Thecursor indicates the current sound distribution in thepassenger compartment. To modify the sound distri-bution, briefly press on the desired position in thepassenger compartment view or use the arrow keysfor a step-by-step modification. To centre sound dis-tribution in the passenger compartment view, pressthe central function button located between the ar-rows.

Sound focus : Optimizes the sound in the passengercompartment.

Subwoofer *: Adjusts the volume of the subwoofer.

Touchscreen tone : The confirmation tone when a func-tion button is pressed is active.

Disabling voice navigation during calls : During a tele-phone conversation, audio driving recommendationswill not be given.

Adjust the playback volume of externalaudio sourcesIf you need to increase the playback volumefor the external audio source, first lower thebase volume on the infotainment system.

If the sound from the connected audio sourceis very low, increase the output volume onthe external audio source. If this is notenough, change the input volume to mediumor high.

If the sound from the connected external au-dio source is too loud or distorted, lower theoutput volume on the external audio source.If this is not enough, change the input vol-ume to medium or low.

Voice control

How it works3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 183 Voice control: main screen

Many of the radio, media, telephone and nav-igation functions can be changed by voicecommands.

The voice control of the infotainment systemwill only be available for the language selec-ted in System settings ››› page 173.

● Voice control settings ››› page 178.

Start and stop voice control● To activate voice control, briefly press thebutton on the multifunction steering wheel .● When activating voice control, a dialoguestart tone will sound and the main voice con-trol screen will be displayed, ››› Fig. 183, (the »

175

Infotainment System

main screen will appear in the format selec-ted in Voice control settings ››› page 178).The spoken indications guide you through thefollowing “dialogue”.● Speak the desired command and follow theinstructions in the “dialogue”. Often a func-tion can be activated by different spokencommands. If in doubt, try speaking a com-mand or say Help.● When an action is taken (e.g., call a con-tact), the voice control ends automaticallyand you must activate it again if you want tocontinue with it. There are certain commandsafter which the voice control does not end,and it waits by saying Next command?.● To manually end voice control, press andhold the button until the correspondingconfirmation signal sounds, or briefly pressthe button twice, or press the function but-ton in the upper right corner of the screen.● You can also end the voice control byspeaking the following commands: Stop orCancel.

Voice control helpIt is recommended to listen to the Help thefirst time you use the voice control.

● Activate voice control .● Say the command Help to start it in the lan-guage indicated System Settings, and fol-low the instructions in the dialogue. The Help

command can also be spoken followed by afunction of the infotainment system, such as“Help with navigation”.

Interacting with the dialogue modeIcons in upper left corner:

The system waits for a user's command.

The system has recognised a commandand will act shortly.The system transmits a spoken com-mand and confirms the command thathas been given.The system is in paused mode. (max. 3minutes).

Hide or show the voice control menu››› Fig. 183.

Operation during the dialogueWhile the infotainment system transmits aspoken instruction, the symbol will be dis-played on the screen.

● You can stop the speech by pressing theupper left icon on the screen or button andvoice recognition will resume for the user.

IMPORTANT: The system will ONLY recog-nize a command when the symbol isdisplayed as “active” on the panel or onthe touchscreen.

/

If you make a mistake when speaking a com-mand, or pronounce it incompletely and ithas no effect, you may repeat the command.The symbol remains activated.

● Briefly press button to repeat the com-mand.

Voice control instructionsFollow the instructions shown below for opti-mal operation of the voice control.

● Speak slowly and clearly if possible. Thesystem will not recognise words that are un-clearly pronounced, or words and numbersthat are missing syllables.● Telephone numbers should be spoken digitby digit, or by blocks units, tens or hundreds.● Speak at a normal volume, without exag-gerated pronunciation or long pauses.● Avoid outside and nearby noise (for exam-ple, conversations inside the vehicle). Closeall doors, windows and the sliding sunroof.● Do not direct the air from the outlets to-wards the roof of the passenger compart-ment.● If you are driving at high speed, talk a littlelouder.

By activating voice control the system takesyou to the main screen ››› Fig. 183, which willdisplay the contexts in which the system op-erates and the main commands.

176

Introduction

From here you can command the systembased on the context that you want to oper-ate, or give a voice command directly.

When selecting each of the contexts (Naviga-tion, Telephone, Radio, Media, Voice control)a menu will displayed listing the main com-mands, and providing brief explanations ofhow to give each of them, as a help mode.

Voice control (RADIO)

Effect Voice command

LISTEN TO THE RADIO Listen to the radio

SELECT STATIONStation STATION NAME 1

Set station

SELECT FREQUENCYFrequency 87.9

Set frequency

CHANGE BANDBand FM

Change band

Voice control (MEDIA)


SOURCE SELECTIONPlay Jukeboxa)

Listen to CD

MUSIC SELECTION Select track / album / ar-tist / genre


PLAY SIMILAR TITLESa) Play similar titles

a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Voice control (TELEPHONE)


CALL CONTACTS

Call Name SurnameHome

Call Name Surname Mo-bile

CALL NUMBERSCall 01234

Call number

CALL LISTShow all calls

Missed calls

REDIAL Redial

CALL MAILBOX Call mailbox

SMS Read out text message

SERVICE Breakdown call

INFORMATION Information call

Voice control (NAVIGATION)*


ENTER THE ADDRESSEnter address

Guide to City, Street,numbera)

SEARCH FOR SPEC.DESTINATIONa)

Search for car parks

Search for restaurantsnear destination

HOME ADDRESS Home address

LAST DESTINATIONS Last destinations

NAVIGATION TO CON-TACTS

Navigate to Name Sur-name

ROUTE GUIDANCEStart route guidance

Route information


Voice control


VOICE CONTROL

Pardon?

Back

Main menu

Cancel voice control

Pause voice control »

177

Infotainment System


HELPHelp

What can I say?

VOICE BUTTON

NoteVoice control is not available when parking

Voice control settings

● Press the infotainment button > Set-tings > Voice control.

When closing a menu, the changes will bemade automatically.


Example commands (infotainment system) : Display voicecontrol examples on the infotainment system screen.

Example commands (instrument cluster) a): Display voicecontrol examples on the instrument panel.

Voice control session start tone : a signal will soundwhen activating voice control. Press to deactivatethe signal.

Voice control session end tone : a signal will sound whendeactivating voice control. Press to deactivate thesignal.


Input tone in voice dialogue : the input tone to confirman order is activated.

End tone in voice dialogue : the end tone to confirm anorder is deactivated.

a) Available depending on equipment

178

Connectivity

Connectivity

Data transfer

Introduction

This communication can allow data to beread and/or written.

From the menu SETTINGS > Data trans-fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox toactivate/deactivate the function and a drop-down menu called Operation via appswhich controls the level of interaction be-tween the apps and the system.

Full Link*

Full Link technology description3 Not available for model: Media System Colour


The Full Link connection is made through aUSB cable.

The Full Link system brings together technol-ogies that allow communication between theInfotainment System and mobile devices:

● MirrorLink®

● Android Auto™● Apple CarPlay™

InterfacesTo access the Full Link system, press the info-tainment button or press the infotainmentbutton and then select the FullLink context.

WARNINGAny applications that are not suitable orexecute incorrectly may cause damage tothe vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.● SEAT recommends the use of the Appsthat SEAT provides for this vehicle.● To make full use of SEAT Apps, you mustactivate the option Settings > Datatransfer for SEAT apps.● The interaction level of the Apps on thesystem must be: Allow.● Protect the mobile terminal with its appli-cations from improper use.● Never make modifications to the applica-tions.● Consult the instruction manual for themobile terminal.

WARNINGThe use of applications while driving candistract your attention from the traffic. Dis-tracting the driver in any way can lead toan accident and cause injuries.● Always drive carefully and responsibly.

CAUTION● In areas where special regulations applyor the use of mobiles forbidden, it must beswitched off at all times. The radiation pro-duced by the mobile when switched onmay interfere with sensitive technical andmedical equipment, possibly resulting inmalfunction or damage to the equipment.● SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam-age caused to the vehicle as a result of theuse of applications that are of poor qualityor are defective, the inadequate program-ming of the applications, the insufficientcoverage of the network, the loss of dataduring transmission or the improper use ofmobiles.

Note● The use of Full Link technology could in-crease the amount you pay for data.● SEAT recommends having a high batterycharge on the device when connected toFull Link.● SEAT recommends that to use Full Link,the “Date and time” should be correctly »

179

Infotainment System

configured. Select Settings > Time anddate.● SEAT apps are designed to communicatewith the vehicle and interact with it throughthe Full Link connection.● You can find further information on thetechnical requirements, compatible devi-ces, suitable applications and availabilityat www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.

Is Full Link blocked?

Fig. 185 Message on Infotainment systemscreen.

If your vehicle does not have Full Link, youcan purchase it as an accessory at yourSEAT dealer ››› Fig. 185.

Requirements for Full Link

Fig. 186 Full Link Requirements

Full Link Activated: If you do not haveFull Link in your vehicle you can acquire itas an accessory at your Authorised Serv-ice.Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror-Link®, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™

1

2

websites to confirm whether your phoneis compatible with the system.Mirror Link– Check smartphone compatibility:

www.mirrorlink.com/phones– MirrorLink® 1.1 or higher– Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or

the CCC must be installed in the de-vice.

Android Auto– Check smartphone compatibility. An-

droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/– Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher– Install Android Auto™ appApple CarPlay– Check smartphone compatibility. Apple

CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay– iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher– Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see

phone settings)

USB cable connecting car to phone:Use the approved USB cable suppliedwith the phone.

3

180

Connectivity

Activation of Full Link

Fig. 187 Full Link Setup

Fig. 188 Full Link menu

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is notnecessary to establish the connection be-tween the smartphone and Full Link.

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces-sary to enable all of the app features1).

Proceed as follows to use Full Link:

● Switch on the Infotainment system● Connect the smartphone to the vehicle'sUSB port using a USB cable ››› page 244.● In the main menu for the Full Link settings,select Activate data transfer forSEAT apps ››› Fig. 187.

Finally, a message will appear stating thatdata transfer will commence when the deviceis connected. Please note that data is trans-ferred over connections between your vehi-cle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec-ted, the technology compatible with your de-vice can be used.

NoteDepending on your smartphone, it mayhave to be unlocked for the connection tooccur.

What should I do if it does not con-nect?

Restart the mobile device.

Check the USB cable. Check whether theUSB cable is damaged. Check that neitherconnection (USB/micro USB) is damaged orworn.

Check that the USB ports are correctlyconnected. Check that the USB port of thevehicle and the device are not damagedand/or deteriorated.● Clean the USB ports (device and vehicle).● Try with another compatible mobile device.● Have the USB port replaced at a SEAT au-thorised service.● Have the mobile device repaired or replaceit.

1) Using the data connection to transfer thesmartphone apps to Full Link may involve addi-tional charges. Please check the charges withyour operator.

181

Infotainment System

Tethering of portable devices thatsupport MirrorLink®, Android Auto™and/or Apple CarPlay™ technolo-gies

Fig. 189 Full Link menu

When you enter Full Link for the first time, thetechnologies available for pairing the porta-ble device are displayed.

Once the device connects via USB, the sys-tem will offer you the technologies availablefor establishing a connection.

In the event of simultaneous connections be-tween two devices with different operatingsystems, a choice will be presented for whichone to make the connection with ››› Fig. 189.

View of the device listiPhone™ devices only support Apple Car-Play™.

There are some Android devices that supportMirrorLink® and Android Auto™.

Bear in mind that once the device is connec-ted it will not be available as an audio source.

Full Link Settings


Activate data transfer for SEAT apps : allows the ex-change of information between the vehicle and ap-plications authorised by SEAT.

Last ModeIf the telephone connection is terminated on-ly by unplugging the cable, the next time thedevice is connected, the session will startwithout the user having to take any action1).

InformationConsult the mobile device manual.

Depends on each technology:

Availability in a countryThird party applications

1.2.

For further information:

MirrorLink®:www.mirrorlink.com

Apple CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay

Android Auto™:www.android.com/auto

Note● In order to use Android Auto™ technologyit is necessary to download the AndroidAuto™ application, located on GooglePlay™.● Only compatible applications can beused, in accordance with the technologyconnected.

1) Unless the device requires the screen to be un-locked in order to establish the connection.

182

Connectivity

MirrorLink®

Fig. 190 Function buttons in the general viewof compatible applications.

Fig. 191 Other MirrorLink function buttons.

MirrorLink® is a protocol which enables com-munication between a device and the Info-tainment system.

This makes it possible to display and operatecontent and functions on the device from thescreen of the infotainment system.

To avoid distracting the driver while driving,only specially adapted applications can beused ››› in Full Link technology descrip-tion on page 179.

RequirementsIn order to use MirrorLink®, the following re-quirements must be met:

● The device must be compatible with Mirror-Link®.● Depending on the device that is used, asuitable application must be installed for theuse of MirrorLink®.

Initiating the connection● In order to initiate the connection with thedevice, just connect it to the Infotainment sys-tem via the USB cable.● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-quest that you accept the device.

Function buttons and possible messages


Full Link To return to the Full Link mainmenu.

CLOSE APPS

Press to close the open apps.Then press the apps to beclosed or the Close all functionbutton to close all the open ap-plications.


1 : 1 Press to change to the mobiledevice screen.

SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup

››› Fig. 191 1 Press to return to the MirrorLink®

main menu.

››› Fig. 191 2Press to display all the functionbuttons in the lower or upperright-hand margin of the screen.

››› Fig. 191 / OR: Right adjust-ment button

Allows buttons 1 and 2 to behidden or shown.

MirrorLink® setup


Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows : Allows MirrorLink®

pop-up windows in applications that support it.

Apple CarPlay™*3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele-phones. Also, iPhone™ mobile telephones onlysupport Apple CarPlay™

Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enablescommunication between a device and the in-fotainment system.

This makes it possible to display and operatecontent and functions on the device from thescreen of the infotainment system. »

183

Infotainment System

RequirementsIn order to use Apple CarPlay™, the followingrequirements must be met:

● Make sure that you do not have AppleCarPlay™ restricted on your device, at: Set-tings > General > Restrictions >CarPlay > ON.● The mobile device must be compatible withApple CarPlay™.

Initiating the connectionIn order to initiate the connection with the de-vice, just connect it to the Infotainment sys-tem via the USB cable.

● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-quest that you accept the device.● If you start the session using AppleCarPlay™ technology, it will not be possibleto pair another device via Bluetooth®. The fol-lowing message will appear in the mainPhone menu:

Please disconnect Apple CarPlayfirst to connect a different mo-bile phone.

Holding down the button on the multifunc-tion steering wheel will start the Apple™ voice“engine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-ment system, press the SEAT icon.

Android Auto™*3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones.

Android Auto™ is a protocol which enablescommunication between a device and the in-fotainment system.

This makes it possible to display and operatecontent and functions on the device from thescreen of the infotainment system.

RequirementsIn order to use Android Auto™, the followingrequirements must be met:

● The mobile device must be compatible withAndroid Auto™.● The Android Auto™ application should al-ready be downloaded and installed on themobile device.

Initiating the connectionIn order to initiate the connection with the de-vice, just use the USB cable to connect it tothe infotainment system and follow the in-structions on the device to be paired.

● The first connection to Android Auto™ mustbe done while the vehicle is stationary.● Once the first pop-up window about ac-cepting data transfer between the car andthe device has been accepted, a messagewill appear requesting that you check your

mobile device for the confirmations neededto pair it with the Infotainment system.● If you are starting the session using AndroidAuto™ technology, the device also automati-cally connects to the Infotainment system viaBluetooth® and it will not be possible to pairanother device via Bluetooth®.

Holding down the button on the multifunc-tion steering wheel will start the Android™voice “engine”.

To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-ment system, press the button.

NoteSome devices require a change in the USBconnection mode in order to use AndroidAuto™.● Make sure that your device is in “MediaTransfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it isconnected to the Infotainment system.

NoteAndroid Auto™ requires the use of Google™services, as well as certain basic applica-tions of the Android system.● Make sure that you always have Google™services updated in order to use this tech-nology.

184

Connectivity

Frequently asked questions aboutFull Link

What connection method is used? USB Cable.

Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle? No. The USB cable supplied with the device shouldbe used.

Is it possible to navigate? Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Linktechnologies if the technology is available in yourcountry and if you have the Navigation app.

What is the difference between using the Full Linksystem navigator (via a device) instead of anoth-er navigator? Advantages: Daily updates.Issues: data consumption, reception problems.

Can I send voice messages? With certified applications, you can reply, not send.

What applications will be visible while driving? Depending on the technology:– for MirrorLink®: Apps certified by SEAT and theCCC,– for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™,– for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™.

Where can I find compatible Apps? Compatible apps are listed at the following links:www.mirrorlink.com/www.android.com/auto/www.apple.com/ios/carplay/

Where can I download the apps? On Google Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink® andon Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™.

If Full Link stops working, where can I go to repairit? If the problem is in the car, you should go to the deal-er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you shouldsee your mobile telephone vendor.

Will WhatsApp be certified? The WhatsApp situation depends on the technology.

Is MirrorLink® available in my country? Yes, MirrorLink® is available in all countries and re-gions where SEAT is located.

What are the differences between MirrorLink®,Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™? MirrorLink® is not compatible with Android Auto™ andApple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies.They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ isdesigned for mobile devices with the Android™ oper-ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone.

Can MirrorLink® be installed in a previous SEATmodel? No, it is not possible.

Where can I find more information about FullLink? If you have any questions, please see our Innova-tion/Connectivity sections on our website:www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail [email protected]

SEAT Media Control*

Introduction3 Not available for model: Media System Colour


The SEAT Media Control1) app can be usedto remotely operate some partial functions inRadio, Media and Navigation mode. Informa-tion can be exchanged between a deviceand the Infotainment System. »

1) Availability depends on the country.185

Infotainment System

The functions are operated by means of aTablet or partially by a mobile phone.

Operating requirements:● A tablet or mobile phone.● The app must be available on the corre-sponding device.● There must be a WLAN connection betweenthe Infotainment System and the device. Se-lect Menu > Media > Settings > WLAN >Share connection over WLAN > Config-uration.

Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti-vated:

● From the SETTINGS menu > Data trans-fer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox toactivate/deactivate the function and a drop-down menu called Operation via appswhich controls the level of interaction be-tween the apps and the system . Select Menu> Settings > Data transfer from mo-bile devices.

You can obtain information about technicalrequirements on the SEAT website or at SEATdealerships.

Telephone functions do not form part of thisapp.

Data transmission and controlfunctions

Fig. 193 SEAT Media Control Main menu

With SEAT Media Control you can operatethe Infotainment System from other places inthe vehicle in Radio and Media modes and,depending on the country and the equip-ment, you can exchange the following infor-mation between a device and the Infotain-ment System:

● Navigation destinations.● Traffic information.● Social media contents.● Audio transmission.● Vehicle data.● Location-specific information, for example,POIs.

WLAN access point*

Introduction3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

The Infotainment System can be used toshare a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi-ces ››› page 187, Configuration for sharinga connection over WLAN.

The Infotainment System can also use theWLAN hotspot of an external device to pro-vide Internet to the devices connected to thehotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 187, Config-ure Internet access.

Note● Data transmission may incur charges.Due to the high volume of data exchanged,SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate tar-iff for data transmission. Mobile phone op-erators can provide the relevant informa-tion.● The exchange of data packages maygenerate additional costs, depending onyour mobile phone rate, particularly if youare abroad (for example, roaming rates).

186

Connectivity

Configuration for sharing a con-nection over WLAN

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Press the Infotainment button and thenpress the Settings menu.● Activate the wireless network. To do so,press the WLAN function button.● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on thedevice that is to be connected. If necessary,refer to the manufacturer’s instruction man-ual.● Activate the mobile device assignment onthe Infotainment System. To do so, press theEnable WLAN connection button and acti-vate the checkbox.● Enter and confirm the network key dis-played on the device.

The following settings can also be made onthe menu Share connection:

● Security level: WPA2 encryption auto-matically generates a network key.● Network key: Network key automaticallygenerated. Press the function button to man-ually change the network key. The network

key must have a minimum of 8 charactersand a maximum of 63.● SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of32 characters).● Do not send network name (SSID):Activate the checkbox to deactivate the visi-bility of the wireless (WLAN) network.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed. To complete the connection, it may benecessary to enter other data into the device.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)1)

Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to createa ciphered local wireless network quickly andsimply.

● Establish the connection with the wirelessnetwork (WLAN) ››› page 211.● Press the WPS button on the WLAN routeruntil the warning light on the router startsflashing. If the WLAN router does not supportWPS the network must be configured man-ually.

● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on theWLAN router until the WLAN light on the routerstarts flashing.● Press the WPS button on the WLAN device.The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed.

Repeat this process to connect other devices.

Configure Internet access

The Infotainment System can use the WLANhotspot of an external device to establish aninternet connection.

Establishing the connection with the wire-less network (WLAN)● Activate and check the wireless hotspot onthe external device. If necessary, refer to themanufacturer’s instruction manual.● Press the Infotainment button and thenpress the Settings menu; OR access Mediaor SEAT Md. Ctrl. and press the SETTINGSmenu.● Press on the menu WLAN > Enable WLANconnection and check the verification box.● Press the Find function button and selectthe device you want from the list. »

1) This function depends on the equipment andthe country in question.

187

Infotainment System

● If necessary, enter the network key of thedevice in the Infotainment System and con-firm with OK.

Manual settings:● To manually enter the network settings ofan external (WLAN) device.

The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish-ed. To complete the connection, it may benecessary to enter other data into the device.

NoteDue to the large number of devices on themarket, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all functions.

188

Operating modes

Operating modes

Radio

Related video

Fig. 194 Radio mode

RADIO main menu

Fig. 195 RADIO main menu.

Fig. 196 Radio mode: station list (FM).

Press the infotainment button andthen select the Radio context to open the RA-DIO main menu ››› Fig. 195.

RADIO main menu function buttons


1Memory keys (1 to 18a) memories, 3banks (screens) ››› page 192)

BAND Select the band.

STATIONLIST List of radio station that can be tuned.

MANUAL Selecting the frequency manually.

VIEW Selecting the information shown on thescreen. Only available in DAB mode.

SETTINGS Settings menu for the current frequen-cy band.


/ Previous or next station that is stored oron the station list. See Settings››› page 195.

Scan Stops the station search (visible only ifit is running ››› page 195).

a) The Media System Colour model has 15 memories.

Indications and possible icons

Display: Meaning

A

Frequency or name of the station orradio text. The name of the radio sta-tion and the radio text will only be dis-played if RDS is active.

RDS off The RDS radio data service is deacti-vated.

TPTraffic information can be retrieved:select Radio > Settings >Traffic programme (TP).

No stations with traffic news are avail-able.

The radio station is stored on a memo-ry button.

Note● The AM and DAB bands will be availableaccording to countries and/or equipment.In this case, the BAND function button willnot be displayed. »

189

Infotainment System

● Being underground, in tunnels, in areaswith tall buildings or mountains can inter-fere with the radio reception.● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached tothe windows may affect reception on vehi-cles with a window aerial.● Radio stations are responsible for thecontent of the information they transmit.

Radio data services RDS (FM band)

Fig. 197 Standard representation: FM stationlisting menu

The RDS (Radio Data System) or radio dataservice offers additional FM information suchas the display of the station name, automaticstation tracking (AF), texts broadcast by radio

(Radio text), traffic announcements (TP) andthe type of station (PTY).

Depending on the country and the equip-ment in question, RDS can be deactivated inthe FM Settings menu ››› page 195.

In general, no radio data services are avail-able without RDS.

Station name and automatic station track-ingIf the RDS function is available, the names ofthe stations can be displayed on the RADIOmain menu and on the Station list .

FM stations temporarily transmit other con-tent on different regional frequencies underthe same name (for example, Station 3).

In general, automatic station tracking takescharge of switching to the frequency with thebest reception of the station that is tuned atany given time, while driving. However, thismay cause a regional broadcast to be inter-rupted.

Automatic frequency switching and automat-ic station tracking can be deactivated in FMSettings ››› page 195.

Set a station nameIn certain cases the station name is exces-sively long. This text can be locked / unlockedby pressing on the name of the station forabout 3 seconds until an audible warning isheard (a point will flash to the right and left ofthe station name).

Radio textSome stations that have RDS transmit addi-tional information in text, the so-called radiotext.

The radio text is displayed in the upper half ofthe screen above the memory buttons››› Fig. 195 A .

The radio text display can be deactivated inthe Settings ››› page 195.

Order of the station listThe stations available at any given time aredisplayed on the station list screen (STA-TIONS function button). This list can be sortedby broadcast group, genre or alphabetically››› Fig. 197.

NoteThe RDS functionality will be limited insome countries for infrastructure reasons,and traffic announcements (TP), automatic

190

Operating modes

station tracking (AF) and station type (PTY)may not be available.1)

Digital radio mode (DAB, DAB + andDMB audio)*

Fig. 198 Display of memory buttons in DABmode.

Fig. 199 Station information display in DABmode.

The DAB radio tuner supports the DAB, DAB +and DMB audio transmission standards.

In Europe, digital radio is transmitted overband III frequencies (from 174 MHz to 240MHz).

The frequencies are called “channels” andhave an abbreviation (eg 12 A).

In a channel, several available DAB stationsare grouped together in an “ensemble”.

Starting the Digital radio mode● In the RADIO main menu, press the BANDfunction button and select DAB .

The last DAB station that was selected will beplayed, if it can still be tuned in that location.

The selected DAB station is shown in the topbar of the screen. The selected station en-semble is shown below ››› Fig. 198.

Additional DAB stations (Secondary Serv-ice Components)Some DAB stations temporarily or perma-nently offer additional stations (for example,for the transmission of sporting events).

DAB stations containing additional stationsare identified on the station list by the symbol.

Select additional stationsPress the name of the main station on theDAB main menu to select an additional sta-tion. Or, select the additional station from thestation list.

On the DAB main menu, the name of the ad-ditional tuned station is displayed next to theabbreviated name of the main DAB station.

Additional stations can not be saved.

Automatic station trackingDAB radio is not currently available every-where. DAB radio mode displays the areaswithout DAB coverage . »

1) Depends on the market and unit in question.191

Infotainment System

If the DAB station that is being listened to canno longer be tuned (e.g. there is no DAB cov-erage), the infotainment system tries to findand tune the same station in the differentavailable frequency bands. If the station cannot be found again, the radio sound is muted.Automatic station tracking can be activatedin the DAB Settings in the following modes››› page 196:

● DAB - DAB station tracking: The radio triesto tune to the same station on an alternativeDAB frequency. To allow station tracking,both DAB stations need to broadcast thesame station identification, or to signal theother corresponding DAB station throughDAB.● DAB - FM Automatic switching: The radiotries to tune to the same station in the FM fre-quency band. To allow station tracking, theDAB station and the FM station need tobroadcast the same station identification, orto signal the other corresponding FM stationthrough DAB. When the corresponding FMstation has been found, “FM” is displayed be-hind the name of the station. If the corre-sponding DAB station becomes availableagain, it returns to DAB mode after a whileand the “FM” identification is concealed.● Switch to a similar station: This allowsservice providers to indicate alternative sta-tions with similar content. In this way, if the ra-dio loses coverage of a DAB station and doesnot find an alternative FM or DAB frequency, it

is possible to tune to a station with similarcontent.

Radio textSome stations transmit additional text infor-mation, the so-called radio text.

Radio text is displayed in the upper half of thescreen above the memory buttons ››› Fig. 198or on the Station Information or Radio textscreens of the Display menu ››› page 192.

The radio text display can be deactivated inthe DAB Settings ››› page 196.

SlideshowSome stations transmit additional visual infor-mation in the form of images.

These images are displayed as a slideshowon the Stations or Slideshow screens of theScreen menu ››› page 192.

The slideshow can be displayed in full screenby pressing on the current image.

Screen MenuThe function buttons refer to the menu that isdisplayed when the View button is pressed››› Fig. 198.


Preset list : Viewing the preset buttons ››› Fig. 198.


Station List : Simultaneous display of radio text andslideshows instead of memory keys ››› Fig. 199.

Radio text : The radio text is displayed instead of thememory buttons.

Slideshow : Slideshows are shown in full screen mode.

NoteNot all DAB stations broadcast radio textand slideshows.

Memory buttons

Fig. 200 RADIO main menu.

In the Radio main menu, you can store sta-tions from all available frequency wave-lengths on the numbered function buttons.These function buttons are called “memorybuttons”.

192

Operating modes

Storing the station on the memory buttonsSee: Preset stations ››› page 194.

Change the memory bank (screens)● Move your finger over the screen from leftto right or vice-versa.● OR: Press one of the function buttons››› Fig. 200 A

Selecting the station from the memorybuttons● Press the memory button corresponding tothe desired station.

The stored stations can only be played bypressing the corresponding memory buttonprovided it can be received at your currentlocation.

Storing the station logo on the memorybuttonsSaved stations can be assigned logos››› page 193.

Save station logos

Save automatically (only in FM and DABmode)1)

When a station is saved, the station logo isautomatically assigned.

If there are 2 or more logos in the database,there is the option to choose the appropriateone.

Saving manuallyStation logos can be imported from a com-patible data medium (for example, memorycard or memories with a USB port).

● Press the function button Settings and thenStation logos .● Press the stored station button that youwant to use to store a station logo.● Select the source in which the logo hasbeen memorized (for example, SD Card 1 ). It isrecommended that the logos should be put inthe root directory of the memory unit.● Select the station logo.● Repeat the process to assign other logos;press the infotainment key and thenselect the Radio context to return to the Ra-dio main menu.

● If you want to change the logo of a memorybutton where a button has already beensaved, it must first be deleted from the buttonin question.

NoteNot all stations are in the database, so it isnot always possible to assign logos auto-matically.

Select, tune and save stations

Selecting stations

Select the sta-tion using thearrow keys

Press the function button or ››› Fig. 195.This switches between stationsavailable for tuning ››› page 195.

Selecting sta-tions from thestation list

Press the Stations ››› Fig. 195function button to open the stationlist.

Browse the list and tune to the sta-tion you want by pressing it.

Press the BACK ››› Fig. 196function button to close the list. If itis not used, the list will close auto-matically after a while. »

1) Not available for the Media System Colourmodel.

193

Infotainment System

Manually tuning a station frequency

Display thefrequencyband

Press the Manual function button››› Fig. 195.

Changing thefrequency stepby step

Turn the adjustment knob.

OR: Press the + or – keys on thedial displayed on the screen.

Quickly trackthe frequencyband

Press and hold one of the arrowbuttons on the left of the multifunc-tion steering wheel. Releasing thebutton switches to the next radiostation that can be tuned.

OR: Keep your finger on the scrollbutton in the frequency band andmove your finger to move the but-ton.

Hide the fre-quency band

Briefly press the settings button.

Selecting a station using the mem-ory button also ends the manualselection of frequencies. If no oper-ations are performed, the frequen-cy band is hidden after a while.

Presetting stations

Saving the sta-tion that is be-ing listened to.

Press and hold the desired presetbutton ››› Fig. 195 until an audiblesignal is heard.

The tuned station is stored on apreset button.

Presetting stations

Saving a sta-tion from thestations list

Press the Stations ››› Fig. 195function button to open the stationlist.

The stations that are already stor-ed on a memory key are marked onthe station list with the symbol ››› Fig. 196.

Select the desired station bypressing and holding it down onthe screen. A screen opens for sav-ing the station on the memory but-tons.

Press the memory key where thestation will be saved.

A sound is heard and the station issaved on the memory button. Re-peat the process to continue sav-ing other station on the list.

Delete presetstations

The Settings menu can be usedto delete all of the saved stationstogether, or separately››› page 195.

Automatic playback (SCAN)

When automatic playback is active, all tune-able stations in the selected frequency bandare played for approximately 5 secondseach.

Start and end automatic playback

Start automaticplayback

Press the Settings function buttonand then select Scan .

End automaticplayback

Press the function button tostop automatic playback on thestation that is being played.

Automatic playback also endswhen a station is selected man-ually using the memory buttons,or when the screen is changed.

Traffic information (TP)

It is only possible for traffic information to betracked with the TP function if the station inquestion can be tuned. Stations with the traf-fic information function are shown on the RA-DIO main menu and on the station list withthe symbol TP ››› Fig. 195 and ››› Fig. 196.

Some stations without their own traffic infor-mation support the TP function by broad-casting traffic announcement from other sta-tions (EON).

Activating and deactivating the TP func-tion● In the Settings (FM, AM, DAB) menu,activate or deactivate theTraffic programme (TP) function button by

pressing it ››› page 195.

194

Operating modes

Active TP function and station selectionTraffic announcements are played in Audiomode.

If a station without the TP function in FM modeis selected, the radio tries to find stations withthis function in the background. If none arefound, it will be displayed half way up the lefthand side of the screen .

In AM mode or in Media mode, a traffic sta-tion is automatically tuned in the backgroundas long as there is one available. Dependingon the situation this operation may take sometime.

Incoming traffic announcementIn Audio mode, traffic announcements areplayed automatically when they are re-ceived.

While the traffic announcement is playing, apop-up window is displayed and the radioswitches, if necessary, to the traffic informa-tion station.

Media mode is interrupted and the volume isset as adjusted ››› page 174.

The volume of the traffic announcement canbe changed with the volume control . Themodified volume remains as set for subse-quent warnings.

● Press the Cancel function button to end thecurrent travel warning. The TP function re-mains active.● OR: Press the Deactivate function button toend the current traffic announcement anddeactivate the TP function permanently. Thefunction can be reactivated in the Settingsmenu.

Settings (FM, AM, DAB)

FM settingsSelect the FM frequency band by pressingthe infotainment key and then selectingthe Radio context.

OR: Press the BAND function button and se-lect the FM frequency band.

Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe FM settings menu.


Sound : Sound settings ››› page 174.

Scan : Automatic playback (SCAN function). Whenautomatic playback is active, each of the tuneablestations in the selected frequency band are playedfor approximately 5 seconds each ››› page 194.

Seek mode : To set the settings for the arrow buttons and . The setting applies to all frequency bands(FM, AM and DAB).


Preset list : The arrow keys are used to switch be-tween all of the saved stations in the selectedfrequency band.

Station List : The arrow keys are used to switchbetween all of the tuneable stations in the selec-ted frequency band.

Traffic programme (TP) : The TP function (tracking oftraffic information stations) is active ››› page 194.

Delete presets : To erase all or some of the preset sta-tions.

Station logos : To assign or delete manually the sta-tion logos saved in the memory keys ››› page 193.

Radio text : The radio text is active ››› page 190, Ra-dio text.

Advanced settings a): Radio data services (RDS) set-tings.

Autostore station logos a): The stations saved on thememory buttons are automatically assigned ra-dio station logos if they are available in the info-tainment system. Also see ››› page 193.

Station logo region a): This allows the vehicle's re-gion (country) to be selected. This optimizes theautomatic assignment of station logos. The op-tion also allows the system to select the regionautomatically.

Automatic frequency control (AF) a): Automatic sta-tion tracking is active. When there is no check incheck box , the function button RDS regionalwill be inactive (grey). »

195

Infotainment System


Radio data system (RDS) a): The Radio Data System(RDS) is deactivated ››› page 190. If there is nocheck in check box , the traffic informationstation (TP), radio text, station name and pro-gram type functions will not be available.

RDS regional a): Set the RDS automatic stationtracking ››› page 190.

Fixed : Only alternative frequencies of theset station with an identical region programare set.

Automatic : It always changes to the frequen-cy of the set station that has the best signalat the time, even if a regional broadcast thatis in progress is interrupted.

a) This depends on the country and unit in question.

AM settingsSelect the AM frequency band by pressingthe infotainment key and then select theRadio context.

OR: Press the BAND function button and se-lect the AM frequency band.

Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe AM settings menu.










Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored onmemory buttons ››› page 193.

DAB settingsSelect the DAB frequency band by pressingthe infotainment key and then select theRadio context.

OR: Press the BAND function button and se-lect the DAB frequency band.

Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe DAB settings menu.









Station logos : To assign logos to stations stored onmemory buttons ››› page 193.

Radio text : The radio text is active ››› page 190, Ra-dio text.

Advanced settings : DAB services settings.

Autostore station logos a): Station logos are as-signed automatically when the radio stations arestored on the memory buttons ››› page 193.

DAB traffic announcements : DAB traffic announce-ments are played in the same way as TP trafficannouncements in any equipment mode.

196

Operating modes


Other DAB announcements : DAB announcements(news, sports information, weather, warnings,etc.) are played while the DAB Radio mode is ac-tive.

DAB - DAB station tracking : Automatic station track-ing within the DAB frequency range is active.

Automatic DAB - FM switching : Switching to the FMfrequency band is permitted for automatic sta-tion tracking.

Switch to a similar station : This allows service pro-viders to indicate alternative stations with similarcontent.b)

a) This depends on the country and unit in question.b) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Media

Introduction


Audio or image sources containing files in dif-ferent media are known as “media sources”.These audio files can be played through thecorresponding players or the infotainmentsystem's audio inputs.

Only supported files are displayed andplayed. Other files are ignored.

CopyrightConsider the legislation on the intellectualproperty of audio and video files.

Note● MPEG-4 HE-AAC audio coding technolo-gy and patents are licensed by FraunhoferIIS.● This product is protected by certain Mi-crosoft Corporation copyright and proper-ty rights. The use or commercialization oftechnology of this type outside the config-uration of this product, without a licencefrom Microsoft or an authorised Microsoftbranch is prohibited.● The infotainment system only plays com-patible undamaged audio files; other filesare ignored.● Check the list of compatible devices onthe SEAT website.

Requirements for data media and files

The factory-fitted CD and DVD players areclass 1 according to DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6 / VDE0837.

Only standard 12 cm CD/DVDs and 32 mm x24 mm x 2.1 mm or 1.4 mm memory cards canbe inserted in the infotainment system.

Any playable file formats on the list will here-inafter be known as “audio files”. A CD con-taining these types of audio files is called an“audio data CD”. »

197

Infotainment System

Valid for the model: Navi System Plus

Data mediaPlayback requirements

Audio files Video files

Optical discs:– Audio CD (up to 80 min).– Standard video DVD and compatible audio DVD.– CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700MB (megabyte) with the ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system.– DVD +/- R / RW up to a maximum of 4.7 GB and double layerDVD up to max. 8.5 GB in the Joliet file system (single sessiononly); UDF. Memory cards:– SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 orVFAT (max 2 GB).– SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT andNTFS file systems. USB data media:– Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications.– FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system.– Different generations of iPods™a), iPads™a) and iPhones™a).– MTP players with the trademarks “PlaysForSure” or “Ready-ForVista”.. Jukebox (internal SSD memory).

– Digital Audio Specification.– MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) files with transferrates from 32 to 320 kbit/s or variable transferrate.– WAV files (.wav).– WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo withoutcopy protection and transfer rates of up to384kbit/s.– AAC files (.m4a, .m4b and .aac) without copyprotection.– OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates ofup to 256kbit/s.– FLAC files (.flac).– Matroska container files (.mka).

v Maximum resolution 720 x 576 pixel and 25-30fps(frames per second).– MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 formats(.mpg, .mpeg, .m2ts, .avi and .mkv) with a maximumresolution of 352x288 pixels.– ISO MPEG-4 format (.mp4, .m4v, .avi, .mov, .3gpand .mkv).– MPEG-4 ASP DivX format 4, 5 and 6 (.avi, .divxand .mkv).– Xvid MPEG-4 format (.avi and .mkv).– MPEG-4 H.264 format:(.mp4, .m4v, .mov, .3gp, .avi, .m2ts, .mkv, .flv, .f4vand .webm).– Windows Media Video 9 format(.wmv, .asf, .mp4, .m4v, .mov, .3gp and .avi).– MJPEG format (.avi, .mov, .mp4 and .m4v).– Theora format (.ogv).

– Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats.– Playlists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries.– File names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters.– On DVD, a maximum of 1000 files per medium and directory.– On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per directory.– On the Jukebox (SSD), a maximum of 3000 files.

Playback of audio files through the AUX-IN jack. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 208.

Playing audio files via Bluetooth®b). – The external media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth® profile ››› page 208.

Playing audio files over WLAN. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 211

a) iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ are protected trademarks of Apple Inc.b) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.

198

Operating modes

Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi System

Data media Requirements for playing audio files

Optical discs:– Audio CD (up to 80 min).– CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with audio data up to a max. of 700 MB (megabyte) withthe ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2, Joliet or UDF 1.02, 1.5, 2.01 file system.

Memory cards:– SD and MMC in the file system must be FAT12, FAT16, FAT32 or VFAT (max 2 GB).– SDHC (max 32 GB) and SDXC (max 2 TB) with the exFAT and NTFS file systems.

USB data media:– Devices with USB 2.0 and 3.0 specifications.– FAT16, FAT32, exFAT and NTFS file system.– Different generations of iPods™a), iPads™a) and iPhones™a).– MTP players with the trademarks “PlaysForSure” or “ReadyForVista”..

– Digital Audio Specification.– MP2 (.mp2) and MP3 (.mp3) files with transfer rates from 32 to 320 kbit/s or varia-ble transfer rate.– WAV files (.wav).– WMA files (.wma) up to 10 mono / stereo without copy protection and transfer ratesof up to 384kbit/s.– AAC files (.m4a, .m4b and .aac) without copy protection.– OGG-Vorbis 1 (.ogg) files with transfer rates of up to 256kbit/s.– FLAC files (.flac).

– Playlists in the M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL formats.– Playlists must not exceed 20 kB or more than 1000 entries.– File names and routes that do not exceed 256 characters.– On memory cards, a maximum of 4000 files and a maximum of 1000 files per di-rectory.

Playback of audio files through the AUX-IN jack. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 208.

Playing audio files via Bluetooth®b). – The external media player must be compatible with the A2DP Bluetooth® profile››› page 208.

Play audio files through WLAN. – The external audio source must meet a series of playback conditions ››› page 211

a) iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ are protected trademarks of Apple Inc.b) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. »

199

Infotainment System

Valid for the model: Media System Colour

Media sources Playback requirements

SD and MMC memory cards according to file system FAT12, FAT16, FAT32, XFAT orVFAT (max 2GB), as well as SDHC and SDXC memory cards.

– MP3 files (.mp3) with a rate of 8 to 320 kbit/s or variable rate.– WMA (.wma) files up to 9.2 mono / stereo without copy protection.– Playlists in PLS, M3U, WPL and ASX formats.– Playlists not exceeding 1000 items or 20 kB.– File names and addresses no longer than 256 characters.– On memory cards: a maximum of 1000 folders and a maximum of 2048 files.

USB data support with specification 2.0 according to file system FAT12, FAT16,FAT32 or VFAT (max 2GB).

Playing audio files via Bluetooth®a). – The external media player must support the Bluetooth A2DP.

a) Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Bluetooth® SIG, Inc.

Read and bear in mind the instruction manualfor the external data storage device.

Limitations and indicationsDirt, high temperatures and mechanicaldamage can cause data media to fail. Con-sider the indications provided by the manu-facturer of the data media.

Quality differences between data media pro-duced by different manufacturers can causeplayback interference.

Consider copyright legislation!

The configuration of data media or of theequipment or programs used for recordingmay cause some tracks or data media to beunreadable. On the Internet, for example, canbe found information about the best way torecord audio files or data media (compres-sion rate, ID3 tag, etc.).

The reading speed can vary considerablydepending on the size, the usage status(copying and deleting processes), the struc-ture of the folders and the type of files of thedata media used.

Playlists only establish a certain playbackorder. The files are not saved in them. Play-lists cannot be played if the files on the datamedia are not saved to the path to which theplaylist refers.

A cover can only be displayed when thename starts with “Cover”, “Folder” or “Al-bum”.

Note● Do not use memory card adaptors, USBextension cords or USB hubs!● SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio-ration or loss of files on data storage devi-ces.

Playback order of files and folders

Fig. 202 Example of the structure of an audiodata CD.

200

Operating modes

The audio files stored on data media areoften arranged by file folders and playlists to establish a certain playback order.

Depending on their name on the data media,tracks, folders and playlists are ordered nu-merically and alphabetically.

The illustration shows an example of a con-ventional audio data CD, containing tracks, folders and subfolders ››› Fig. 202.

In this case the tracks will be played as fol-lows1):

Tracks 1 and 2 in the root directory(Root) of the CDTracks 3 and 4 in the first F1 folder ofthe CD root directoryTrack 5 in the first subfolder F1.1 of fold-er F1.Track 6 in the first subfolder F1.1.1 ofsubfolder F1.1Track 7 in the second subfolder F1.2 offolder F1Track 8 and 9 in the second folder F2

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Note● The playback sequence can be modifiedby selecting the different playback modes››› page 202.● Playlists do not play automatically, theyhave to be selected directly from the trackselection menu ››› page 204.

MEDIA main menu

Fig. 203 MEDIA main menu.

Using the Media main menu, different mediasources can be selected and played.

● Press the infotainment button andthen select the Media context to open theMEDIA main menu ››› Fig. 203.

It will continue playing the last media sourceselected from the same point.

The media source being played is indicatedon the dropdown list when pressing theSOURCE function button ››› Fig. 203.

If there is no available media source, the Me-dia main menu is displayed. »

1) The Mix/repeat including subfolders function mustbe active in the Media settings menu››› page 214.

201

Infotainment System

MEDIA main menu function buttons


SOURCE MEDIAa)

The media source that is beingplayed. Press to select another me-dia source.

JUKEBOX b): Internal hard drive(SSD) ››› page 209.

CD/DVD b): Internal CD and DVDdrive ››› page 206.

SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memo-ry card ››› page 206.

USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data stor-age device connected to the USBport ››› page 207.

AUX : External audio source con-nected to the AUX-IN multimediasocket ››› page 208.

BT AUDIO : Bluetooth® audio››› page 208.

WLAN *c): External audio sourceconnected by WLAN ››› page 211

SELECTION Depending on the level, track list,folders or source.

/ Changes track in Media mode orfast forward/rewind.

Playback stops. The functionbutton changes to .


Playback is resumed. The func-tion button changes to .

b)

Play similar tracks.Creates a virtual playlist that in-cludes tracks with a similar rhythmto the one being played if availableusing Gracenote®.

SETTINGS Opens the menu Media Set-tings.

REPEAT

Repeats all the tracks that are onthe same memory level as the trackbeing played at that moment. If inthe Media Settings menu theMix/Repeat including subfolders option

is enabled, it also includes the sub-folders.

REPEAT

Repeat the current track.

MIX

Random playback of tracks that areat the same memory level as thecurrent track. If in the Media Set-tings menu theMix/Repeat including subfolders option

is enabled, it also includes the sub-folders.

a) Depends on the equipment in questionb) Only available for the Navi System Plus model.c) Not available for the Media System Colour model.

Indications and symbols of the MEDIAmain menu

Display: Meaning

A

Information about the artist name, al-bum name and song title.

Audio CD: track information if availa-ble via Gracenote®a). If no data isavailable, it only displays Track andthe corresponding order number.

B

Album cover.The system prioritizes the display asfollows:1st Cover embedded in the file(s).2nd Image in the file folder.3rd Image provided by the Grace-note® databasea)

4th Icon of the connected device.

If playing a video file, by pressing theicon (cover) it can be played on fullscreen.

CThe playing time so far and time re-maining in minutes and seconds.

RDS offb)The RDS radio data service is deacti-vated. The RDS can be activated inthe FM settings menu.

TPb) The TP function is active and can betuned in.

b) There is no traffic news station availa-ble.

202

Operating modes

Display: Meaning

b) DAB not available.

a) Gracenote® is a database available on the Infotain-ment system hard drive that contains information onthe tracks of different artists and albums. In order forthe user to benefit from the functions offered byGracenote®, the tracks must contain the artist and/oralbum data (only available for the model: Navi Sys-tem Plus.b) Depends on the market and unit in question.

Note● When the media source is inserted, play-ing will not start automatically; it is neces-sary for the user to select the source. Norwill the media source change when it isejected.● In order to see the different covers insideof the same album/folder, make sure thatthe tracks contain different informationabout the Artist or Album in its metadata. Ifnot, you will see the same cover for all oftracks contained in the same album/folder.

Switching the Media source

Fig. 204 MEDIA mode: switching mediasource.

● Lower the base volume on the Infotainmentsystem.● From the Media main menu, press theSOURCE function button ››› Fig. 204 and se-

lect the desired media source.

In the pop-up window, the Media sources notselected are shown as deactivated (in grey).

When a Media source that has already beenplayed is selected again, playback is re-sumed from the point at which it was stop-ped.

NoteThe Media source can be changed in theTrack list view: select Media > View.

Changing track in the MEDIA mainmenu

Fig. 205 MEDIA main menu.

The tracks of the Media source that is beinglistened to can be changed successively us-ing the arrow buttons.

The arrow buttons cannot be used to exit aplaylist or start the playback of a playlist.Both actions have to be performed manuallyfrom the track selection menu ››› page 204.

Control through the MEDIA main menu

Action Function

Briefly press the func-tion button once.

At the start of the currenttrack. If the track hasbeen played for less than3 seconds, it returns tothe start of the previoustrack. »

203

Infotainment System

Action Function

Press the function but-ton twice in a row.

If the track has beenplayed for more than 3seconds, it returns to thestart of the previous track.If the first track is beingplayed, pressing the but-ton goes back to the lasttrack on the data mediathat is being played.

Briefly press the func-tion button once.

To the next track. Itchanges the last track tothe first track on the datamedia that is beingplayed.

Press and hold functionbutton .

Rewind.

Press and hold functionbutton .

Fast forward.

Slide your finger hori-zontally over the screen.

Change to the previ-ous/next track, with thesame playback times aschanging tracks with thekeys or .

Selecting an album by cover3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 206 Selection by cover.

Clicking on the current cover ››› Fig. 205 1will display all of the album covers availablein the active Media source ››› Fig. 206.

It is possible to browse through all the albumsby sliding the covers right or left or using thebottom horizontal scroll bar.

The cover selection view closes after approx-imately 5 seconds of inactivity and the Mediamain menu is displayed again.

Selecting a track from a track list

Fig. 207 Media Mode: list of folders of a Mediasource.

Fig. 208 Media Mode: list of tracks of a Mediasource.

Open a list of tracks● Press the SELECT function button on theMEDIA main menu ››› Fig. 205 to open thetrack list. The track that is playing is highligh-ted ››› Fig. 208.

204

Operating modes

● Search the track list and press the trackyou want.

If there is track information available, thetrack (on audio CDs) or the file name (MP3) isdisplayed instead of Track + num.

Overview of the function buttons in thetrack list


AOpen the Sources menu. Select anoth-er Media source by pressing.

B

Indicates the media source being ex-plored. If pressed, it goes to the root ofthe device shown on the icon.

JUKEBOX a): Internal hard disk of the info-tainment system (SSD) ››› page 209.

CD/DVD a): Internal CD and DVD drive››› page 206.

SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memorycard ››› page 206.

USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data storage de-vice connected to the USB port ››› page 207.

BT AUDIO : External Media Player con-nected via Bluetooth® ››› page 208.

AUX : Audio source connected to theAUX-IN socket ››› page 208.

WLAN *b): External audio source connec-ted by WLAN ››› page 211.


CPress the function button to open the topfolder of the Media source.

Start playback of the first track.

Repeat all tracks.

Repeats all the tracks that are on thesame memory level as the track beingplayed at that moment. If in the MediaSettings menu theMix/Repeat including subfolders option is

enabled, it also includes the subfolders››› page 214.

Random play.

Includes all the tracks that are on thesame memory level as the track beingplayed at that moment. If in the MediaSettings menu theMix/Repeat including subfolders option is

enabled, it also includes the subfolders››› page 214.

CLOSE× To close the tracks list.

a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus.b) Not available for the Media System Colour model.

NoteTracks, folders and playlists can also beselected by turning the setting button, andthey can be played or opened by pressingit.

Data bank view3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 209 Media Mode: data bank view

On the track list, click the Show database viewoption. The content of the current Mediasource will be listed by Playlists , Artists ,Albums , Genres , Tracks and Videos

››› Fig. 207.

When selecting one of the folders Artists ,Albums or Titles , a search button is displayed

in the upper right corner (magnifying glass)that allows searching within the selected cat-egory ››› page 171, Input window with on-screen keypad.

To return to the folder view, press theShow folder view option on the SELECTION

menu.

205

Infotainment System

Insert or remove a CD or DVD1)

3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 210 Slots for data storage devices in theglove compartment.

The driver should refrain from operating theunit while the vehicle is in motion. Insert orchange the data storage device before mov-ing off!

The CD and DVD drives can play audio CDsand DVDs and audio data CDs and DVDs.

Insert a CD or DVD● Insert a CD or DVD into the slot››› Fig. 210 3 with the printed side facing up-wards, until the equipment inserts it automati-cally.

Ejecting a CD or DVD● Press button 1 .● The CD or DVD in the drive will be ejectedand must be removed within approximately10 seconds.

If the CD is not removed within 10 seconds, itis automatically retracted for security rea-sons without activating the CD mode.

Unreadable or defective CD or DVDIf the data on an inserted CD or DVD cannotbe read or a defective CD or DVD is inserted,the corresponding warning appears onscreen.

Depending on the equipment, unreadableCDs or DVDs are automatically ejected 3times and reinserted to start another threeread attempts before this indication is dis-played.

Note● Uneven road surfaces and strong vibra-tions can cause playback to jump.● When the temperature inside the equip-ment is too high, loading and playback ofCDs and DVDs is disabled.

● If after inserting a number of different orDVDs and receiving the CD or DVD driveerror, every time, contact a specialisedworkshop.

Inserting or ejecting a memorycard

Depending on the features and the country,the vehicle may have one or two slots for SDcards.

Inserting a memory cardInsert the compatible memory card, with thecut corner first and the contacts facing down,into slot ››› Fig. 210 2 or ››› Fig. 173 9 , until itclicks into place.

Removing a memory cardThe inserted memory cards must be pre-pared for removal.

● From the main Media menu, press theSETTINGS button to open the Media Set-tings menu or press the infotainment button and then press Settings, to openthe System settings menu.

1) The DVD drive is only available for the NaviSystem Plus model.

206

Operating modes

● Press the Remove safely function button. Adropdown menu appears with the followingoptions: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 andUSB2*. Pressing the corresponding functionbutton disables it.● Press the inserted memory card. The mem-ory card “jumps” to the eject position.● Remove the memory card.

External data storage device con-nected to the USB port

Depending on the features and the country,the vehicle may have one or two USB con-nections ››› page 244.

Where this manual refers to external datastorage devices, this means USB mass stor-age devices containing supported audio files,such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.

Only supported audio files are displayed andplayed. Other files are ignored.

Further operation of the external data medi-um (changing track, selecting tracks andplayback modes) is described in the appro-priate chapters of this manual ››› page 197.

Instructions and restrictionsCompatibility with Apple™ devices and othermedia players depends on the unit.

The USB port supplies the usual USB volt-age of 5 volts for a USB connection.

External hard disks larger than 32 GB must bereformatted for the FAT32 file system in somecircumstances. You will find the necessarysoftware and information on the Internet.

Take into account all other instructions andlimitations regarding requirements for mediasources.

iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™Depending on the country and equipment,iPods™, iPads™ or iPhones™ can be connec-ted via the device's own USB cable to the ve-hicle’s USB port and used as audio sour-ces.

After connecting an iPod™, iPad™ or iPhone™,the list views specific to the iPod™ are dis-played at the top selection level ( Play-lists, Artists, Albums, Tracks, Podcasts, etc.).

Possible error messages after connectingexternal data media

Error message Cause and actions totake

Source is notsupported.

It is not possible to play theexternal data media or es-tablish communication withthe adapter cable that isused.

Check that the external datamedia is connected and op-erates correctly.If possible, update the exter-nal data media software.

Device not re-sponding.

Communication interrupted.

Check that the external datamedia is connected and op-erates correctly.

Due to the large number of different data storage de-vices and various iPod™, iPad™ and iPhone™ genera-tions available, it is not possible to guarantee fault-free operation of all functions described here.

DisconnectingData media be prepared for disconnection.

● From the main Media menu, press the SET-TINGS button to open the Media Settingsmenu or press the infotainment button and then press Settings, to openthe System settings menu. »

207

Infotainment System

● Press the Remove safely function button. Adropdown menu appears with the followingoptions: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 andUSB2*. Pressing the corresponding functionbutton disables it.● Now the data storage device can be dis-connected.

Note● Do not connect an external media playerat the same time to play music via Blue-tooth® and via the USB port with the In-fotainment system, as this could causeplayback limitations.● If the external player is an Apple™ device,it cannot be simultaneously connected byUSB and by Bluetooth®.● If a connected source is not recognized,disconnect and reconnect it. If the datacannot be played, the corresponding indi-cation will be displayed.

External audio source connected tothe AUX-IN multimedia socket

Depending on the equipment and countrythere may be an AUX-IN multimedia socket››› page 244.

The connected external audio source cannotbe operated with the infotainment system'scontrols.

Connecting an external audio source tothe AUX-IN multimedia socket● Connect the external audio source to theAUX-IN multimedia socket.● Start playback on the external audiosource.● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCEfunction button and select AUX .

The playback volume of the connected ex-ternal audio source should be adjusted to thevolume of the other audio sources››› page 174.

Information on operating an external au-dio source connected to the AUX-IN multi-media socket

Operation Effect

Selection of another au-dio source from the Info-tainment system.

The external audiosource continues to run inthe background.

Stopping playback onthe external audiosource.

The infotainment systemremains in the AUX menu.

Remove the connectorfrom the AUX-IN multi-media jack.

The infotainment systemremains in the AUX menu.

Note● Please read and observe the manufac-turer's instruction manual for the externalaudio source.● Interference noise may be heard if the ex-ternal audio source is powered from the 12-volt power socket of the vehicle.

Connect an external audio sourcevia Bluetooth®

In the Bluetooth® Audio mode, audio files thatare playing on a device connected by Blue-tooth can be listened to on the infotainmentsystem.

Conditions● The Bluetooth® audio source must supportthe A2DP Bluetooth® profile.● In the Bluetooth® Settings menu theBluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be

on. Select Telephone > Settings >Bluetooth

Starting Bluetooth® audio transfer● Activate Bluetooth® visibility on the externalBluetooth® audio source.● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCEfunction button and select BT audio .

208

Operating modes

● Press Search for new device in order to con-nect an external Bluetooth® audio source forthe first time ››› page 234.● OR: Select a Bluetooth® external audiosource from the list.● Please refer to the instructions on thescreen of the Infotainment system and on theBluetooth® audio source regarding the rest ofthe procedure.

You may need to manually start playback onthe Bluetooth® source.

When the Bluetooth® device is disconnected,the infotainment system remains in Blue-tooth® audio mode.

Controlling playbackThe extent to which the Bluetooth® audio sys-tem can be operated through the infotain-ment system depends on the connectedBluetooth® device.

Note● Due to the large number of possible Blue-tooth® audio sources, it is not possible toguarantee fault-free operation of all de-scribed functions.● Always switch off the warning and serv-ice tones on a connected Bluetooth® audiosource, e.g. key tones on a mobile tele-

phone, to prevent possible interferencenoise and malfunctions.● To play music, do not link the externalmedia player simultaneously to Bluetooth®

and the USB interface of the infotainmentsystem, as this can cause limitations duringplayback.● The system response time may vary, de-pending on the connected external play-back device.● If the external player is an Apple™ device,it cannot be simultaneously connected byUSB and by Bluetooth®.

Jukebox (SSD)3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Fig. 211 Manage Jukebox

The “jukebox” is located on the hard drive ofthe Infotainment system (SSD1)).

Compressed audio files (MP3 and WMA) andsome video files (Podcasts, AVIs, etc.) can beimported from different data storage devicesto the jukebox and this used to play them.

The files will only be copied when the engineis running. Copying copy-protected CDs andDVDs is prohibited

Importing files● In Media mode, press the SETTINGS func-tion button and then select Manage Jukebox .● Press the IMPORT function button.● Select the desired source from the Selectsource menu.

The data storage device is prepared. This op-eration may take a few seconds.

● Activate the checkboxes to the right of thefiles or folders to be imported.● If Select all is activated, all files and folderson the data storage device will be imported.● Press the IMPORT function button.

Depending on the selection, all files and fold-ers will be imported with the indicated nameto the Jukebox. »

1) Solid-State-Drive (SSD).209

Infotainment System

If no track information is available, the audiofiles will be placed in the following folders:

Audio data CD■ Album■ Unknown albums■ Título.mp31)

■ Artists■ Unknown artists■ Unknown albums■ Título.mp31)

Functions and progress display during thecopying operationWhile copying, an animation is displayedalong with the progress percentage on theimport screen.

Audio data CD: It is not possible to copy andplay files at the same time.

● Press the Cancel function button to end theimport of the whole track that is currently be-ing imported.● To obtain information on the status of theimport, press the Information function button.● Press the BACK function button to closethe import screen with the progress informa-tion.

● When the file import ends, a message willappear.

Deleting files● In Media mode, press the SETTINGS func-tion button and then select Manage Jukebox .● Press the DELETE function button.● Activate the checkboxes to the right of thefiles or folders to be deleted.● If Select all is activated, all the files andfolders on the data storage device will be de-leted.● Press the DELETE function button. Thefiles and folders will be deleted according tothe selection made.● When the files have been deleted, a mes-sage will appear.● Press the BACK function button to closethe menu.

Opening stored audio and video files● Change to Jukebox (SSD) content.

When storing the tracks, they are stored un-der different categories and lists according tothe information available.

The tracks saved can be checked andopened from these lists according to differentcategories.

Jukebox● Playlist● Artist● Album● Music genre● Title● Video● Non-playable files (an unsupported file hasbeen imported).

Note● If the Infotainment system cancels acopying operation, check the storagespace on the internal hard drive and checkthe data storage device.● Due to copyright laws, before anychange in ownership of the Infotainmentsystem, all files stored on the jukebox mustbe deleted.● There are several possible reasons whyfiles may be shown as inactive (grey): filesthat cannot be imported (e.g. images), filesthat are already stored in the Jukebox or

1) The name and extension of the file are exam-ples.

210

Operating modes

files that take up more space than availa-ble in the internal memory.

Connect an external audio sourcevia WLAN*

3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

WLAN allows wireless connection between anexternal audio source and the Infotainmentsystem.

To use this connection, the device being con-nected must have an app compatible withthe UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) communi-cation protocol.

Conditions● Having a compatible (UPnP) app installedon the device.● Having the Enable WLAN connection op-tion active, which can be found in the wirelessconnection configuration.● Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain-ment system using a password generated bythe system. Pairing must be done from thedevice to be connected.

Starting the WLAN audio transfer● Start the UPnP app or the app for the play-back of the WLAN audio source.

● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCEfunction button and select WLAN .● Please refer to the instructions on thescreen of the Infotainment system and on theWLAN audio source regarding the rest of theprocedure.

Controlling playbackThe extent to which the WLAN audio can becontrolled via the Infotainment system de-pends on the connected WLAN device andthe app that is used.

Note● The Infotainment system does not pro-vide an internet connection, it only estab-lishes a wireless connection between themobile device and said system.● Via the WLAN, only the connection be-tween the device and the Infotainment sys-tem can be guaranteed, its operation de-pends on the application itself.

WLAN settings3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

To access the WLAN settings the ignition mustbe switched on.

● Select the Media main menu by pressingthe infotainment key and then select theMedia context.

● Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe Media settings menu.● Press the WLAN function button, then theShare connection over WLAN button willappear along with information about the useof WLAN.● Press the function button Share connec-tion over WLAN, then you can EnableWLAN connection and access the WLANnetwork Configuration.● Press the Configuration function buttonto configure the WLAN network.


Enable WLAN connection : To turn on/off the WLAN net-work.

Security level: WPA2 encryption automaticallygenerates an 8 character network key.

Network key : Network key automatically gener-ated. Press the function button to manuallychange the network key. The network key musthave a minimum of 8 characters and a maximumof 63.

SSID : Name of the WLAN network of the infotain-ment system.

Do not send network name (SSID) : Activate thecheckbox to deactivate the visibility of the WLANnetwork.

To save the changes made to the configura-tion of the mobile access point, press theSAVE button.

211

Infotainment System

Video DVD mode3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

Fig. 212 DVD main menu.

Fig. 213 DVD mode control menu.

Regional code of video DVDQuite often, the playback of DVD video islimited to certain regions (for example, to theUS and Canada) by so-called region “co-des”. These DVDs can only be played onunits that are coded for the same region.

The unit's DVD drive is configured to read theregional code for the region in which the vehi-cle was originally sold.

Starting the DVD mode● Insert a compatible DVD in the DVD drive.

The reading of DVD data may take a few sec-onds.

The DVD's “intro” (short initial sequence) isplayed. Next, the different DVD menus aredisplayed.

Controlling a DVD menu● Briefly touch the screen to activate thefunction buttons in the DVD mode main menu››› Fig. 212.


SOURCE Display and selection of the source.

DVD MENUTo display the control menu and re-turn to the main DVD screen››› Fig. 213.

A Chapter display.

BDisplays play time duration and re-maining play time.


C

: Move the control menu window.

: Minimise the control menu win-dow.

: Maximise the control menu win-dow.

: Close the control menu.

DUse the arrow buttons to browse theDVD menu. Confirm the selection bypressing OK .

E Press to open the DVD main menu.

/ To move to the next or previouschapter.

Playback stops. The function but-ton changes to .

Playback is resumed. The func-tion button changes to .

SETTINGS This menu contains the Video (DVD)settings.

Note● The visual appearance of the DVD filmmenus and the menu options which it offersare the responsibility of the DVD manufac-turer.● The difference in behaviour of some filmswhen using the same mode is the responsi-bility of the DVD manufacturer.

212

Operating modes

● You may not be able to play video DVDswhich you have burned yourself.● The Infotainment system screen only dis-plays the image when the vehicle is stop-ped. Whilst in motion, the screen discon-nects (the image), but the audio remainsactive.

Video settings (DVD)3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

While in the DVD mode press the SETTINGSfunction button and then select the Video set-tings (DVD) option.


Format : To select the screen format. If Automatic isselected, the optimal format for the screen is set au-tomatically.

Audio channel : To select the language of the voice in-structions.

Subtitles : To select the subtitle language.

Enter/change PIN for parental settings : Parental settingspassword.

Child protection : To select the level of protection youwant to associate with DVD playback.

The options within the Video Settings (DVD)menu may vary depending on the DVD or thechapter that is playing.

The available audio channel languages andsubtitles depend on the DVD that is inserted.

All or part of the content of a video DVD canbe protected by a password (PIN) if the DVDallows parental settings. In addition, you canchoose the restriction level based on age,with 1 being the least restrictive (all audien-ces) and 8 the most restrictive (adults).

Images3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 214 Images main menu.

Using the Images menu, image files can beviewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide-show.

The image files must be stored on a compati-ble data storage device.

● Press the Infotainment button and thenselect the Images context.

● Press the SOURCE function button to selectthe source where the pictures in question arelocated.


SOURCE Selection of the source.

SELECTION Opens a list of image files.

The image viewed was obtained viaGPS localisation and upon pressingthis function button, the navigatormenu opens to start a route to thisdestination.

/

Rotate the image view 90° left orright, or by swiping your fingersacross the screen in a circular direc-tion.

Reset the view of the image.

To stop the playback of a slideshow.The function button changes to .

To continue the playback of a slide-show. The function buttonchanges to .

/ Change image PREVIOUS or NEXT,or by sliding your finger horizontallyacross the screen.

SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu. »

213

Infotainment System

Enlarging or reducing the view● Slide 2 fingers across the screen, movingthem further apart or closer together.

Requirements for viewing images

Image files Maximum resolu-tion

BMP 4MP

JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode)

JPG 64MP

GIF 4MP

PNG 4MP

Image settings

Open the Image settings menu● Press the SETTINGS function button in themain Images menu.


Image view : To adjust the image view format.

Automatic: Images scale to the size of thescreen (the image may not be displayed com-pletely).


Complete: The images are displayed fully onthe screen.

Display time : To adjust the display time of imagesduring a slideshow.

Repeat slideshow : The active slideshow is repeatedinfinitely.

Media settings

● Select the MEDIA main menu by pressingthe infotainment key and then select theMedia context.● Press the SETTINGS function button to openthe Media settings menu.



Manage Jukebox a): To import files to the jukebox or todelete existing files ››› page 209.

Mix/repeat including subfolders : Subfolders are inclu-ded in the selected playback mode ››› page 197.

Bluetooth® : Bluetooth® settings ››› page 243

WLAN a): WLAN settings ››› page 211.


Video settings : Settings for playing DVD videos orfiles.

Remove safely : To prepare external data media for ex-traction or disconnection. See also ››› page 206, In-serting or ejecting a memory card and››› page 207, External data storage device con-nected to the USB port .


a) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus.

Navigation1)

Introduction

Fig. 215 Navigation

General informationA GPS (Global Positioning System) satellitesystem locates the current position of the ve-hicle. The vehicle’s sensors measure the

1) Valid for: Navi System and Navi System Plus.214

Operating modes

distance travelled. The measurements arecompared with the stored detailed map re-sources, according to road indications storedin them. Traffic reports, if any, will also be tak-en into account in the route calculation (dy-namic route guidance ››› page 222). Using allthe data available, the Infotainment systemcalculates the optimum route to the destina-tion.

The destination is defined by entering an ad-dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta-tion or hotel.

Navigation announcements and graphic rep-resentations will guide you to your destina-tion.

Depending on the country, some functions ofthe infotainment system will not be availableon the screen when travelling higher than acertain speed. It is not a malfunction, but isdue to compliance with legislation.

CAUTIONThe navigation announcements may be in-accurate (e.g. due to out-of-date data).

Instructions for navigation

When the Infotainment system is unable to re-ceive any data from GPS satellites (tunnels,garages), navigation can still continue usingthe vehicle sensors.

Possible limitations in navigationIn areas that are not or are only partially digi-tised (e.g. insufficient definition of one-waystreets and road categories), the Infotain-ment system will still attempt to provide routeguidance.

In the case of missing or incomplete naviga-tion data, it may not be possible to determinethe exact position of the vehicle. This maymean that navigation is not as precise as usu-al.

Navigation area and update of navigationdataRoad layouts change continuously. There-fore, if the navigation data are not updated,then errors or inaccuracies may occur.

SEAT recommends updating navigation dataon a regular basis.

Updating and using navigation da-ta from an SD card

3 Only available for the model: Navi System

The SD card is factory fitted in slot 2 for SDcards.

Navigation data that is currently valid for thisunit in order to allow all functions to be usedin full.

Updating navigation dataThe current navigation data can be downloa-ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor-ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.

Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEATdealerships.

The procedure is described on the internet atwww.seat.com.

Using navigation data● Insert the memory card ››› page 206.● Wait for the testing icon to disappear.

If the inserted memory card contains naviga-tion data, the following message appears:“The source contains a valid naviga-tion database”. Navigation can be started.

Note● The inserted memory card must be pre-pared before it is ejected ››› page 206.● Navigation is not possible without the SDcard.● Do not remove the memory card whilethe navigation data is in use. This coulddamage the memory card!● The navigation memory card cannot beused as a memory for other files.● SEAT recommends using only the originalSEAT cards. The use of other memory cardscould limit its operation.

215

Infotainment System

Updating and installing navigationdata

3 Only available for the model: Navi System Plus

The Infotainment system is equipped with aninternal navigation data memory. The re-quired navigation data are already installedon the system.

The Infotainment system always requires thenavigation data that is currently valid for thisunit in order to allow all functions to be usedin full. Using an old version may lead to errorsduring navigation.

Updating navigation dataTo update navigation data visit our website:www.seat.com.

The navigation data must be installed afterdownloading. Navigation is not possible fromthe memory card.

Installing navigation dataThe installation process takes about 2 hours.

If the Infotainment system is switched off, theinstallation process is paused and will auto-matically resume when switched back on.

● Switch the ignition on.

● Insert the memory card containing the nav-igation data ››› page 206.● Press the infotainment key > Settings> System information.● Press UPDATE to import the stored naviga-tion data.● Follow the instructions displayed on thescreen.

Once installed, the memory card can be re-moved. The memory card must be preparedfor removal ››› page 206.

CAUTIONDo not remove the memory card while thenavigation data is being installed. Thememory card may be irreparably dam-aged!

Note● The navigation memory card may not beused as memory storage for other files. TheInfotainment system will not recognise thefiles saved on it.● SEAT recommends a CLASS 101) memorycard for the use of navigation data. The useof other memory cards could limit its oper-ation.

Navigation main menu

Fig. 216 Navigation main menu

Navigation functions can only be used if thenavigation data for the area where the vehi-cle is driving is available in the infotainmentsystem.

The Navigation main menu allows you to se-lect a new destination, call up a previouslyused or stored destination and search forpoints of interest.

Opening the main Navigation menu● Press the Infotainment button and thenselect the Navigation context to open thelast menu that was open in navigation.● If the Navigation main menu is not dis-played, select Navigation again until themain Navigation menu is displayed.

1) The speed class of an SD card.216

Operating modes

● OR: Press the function button to returnmenu by menu to the Navigation menu.

Navigation main menu function buttonsand indicators


A The split screen is displayed ››› page 221.

B Messages and function buttons on the mapdisplay ››› page 222.

NEW DEST : To enter a new destination ››› page 217.

ROUTE : During route guidance ››› page 218.

MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destina-tions ››› page 219.

POI : Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta-tions and restaurants) within a particular search area››› page 220.

VIEW : To modify or activate or deactivate the splitscreen and show POI ››› Fig. 216 A ››› page 221.

SETTINGS : Open the Navigation Settingsmenu.

New destination (entering the des-tination)

Fig. 217 Search screen.

● In the Navigation main menu, press theNew destination function button.● Press the OPTIONS function button and se-lect the desired destination entry type(Search, Address, POI or On the map).● Using voice control*, if you say Town, streetand number, without pauses, and then the in-struction “Start Route Guidance” a route tothe given destination will start.

SearchSearch for addresses and Points of Interestusing the keypad to enter them ››› Fig. 217.

For cities, post codes and points of interest,the full details must be entered. You can alsosearch for points of interest by names or cat-

egories. When necessary, enter the name ofthe city to refine the search.

››› Fig. 217

A Press to open the cursor buttons (, ),which allow you to move within the text.

SteeringWhen narrowing down the destination ad-dress, please note that every entry restrictsthe available range of subsequent selections.

To enter an address press the function but-tons in the following order:

● Country, City (or postcode), Centre(starts the route to the centre of the indicatedcity), Street, Number, Junction, LAST DES-TINATIONS, START (starts route guidance tothe selected destination).

On the map● Select the destination on the map or enterit using GPS coordinates and confirm withOK .


Store : Store the point of interest in the destinationmemory ››› page 219.

Edit : Edit the destination or enter another one.

Route options : Setting route options, see Naviga-tion Settings > Route options. »

217

Infotainment System


Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected pointof interest.

After starting route guidance

Fig. 218 Route calculation.

When starting route guidance, the route iscalculated based on the data that have beenselected in the Route options menu.

Three alternative routes are proposed››› Fig. 218. These 3 routes correspond to theselectable route options: Economical, Fastand Short.

Blue route: Economic route.Red route: Fastest route.Orange route: Shortest route to thedestination, even if it results in longertravelling time.

–––

● Select the desired route by pressing it.

The route criteria settings in the Route op-tions menu are modified accordingly.

If a route is not selected, the route guidancestarts automatically after approx. one minuteaccording to the setting selected in Routeoptions.

Once the route has been calculated, the sys-tem gives the first navigation announcement.Up to 3 navigation announcements are givenbefore a turn.

● Press the adjustment knob to listen to thelast audible navigation instruction.

The indicated distances depend to a greatextent on the type of road and the trafficspeed. On motorways, for example, naviga-tion announcements are received much earli-er than in urban traffic.

The corresponding navigation announce-ments are also given on roads with severallanes that split, and on roundabouts, for ex-ample: “Leave the roundabout at the secondexit.”

A navigation announcement informs youwhen you have reached your “destination”.

A navigation announcement informing youthat you have reached the “destination area”is given if the exact destination cannot bereached.

During dynamic route guidance, you re-ceive information about reported traffic con-gestion on the route. An additional navigationannouncement is given if the route is recalcu-lated.

During a navigation announcement, you canchange its volume using the button .

For other announcement settings, selectNavigation > Settings > Navigationannouncements.

Note● If you miss a turning during route guid-ance and are currently unable to turn back,keep on driving until the navigation systemoffers a new route.● The quality of the announcements andrecommendations depends on the naviga-tion data available and any reported trafficproblems.

Route

In the Navigation main menu, press the Routefunction button.

The Route function button is only displayedwith route guidance activated.


STOP GUIDANCE : Aborts current route guidance.

218

Operating modes


ENTER DESTINATION : To enter a new destination or anew stopover ››› page 217.

CONGESTION AHEAD : To exclude a section of theroute. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route func-tion button and then CANCEL CONGESTION .

CHANGE ROUTE a): The map of the calculated routeappears and by holding a finger on the route anddragging the finger across said map, the route ischanged to the road(s) that you want and the newroute is then recalculated.

ROUTE DETAILS : View route information.


My destinations (destination mem-ory)

Fig. 219 List of saved routes.

The stored destinations can be selected fromthe My destinations menu.

● Press the My destinations function button inthe main Navigation menu.● Select the desired function button.STORE POSITION , ROUTES , DESTINATIONS ,LAST DESTINATIONS OR HOME ADDRESS .

Store position● By pressing the STORE POSITION functionbutton, the current position is stored as aFlagged destination in the Destinationmemory.

To save the stored position permanently as aflagged destination, change the name ofthe position in the destination memory. Oth-erwise, the saved position is overwritten whenanother flagged destination is saved.

● Mark the Flagged destination in thedestination memory.● Press the Store function button.

The name can be changed in the followinginput window. Press the function button tostore the destination.

RoutesIn the Route mode, you can define variousdestinations (final destination and stopovers).

The starting point of a route is always thevehicle’s current position. The destination isthe end point of a route. Stopover destina-tions are driven to before the destination.

● In the Navigation main menu, press theMy Destinations function button.● Press the ROUTES function button.

If you have not stored any routes or want tocreate a new route, press the New route func-tion button and then follow the instructions asfor a new destination, before pressing Store .

Pressing on a stored route brings up the fol-lowing function buttons:


Delete : To delete a stored route.

Edit : To edit and store a route.

Start : To start route guidance.

Function buttons and indications in the Newroute or Edit menu

Function button or message: function ormeaning

Stopover.

Destination.

... Estimated time of arrival. »

219

Infotainment System

Function button or message: function ormeaning

... Calculated distance to destination.

... Estimated travelling time.

... Distance to the next stopover.

Press on the destination to display thefunction buttons

Delete destination.

Starting route guidance direct to the se-lected destination. The stages are omit-ted.

Opening the detailed view of the desti-nation in question.

Available function buttons

New desti-nation Add a new destination.

Destina-tions

Adding a new destination from Mydestinations.

Storing To store the created route in the routememory.

Start Start route guidance.

Calculate To update the calculated distance andestimated arrival time.a)

Stop To stop active route guidance.b)

Available function buttons

Moving a stopover or a destination toanother position on the list. Press anddrag to move the destination.

a) Only displayed with route guidance activated andwhen a destination has been added to the tour.b) Only displayed with route guidance activated.

Last destinationsList of last destinations.

My destinations● Press the Options function button and se-lect the desired function button.


Destination memory : View of destinations stored man-ually and from imported vCards ››› page 224, Im-porting vCards (electronic business cards).

Favourites : List of destinations stored as favourites.

Contacts : List of phone book contacts that have astored address (postal address).

Home addressOnly one address or position can be storedas the home address at any one time.

Pressing will start guidance to the storedhome address.

If a home address has not yet been stored,an address can be assigned.

Assigning the home address for the first time:

Position : Press to store the vehicle's current positionas the home address.

Address : Press to enter the home address manually.

Editing the home address:

The home address can be edited in the Naviga-tion settings > Manage memory menu.

Special destinations (POI)

Fig. 220 Points of interest on the map.

The points of interest saved in the memoryare divided into different categories. Eachcategory of special destinations has a sym-bol assigned to it.

In the Map settings menu, you can indicatethe special destinations that you want to

220

Operating modes

display on the map. Up to 10 categories canbe selected.

Selecting a point of interest on the map


1There are several points of interest in the area.Press this symbol to open a list of points of in-terest.

2The only point of interest in this zone. Press thesymbol to open the detailed view of the point ofinterest.

Quick POI searchIn the Navigation main menu, press the POIsfunction button and the three main catego-ries will appear. Alternatively, enter the nameof the point of interest to be searched usingthe new destination keypad, or pressSearch nearby on the map ››› table on

page 221.

View

In the Navigation main menu, press the Viewfunction button.


Map display in two dimensions (con-ventional).


Map display in three dimensions (bird'seye view).

The places of interest and well-knownbuildings are also shown in detail andin colour.

a) To display the destination on the map.

a) To display the route on the map.

Auto /Day / Night

To switch between day and night for-mat.

SPLITSCREEN Show the split screen ››› page 221.

POI Show special destinations.

a) Only displayed with route guidance activated.

Split screen

Fig. 221 Split screen displayed.

The split screen ››› Fig. 221 A shows the in-formation detailed below:

● Pressing the name displays a menu with thefollowing options:


Audio : Current audio source.

Compass : Displays a compass with the current di-rection and position of the vehicle (street name).

Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres,POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them bringsup additional information

FREQUENT ROUTES a): Information on the user's mostfrequent routes.

Position : current vehicle position in coordinates andGPS status (satellite reception).

a) Only shown when route guidance is not active orwhen predictive route guidance is active.

Press the function button to close the splitscreen.

At any moment during navigation, pressinginside the map will make a pop-up menu ap-pear with the following functions:


Clicking on the map : Shows the details of the selectedpoint, street name or coordinates

Only when you press on an icon on the map: »

221

Infotainment System


POI : name of the point of interest (when only oneappears on the map).

Group of POIs : more points of interest (when youpress on the map on various POIs grouped to-gether).

FAVOURITE : name of the favourite.

HOME ADDRESS : Home address.

Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.

Add stopover : only when you have an active route.

Search nearby : enters in the search menu, but onlyfor the area around the point selected on the map.

Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active)

Map display

Fig. 222 Messages and function buttons onthe map display.

Function buttons and messages on themap display.To activate function buttons and , pressfunction button .


Current altitude indicator.

To centre the vehicle position on the map.

To centre the destination on the map. On-ly displayed if either Display destinationon map or Display route on the map is se-lected ››› page 221.

To change the orientation of the map(north-facing or direction of travel). Onlyavailable in 2D mode.

Map scale. To change the scale, turn theadjustment knob or move two fingers to-gether or apart on the screen.

Selecting automatic scaling. If the func-tion is active, the symbol is displayed inblue.

Briefly increases the scale of the map(zoom) The selected scale is displayedagain after a few seconds.

Mute or repeat the last announcement,change the announcement volume.

Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip-ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data aredisplayed. Select Navigation > Settings >Map > Show road signs.

Traffic bulletins and dynamic desti-nation guidance (TRAFFIC)

Fig. 223 Traffic reports

The Infotainment system constantly receivestraffic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back-ground, if a traffic information station istuned.

Traffic bulletins are displayed on the mapwith symbols ››› page 223, Traffic reports onmap (selection) and they are required dy-namic destination guidance ››› page 223,Dynamic route guidance.

List of available traffic reports● Press the Infotainment button and thenselect the Traffic context.

222

Operating modes

Dynamic route guidanceIn order for dynamic route guidance to func-tion, Dynamic route must be activated in theroute options.

If a traffic report is received that affects theroute being travelled, an alternative route willbe searched for if the system calculates thattime can be saved.

If, on the other hand, the alternative routedoes not save time, the route will continuewith the traffic jam. In both cases, an an-nouncement will be made.

Shortly before reaching the announced traf-fic jam, it is indicated again.

Avoiding a traffic jam by following the instruc-tions of a traffic bulletin does not always savetime, for example, if alternative routes arecongested. The effectiveness of dynamicnavigation depends on the traffic bulletinsthat are received.

The rest of the route that has to be travelledcan be manually excluded to force its recal-culation ››› page 218.

Traffic reports on map (selection)

Symbol: Meaning

: Slow traffic

: Traffic jam

Symbol: Meaning

: Accident

: Slippery road surface (ice or snow)

: Slippery road surface

: Danger

: Road works

: Strong wind

: Road closed to traffic

During route guidance, traffic incidents thatdo not affect the calculated route calculatedare displayed in grey.

The length of a traffic jam on the calculatedroute is shown by a red line.

Incidents that affect the calculated route andthat have led to the recalculation of the routeare shown in orange.

The position of a symbol indicates the start ofthe traffic jam if it is precisely specified in thetraffic bulletin.

Predictive navigation

Fig. 224 Predictive navigation

When you activate Predictive navigation, thesystem detects and stores in the backgroundroutes that are frequently followed, withoutthem being active destination routes.

This function has no navigation announce-ments unless the user requires them by press-ing the right thumbwheel of the multifunctionsteering wheel.

● On the main screen of the Navigation menu,in the pop-up window, press theFREQUENT ROUTES button. To display fre-

quently followed routes press theShow on map button ››› Fig. 224.

223

Infotainment System

Importing vCards (electronic busi-ness cards)

Importing vCards to the destination mem-ory● Insert the data storage device with the stor-ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainmentsystem ››› page 197.● In the Navigation main menu, press theSETTINGS function button.● In the Navigation settings menu, pressthe Import destinations function button.● Select the data carrier with the vCardssaved in the list.● Press Import all vCards from this folder .● Confirm the import notice with the OKfunction button.

Saved vCards will now be in the destinationsmemory ››› page 219.

NoteOnly one address per vCard can be impor-ted. In the event any vCards have multipleaddresses, only the main address will beimported.

Navigation with images

Fig. 225 Images main menu.

Selecting an image and starting routeguidance● Press the Infotainment button and thenselect the Images context.● Press the SOURCE ››› Fig. 225 function but-ton and select the data storage device wherethe images are stored.● If the image displayed was taken using GPSlocalisation, the function button will appear.Press to start guidance to a destination.

Road signs indication

The road sign indication must be active in theNavigation settings menu ››› page 225.

If there are road signs stored in the navigationdata for the route you are driving on, the sys-

tem can display them on the map (e.g. aspeed limit).

Take into account the age of the navigationdata and the limitations of the navigation sys-tem ››› page 214!

Recognition of road signs

Some vehicles have a road sign recognitioncamera. If the vehicle has road sign recogni-tion and it is active, road signs detected bythe system will be displayed on the map,along with additional information.

Read and take into account the informationand indications of the road signs recognitionsystem ››› page 78.

Route guidance in Demo mode

If demo mode is activated in the Navigationsettings menu, an additional pop-up win-dow opens when you start route guidance.

● Pressing the Demo mode function buttonstarts a “virtual route guidance” to the desti-nation you have entered.● If you press the Normal function button, a“real route guidance” starts.

The development and operation of virtualroute guidance is compatible with the

224

Operating modes

development and operation of real routeguidance.

Virtual route guidance is repeated afterreaching the fictitious destination and re-starts from the starting point, if it is not inter-rupted beforehand.

When the starting point of the Demo mode ismanually set Navigation settings menu,the virtual route guidance starts from that po-sition.

A manually entered starting point is overwrit-ten with the current location of the vehicle, ifthe vehicle starts moving.

NoteDeactivate the Demo mode after use, oth-erwise you will always have to selectwhether to start a virtual route or normalroute before starting route guidance.

Navigation settings

● In the Navigation main menu, press theSETTINGS function button.


Route options : To make the route calculation adjust-ments.


Suggest 3 alternative routes : After starting routeguidance, 3 alternative routes are proposed››› page 218.

Route : Route type selection.

Economical : Route calculation, taking econom-ic aspects into account.

Fast : The fastest route to the destination.

Short : The shortest route to the destination,even if it results in longer travelling time.

Most frequent routes : Information on the user's mostfrequent routes.

Dynamic route : Dynamic route guidance activateswhen a TMC is received ››› page 222.

Avoid motorways and highways : Motorways will beexcluded from the route calculation whereverpossible.

Avoid ferries and motorail trains : Ferries and motorailtrains will not be taken into account for the routecalculation, wherever possible.

Avoid toll roads : Toll roads will be excluded fromthe route calculation, whenever possible.

Avoid tunnels : Tunnels will be excluded from theroute calculation, whenever possible.

Avoid routes requiring toll stickers : Mandatory tollstickers (stickers certifying that the toll has beenpaid) will be excluded from the route calculationwhenever possible.


Show available toll stickers a): To mark the availabletoll stickers on the list( Avoid routes requiring toll stickers must be active).Routes requiring toll stickers will be taken into ac-count in the route calculation if it is marked thatthe toll sticker is available.

Include trailer : Calculate the route and arrivaltime, depending on whether a trailer is being tow-ed.

Map : To adjust the map display settings.

Show road signs : The road signs stored in the navi-gation data for the road you are driving on are dis-played during route guidance ››› page 224.

Lane guidance : During route guidance, an addi-tional indication is displayed to recommend alane when driving, and when turning on roads withseveral lanes. Only if the data bank contains infor-mation about the area that is being driventhrough.

Show favourites : The destinations saved as favour-ites on the map are displayed ().

Show POIs

Select categories for POIs : To select the POI cate-gories shown on the map ››› page 220.

Show brand logos for POIs : Displays logos of theselected special destinations categories (e.g.displays logos of service stations).

Manage memory : To make adjustments to the storeddestinations. »

225

Infotainment System


Sort contacts : To select the sequential order ofagenda entries recorded with postal addresses,see also ››› page 219.

Define home address : To assign or edit a home ad-dress, see also ››› page 220.

Import destinations (SD/USB) : To import digital busi-ness cards (vCards) into the destination memory››› page 224.

Delete user data : To delete stored destinations (e.g.Last destinations or the Destinationmemory).

Navigation announcements : To change the navigationannouncements settings.

Volume : To adjust the volume of audible drivingrecommendations.

Entertainment fading (nav. announcements) : Set thevolume of the active audio source during naviga-tion announcements.

No navigation announcements during calls : During atelephone conversation, audio driving recommen-dations will not be given.

Note: My POIs : Audible warning when approachinga special destination.

Speed limits : Shows the speed limits, depending onthe road, of the country that is being driven through.

Fuel options : To change fuel related settings.


Select preferred petrol station : The brand of the se-lected service station is given priority in specialdestination search results.

Fuel warning : The fuel warning is active.

If the fuel level reaches the reserve, an appropri-ate warning is generated that enables the servicestation search.

Version information : Information about stored naviga-tion data.

Advanced settings : For making advanced changes tothe navigation settings.

Time display : Indication during route guidance.

Time of arrival : The estimated time of arrival atthe destination is displayed.

Running time : The envisaged travelling time tothe destination is displayed.

Status line : View during route guidance.

Destination : The calculated distance to thedestination is shown.

Next stopover : The calculated distance to thenext stopover is shown.

Note: National border crossed : Indication of thespeed limits of the country in question whencrossing a border.


Demo mode : When the Demo mode is active androute guidance is started, a virtual guide to the en-tered destination may be started ››› page 224.

Define demo mode starting point : If the Demomode is active and the vehicle is stopped, a fic-titious starting point can be set for the virtualroute guidance.

Waypoints mode b): To start Offroad navigation.

a) This functionality will depend on the country.b) Only available on model: Navi System Plus.

Navigation in Offroadmode*1)

Introduction

Offroad* navigation is a function for offroaddriving that provides directions in “non-digi-tised areas” at low speeds.

Non-digitised areas are areas about whichthe system does not have information for thestreets or terrain. It does not detect streets,buildings or natural limits such as mountainsor rivers, although they may be shown on themap.

1) Only available for the model: Navi System Plus226

Operating modes

Offroad* navigation is not suitable for drivingon conventional roads as it does not detectone-way streets, motorway entries or similar.

Offroad Navigation Menu

Fig. 226 Offroad Navigation Menu start

Press the SETTINGS function button in themain Navigation menu.

● In the menu, press the Waypoint modefunction button.● The Offroad Navigation menu opens››› Fig. 226.

Function buttons in the Offroad Navigationmenu


RECORD : Initiates the plotting of an Offroad tour.


MEMORY : Opens a list allowing the selection of astored Offroad tour.

EXIT : Ends Offroad navigation.

Recording an Offroad tour

Fig. 227 Recording an Offroad tour

An Offroad tour is formed by a series of stor-ed waypoints.

Starting recording● In the Offroad Navigation menu, in the pop-up window press the RECORD pop-up button.● In the pop-up window, the user is able toplot the tour with a given destination or startplotting the route without giving a final desti-nation.● Starts plotting the route.

The offroad markers can be recorded by in-dicating a manual waypoint.

● In the Offroad Navigation menu, press theADD WAYPOINT function button. The tour way-

points defined manually are shown on themap by a marker.

Ending recording● Press the STOP RECORDING function buttonin the main Offroad Navigation menu.

Managing stored Offroad tours

Fig. 228 Offroad Navigation menu, storedtours

● Press the MEMORY function button in theOffroad Navigation menu.● A list of stored Offroad tours opens, if thereare any. »

227

Infotainment System

When a tour is selected, the following iconswill appear ››› Fig. 228:

Export the tour to an SD card.Edit the name of the tour.Delete the tour.Load tour


IMPORT : allows the import of an Offroad route in“.GPX” format.

Loading an Offroad tourWhen the Offroad tour is selected, press Play and the selected tour will be loaded ontothe Navigation system.

Creating an Offroad tour

Fig. 229 Offroad route guidance mode

Start route guidance● Loads the stored Offroad tour.● Starting off in a stored route is not detectedby the system automatically.

Setup


Invert : Reverses the direction of the stored Offroadtour.

Next point : Starts the Offroad tour from the nearestpoint.

Start : Starts the complete Offroad tour.

When route guidance starts, the systemswitches to the map view.

Stopping route guidance● Press the OPTIONS button on the screenand then press Stop .

End waypoint navigation● Press the Exit function button in the Off-road Navigation menu

WARNINGTerrain features are disregarded duringroute guidance Drive slowly and followingthe instructions in order to perform the ma-noeuvre as far as possible!

● The general direction of travel is indica-ted straight ahead by direction arrows inthe Infotainment System pop-up window››› Fig. 229 A .

NoteIf an Offroad tour is being recorded, this isautomatically stored if Offroad navigationis discontinued.

Vehicle Menu

Introduction to using the Vehiclemenu

Press the Infotainment button andthen select the Vehicle context to accessthe main menu with the following options:

● VIEW● RADIO or MEDIA (to control playback in ra-dio or media mode)● PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen)● SETTINGS ››› page 92

With the function button VIEW you can ac-cess the following information:

● INSTRUMENT PANEL ››› page 229● SPORT* ››› page 229

228

Operating modes

● OFFROAD* ››› page 230● CONSUMERS ››› page 230● DRIVING DATA ››› page 231● ECOTRAINER ››› page 231● VEHICLE STATUS ››› page 232

Instrument panel*3 Valid for vehicles equipped with the SEAT Digi-tal Cockpit

Fig. 230 Instrument panel

Press the Instrument panel button to choosefrom the various display options and custom-ise the information that appears in the SEATDigital Cockpit ››› page 70.

Automatic ViewPre-set information depending on the Drivingmode.

Classic ViewThe needles are displayed at full length.

Views 1, 2, 3Customise the information that appears inthe digital cockpit. The user chooses which todisplay, and in what order, by moving a fingervertically over the dials.

Depending on the version, the Views can bememorised by existing the menu or keepingthe View button pressed.

Sport*

Fig. 231 SPORT menu

Fig. 232 SPORT Menu Lap timer

● Press the Infotainment button andthen select the Vehicle context.● Press the VIEW function button and selectSPORT.

If the corresponding equipment is available,the following information appears in theSport option ››› Fig. 231:

Instantaneous power expressed in kWG forcesTurbo pressure, expressed in bar (“bar”),kilopascals (“kPa”) or in pounds persquare inch (“psi”). Press the Settingsbutton to change the units of pressure››› page 173Coolant temperatureOil temperature

Only 3 of these items of information can bedisplayed at the same time, but the user »

1.2.3.

4.5.

229

Infotainment System

chooses which to display, and in what order,by moving the finger vertically over the dials.

Press the NEXT button to bring up the Laptimer1) menu that is described below››› Fig. 232:

Analogue lap timerNew timing is started by pressing on thesurface of the digital lap timer +.Stop lap timer/Lap time.The analogue lap timer's time is stoppedfor 5 seconds. After 5 seconds, the ana-logue lap timer shows the real time again.Statistics/delete last lap time.

1

2

3

4

5

Offroad*

Fig. 233 Offroad CAR Menu.

● Press the Infotainment button andthen select the Vehicle context.● Press the VIEW function button and selectOFFROAD.

If the corresponding equipment is available,the information that appears is the following:

Compass.Turning angle of steered wheels.Coolant temperature.Lubricating oil temperature

1.2.3.4.

Only 2 of these items of information can bedisplayed at the same time, but the userchooses which to display, and in what order,by moving the finger vertically over the dials.

Consumers

Fig. 234 Convenience consumers.

Access information about the vehicle’s mainconvenience consumers. It is shown via aconsumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h)2).

1) This lap timer is independent of the one thatappears on the instrument panel ››› page 81.2) In the case of Gas (CNG) vehicles, the units arein kg/h.

230

Operating modes

Driving data

Fig. 235 Driving data.

The on-board computer has 3 memories.They can be used to display: distance, time,average speed, average consumption andrange.

1. Since startIndication and storage of distance travelledand consumption values between the ignitionbeing turned on and it being turned off.

2. Since refuellingDisplay and storage of the values for the jour-ney and the consumption. By refuelling, thememory will be erased automatically.

3. Long-termThe memory records the values for a specificnumber of partial trips, up to a total of 19

hours and 59 minutes or 99 hours and 59 mi-nutes, or 1999.9 km (mi) or 9999 km (mi), de-pending on the model of instrument panel.

When one of these values is reached (de-pending on the version of the instrument pan-el), the memory is automatically deleted andstarts counting again from 0.

Ecotrainer

Fig. 236 CAR Ecotrainer menu.

Fig. 237 Driving style symbols.

Open the ECOTRAINER Menu● While the vehicle is stopped, press the info-tainment button , followed by Vehi-cle context.● Press the VIEW function button and selectECOTRAINER.

Provides information about your driving style.The information on driving style is only evalu-ated and displayed when moving forward.

∅ ECO points: indication on driving styleIndicates driving style efficiency since starton a scale of 0 to 100. The higher the valuedisplayed, the more efficient the driving style.Press on the display for more information.Statistics are shown for the last 30 minutes ofdriving from the start. If 30 minutes have notelapsed, the values of the last trip are shownin grey. »

231

Infotainment System

∅ l/100 km: Average fuel consumptionShows the average fuel consumption. Thevalue is calculated using the kilometres trav-elled since start as a reference. Press on thedisplay for more information. Statistics areshown for the last 30 minutes of driving fromthe start. If 30 minutes have not elapsed, thevalues of the last trip are shown in grey.

Eco tips: Tips on how to save fuelPress the ECO tips button to get advice onhow to save fuel. These tips can only be con-sulted while the vehicle is stopped.

Efficient driving style assessmentThe representation uses different elements toshow driving style efficiency.

Indication ››› Fig. 236: Meaning

1To the left of the columns are different symbolsthat provide information about the current driv-ing style ››› table on page 232.

2

The white column is an indication of where theefficiency graph starts (from left to right).It shows the position of the evaluation that iscurrently being performed.

3

Bars to illustrate acceleration.The position of the car represents acceleration.If the speed is constant, the car remains in thecentral zone. If it accelerates or brakes, the carmoves backwards or forwards respectively.

Indication ››› Fig. 236: Meaning

4

Columns representing driving style efficiency.Horizontally, the columns represent retrospec-tive driving efficiency, and move from left toright approximately every 5 seconds. The high-er the columns, the more efficient the drivingstyle.The colour of the sky represents the average ofthe last 3 minutes. The colour changes fromgrey (less efficient) to blue (more efficient).

Symbols ››› Fig. 237: Meaning

A Thinking ahead. Sudden changes in accelera-tion lower the efficiency of the driving style.

B Gear recommendation.

C Current speed has a negative impact on fuelconsumption.

D Ecological driving style.

Vehicle status

Fig. 238 Standard representation: vehicle sta-tus.

Fig. 239 Standard representation: vehicle sta-tus.

Press the Vehicle status button to access infor-mation on the Vehicle status messagesand Start-Stop system.

232

Operating modes

The Vehicle status messages are dis-played ››› Fig. 238, in addition to being speci-fied on the corresponding button.

According to the parties affected by thesemessages, they will be shown in different col-ours (depending on their importance) on thevehicle's screen.

To access the Tyre Pressure Loss Indi-cator, press the FORWARD or BACK keys.

From this same menu, use the SET buttonto store the tyre pressures.

NoteThe values shown on the figures ››› Fig. 234,››› Fig. 235, ››› Fig. 238 and ››› Fig. 239 areindicative and may vary depending on theequipment.

Telephone

General information


Telephone functions can only be used if thereis a mobile phone connected by Bluetooth tothe infotainment system ››› page 235.

To do this, the phone must have the Blue-tooth® function activated.

The instructions shown on the screen for thetelephone menus will depend on the mobiletelephone used.

Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices. Forfurther information on compatible Bluetooth®

products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer orcheck on the internet.

Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele-phone and of any accessories.

If you detect any operating issues betweenyour mobile telephone and the Infotainmentsystem, restart your mobile by switching it offand on again.

Some functions and setup can only be per-formed when the vehicle is stopped and arenot available on all mobile telephones.

You may experience poor reception or maybe cut off in areas where the signal is weak.

Most electronic devices are shielded againstHF (high-frequency) signals. In any case, theelectronic equipment may not be protectedfrom the HF signals of the telephone man-agement system. This may cause interfer-ence.

WARNINGGeneral, mandatory, legal and country-specific instructions and laws for the use ofmobile phones inside the vehicle must al-ways be considered.

WARNINGSpeaking by telephone and using the mo-bile telephone management system whilstdriving can distract you from the road andcause an accident.● In areas of little coverage your call maybe cut off and you may not be able to makeeven emergency calls.

WARNINGMobile telephones may interfere with andalter the correct operation of pacemakersif they are carried directly over them.● Maintain a minimum distance of at least20 centimetres between the aerials of themobile telephone and the pacemaker.● Do not carry your switched-on mobiletelephone in your breast pocket directlyover the pacemaker.● If you suspect interference, switch off themobile telephone immediately.

CAUTIONHigh speeds, poor weather or road condi-tions and the quality of reception can all »

233

Infotainment System

affect the audio quality of a telephone con-versation in the vehicle.

Note● Restrictions on the use of devices usingBluetooth® technology may apply in somecountries. For further information, contactthe local authorities.● If you wish to connect a device via Blue-tooth®, consult the safety warnings in its in-struction manual. Only use compatibleBluetooth® devices.● Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-cle may provoke noise in the speakers.● Some networks may not recognise all ofthe language characters or offer all of theservices.

Places with special regulations

In the majority of cases, these places aresignposted, but not always clearly. They in-clude, for example:

● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks● The lower decks of boats and ferries.● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquidgas (such as propane or butane).

● places where the air is laden with chemi-cals or particles such as flour, dust or metalpowder.● all other places where the vehicle enginemust be switched off.

WARNINGSwitch off the mobile phone in areas with arisk of explosion! The mobile telephone canautomatically connect to the mobile tele-phone network again if it loses the Blue-tooth® connection to the telephone man-agement system.

CAUTIONIn areas where special regulations apply orthe use of mobile telephones is prohibited,both the telephone and the telephonemanagement system must always beswitched off. Interference may be causedwith sensitive technical and medical equip-ment, possibly resulting in a malfunction ordamage to the equipment.

Bluetooth®

Bluetooth® technology allows a mobile tele-phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele-

phone management system. Prior pairing be-tween the two is required for this purpose.

Some Bluetooth® mobile telephones connectautomatically when turning on the ignition if aconnection has been previously established.Its Bluetooth® function must be activated forthis purpose, and there must be no Bluetooth®

connection with other devices.

Bluetooth® connections are free.

Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth® SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth profiles®

When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-ephone management system, a data ex-change takes place via one of the Bluetooth®

profiles.

● Hands-free telephone profile (HFP): theHFP can be used to manage calls through theinfotainment system.● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile allowsaudio to be transmitted with stereo quality. Itmay require connecting other profiles formanaging and controlling playback.● Phone book access profile (PBAP): Allowsphone book contents to be downloaded fromthe mobile telephone.

234

Operating modes

● Message profile (MAP):1) It allows shortmessages (SMS) to be downloaded andsynchronised.

NoteThe mobile telephone's button and warningtones should be off. Where necessary, dis-connect the headset from the mobile tele-phone you wish to connect to the system.

Pairing and connecting a mobiletelephone to the Infotainment sys-tem

In order to manage a mobile telephone viathe Infotainment system, it is necessary topair both devices once.

For your safety, pairing should be done whenthe vehicle is stationary. In some countries it isnot possible to perform the pairing with thevehicle running.

Conditions● The ignition must be switched on.● The Bluetooth® function of the mobilephone and the Infotainment system must beactive and visible.

● The keypad lock on the mobile telephonemust be deactivated.

Follow instructions in the manual for the mo-bile telephone.

During the pairing process, it is necessary toenter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.

Pairing a mobile telephone● Press the infotainment button >Phone > Find telephone > Search re-sults.

OR:● Press the infotainment button >Phone > Settings > Select mobilephone > Search results.

OR:● Press the infotainment button >Phone > Settings > Bluetooth > Finddevices> Search results.

OR:● Make the connection from the settingsmenu of the mobile phone itself.

The name of your Infotainment system will bedisplayed on the main Telephone screen and

you can edit this name via the Bluetoothsettings menu.

The search process can take up to 1 minute.

As soon as the search is completed, thenames of the Bluetooth® devices found aredisplayed on-screen.

● Select the Bluetooth® device you want toconnect. Additional data may need to be en-tered.● Use your mobile telephone to enter andconfirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis-play of the infotainment system.● If more Bluetooth® profile pairing requestsare received on the mobile telephone, makesure to reply to them.

OR:● Compare the PIN code shown on the dis-play of the Infotainment system with the oneshown on the mobile phone. If they match,confirm on both devices.

Now, the infotainment system and the mobilephone will be connected to each other.

When the pairing has been finalized correct-ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. Thephone book, call list and SMS messages stor-ed in the mobile phone will be loaded once »


235

Infotainment System

the requests have been accepted in the mo-bile phone. After downloading, the data willbe available on the Infotainment system.

Pairing and connection of mobile tele-phonesYou can pair up to 20 mobile telephones tothe Infotainment system, but the number of si-multaneous connections varies:

● Media System Colour: a phone connectedto the hands-free profile and the same or adifferent one as Bluetooth® audio.● Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo-bile phones simultaneously connected to thehands-free profile, and one of them as Blue-tooth® audio.● Navi System Plus: two mobile phones simul-taneously connected to the hands-free pro-file and one of them or a third one connectedto the Bluetooth® audio.

When the Infotainment system is switched on,it connects to the last connected mobile tele-phone. If it is not possible to connect to thismobile telephone, the system will try to con-nect to the next mobile telephone on the listof paired devices.

The maximum range of the connection is ap-prox. 10 metres. The connection will be inter-rupted if this distance is exceeded. The con-nection is automatically re-established as

soon as the device is once again within Blue-tooth® range.

If the maximum number of paired devices isreached and you want to pair another one,the system will automatically replace theleast recent one with it. If it is to replace an-other one, the user must delete that one first.Do do this:

● Press the SETTINGS function button in thetelephone context.● Press the function button Bluetooth set-tings > Paired devices.● In the list of linked devices, press the func-tion button after the mobile phone to bedeleted, and then press Delete to confirmthe process.

WARNINGDo not perform the pairing and connectionprocess while driving. This may cause anaccident!

NoteCheck that there are no requests pendingacceptance in your mobile phone. If thereare, this could block some of the functionsin the Telephone menu.

Telephone main menu

Fig. 241 Phone main menu.

Assign a user profileThe phonebook, the call lists and the speeddial buttons are assigned to a user profile andremain stored on the telephone managementsystem. This information will be available ev-ery time the mobile telephone is connected.

After the first connection, it will take a few mi-nutes for the data from the linked mobilephone to be available in the system. The nexttime that the mobile telephone is connectedthe phonebook is updated automatically.

If the mobile phonebook has been modifiedwhile connected, a manual update of thephonebook data can be started from theUser profile settings menu.

Telephone management can store a maxi-mum of 4 profiles for mobile phones. If you

236

Operating modes

wish to pair another mobile phone, the oldestuser profile will be replaced.

Telephone management system functionbuttons● Press the infotainment button andthen select the Telephone context to accessthe Telephone main menu.


1Name of connected mobile tele-phone. Press the icon to the left toconnect another mobile phone.

2 Speed-dial buttons, connected tel-ephone contacts favourites.

3 a)

To change to another telephoneconnected to the hands-free profile.Only visible when there are two tele-phones connected as hands-free.

DIAL NO. Open the numeric keypad››› page 238.

CONTACTS To open the phonebook of the con-nected telephone.

Text mes-sagea) To open the SMS menu.

ACTIVATEb)Activate the voice control of theconnected mobile phone (compati-ble with Android and Apple devices).

CALLS To open call lists of the connectedmobile telephone ››› page 241.


SETTINGS To open the Phone settingsmenu.

a) Not available for the Media System Colour model.b) Only valid for the Media System Colour model.

Instructions and symbols of thephone management system

Fig. 242 Active call.

Fig. 243 Conference call.

Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 242

AName of the mobile operator of the connec-ted device.

B

Stored telephone number or name. If thename stored in the phonebook has an as-signed photo, it can be displayed: selectTelephone > Settings > Userprofile > Show pictures forcontacts*.

To accept a call.

To end a call.

OR: To reject an incoming call.

To mute or to reactivate the ring tone duringan incoming call.

To mute the microphone during an activecall and to reactivate it. »

237

Infotainment System

Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 242

The active call is put on hold. While on holdthe listener will not hear the conversation. Toreactivate it, press the call accept button .To reject it, press the reject button .

a)

Press to add a participant to the active call.

Connected mobile telephone charge status.

Strength of the signal received by the mo-bile telephone.

a) Not available for the Media System Colour model.

Multiple callsThe telephony management system allowsthe user to interact with up to three calls onthe screen.

Only one of the calls can be active.

Conference callThe user can merge several calls into a singleone by making a conference call by pressingbutton 1). There must be a minimum of twocalls for this to work. Once the conferencecall has started, the user can add up to 5 par-ticipants.

Once the conference call is established, theuser can consult the list of participants bypressing on the conference call image››› Fig. 243 C .

Depending on the mobile device, the callfrom a conference call participant can behung up or excluded from the conference callbut kept on a separate call.

WARNINGRemember that the driver should not oper-ate the mobile phone while driving.

NoteMulti-call and conference call functionali-ties are subject to the services associatedwith the user's SIM card.

Enter telephone number menu

Fig. 244 Enter telephone number menu.

● Press the DIAL NUMBER function button fromthe Telephone main menu.

Enter telephone number● Enter a phone number with the keypad.Press the function button to make a call.

Select a contact from the list● Enter the first few letters of the contact. Theavailable entries appear in the phonebook.● Select the desired contact to make the call.

Enter the country code● Press the function button 0 for approx. 2seconds to add the +.


238

Operating modes

Assistance call● Press the function button to obtain help inthe event of breakdown.

Information call● Press the function button to obtain informa-tion on the SEAT brand and the additionalcontracted services.

Call mailbox● Press the function button to make the call.● OR: Press the function button for about 2seconds to make a call.

Note● Breakdown service and information callscan incur an additional cost on your tele-phone bill.● The Roadside Assistance and Informationservices might not work properly, for exam-ple, if the vehicle and the operator of theconnected mobile telephone are in differ-ent countries. If you are not able to usethese services contact an authorised SEATworkshop.

Phonebook Menu (contacts)

Fig. 245 Contacts Menu.

Fig. 246 Search window.

Once the first pairing is made, it may takesome time until the phonebook data1) of thepaired mobile are available in the infotain-ment system. Depending on the volume of

data that has to be transferred, the processmay take several minutes. It may be necessa-ry to confirm the data transmission on themobile phone.

The phonebook can also be viewed during atelephone conversation.

If the name saved in the phonebook has anassigned photo, it can be displayed on the listnext to the name. To do this, the optionShow pictures for contacts in the Phone set-

tings context must be enabled and your mo-bile phone must support this functionality(check the compatibility list) ››› page 242,Phone settings.

In the Telephone main menu, press theContacts function button to access the con-

tacts list.

Select a contact from the list● Search the list and press on the desiredcontact to make the call.● OR: If the contact has several numbers, firstpress on the contact and then press on thedesired number for making the call.

Search for a contact in the search window● Press the Search function button››› Fig. 245 to open the search window. »

1) Depending on the device, only contacts in thephone's memory are loaded.

239

Infotainment System

● Enter the name of the contact you are look-ing for in the window ››› Fig. 246. While thecharacters are being entered, a contact isdisplayed in the input field.● The number of matching results is dis-played to the right of the input field. Press thefunction button to go to the list.● Search the list and press on the desiredcontact to make the call.

Opening the detailed view of a contact● Press the function button ››› Fig. 245 lo-cated next to the entry on the contacts list.

All the telephone numbers are displayed inthe detailed view, and where applicable, theaddress recorded for the contact in question.

Read contact name● Press the function button on the detailedlist if you want the voice control system toread the name of the contact 1).

Call a contact● Press the desired telephone number on thedetailed list to make the call.

● Press the icon to edit the number beforecalling.

Send SMS to a contact● Press the function button on the detailedlist1 ).

Start route guidance to a contact's ad-dress2)

If the contact’s address data has been saved,route guidance can be started to the con-tact's address.

● Press address data in the detailed view tostart route guidance.

NoteIf you edit a number before calling, it willnot be saved in the phonebook but onlyused for the call.

Short messages (SMS) menu3 Not available for model: Media System Colour

Fig. 247 Short messages (SMS) menu.

If the mobile phone connected to the HFPprofile also supports the SMS profile, a newfunction button will appear in the upper leftcorner of your Telephone menu, which will al-low you to receive, view and send SMS mes-sages through the infotainment system.

Whether or not the aforementioned functionswork correctly will depend on the compatibil-ity of the connected mobile phone.

SMS menu function buttons● Press the SMS function button from the Tel-ephone main menu.

1) Not available for the Media System Colourmodel.2) Valid for Navi System and Navi System Plus.

240

Operating modes


New textmessage

To write and send an SMS (includesthe possibility of accessing presettext templates).

Inbox To open the received SMS folder.

Outbox To open the outbox folder. SMSmessages that have not been sentare stored here.

Sent To open the sent SMS folder.

Drafts To select a message that has beenstored but not sent.

Send contactdetails

To send the details of a contactfrom the contact list.

Possible submenu function buttons


READ OUT For the voice control system toread the text of the SMS.

Options Open the Options menu.

Reply withtemplate

To select a text template from alist.

Delete currenttext message

The SMS is deleted from theInbox folder.

Telephonenumber

The sender's telephone numberis displayed.

FORWARD To forward an SMS.

REPLY To reply to an incoming SMS.


Enter number

To enter a telephone number orto select a recipient from thecontact list.

Press the Recipients functionbutton to select multiple recipi-ents.

Recipients To select multiple recipientsfrom the contact list.

Delete To delete an SMS.

Calls Menu (call lists)

Fig. 248 Call lists menu.

● Press the Calls function button from theTelephone main menu.● Press the FILTER function button.● Select the desired call list: All calls ,Missed calls , Calls or Received calls .

If a telephone number is stored in the phonebook, the saved name is displayed on the calllist instead of the number.

If a photo is assigned to the name stored inthe phonebook, it can be displayed on thecall list next to the name ››› page 242.

Possible displays in the Calls menu

Display: Meaning

Missed calls : Missed and unanswered calls.

Calls : Dialled numbers.

Received calls : Received calls.

NoteThe availability of the call lists will dependon the mobile phone used.

241

Infotainment System

Quick dial keys

Fig. 249 Quick access to the phone book.

The speed dial keys ››› Fig. 249 1 can beassigned a telephone number from thephone book.

If a photo is assigned to the name stored inthe phone book, it can be displayed on thespeed dial key ››› page 2421).

All speed dial keys have to be manually edi-ted and will be assigned to a user profile. Upto 12 contacts can be added to the speed di-al keys.

Assign the speed dial keys● In the main Telephone menu, press a freespeed dial key.

● Select the desired contact from the list. Ifthe selected contact has several phone num-bers, select the number you want.

Edit assigned speed dial keys● Press and hold an occupied speed dial keyin the Telephone main menu until the Con-tacts menu opens.● Select the desired contact from the list. Ifthe selected contact has several phone num-bers, select the number you want.● To close the Contacts menu without apply-ing the changes, press the BACK functionbutton.

Delete assigned speed dial keys● The phone numbers stored in the speed di-al buttons can be deleted in the menu Userprofile settings > Manage favourites››› page 243.

Make a call with a speed dial button● Briefly press an assigned speed dial key inthe Telephone main menu to call the tele-phone number stored in it.

NoteThe contacts stored in the speed dial keysare NOT updated automatically. If a con-tact stored on a speed dial key is modifiedon the mobile phone, the speed dial keymust be assigned again.

Phone settings

In the Telephone main menu, press theSETTINGS function button.


Private mode : Private mode can only be activatedduring an active call. When private mode is disabled(by default), the call’s audio is managed through thevehicle. When private mode is activated, call audio ismanaged through the mobile phone.

Select mobile phone : From the list, select the mobilephone to be connected to the hands-free profile withthe infotainment system.OR: Press Find telephone to connect a new mobilephone.

Bluetooth® : Opens the menu Bluetooth® set-tings ››› page 243.

User profile : Open the User profile settingsmenu ››› page 243.


242

Operating modes

NoteSome telephones require a restart to down-load the last added contacts again.

Bluetooth® settings

In the main Telephone menu, press theSETTINGS function button and then press theBluetooth® function button.


Bluetooth® : Press to deactivate Bluetooth®. All activeconnections are disconnected.

Visibility : Activating and deactivating Bluetooth® visi-bility.

Visible : Bluetooth® visibility is active.

Hidden : Bluetooth® visibility is deactivated.Bluetooth® visibility must be active for externalpairing of a Bluetooth® device with the infotain-ment system. When a Bluetooth® audio deviceis active and playing, visibility is automaticallyset to Hidden.

Forename : Display or change the Bluetooth® name ofthe infotainment system. This will be the name shownto other Bluetooth® devices.

Paired devices : Viewing paired devices. To disconnectand connect Bluetooth® devices and Bluetooth® pro-files.


Find devices : Search for visible Bluetooth® devicesthat are within range of the infotainment system. Themaximum range is approx. 10 meters.

Bluetooth® Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) : If an external audiosource is to be connected to the infotainment systemvia Bluetooth®, this function must be active››› page 208.

User profile settings

In the main Telephone menu, press theSETTINGS function button and then press theUser profile function button.


Manage favourites : Edit the speed dial keys.

Occupied speed dial key: Press to delete thestored number.

Free speed dial key: Press to save a phonebook number on the speed dial key.

Mailbox number : To enter or change the voice mailboxnumber.

Sort by : To set the order of appearance of the phonebook entries (Forname and Surname or vice versa).

Import contacts : Press to import the phone book of theconnected telephone or to update the importedphone book.


Reminder: remember your mobile phone : If a Bluetooth®

connection is active with a mobile phone, the mes-sage “Do not forget your mobile phone”appears when the ignition is switched off.

Show pictures for contacts a): If the contacts in thephone book have been saved with a photo, it can bedisplayed on the speed dial keys, call lists andphone book.

a) Depending on the mobile phone.

NoteSome telephones require a restart to down-load the last added contacts again.

243

Infotainment System

Multimedia

USB/AUX-IN input

Fig. 250 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.

Fig. 251 Rear part of the centre console: USBconnectors.

Depending on the special characteristics andthe country, the vehicle may have aUSB/AUX-IN port.

The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in thestorage compartment area of the centreconsole ››› Fig. 250.

Depending on the equipment and the coun-try, the vehicle may also have USB connec-tions exclusively for charging or as a powersocket.

These USB ports are located at the rear ofthe console, between the front seats››› Fig. 251.

Connectivity Box* / WirelessCharger*


Fig. 253 In the centre console: pad for the mo-bile phone connection.

The Connectivity Box includes different func-tions that will help to use your mobile device.

They are the “Wireless Charger” and the“Mobile Signal Amplifier”.

The Wireless Charger only features the“Wireless Charger” function.

“Wireless Charger”The “Wireless Charger” allows mobile devi-ces with Qi1) technology to be charged with-out a cable.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly:

● Place your mobile device in the middle ofthe pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 253››› .

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mo-bile phone wirelessly.

244

Operating modes

Make sure there are no objects between thepad and the mobile phone.

The mobile phone will start charging auto-matically. For further information aboutwhether your mobile device uses Qi technol-ogy, check your phone's user manual or visitthe SEAT website.

“Mobile Signal Amplifier”The “Mobile Signal Amplifier” allows you toreduce the radiation in your vehicle and enjoybetter reception.

For safety reasons, it is recommended thatyou pair the system and the mobile usingBluetooth® and place it on the ConnectivityBox pad, for the best reception without hav-ing to handle the mobile phone.

To establish a connection with the vehicle'sexternal aerial:

● Place your mobile device in the middle ofthe pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 253››› .

Make sure there are no objects between thepad and the mobile phone.

Your mobile phone will automatically beready to make use of the external aerial.

WARNING● The mobile phone may heat up due to thewireless charging. Think about this before

you pick it up, and take care when removingit.● There must be no metallic or other ob-jects between the mobile phone and thehousing, to prevent the functionality of theConnectivity Box from being affected.

Note● Your mobile device must support the Qiinductive charging interface standard forproper operation.● The charging time and the temperaturevary in accordance with the device used.● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W.● Qi technology does not allow you tocharge more than one mobile device simul-taneously.● No improvement in reception can beguaranteed if there is more than one mo-bile phone on the pad.● You are advised to keep the engine run-ning to guarantee proper wireless charg-ing.● When a telephone with Qi technology isconnected by USB, it will be charged by themeans specified by the manufacturer.

245

Driving

Driving

Start and driving

Starting and stopping theengine

Ignition lock

Fig. 254 Ignition key positions.

Key positions ››› Fig. 254Ignition off. Key can be removed from thevehicle.Ignition is switched on. Preheating occursin diesel vehicles .Starting the engine.

1

2

3

Locking and unlocking the steering wheel● Lock the steering wheel: remove the keyfrom the ignition and turn the wheel until itlocks. Depending on the country, in vehicleswith automatic transmission, in order to re-move the key, move the gear shift to the P po-sition. If necessary, press the gear shift block-ing key and release it.● Unlock the steering wheel: put the key intothe ignition and turn it at the same time as thesteering wheel in the direction indicated bythe arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer-ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.

Start-Stop system*If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stopsystem* switches off the engine, the ignitionremains switched on.

Automatic transmission: before leaving thevehicle, make sure that the ignition is switch-ed off and the selector lever is in position P.

WARNING● Always remove the key from the ignitionwhen leaving the vehicle, even if only for ashort period. This is especially important ifchildren or disabled people are left alonein the vehicle. They could accidentallystart the engine or operate electricalequipment, resulting in an accident.● The ignition key must NOT be removedfrom the lock until the vehicle comes to a

standstill. Otherwise, the steering could beimmediately blocked- Risk of accident!

Note● If it is difficult to turn the ignition key tothe position 2 , move the steering wheel toboth sides to release the steering lock.● If the vehicle battery is disconnected andreconnected, the key must remain in theposition 2 for around 5 seconds beforestarting up.● Vehicles with automatic transmission,de-pending on the country, after switching offthe ignition, you can only remove the igni-tion key if the selector lever is in position“P” (parking lock). Next, the selector leveris locked.

246

Start and driving

Ignition and start button*

Fig. 255 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: start button.

The engine can be started with a start button(Press & Drive). To do so, there must be a validkey inside the vehicle in the area of the frontor rear seats, or on the centre console.

In vehicles with the Keyless Access››› page 100 system, the engine can also bestarted with the key in the luggage compart-ment.

Opening the driver's door when exiting thevehicle activates the electronic lock on thesteering column if the ignition is disabled.

Switching the ignition on/off manuallyIf you only want to switch on the ignition(without starting the engine), briefly press thestart button once without pressing the brakepedal or the clutch pedal ››› .

The start button text START ENGINE STOP flash-es like a heartbeat when the system is readyfor the ignition to be turned on or off.

Automatic ignition disconnectionIf the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the keywith them but leaving the ignition on, the igni-tion does not switch off automatically. The ig-nition is switched off by pressing the lock but-ton on the remote control or by pressingthe sensor surface on the door lever››› Fig. 100.

Automatic deactivation of the ignition onvehicles with the Start-Stop systemThe ignition is switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle is stopped and the auto-matic engine shutdown is active, if:

● The driver's seat belt is not fastened,● the driver does not step on any pedal,● the driver door is opened.

After automatically turning off the ignition, ifthe dipped beam is on, the side light re-mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if there isenough charge in the battery). If the driverlocks the vehicle or manually turns off thelight, the side light goes out.

Engine restart featureIf no key is detected inside the vehicle afterthe engine stops, you will only have 5 sec-

onds to restart it. A warning will display on thedash panel screen.

After this interval, it will not be possible tostart the engine without a valid key inside thevehicle.

WARNINGWhen switching on the ignition, do notpress the brake or clutch pedal, otherwisethe engine could start immediately.

WARNINGIf vehicle keys are used negligently or with-out due care, this may cause accidents andserious injury.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen you leave it. Otherwise, a child or un-authorised person could lock the vehicle,start the engine or connect the ignition andoperate any of the electrical equipment.

Note● Before leaving the vehicle, always dis-connect the ignition and, if appropriate,take into account the instructions on thescreen of the dash panel.● If the vehicle is stationary for a long timewith the engine off and the ignition on, thevehicle battery might be discharged and itmight not be possible to start the engine. »

247

Driving

● In vehicles with diesel engines, wait untilthe warning light ››› page 248 goes offbefore starting the engine.● If during the STOP phase you press theSTART ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is

switched off and the button flashes.● If the indication is displayed on the in-strument panel display “Start-Stop systemdeactivated: Start the engine manually”,the START ENGINE STOP button will blink.

Starting the engine

Before starting the engine● Vehicles with manual gearboxes: put thegear lever in neutral, press the clutch pedaland keep it it in this position until the enginestarts.● Vehicles with automatic transmission: putthe lever in position P or N.

Vehicles with ignition locks● Turn the key to position ››› Fig. 254 2 . Pre-heating occurs in diesel vehicles .● Keep turning the key to position››› Fig. 254 3 without stepping on the accel-erator.● Once the engine starts, release the key.When it is released, the key returns to position

2 .

● If the engine does not start, stop and waitfor around 1 minute to try again.

Vehicles with start buttons● Press and hold the brake pedal until the en-gine starts.● Press the starter button ››› Fig. 255; do notpress the accelerator. There needs to be avalid key inside the vehicle for the engine tostart. After starting the engine, the lighting ofthe START ENGINE STOP button changes tosteady lighting, indicating that the engine hasstarted.● Once the engine starts, release the start-upbutton.● If the engine does not start, stop and waitfor around 1 minute to try again. If necessary,perform an emergency start ››› page 250.

Diesel engines can take a few seconds longerthan usual to start on cold days. During pre-heating, the warning lamp remains lit. Toavoid unnecessary discharging of the bat-tery, do not use any other major electricalequipment while the glow plugs are pre-heating.

The preheating time depends on the coolantand exterior temperatures. With the engine atoperating temperature, or at outside temper-atures above +8°C, the warning lamp willlight up for about one second. This meansthat the engine starts immediately.

Starting a diesel engine after having runout of fuelIf the fuel tank has been completely run dry, itmay take longer than normal (up to one mi-nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling.This is because the fuel system must elimi-nate air first.

WARNINGDo not keep the engine running in confinedspaces, as there is a danger of poisoning.● The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-oxide, an odourless and colourless poison-ous gas that can cause loss of conscious-ness and death.

WARNINGDo not get out of the vehicle with the en-gine running, especially if a gear is engag-ed. The vehicle could then suddenly moveor something strange could happen thatwould cause damage, fire or serious injury.

WARNINGNever use cold start sprays, they could ex-plode or cause the engine to run at highrevs. Doing this risks injury.

CAUTION● The starter motor or the engine may bedamaged if you try to start the engine while

248

Start and driving

driving or if you restart it immediately afterswitching it off.● When the engine is cold, you shouldavoid high engine speeds, driving at fullthrottle and over-loading the engine. Riskof engine damage.

For the sake of the environmentDo not warm-up the engine by running theengine with the vehicle stationary. Start offimmediately, driving gently. This helps theengine reach operating temperature fasterand reduces emissions.

Note● Electrical components with a high powerconsumption are switched off temporarilywhen the engine starts.● When starting with a cold engine, noiselevels may briefly increase. This is quitenormal, and no cause for concern.● When the outside temperature is below+5 °C (+41 °F), if the engine is diesel, somesmoke may appear under the vehicle whenthe fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on.● In vehicles with a natural gas engine(CNG), by default, the engine starts withgas, with the exception of the following ca-ses:– Coolant temperature below -10°C.– After refuelling CNG.

Turning off the engine

● Bring the vehicle to a full stop ››› .● With manual transmission, press the clutchall the way down. If the vehicle is automatic,set the selector lever to the P position.● Apply the electronic parking brake.● Vehicles with ignition locks: Turn the key toposition ››› Fig. 254 1 .● Vehicles with start buttons: Briefly press thestart-up button ››› Fig. 255.

Emergency disconnectionIf the engine does not switch off after brieflypressing the starter button, an emergencydisconnect will be required:

● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec-onds or press it once for more than 1 sec-ond ››› in Ignition and start button* onpage 247.

WARNINGNever switch off the engine while the vehi-cle is moving. This could cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in-jury.● The airbags and belt tensioners do notwork when the ignition is switched off.● The brake servo does not work with theengine off. Therefore, you need to press thebreak pedal harder to brake the vehicle.

● Power steering does not work when theengine is not running. You need morestrength to steer when the engine is switch-ed off.● If the ignition is switched off, the steeringcolumn could be locked, making it impossi-ble to control the vehicle.● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, thesteering could suddenly lock, making it im-possible to steer the vehicle: risk of acci-dent!

WARNINGAlways take the key with you when youleave the vehicle. This is particularly impor-tant if there are children in the vehicle, asthey might otherwise be able to start theengine or use power-operated equipment(e.g. the electric windows), which couldcause injuries.

CAUTION● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start-Stop system* switches off the engine, theignition remains switched on. Make surethat the ignition is switched off before leav-ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery coulddischarge.● If the engine has been driven at highspeed for a prolonged period of time, itmay overheat when turned off. To avoid en-gine damage, allow the engine to run for »

249

Driving

approximately two minutes in neutral be-fore switching it off.

NoteAfter the engine is switched off the radiatorfan may run on for up to 10 minutes, even ifthe ignition is switched off. It is also possi-ble that the fan turns itself on once more ifthe coolant temperature increases due tothe heat accumulated in the engine com-partment or due to its prolonged exposureto solar radiation.

Electronic immobilizer

The electronic immobiliser prevents unau-thorised persons from driving the vehicle.

Inside the key there is a chip that deactivatesthe electronic immobiliser automaticallywhen the key is inserted into the ignition.

The electronic immobiliser will be activatedagain automatically as soon as you pull thekey out of the ignition lock. For vehicles withthe “Keyless Access” system, the key has tobe outside the vehicle.

If the following message is shown on the in-strument panel display: SAFE, the vehiclecannot be started.

The engine can only be started using a genu-ine SEAT key with its correct code.

NoteA perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur-ed if genuine SEAT keys are used.

Emergency starting function

Fig. 256 On the right of the steering column:emergency start.

If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,an emergency start-up will be required. Therelevant message will appear in the dashpanel display. This may happen when, for ex-ample, the vehicle key battery is very low:

● Immediately after pushing the starter but-ton, keep the key next to the right trim of thesteering column ››› Fig. 256, as close as pos-sible to the Kessy logo.● The ignition connects and the engine startsautomatically.

Instructions for the driver on the in-strument panel display

Press the clutchThis message appears on vehicles with amanual gearbox if the driver tries to start theengine without having the clutch pedalpressed. The engine will only start if you pressthe clutch pedal.

Press the brakeThis message appears on vehicles with anautomatic gearbox if the driver tries to startthe engine without having the brake pedalpressed.

Select N or PThis message appears if you try to start orstop the engine when the selector lever of theautomatic gearbox is not in position P or N.The engine can only be started and stoppedin those positions.

Engage position P; the vehicle canmove; doors can only close in po-sition P.

For safety reasons, this driver message ap-pears and an audible warning sounds if theselector lever of the automatic gearbox is notin position P after you switch off the ignition.Move the selector lever to the P position, oth-erwise the vehicle could move.

250

Start and driving

Gear change: selector lever in thedrive position!

This driver message is displayed when theselector lever is not in the position P when thedriver door is opened. Additionally, a buzzingsound is emitted. Put the selector lever in po-sition P, otherwise the vehicle could roll away.

Ignition is switched onThis driver message is displayed and a buz-zer is sounded when the driver door isopened with the ignition switched on.

“My Beat” function

For vehicles with a convenience key there isthe “My Beat” function. This feature providesan additional indication of the vehicle ignitionsystem.

When entering the vehicle, the start button››› Fig. 255 flashes to draw attention to it.

When the ignition is on/off, the engine startbutton flashes. With the ignition is switchedoff, the start button goes off after a few sec-onds.

With the engine running, the start button lightstays on, indicating that the engine is running.The time elapsed between the moment the

user starts the engine with the start buttonbutton and the lighting changes from flashingto fixed will depend on specific engine sizecharacteristics. When the start button is usedto stop the engine, the button starts flashingagain.

In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the“My Beat” function also offers additional in-formation:

● When the engine stops during the Stopphase, the light of the start button buttonstays on, as the Start-Stop system remainsactive even though the engine is off.● When the engine cannot be started againwith the Start-Stop system, ››› page 251, andneeds to be started manually, the start but-ton flashes to indicate this situation.

Start-Stop system*

Control lamps

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-gine shutdown is active.

It lights up

The Start-Stop system is not available or has beendisconnected.

Instructions for the driver on the instru-ment panel displayStart-Stop system deactivated.Start the engine manually

This indication for the driver shows that theStart-Stop system cannot start the engineagain.

Start-Stop system: Fault! Functionnot available

There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Takethe vehicle to a workshop to have the fault re-paired.

Description and operation

The Start-Stop system helps you to save fueland reduce CO2 emissions.

In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automati-cally switch off when the vehicle stops or isstopping. The ignition remains switched on.The engine automatically switches back onwhen required. »

251

Driving

In this scenario, the light of the button stays lit1).

When the ignition is switched on, the Start-Stop function is automatically activated.

In the Easy Connect system you can findmore information about the Start-Stop sys-tem: press the button > Vehicle >View > Vehicle status.

Vehicles with a manual gearbox● When the vehicle or when it is stopped, putit into neutral and release the clutch pedal.The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will light up. The engine can be stoppedbefore stopping completely (approximately 7km/h).● When the clutch pedal is pressed the en-gine will start up again. The warning lamp willswitch off.

Vehicles with an automatic gearbox● Brake until it is stopped, and keep your footon the brake pedal or activate the Auto Hold*system so that the vehicle remains braked.The engine will switch off. The warning lamp will appear in the display. The engine canbe stopped before stopping completely (ap-proximately 7 or 2 km/h depending on the ve-hicle's gearbox).

● When you take your foot off the brake ped-al the engine will start up again. The warninglamp will switch off. In vehicles with the AutoHold* system, when the system is active, theengine will not start if you remove your footfrom the brake pedal. The car starts whenyou press the accelerator pedal.

Basic requirements for the Start-Stopmode● The driver door must be closed.● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.● The bonnet must be closed.● The engine has reached operating temper-ature.● The reverse gear must not be engaged.● The vehicle must not be on a very steepslope.

The engine does not turn off for variousreasonsBefore stopping the vehicle, the system veri-fies whether certain conditions are met. Theengine does not switch off, in the followingsituations for example:

● The engine has not yet reached the re-quired temperature for the Start-Stop mode.

● The temperature selected on the climatecontrol has not been reached.● The interior temperature is very high/low.● Defrost function button activated››› page 155.● The parking aid* is switched on.● The battery is very low.● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be-ing turned.● If there is a danger of misting.● After engaging reverse gear.● In case of a very steep gradient.

is shown on the instrument panel display,as well as on the driver information system*.

The engine starts by itselfWhen stopped, the normal system mode maybe interrupted in the following situations. Theengine restarts by itself without involvementfrom the driver.

● The interior temperature differs from thetemperature selected on the climate control.● Defrost function button activated››› page 155.● The brake has been pressed several timesconsecutively.

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access.252

Start and driving

● The battery is too low.● High power consumption.

Additional information related to the auto-matic gearboxThe engine stops when the selector lever is inthe positions P, D, N and S1) in addition towhen in Tiptronic mode. With the selector lev-er in P, the engine will also remain switchedoff when you take your foot off the brakepedal. In order to start the engine up againthe accelerator must be pressed, or anothergear engaged or the brake released.

If the selector lever is placed in R while stop-ped, the engine will start up again.

Change from D to P to prevent the enginefrom accidentally starting when passingthrough R.

Additional information about vehicles withAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC)In vehicles with ACC function, the engine willstart up again in certain operating conditionsif the radar sensor detects that the vehicleahead drives off again.

WARNING● Never switch the engine off until the vehi-cle is stationary. The operation of the brakeand steering will not be fully guaranteed.More force will be needed to turn the steer-ing wheel or to brake. You could suffer anaccident and even serious injuries.● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start-Stop system is switched off when workingin the engine compartment ››› page 254.

CAUTIONThe Start-Stop system must always beswitched off when driving through floodedareas ››› page 269.

Note● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox,you can control whether the engine shouldswitch off or not by reducing or increasingthe brake force applied. While the vehicleremains stopped, the engine will not stop ifthe brake pedal is slightly pressed, in trafficjams with frequent stopping and startingfor example. As soon as strong pressure isapplied to the brake pedal, the engine willstop.

● When stopped, the brake pedal must bekept pressed to ensure that the vehicledoes not move.● If the engine “stalls” with a manual gear-box, it can be directly started up again byimmediately pressing the clutch pedal.● With an automatic gearbox, if the lever isplaced in position D, N or S after engagingreverse gear, 10 km/h (6 mph) in a forwardsdirection must be reached for the system tobe in a status to stop the engine.

1) Except in the CUPRA model. In this case, whenyou place the selector lever in the S position or inthe Tiptronic mode, the Start/Stop system willprevent the engine from switching off.

253

Driving

Manually connecting and discon-necting the Start-Stop system

Fig. 257 Centre console: Start-stop systembutton.

If you do not wish to use the system, you canswitch it off manually.

● To manually switch on/off the Start-Stopsystem, press the button ››› Fig. 257.

The button symbol remains lit up yellowwhen the system is switched off.

NoteThe system switches on every time the en-gine is turned off voluntarily.

Manual gearbox

Changing gears

Fig. 258 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speedmanual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on thegearbox lever ››› Fig. 258.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.● Move the gearbox lever to the required po-sition.● Release the clutch.

Selecting reverse gearEngage reverse gear only when the vehicle isstopped.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your footright down.

● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push itdownwards, move it to the left as far as it willgo and then forwards to select reverse››› Fig. 258 R .● Release the clutch.

Changing down gearsWhile driving, changing down a gear must al-ways be done gradually, i.e. to the gear di-rectly below and when the engine speed isnot too high ››› . Changing down while by-passing one or various gears at high speedsor at high engine speeds can damage theclutch and the gearbox, even if the clutchpedal remains depressed ››› .

WARNINGWhen the engine is running, the vehicle willstart to move as soon as a gear is engagedand the clutch released. This also happensif the electronic parking brake is switchedon.● Never engage reverse gear when the ve-hicle is moving.

WARNINGIf the gear is changed down inappropriate-ly by selecting a gear that is too low, youmay lose control of the vehicle, causing anaccident and serious injuries.

254

Start and driving

CAUTIONWhen travelling at high speeds or at highengine speeds, selecting a gear that is toolow can cause considerable damage to theclutch and the gearbox. This can also oc-cur if the clutch pedal is pressed and heldand it does not engage.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage and avoid prematurewear, please observe the following:● Do not rest your hand on the gear leverwhile driving. The pressure applied by yourhand is transmitted to the gearbox selectorforks.● Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped-al; although the pressure may seem insig-nificant, it can cause the premature wear ofthe clutch plate. Use the foot rest when youdo not need to change gear.● Always ensure that the vehicle is com-pletely stopped before engaging the re-verse gear.● Always press the clutch to the floor whenchanging gears.● Never hold the vehicle “on the clutch” onhills with the engine on.

Automatic gearbox/DSG au-tomatic gearbox*

Introduction

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be-tween the engine and the gearbox is trans-mitted via two independent clutches. Theyreplace the torque converter found on con-ventional automatic gearboxes and allow forsmooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve-hicle.

The Tiptronic system allows the driver tochange gears manually ››› page 257,Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*.

Control lamps

It lights up green

The brake is not pressed.To select a gear range, press the brake pedal.

Flashes green

The selector lever locking button is not engaged.The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. En-gage the selector lever lock.

Selector lever positions

Fig. 259 Selector lever lock.

The selector lever position is shown when thecorresponding sign lights up. With the selec-tor lever in the manual gearbox positions M, Dand S, the engaged gear is also shown on thedisplay.

– Parking lockWhen the lever is put in this position, the drivewheels are locked. The lever must only be putin P when the vehicle is stationary ››› .

To put the lever in P or take it out of P , thelocking button must be pressed and held andthe brake pedal pressed simultaneously.

– Reverse gearReverse gear must be engaged only whenthe vehicle is stationary and the engine isidling ››› . »

255

Driving

To move the lever to position R, the lock but-ton must be pressed and held while pressingthe brake pedal at the same time. The reverselights come on when the lever is in the R posi-tion with the ignition on.

– NeutralWith the lever in this position, the gear is inneutral.

Press the brake pedal to move the lever fromN to D/S when the vehicle is stationary or atspeeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) ››› .

– Permanent forward drive positionThe lever in the D/S position enables thegears to be operated in normal mode (D) orsport mode (S). To select Sport mode S,move the lever backwards. Pushing the leveragain will select normal mode D. The selec-ted driving mode is shown on the instrumentpanel display.

In normal mode (D), the gearbox selects thebest gear ratio. This depends on the engineload, the road speed and the dynamic gearcontrol programme (DCP).

Sport mode (S) should be selected for asporty driving style. This setting makes use ofthe engine's maximum power output. Whenaccelerating the gear shifts will be noticea-ble.

Under certain circumstances (e.g. on moun-tain roads) it can be advantageous to switchtiptronic mode ››› page 257, to adapt thegears to suit the road conditions.

Selector lever lockIn P or N, the lever lock prevents a gear rangefrom being engaged, and prevents the vehi-cle from moving off accidentally.

To release the gear lever lock, press and holdthe brake pedal with the ignition on. At thesame time, press the lever lock in the direc-tion of the arrow ››› Fig. 259.

As a reminder to the driver, when the lever isin positions P or N the following indication willbe shown on the screen:

When stationary, apply footbrakewhile selecting a gear.

The lever is not locked if it is moved quicklythrough position N (e.g. when shifting from Rto D). This makes it possible, for instance, to“rock the vehicle backwards and forwards” ifit is stuck in snow or mud. The lever lock en-gages automatically if the brake pedal is notpressed and the lever is in position N for morethan about one second at a speed of lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph).

Safety interlock for ignition keyOnce the ignition has been turned off, the keymay be removed only if the gear selector is in

position P. While the key is not in the ignition,the selector lever is locked in position P.

WARNING● Take care not to press the acceleratorpedal when the vehicle is stopped. The ve-hicle could start moving immediately (insome cases even if the parking brake is en-gaged) resulting in the risk of an accident.● Never move the lever to R or P when driv-ing. Failure to follow this instruction couldresult in an accident or failure.● With lever in any position (except P), thefoot brake must be pushed down wheneverthe engine is running. This is because anautomatic gearbox still transmits powereven at idling speed.● While you are selecting a gear and thevehicle is stopped with the engine running,do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● As a driver you should never leave yourvehicle if the engine is running and a gear isengaged. Switch on the electronic parkingbrake and select the parking lock (P).

Note● If the lever is moved accidentally to Nwhen driving, release the accelerator andlet the engine speed drop to idling beforeselecting gear range D or S again.● Should the power supply to the lever beinterrupted in position P, it will not be

256

Start and driving

possible to move the lever. If this shouldhappen the manual release can be used››› page 262.

Note● If the lever lock does not engage, there isa fault. The transmission is interrupted toprevent the vehicle from accidentally mov-ing. Follow the procedure below in order forthe lever lock to engage again:– With a 6-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal and release it again.– With a 7-speed gearbox: press the

brake pedal. Move the lever to posi-tion P or N and subsequently engage agear.

● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi-cle does not move forwards or back. Pro-ceed to the next mode:– When the vehicle does not move in the

required direction, the system may nothave the gear range correctly engag-ed. Press the brake pedal and engagethe gear range again.

– If the vehicle still does not move in therequired direction, there is a systemmalfunction. Seek specialist assistanceand have the system checked.

Changing gear in Tiptronic mode*

Fig. 260 Lever in the Tiptronic position

Fig. 261 Steering wheel: automatic transmis-sion levers

Tiptronic gives the driver the option tochange gears manually.

When you change to the Tiptronic pro-gramme, the vehicle remains in the currentlyselected gear. This is possible as long as the

system is not changing gear automaticallydue to a traffic situation.

Using Tiptronic with the selector leverIt is possible to change to Tiptronic mode,both when the vehicle is stopped and whiledriving.

● Starting from the D/S position, move thelever to the right. The instrument panel willshow whether the lever is in manual or Tip-tronic mode (e.g. M4).● Push the lever forwards + or backwards –to move up or down a gear ››› Fig. 260.● To exit Tiptronic mode, move the lever to theleft.

Using Tiptronic with the steering wheelpaddles*The gearshift paddles can be used when theselector lever is in the D/S or M (Tiptronic)positions.

● Press the gearshift paddle + to select ahigher gear ››› Fig. 261.● Press the gearshift paddle – to select alower gear.● To exit the Tiptronic mode, pull the right-hand lever towards the steering wheel for ap-proximately 1 second or move the lever to theleft. »

257

Driving

If the paddles are not operated for some timeand the lever is not in the Tiptronic selectionposition, it will automatically exit from Tip-tronic mode.

CAUTION● When accelerating, if a higher gear is notselected, it will automatically changeshortly before reaching the maximum per-mitted RPM.● Also, if a lower gear is selected, the sys-tem will not change until it detects that theengine will not reach its maximum RPM.

Driving with an automatic gearbox

The gearbox changes gear ratios automati-cally as the vehicle moves.

The engine can only start with the selectorlever in position P or N. At low temperatures,below -10 °C (+14 °F), the engine can onlystart with the selector lever in position P.

Driving down hillsUnder certain circumstances it may be ad-vantageous to use the Tiptronic mode to se-lect the gear manually according to drivingconditions ››› .

Stop/ParkOn level ground, just use the lever to engageposition P. On slopes you should first applythe parking brake and then set the lever to P.This makes it easier to remove the lever fromposition P when starting.

If the driver door is opened and the lever isnot in position P, the vehicle could move. Thefollowing warning is displayed on the instru-ment panel: Gear change: selectorlever in the drive position!. Addi-tionally, a buzzer will sound.

Stopping on a downhillAlways apply the brake pedal firmly to pre-vent the vehicle from moving; if necessary,apply the electronic parking brake ››› .

Do not accelerate while a range of gears isengaged to prevent the car from rollingdownhill ››› .

Starting off uphill with the Auto Hold func-tion● Once you have engaged a gear, take yourfoot off the brake pedal and gently press theaccelerator.

Starting off uphill without the Auto Holdfunction● Pull on the electronic parking brake button.

● Once you have engaged a gear, gentlypress the accelerator and pull on the elec-tronic parking brake button.

Back-up programmeIf all the positions of the lever are shown overa light background on the instrument paneldisplay, there is a system fault and the auto-matic gearbox will operate in with the backupprogramme. It is still possible to drive the ve-hicle, however, at low speeds and within a se-lected range of gears. Driving in reversegear may not be possible.

Kick-downThe kick-down system provides maximum ac-celeration when the gear selector lever is inthe positions D, S or in the Tiptronic position.

When the accelerator pedal is pressed rightdown, the automatic gearbox will shift downto a lower gear, depending on road speedand engine speed. This takes advantage ofthe maximum acceleration of the vehicle››› .

The upshift to the next higher gear is delayeduntil the engine reaches maximum rpm.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Selec-tor lever positions on page 256.● Never allow the brake to rub and do notuse the brake pedal too often or for long

258

Start and driving

periods, as the brakes can overheat. Thisreduces the braking power, increases thebraking distance or even causes a brakesystem fault.● If you have to stop on a hill, keep the vehi-cle’s brakes applied with the brake pedal orparking brake.

WARNINGPlease note that if the road surface is slip-pery or wet, the kick-down feature couldcause the driving wheels to spin, whichcould result in skidding.

CAUTION● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, donot attempt to stop it from rolling by de-pressing the accelerator when a gear hasbeen selected. This could cause overheat-ing and damage the automatic gearbox.● If you allow the vehicle to roll with thelever in position N and the engine off, theautomatic gearbox will be damaged bylack of lubrication.● In certain driving situations or traffic con-ditions, the gears could overheat and bedamaged! If the warning lamp lights up,

stop the vehicle as soon as you can andwait for the gearbox to cool ››› page 261.● If the gearbox operates with the backupprogramme, take the vehicle to a special-ised workshop and have the fault repairedwithout delay.

Launch-control program3 Value for vehicles: diesel with power of morethan 125 kW, and petrol of more than 140 kW.

The Launch-control programme enablesmaximum acceleration from a standstill.

Condition: the engine must have reached op-erating temperature and the steering wheelmust not be turned.

The engine speed for Launch-control is differ-ent on petrol and diesel engines.

To use the Launch-control you must discon-nect the anti-slip regulation (ASR) through theEasy Connect system menu ››› page 92. Thewarning lamp will stay switched on or willflash slowly depending on whether or not thevehicle has a driver information system*.

On vehicles with the driver information sys-tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently andthe corresponding text message Stabilitycontrol deactivated (temporary) appearson the instrument panel to indicate the deac-tivation status.

● With the engine running, switch off tractioncontrol (ASR) ››› page 2981).● Press the brake pedal with your left footand hold it down for at least one second.● Turn the selector lever to position S or Tip-tronic, or else select the sport driving modefrom the SEAT Drive Profile* ››› page 264.● With your right foot, press the acceleratordown to the full throttle or kick-down position.The engine speed will stabilise at about3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about2,000 rpm (diesel engine).● Take your left foot off the brake pedal. Thevehicle starts with maximum acceleration.

WARNING● Always adapt your driving style to thetraffic conditions.● Only use the Launch control programmewhen road and traffic conditions permit, »

1) Vehicles without a driver information system:the warning lamp flashes slowly. Vehicles with adriver information system: the warning lamp re-mains on.

259

Driving

and make sure your manner of driving andaccelerating the vehicle does not incon-venience or endanger other road users.● Make sure that the ESC remains switchedon. Please note that when the ASR and ESCare deactivated, the wheels may start tospin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Riskof accident!● After moving off, the ESC “sport” modeshould be deactivated by briefly pressingthe button.

Note● After using the Launch control pro-gramme, the temperature in the gearboxmay have increased considerably. In thiscase, the programme could be disabled forseveral minutes. The programme can beused again after the cooling phase.● Accelerating with the launch control pro-gramme places a heavy load on all parts ofthe vehicle. This can result in increasedwear and tear.

Downhill assistant*

Downhill speed control is activated when thelever is in the D/S position and the brake isapplied. An appropriate lower gear is engag-ed.

The assistant attempts to maintain the speedat which the vehicle was travelling when thebrake was applied, within logical limits. It maybe necessary to correct the speed by press-ing the brake.

The assistant can only change down as faras 3rd gear. It is possible that on very steepslopes you have to switch to tiptronic modeand change down to 2nd or 1st gear to takeadvantage of engine braking and take theload off the brake system.

Downhill speed control is deactivated assoon as the road levels out again or you pressthe accelerator pedal.

On vehicles with cruise control system*››› page 270, downhill speed control is acti-vated when you set a cruising speed.

WARNINGThe downhill speed control cannot defy thelaws of physics. Therefore, speed cannotbe maintained constant in all situations. Al-ways be prepared to use the brakes!

Inertia mode

The inertia mode allows you to travel certaindistances without using the accelerator,which saves fuel. Plan ahead and use the in-ertia mode to “let” the vehicle “roll”.

Activation of the inertia modeCondition: lever in position D, slopes of lessthan 12% and speeds between 20 and 130km / h (12 and 80 mph).

● Gently take your foot off the accelerator.

The indication will be shown on the instru-ment cluster , the engaged gear and cur-rent consumption will disappear and theword Inertia will appear.

The gears will automatically disengage andthe vehicle will roll freely, without the effect ofthe engine brake. While the vehicle rolls, theengine runs at idling speed.

Stopping inertia mode● Press the brake or the accelerator pedal.

To take advantage of the engine's inertiamode, simply remove your foot from the ac-celerator.

Applying both the inertia mode (= prolongedsection with less energy) and inertia discon-nection (= shorter section without the needfor fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumptionand emission balance.

If the vehicle has SEAT Drive Profile››› page 264, the inertia mode can be activa-ted in Normal, Eco and Individual modes. InEco mode, it is activated whenever the oper-ating conditions are met, regardless of the

260

Start and driving

smoothness with which the foot is removedfrom the accelerator.

WARNING● If the inertia mode has been switched on,take into account, when approaching anobstacle, that the vehicle will not deceler-ate in the usual manner: risk of accident!● When using inertia mode while travellingdown hills, the vehicle can increase speed:risk of accident!● If other users drive your vehicle, warnthem about inertia mode.

Note● The driver message Inertia is only dis-played with the current consumption. In in-ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis-played (for example “D” or “E” will appearinstead of “D7” or “E7”).● The inertia mode will be automaticallydisconnected on gradients steeper than15%.● In the case of the TDI, TGI and 2.0l TSI en-gines, the inertia mode will only work in theEco driving mode.

Indications on the instrument paneldisplay

Clutch Clutch overheating! Please stop!

The clutch has overheated and could bedamaged. Stop and wait for the gearbox tocool with the engine at idling speed and theselector lever in position P. When the warninglamp and the driver message switch off, havethe fault corrected by a specialised work-shop without delay. If they do not turn off, donot continue driving. Seek specialist assis-tance.

Faults in the gearbox Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicleand place the lever in the posi-tion P.

There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-ing. Seek specialist assistance.

Gearbox: System fault! You maycontinue driving.

Have the fault corrected by a specialisedworkshop without delay.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving with restric-tions. Reverse gear disabled

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired.

Gearbox: System fault! You cancontinue driving in D untilswitching off the engine

Park the vehicle in a safe place. Seek special-ist assistance.

Gearbox: too hot. Adapt yourdriving accordingly

Continue driving at moderate speeds. Whenthe warning lamp switches off, you can con-tinue driving in a normal manner.

Gearbox: press the brake and en-gage a gear again.

If the warning was caused by the tempera-ture of the gearbox, this driver message willbe displayed when the gearbox has cooledagain.

261

Driving

Manual release of the selector lev-er

Fig. 262 Gear selector lever: manual releasefrom the parking position.

In the event of a power failure when starting(e.g. discharged battery), the lever will remainlocked in position P. To move it to position N tomove the vehicle, there is an emergency re-lease device under the centre console, on theright side. Releasing the selector lever re-quires a certain degree of practical skill.

Removing the cover from the selector lev-er● Apply the electronic parking brake ››› .● Carefully pull the corners of the selectorlever boot and twist it upwards over the leverhandle.

Releasing the selector lever● Using the flat part of a screwdriver, pressthe yellow tab sideways and keep it presseddown ››› Fig. 262.● Press the lock button on the selector lev-er and move it to position N.● After completing the emergency release,reattach the selector lever boot to the gear-box console.

WARNINGDo not move the lever from position P if theparking brake is not firmly engaged. If youstill think the car could move, press thebrake pedal. Danger! The vehicle couldmove in an unforeseen way and cause anaccident or serious injury.

Gear-change recommenda-tion

Selecting the optimal gear

Fig. 263 Instrument panel: gear-change indi-cator (manual gearbox).

Depending on the equipment on the instru-ment panel screen, a recommendation isshown with the gear that should be engagedto optimise consumption.

On vehicles with automatic transmission, thelever must be in Tiptronic mode ››› page 257.

No recommendation will appear if the opti-mal gear is engaged. The current gear will bedisplayed.

262

Start and driving

Display Meaning

Optimum gear.

Changing to a higher gear is rec-ommended.

Changing to a lower gear is rec-ommended.

Information regarding the “cleanliness” ofthe particulate filterWhen the exhaust system detects that theparticulate filter is close to saturation, thissystem’s self-cleaning function recommendsthe optimal gear for that function››› page 330.

WARNINGThe gear change recommendation is anauxiliary function and in no case should bea substitute for careful driving.● Responsibility for selecting the correctgear, depending on the circumstances,rests solely with the driver.

For the sake of the environmentSelecting the correct gear can help to savefuel.

NoteThe recommended gear indication turns offwhen the clutch pedal is pressed or when

the lever is removed from the tiptronic posi-tion.

Steering

Information relating to different ve-hicle processes.

Electro-mechanical power steering adaptselectronically to the speed of the car, torqueand steering angle.

Even if the power steering fails or the engineis stopped, it is possible to continue to rotatethe steering wheel as long as the key remainsin the ignition lock, but more force must beapplied.

Progressive steeringDepending on the vehicle’s features, it may ormay not incorporate a progressive steeringsystem.

In city traffic you do not need to turn so muchon parking, manoeuvring or in very tight turns.

On the road or on the motorway, progressivesteering transmits, for example, in bends, asportier, more direct and noticeably more dy-namic driving sensation.

Steering assistThis help assists the driver in critical situa-tions. It recommends turning the steeringwheel to perform a corrective manoeuvre(counter-steering), turning slightly to avoidskidding ››› .

WARNINGSteering assist helps the driver in criticalsituations. The driver is the person who hasto control the vehicle's steering at all times.

Control lamp

It lights up red

Faulty steering.Do not continue driving, stop the vehicle as soon aspossible and in a safe manner.Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired as soon as possible.

It lights up yellow

Limited steering operation.Drive carefully to a specialised workshop to have thesteering checked.If the warning light does not come on again after re-starting the engine and driving a short distance, it isnot necessary to check the steering.

OR: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and re-connected.Drive a short distance at 15-20 km / h (9-12 mph). »

263

Driving

It flashes yellow

The steering column is jammed.When stopped, turn the steering wheel in both direc-tions.

OR: The steering column does not unlock or lock.Remove the key from the ignition switch and recon-nect it. Consider the messages shown on the instru-ment panel display.Do not continue driving if the steering column re-mains locked after switching on the ignition. Seekspecialist assistance.

The control lamp should light up for a fewseconds when the ignition is switched on. Itshould go out once the engine is started.

WARNINGNever ignore the warning lamps or messag-es.● If the warning lamps and the correspond-ing messages are ignored, the vehicle maystall in traffic, causing serious damage oraccidents and injuries.● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunityand in a safe place.

SEAT Driving modes (SEATDrive Profile)*

Introduction

The SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver tochoose between the Eco, Normal, Sport andIndividual profiles and modes, which modi-fy the behaviour of various vehicle functions,providing different driving experiences. In theFR and X-PERIENCE models equipped withdynamic chassis control (DCC), the Comfortprofile is also available.

In the Leon Cupra model the four profiles areComfort, Sport, Cupra and Individual.

The Individual profile can be configuredaccording to personal preferences. The otherprofiles have a fixed configuration.

Description

Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve-hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on thefollowing functions:

EngineDepending on the profile selected, the engineresponds more quickly or smoothly to the ac-celerator being pressed. When Eco mode isselected, the Start-stop function is activated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission, thegear change timing is changed to put thechanges at higher or lower revolutions. Ecomode activates the Inertia function, therebyreducing consumption. The rest of the drivingmodes will activate the inertia use functionwhen the selector lever is not in the S posi-tion, depending on how the accelerator ped-al is released ››› page 260. When the vehicleis turned on again, the function is activatedby default to reduce consumption.

With a manual gearbox, the Eco mode 1)

changes the gear changes recommenda-tions to facilitate more efficient driving.

Dynamic chassis control (DCC)DCC continuously adapts the shock absorb-ers to the condition of the road and currentdriving conditions, according to the pre-setprogramme.

In the event of a fault in the DCC, the follow-ing message is displayed on the instrument

1) In the Leon Cupra model, the Eco mode can beselected through the Individual profile by settingthe engine characteristic to Eco.

264

Start and driving

screen Fault: shock absorber regula-tion

SteeringPower steering becomes more robust inSport mode to enable a sportier driving style.

In the Leon Cupra the power steering be-comes more robust in Cupra mode.

Air conditioningIn vehicles with Climatronic, this can operatein eco mode, especially restricting fuel con-sumption.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)The ACC’s acceleration and braking modevaries according to the driving profile››› page 276.

Electronic self-locking differential1)

The self-locking differential adapts its behav-iour depending on the driving profile chosen.Normal mode or Cupra mode can be selec-ted to prioritise improved traction in sportdriving.

Setting the driving profile

Fig. 264 Centre console: MODE button. Youcan select from Normal, Sport, Eco, Comfortand Individual.

Fig. 265 Centre console: Cupra Drive Profilebutton. You can select from Comfort, Sport, Cu-pra and Individual

You can select the required mode either byrepeatedly pressing selection button››› Fig. 264, ››› Fig. 265, or on the touchscreen, in the menu that opens when theabove button is pressed.

An icon on the touch screen provides infor-mation about the active mode.

Button lights up when the active mode isdifferent to Normal.

In the Cupra model, the button stays on onlywhen the Cupra profile is active.

Driving pro-file Characteristics

a)

Places the vehicle in a low stateof consumption, facilitating afuel-saving driving style that isrespectful to the environment.

Normal

Offers a balanced driving experi-ence, suitable for everyday use.

Sport

Provides a complete dynamicperformance in the vehicle, ena-bling the user a more sporty driv-ing style.

Only for Cupra models: It repre-sents the vehicle's default be-haviour, suitable for dynamicdriving. »

1) Applies to the Leon Cupra model.265

Driving

Driving pro-file Characteristics

Convenienceb)

It permits more relaxed andcomfortable driving, for examplefor long motorway journeys. Itsmain characteristic is the softsuspension setting (DCC).

Cuprac)

It gives the vehicle a decidedlysportier nature, and makes formaximum performance.

Individual

It allows you to personalise theconfiguration. The functions thatcan be adjusted depend on theequipment fitted in the vehicle.

a) Not available for Cupra models (Eco mode is selec-ted in the Individual profile).b) Only for models fitted with adaptive suspension(DCC) and Cupra models.c) Only for Cupra models.

Kick-down*The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-celeration ››› page 258.

If eco mode has been selected in SEAT DriveProfile*, and the accelerator is pressed be-yond a hard point, the engine power is auto-matically controlled to give your vehicle max-imum acceleration.

WARNINGWhen operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at-tention to all traffic: doing otherwise couldcause an accident.

Note● When the engine is switched off it willstore the driving profile that was selectedwhen the ignition was turned off. When re-started, the engine and the gearbox willstart in their Normal mode. To return the en-gine and gear to your desired mode, rese-lect the corresponding driving profile.● Your speed and driving style must alwaysbe adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf-fic conditions.● The Eco profile is not recommended whentowing a vehicle.

Driving tips

Running in

Please observe the instructions for running-innew components.

Running-in the engineA new engine must be driven through a run-inperiod during its first 1500 kilometres (1000miles). During its first few hours of running, the

internal friction in the engine is greater thanlater on when all the moving parts have bed-ded down.

How the vehicle is driven for the first 1500 km(1000 miles) influences the future engine per-formance. Throughout the life of the vehicle, itshould be driven at a moderate speed (espe-cially when the engine is cold) this will reduceengine wear and increase its useful life. Neverdrive at extremely low engine speeds. Alwaysengage a lower gear when the engine works“irregularly”. For the first 1000 km or600 miles, please note:

● Do not use full throttle.● Do not force the engine above two thirds ofits maximum speed.● Do not tow a trailer.

Between 1000 and 1500 kilometres (600to 1000 miles), gradually increase poweruntil reaching the maximum speed and highengine speeds.

Running in new tyres and brake pads● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres››› page 347.● Information about brakes ››› page 290.

266

Start and driving

For the sake of the environmentIf the engine is run in gently, the life of theengine will be increased and the engine oilconsumption reduced.

Four-wheel drive (4Drive)3 Valid for vehicles: 4Drive all-wheel drive

On four-wheel drive models, the engine pow-er is distributed to all four wheels

General notesOn four-wheel drive vehicles, the enginepower is distributed to all four wheels. Thedistribution of power is controlled automati-cally according to your driving style and theroad conditions. Also see ››› page 296.

The four-wheel drive is specially designed tocomplement the superior engine power. Thiscombination gives the vehicle exceptionalhandling and performance capabilities, bothon normal roads and in more difficult condi-tions, such as snow and ice. Even so (or per-haps especially for this reason), it is importantto observe certain safety points ››› .

Winter tyresThanks to four-wheel drive, your vehicle willhave plenty of traction in winter conditions,even with the standard tyres. Nevertheless,we still recommend that winter tyres or all-

season tyres be fitted on all four wheels togive even better braking response.

Snow chainsOn roads where snow chains are mandatory,this also applies to cars with four-wheel drive››› page 351.

Changing tyresOn vehicles with four-wheel drive, all fourtyres must have the same rolling circumfer-ence. Also avoid using tyres with varyingtread depths ››› page 347.

Off-roader?If your SEAT vehicle is not an off-roader: itdoes not have enough ground clearance tobe used as such. It is therefore best to avoidrough tracks and uneven terrain as much aspossible.

WARNING● Even with four-wheel drive, you should al-ways adjust your speed to suit the condi-tions. Do not let the extra safety featurestempt you into taking any risks when driv-ing. Risk of accident!● The braking capability of your vehicle islimited by the tyres' grip. It is therefore nodifferent from a car without four-wheeldrive. So do not be tempted to drive too faston firm or slippery roads just because the

vehicle still has good acceleration in theseconditions. Risk of accident!● On wet roads bear in mind that the frontwheels may start to “aquaplane” and losecontact with the road if the car is driven toofast. If this should happen, there will be nosudden increase in engine speed to warnthe driver, as occurs with a front-wheeldrive car. For this reason you should alwayschoose a driving speed suitable for theroad conditions. Risk of accident!

Economical and environmentallyfriendly driving

Fuel consumption, environmental pollutionand wear to the engine, brakes and tyres alldepend largely on driving style. Consumptioncan be reduced between 10-15% with an effi-cient driving type. The following section givesyou some tips on lessening the impact on theenvironment and reducing your operatingcosts at the same time.

Active cylinder management (ACT®)*Depending on vehicle equipment, the activecylinder management (ACT®) may deacti-vate some of the engine cylinders if the driv-ing situation does not require too much pow-er. The number of active cylinders can beseen on the instrument panel display.››› page 72. »

267

Driving

Foresight when drivingIf you think ahead when driving, you will needto brake less and thus accelerate less. Takeadvantage of the inertia of the vehicle when-ever possible, with a gear engaged. Thistakes advantage of the engine braking effect,reducing wear on the brakes and tyres. Emis-sions and fuel consumption will drop to zero.

Changing gear to save energyAn effective way of saving is to change in ad-vance to a higher gear.

Manual transmission: shift up from first tosecond gear as soon as possible. Choosingthe right gear enables fuel savings. Select thehighest possible gear appropriate for thedriving situation (the engine should continuefunctioning with cyclical regularity).

Automatic transmission: accelerate gradu-ally and without reaching the “kick-down”position.

Avoid driving at high speedAvoid travelling at your vehicle’s top speed,whenever possible. Fuel consumption, emis-sion of harmful gases and noise pollutionmultiply as speed is increased. Driving atmoderate speeds will help to save fuel.

Reduce idling timeIn vehicles with the Start-Stop system idling isautomatically reduced. In vehicles withoutthe Start-Stop system it is worth switching offthe engine, for example, at level crossingsand at traffic lights that remain red for longperiods of time. When an engine has reachedoperating temperature, and depending onthe cylinder capacity, keeping it switched offfor a minimum of about 5 seconds alreadysaves more than the amount of fuel necessa-ry for restarting.

The engine takes a long time to warm upwhen it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu-tant emissions are also especially high duringthis initial warm-up phase. It is therefore bestto drive off immediately after starting the en-gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed.

Regular maintenanceRegular servicing helps in saving fuel evenbefore the engine is started. A well-servicedengine gives you the benefit of improved fuelefficiency as well as maximum reliability andan enhanced resale value. A badly servicedengine can consume up to 10% more fuelthan necessary.

Avoid short journeysThe engine and catalytic converter need toreach their optimal operating temperature

in order to minimise fuel consumption andemissions.

A cold engine consumes a disproportionateamount of fuel. The engine reaches its work-ing temperature after about four kilometres(2.5 miles), when fuel consumption will returnto a normal level.

Check tyre pressureAlways make sure the tyres are inflated to thecorrect pressures ››› page 348 to save fuel. Ifthe pressure is below half bar, fuel consump-tion may increase by 5%. Due to the greaterrolling resistance, under-inflation also increa-ses tyre wear and impairs handling.

Do not use winter tyres all year round asthey increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.

Avoid carrying unnecessary loadsGiven that every kilo of extra weight will in-crease the fuel consumption, it is advisablemake sure that no unnecessary loads are be-ing transported.

Since the luggage rack increases the aero-dynamic drag of the vehicle, you should re-move it when not needed. At speeds of100-120 km/h (62-75 mph), this will save 12%of fuel.

268

Start and driving

Save electrical energyThe engine drives the alternator, therebygenerating electricity. This implies that anyincrease in power consumption also increa-ses fuel consumption! For this reason, switchoff any unneeded electrical devices. Devicesthat use a lot of electricity includes the blow-er at a high setting, the rear window heatingor the seat heating* ››› page 228.

Note● If you have the Start-Stop system, it isrecommended that it should not be discon-nected.● It is recommended that you close thewindows when driving at more than60 km/h (37 mph).● Do not drive with your foot resting on theclutch pedal, as the pressure can make theplate slip. This causes wear and can dam-age the clutch plate.● Do not ride the clutch on a hill, use thebrake. The fuel consumption will be lowerand you will prevent the clutch plate frombeing damaged.● Use the engine brake on downhills bychanging to the gear that is best suited forthe gradient. Fuel consumption will be“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle driving onflooded roads, take the following into ac-count:

● The water should never come above thelower edge of the bodywork.● Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNINGAfter driving through flooded zones, brak-ing effectiveness can decrease if the brakediscs or pads are damp ››› page 290.

CAUTION● Driving through flooded areas may dam-age vehicle components such as the en-gine, transmission or electrical system.● Whenever driving through water, theStart-Stop system* must be switched off››› page 251.

Note● Check the depth of the water before en-tering the flooded zone.● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,or stop the engine.● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc-tion cause waves that could exceed yourvehicle's critical height.

● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-sion) ››› page 359.

Trips abroad

● With petrol vehicles, it should be ensuredthat lead-free petrol is available throughoutthe journey ››› page 324, Fuel types. Seekinformation about service station networksselling unleaded fuel.● In some countries, it is possible that yourvehicle is not sold and some spare parts maynot be available or the technical servicesmay only be able to make limited repairs.

SEAT importers and distributors will provideinformation about the technical preparationthat your vehicle requires and also aboutnecessary maintenance and repair possibili-ties.

CAUTIONSEAT does not accept liability for any dam-age to the vehicle due to the use of a lowerquality fuel, an inadequate service or thenon-availability of genuine spare parts.

269

Driving

Driver assistance systems

Cruise control system(CCS)*

Related video

Fig. 266 Dash panel

Control lamp

It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on andactive.

OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) isswitched on and active.

The control lamps light up when the ignition isswitched on and should turn off after approxi-mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken forthe function check.


Introduction

Fig. 267 Instrument panel display: GRA statusindications.

The cruise control system (CCS) is able tomaintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed byceasing to accelerate, not by actively brakingthe vehicle ››› .

Status displayGRA status ››› Fig. 267

CCS temporarily switched off. The setspeed is displayed in small or darkenedfigures.System error. Contact a specialisedworkshop.CCS switched on. The speed memory isempty.The CCS is switched on. The set speed isdisplayed in large figures.

Changing gear in CCS modeThe CCS decelerates as soon as the clutchpedal is pressed, intervening again automati-cally after a gear is engaged.

Travelling down hills with the CCSIf the CCS cannot maintain a constant vehi-cle speed downhill, brake and change downa gear if necessary. The GRA is temporarilydisabled by pressing the brake.

Automatic offThe GRA disconnects automatically or istemporarily interrupted:

● If the system detects a fault that could af-fect the working order of the CCS.● If you press and maintain the acceleratorpedal for a certain time, driving faster thanthe stored speed.● If the dynamic driving control systems inter-vene, ASR, ESC, etc.

A

B

C

D

270


● If the brake pedal is pressed.● If the airbag is triggered.● If the lever is taken out of the D/S position.

WARNINGUse of GRA could cause accidents and se-vere injuries if it is not possible to drive at aconstant speed maintaining the safety dis-tance.● Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis-tance from the vehicle in front is insuffi-cient, on steep roads, with several bends orin slippery circumstances or on floodedroads.● Never use the CCS when driving off-roador on unpaved roads.● Adapt your speed and the distance to thevehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath-er, the condition of the road and the trafficsituation.● To avoid unexpected operation of thecruise control system, turn it off every timeyou finish using it.● It is dangerous to use a set speed which istoo high for other conditions.● If driving down a steep gradient, the GRAcannot maintain a constant speed. Thespeed can increase. In this case, brake andchange down a gear.

Operating the cruise control

Fig. 268 On the turn signal lever: controls foroperating the GRA.

Connecting● Move the control ››› Fig. 268 1 to .

If no speed has been programmed, the sys-tem will not control it.

Activating the cruise control● Press button ››› Fig. 268 2 in area .

The current speed is stored and the cruisecontrol is activated.

Temporarily interrupting● Move the control ››› Fig. 268 1 to orstep on the brake.

The cruise control system is switched off tem-porarily. The speed is stored.

Reinstating the cruise control● Press button ››› Fig. 268 2 in area .

Cruise control is activated at the storedspeed.

Adjusting the speedWhile the GRA is set, the stored speed can beadjusted with button ››› Fig. 268 2 :

● To increase in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)briefly press button ››› Fig. 268 2 in the area.● To increase the speed without interruption,keep button ››› Fig. 268 2 pressed down inthe area .● To reduce in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)briefly press button ››› Fig. 268 2 in the area.● To reduce the speed without interruption,keep button ››› Fig. 268 2 pressed down inthe area .

The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac-celerating or stopping accelerating. The vehi-cle does not brake actively.

Switching off● Move control ››› Fig. 268 1 to .

The system is disconnected and the memo-rised speed is deleted.

271

Driving

Emergency brake assistancesystem (Front Assist)*

Introduction

Fig. 269 On the instrument panel display: ad-vance warning indications.

The objective of the system is to preventhead-on collisions against objects that maybe in the vehicle’s path or minimise the con-sequences of such impacts.

Depending on several factors and how criti-cal the situation is, the system operates in astaggered manner. First it warns the driver,and if the driver’s reaction does not occur oris insufficient, it activates independent emer-gency braking.

The function is intended to prevent collisionswith parked vehicles or vehicles in the samelane travelling in the same direction, or withpedestrians crossing the vehicle’s path. It

may not activate in other hazard situations››› .

Front Assist is active between 4 km/h (2.5mph) and 250 km/h (156 mph). Dependingon a range of conditions, some of the func-tions described below are omitted to optimizethe behaviour of the system.

Front Assist is a driving assistance functionthat can never replace the driver’s atten-tion.

Safety distance warningIf the system detects that you are driving tooclose to the vehicle in front, it will warn thedriver with this indication on the instrumentpanel display .

The timing of the warning varies dependingon driver behaviour and the traffic situation.

Advance warningIf the system detects a possible collision withthe vehicle in front, it alerts the driver bymeans of an audible warning and an indica-tion on the instrument panel display››› Fig. 269.

The warning moment varies depending onthe traffic situation and driver behaviour. Atthe same time, the vehicle will prepare for apossible emergency braking ››› .

Critical warningIf the driver fails to react to the advancewarning, the system may actively intervenein the brakes and generate a brief jolt to warnthe driver of the imminent danger of a colli-sion.

Automatic brakingIf the driver also fails to react to the criticalwarning, the system may initiate independ-ent emergency braking by progressively in-creasing the braking in accordance with howcritical the situation is.

Driver emergency brake assistance sys-temThe system may detect that the driver is notbraking hard enough to avoid the collision. Inthis case, it will increase the braking intensity.

The system cannot prevent a collision, al-though it can significantly minimise the con-sequences by reducing the speed and theforce of the impact.


WARNINGFront Assist cannot change the laws ofphysics or replace the driver in terms of

272


keeping control of the vehicle and reactingto a possible emergency situation.

WARNINGFollowing a Front Assist emergency warn-ing, pay immediate attention to the situa-tion and try to avoid the collision as appli-cable.● If the Front Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedlyintervenes unnecessarily), switch it off.Have the system checked by a specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership.● Always adapt your speed and distanceaway from the vehicle in front of you at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-dents and serious injuries.● In complex driving situations, Front Assistmay issue warnings and intervene in brak-ing unnecessarily.● If the operation of the Front Assist is im-paired by dirt or because the radar sensorhas lost its settings, the system may issueunnecessary warnings and intervene inop-portunely in the braking.● The Front Assist does not react to animalsor vehicles crossing your path or ap-proaching head-on down the same lane.

● The Front Assist does not react to pedes-trians walking head-on in the same lane.● The driver must always be ready to takeover the control of the vehicle.

Note● When Front Assist is connected, the indi-cations of other functions on the screenmay be hidden.● When the Front Assist causes a braking,the brake pedal is “harder”.● Automatic interventions by the Front As-sist on the brakes may be interrupted bypressing the clutch, accelerator or movingthe wheel.● The Front Assist may brake the vehicleuntil it stops completely. However, thebrake system does not halt the vehicle per-manently. Use the foot brake!● If the Front Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenesseveral times unnecessarily), switch it off.

Radar sensors

Fig. 270 On the front bumper: radar sensors.

A radar sensor is fitted on the front bumper››› Fig. 270 1 .

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, or by environmental influences suchas rain or mist. In this case, the Front Assistdoes not work. The instrument panel displaysthe following message: Front Assist: Nosensor vision! Clean the radar sensor››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly again, the Front Assist will be availa-ble again. The message will disappear fromthe screen.

Front Assist operation may be affected by astrong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-cur, for example, in a closed car park or dueto the presence of metallic objects (e.g.guard rails or sheets used in road works). »

273

Driving

The area in front of and around the radarsensor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect Front Assist operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-paired or structural modifications are madeto it, Front Assist operation may be affected.SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealershipfor this purpose.

CAUTIONIf you have the feeling that the radar sensoris damaged or has lost its settings, discon-nect the Front Assist. This will avoid possi-ble dangerous situations caused by the in-adequate operation of the system. If thisoccurs have it adjusted.● The sensor may not be adjusted correct-ly if it receives an impact. This may com-promise the system's efficacy or discon-nect it.● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront that is larger than the space for theregistration plate, or a registration platethat is curved or warped can cause the ra-dar to malfunction.● Clean away the snow with a brush andthe ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.

Operation of the emergency brakeassistance system (Front Assist)

Fig. 271 On the instrument panel display: FrontAssist deactivated indication.

The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-tion is switched on.

When the Front Assist is switched off, so tooare the advance warning and the distancewarning functions.

SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assistactivated. Exceptions ››› page 275, Deacti-vating Front Assist temporarily in the fol-lowing situations.

Switching the Front Assist on and offWith the ignition switched on, the Front Assistcan be deactivated or activated as follows:● Select the corresponding menu option us-ing the button for the driver assistance sys-tems ››› page 89.

● OR: using the Easy Connect system withthe button > Vehicle > SETTINGS> Driver assistance ››› page 92.

When the Front Assist is deactivated, the indi-cation ››› Fig. 271 will be shown on the in-strument panel.

Activating or deactivating the pre-warning(advance warning)The advance warning can be activated ordeactivated in the Easy Connect system us-ing button > Vehicle > SETTINGS> Driver assistance ››› page 92.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping advance warningactive.

Depending on the vehicle’s infotainment sys-tem the advance warning function may beadapted in the following modes:

● Advance● Medium● Delayed● Deactivated

SEAT recommends driving with the function in“Medium” mode.

274


Switching distance warning on and offThe distance warning can be activated ordeactivated in the Easy Connect system us-ing button > Vehicle > SETTINGS> Driver assistance ››› page 92.

The system will store the setting for the nexttime the ignition is switched on.

SEAT recommends keeping the distancewarning active.

Deactivating Front Assist tempora-rily in the following situations

In the following situations the Front Assistshould be deactivated due to the system'slimitations:

● When the vehicle is to be towed.● If the vehicle is on a test bed.● When the radar sensor is damaged.● If the radar sensor receives a violent im-pact.● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.● If the radar sensor is temporarily coveredby an accessory.● When the vehicle is going to be loaded ontotransportation.

System limitations

Front Assist has certain limitations inherent tothe system. Thus, in certain circumstances,some of the reactions may be inappropriatefrom the driver's standpoint. So pay attentionin order to intervene if necessary.

The following conditions may cause theFront Assist not to react or to do so toolate:● In the first few instants of driving afterswitching on the ignition, due to the system’sinitial auto-calibration.● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-aged.● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.● On taking tight bends or complex paths.● Pressing the accelerator all the way down.● If the ASR has been disconnected or theESC activated in Sport mode ››› page 298.● If the ESC is controlling.● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.● If there are metal objects, e.g. guard rails orsheets used in road works.● If the vehicle is reversing.● In case of snow or heavy rain.● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-bikes.

● Misaligned vehicles.● Vehicles crossing the other's path.● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-tion.● Loads and accessories of other vehiclesthat protrude over the sides, backwards orover the top.

275

Driving

ACC - Adaptive Cruise Con-trol*

Introduction


Fig. 273 Detection area.

The ACC is an extension of the vehicle’scruise control function (GRA) ››› .

It allows the driver to set a cruise speed be-tween 30 km/h (20 mph) and 210 km/h (130mph), and select the desired distance fromthe previous in front.

The ACC adapts the cruising speed of thevehicle, keeping a safe distance away fromthe vehicle in front, if there is one, dependingon speed.

When driving behind another vehicle, theACC reduces speed until it is the same asthat of the vehicle ahead and maintains theset distance between the vehicles. If the vehi-cle ahead accelerates, the ACC also accel-erates the vehicle, going no higher than theprogrammed target speed.

If the vehicle is equipped with automaticgearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle untilit stops completely if a vehicle in front of itstops.

The distance programmed should be in-creased when the road surface is wet.

Driver intervention promptACC is subject to certain limitations inherentto the system. In other words, in certain cir-cumstances the driver will have to adjust thespeed and the distance from other vehicles.

In this case, the instrument panel screen willwarn you to intervene by applying the brakeand a warning tone will be heard››› page 277.

WARNINGThe ACC’s technology cannot overcomethe system's inherent limitations or change

the laws of physics. If used negligently orinvoluntarily, it may cause serious acci-dents and injuries. The system is not a re-placement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitvisibility, weather, road and traffic condi-tions.● Do not use ACC in poor visibility, or onroads that are steep, with lots of curves orslippery.● Never use ACC when driving off-road oron unpaved roads. The ACC has been de-signed for use on paved roads only.● ACC does not react when approaching afixed obstacle, such as the end of a trafficjam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop-ped at the traffic lights.● The ACC only reacts to people if a pe-destrian monitoring system is available.The system does not react to animals orvehicles crossing your path or approachinghead-on down the same lane.● If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi-ciently, brake the vehicle immediately.● If you are driving with a spare wheel fit-ted, the ACC system could automaticallyswitch off. Switch off the system whenstarting off.● If the vehicle continues to move involun-tarily after a driver intervention prompt,brake the vehicle.

276


● If the instrument panel screen displays adriver intervention prompt, adjust the dis-tance.● The driver should be ready to accelerateor brake at all times.

Note● If the ACC does not work as described inthis chapter, do not use it until it has beenchecked by a specialised workshop. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.● Maximum speed with the ACC activatedis limited to 210 km/h (130 mph).● When the ACC is switched on, strangenoises may be heard during braking,caused by the braking system.

Symbols on the instrument paneldisplay and control lamps

The speed reduction by the ACCto maintain the distance from thevehicle in front is not sufficient.

Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver interventionprompt.

ACC is not currently availablea).

While the vehicle is stationary, switch off the engineand start it again. Perform a visual check of the radarsensor ››› Fig. 275. If it is still unavailable, refer to aspecialised workshop to have the system inspected.

a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colourdisplay is in colour.

The ACC is active.

No vehicle is detected in front. The programmedspeed remains constant.

If the symbol is white: the ACC isactive.

A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC ad-justs speed and distance from the vehicle in front.

If the symbol is grey: ACC is inac-tive (Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

The lamp lights up green

The ACC is active.

Some control and warning lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.


Status display

Fig. 274 On the instrument panel display: ACC inactive (Standby). ACC active.

Indications on the display ››› Fig. 274:Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not ac-tive and is not regulating your speed. »

1

277

Driving

Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC isnot active and is not regulating your dis-tance.Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is activeand is regulating your speed.Distance level 2 set by the driver.ACC is active and is regulating your dis-tance based on speed.Speed programmed with the ACC

NoteWhen the ACC is connected, the indica-tions on the instrument panel screen maybe concealed by warnings from other func-tions, such as an incoming call.

Radar sensors

Fig. 275 On the front bumper: radar sensors.

2

3

4

5

6

A radar sensor is fitted on the front bumper››› Fig. 275 1 .

The radar sensor's visibility may be impairedby dirt, or by environmental influences suchas rain or mist. In this case the adaptive cruisecontrol (ACC) does not work. The instrumentpanel displays the following message: ACC:No sensor vision! Clean the radar sensor››› .

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly, the ACC will become available. Themessage on the screen will switch off and theACC may be reactivated.

ACC operation may be affected by a strongradar reverse reflection. This may occur, forexample, in a closed car park or due to thepresence of metallic objects (e.g. guard railsor sheets used in road works).

The area in front of and around the radarsensor should not be covered with adhesives,additional or similar headlights, as this maynegatively affect ACC operation.

If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-paired or structural modifications are madeto it, ACC operation may be affected. In thisscenario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership.

CAUTIONIf you have the sensation that the radarsensor is damaged or has lost its settings,

disconnect the ACC. This way you canavoid possible damage. If this occurs haveit adjusted.● The sensor may not be adjusted correct-ly if it receives an impact. This may com-promise the system's efficacy or discon-nect it.● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis purpose.● A registration plate or plate holder on thefront that is larger than the space for theregistration plate, or a registration platethat is curved or warped can cause the ra-dar to malfunction.● Clean away the snow with a brush andthe ice preferably with a solvent-free de-icer spray.

278


ACC operation

Fig. 276 On the left of the steering column: op-erating the ACC with the third lever.

Fig. 277 On the left of the steering column: op-erating the ACC with the third lever.

When the ACC is connected, the green con-trol lamp will light up on the instrumentpanel, and the programmed speed and ACCstatus will be displayed ››› Fig. 274.

What ACC settings are possible?● Connecting and activating the ACC››› page 279.● Setting your speed ››› page 279.● Setting your distance ››› page 279.● Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC››› page 280.● Adjusting the default distance level at thestart of your journey ››› page 280.● Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 280.● Conditions in which the ACC does not re-act ››› page 280.

Connecting and activating the ACCTo connect and activate the ACC, the posi-tion of the gearbox lever, the vehicle speedand the position of the third level of the ACCmust all be taken into account.

● With manual transmission, the gear levermust be in any gear except first. With auto-matic transmission, the gear lever must be inposition D or S. Speed must be higher than30 km/h (18 mph) approx.● To activate the ACC, move the third lever toposition ››› Fig. 276 1 . At this time, theACC is not active and there is no program-med speed.● Next, press button ››› Fig. 277 B ormove the lever to position ››› Fig. 276 2 . At this moment the ACC is ac-

tivated and the current speed and distanceare programmed. The picture in the box willchange to Active mode ››› Fig. 274 .

While ACC is active, the vehicle travels at aset speed and distance from the vehicleahead. Both speed and distance can bechanged at any time.

Setting speed● To set the speed, move the third lever up +or down – to the desired speed››› Fig. 274 6 . The speed adjustment is madeat 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals.● If you wish to increase speed by intervals of1 km/h (0.6 mph), move the lever to position ››› Fig. 276 2 , or to decrease it pressbutton ››› Fig. 277 B .

The set speed can be changed when the ve-hicle is stopped or during driving.

Setting your distance level● To increase or reduce the distance, pressbutton A to the right or left ››› Fig. 277.

The instrument panel display modifies the se-lected distance ››› Fig. 274 4 . There are 5distance levels to choose from. SEAT recom-mends level 3. The set distance can bechanged when the vehicle is stopped or whiledriving ››› . »

279

Driving

Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC● To disconnect the ACC move the lever toposition (fixed) ››› Fig. 276 0 . An ACC de-activated message appears and the func-tion is totally deactivated.

If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, justto switch it temporarily to inactive mode(Standby), move the third lever to position 3 or press the brake pedal.

It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby)if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door isopened.

Adjusting the default distance level at thestart of your journeyIn wet road conditions, you should always seta larger distance with regard to the vehicle infront than when driving in dry conditions››› .

In the Easy Connect system, you can pre-se-lect the distance level when connecting theACC to: Very short, Short, Medium, Long andVery long using button > Vehicle >SETTINGS > Driver assistance››› page 92.

Changing the driving profileIn vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the drivingprofile selected can have an influence on theACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour››› page 264.

In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be-haviour of the ACC can also be affected ifany of the following drive profiles are selec-ted in the Easy Connect system:

● Normal● Sport● Eco● Convenience

In this case you must access the ACC set-tings using button > Vehicle >SETTINGS > Driver assistance > ACC››› page 92.

The following conditions may lead theACC not to react:● If the accelerator is pressed.● If there is no gear engaged.● If the ESC is controlling.● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-trically connected trailer are damaged.● If the vehicle is reversing.● Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).

Driver messages ACC not available● The system cannot continue to guaranteesafe vehicle detection and is deactivated.The sensor has lost its setting or is damaged.

Take the vehicle to a specialised workshopand have the fault repaired.

ACC and Front Assist: currentlynot available. No sensor vision● This message is displayed if the radar sen-sor's visibility is impaired by leaves, snow,dense fog or dirt. Clean the sensor››› Fig. 275.

ACC: currently not available.Gradient too steep● The maximum road slope has been excee-ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot beguaranteed. The ACC cannot be switchedon.

ACC: only available in D, S or M● Select the D/S or M position on the selectorlever.

ACC: parking brake applied● The ACC is deactivated if the parking brakeis applied. The ACC is available once againafter the parking brake is released.

ACC: currently not available. In-tervention of stability control● The indication is displayed when the elec-tronic stability control (ESC) intervenes. In thiscase, the ACC is automatically switched off.

280


ACC: Take action!● The indication is displayed if, when the ve-hicle starts up on a hill with a slight slope, thevehicle rolls back even although the ACC isactivated. Apply the brake to stop the vehiclefrom moving/colliding with another vehicle.

ACC: speed limit● The indication is displayed in vehicles withmanual gearboxes if the current speed is toolow for the ACC mode. The speed limiterswitches off if the speed falls below 20 km/h(12 mph).

ACC: available as of the 2nd gear● The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear(manual gearbox).

ACC: engine speed● This indication is displayed if, when theACC accelerates or brakes, the driver doesnot shift up or down a gear in time, whichmeans exceeding or not reaching the permit-ted RPM. The ACC switches itself off. A buzzerwarning is heard.

ACC: clutch applied● Vehicles with manual transmission: pressingthe clutch pedal for longer exits cruise con-trol.

Door open● Vehicles with automatic transmission: theACC cannot be activated with the vehiclestationary and the door open.

WARNINGThere is a danger of rear collision when thedistance to the vehicle in front is reducedand the speed difference between both ve-hicles is so great that a speed reduction bythe ACC is not sufficient. In this case, brakeimmediately!● The ACC may not be able to detect allsituations properly.● Stepping on the accelerator may causethe ACC not to intervene in braking. Driverbraking will have priority over interventionby the speed control or adaptive cruisecontrol.● Always be ready to use the brakes!● Observe country-specific provisions gov-erning obligatory minimum distances be-tween vehicles.● It is dangerous to activate control and re-sume the programmed speed if the road,traffic or weather conditions do not permitthis. Risk of accident!

Note● The programmed speed is erased oncethe ignition or the ACC are switched off.

● When the traction control system (ASR) isdeactivated during acceleration or else theESC is activated in Sport* Mode(››› page 92), the ACC switches off auto-matically.● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system,the engine switches off during the ACCstopping phase and restarts for moving off.

Function to prevent overtaking onthe right

Fig. 278 On the instrument panel display: ACCactive, vehicle detected in an outer lane.

The ACC has a function to prevent overtakingon the right.

If another vehicle is driving more slowly to theleft of the vehicle, it is shown on the display››› Fig. 278. »

281

Driving

The system brakes the vehicle to avoid over-taking on the right, and will avoid overtakingbased on speed. The driver can interrupt theintervention of the ACC by pressing the ac-celerator. At low speeds the function is inac-tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or incity traffic.

Deactivating the ACC temporarilyin certain situations

In the following situations the ACC should bedeactivated due to the system's limitations››› :

● When overtaking, on closed curves ormountain roads, roundabouts, slip roads orroadwork sections, preventing the systemfrom accelerating to reach the programmedspeed.● When going through a tunnel, as operationcould be affected.● When other vehicles are going slower in theleft lane. In this case, slower vehicles will beovertaken on the right.● In case of heavy rain, snow or fog, the vehi-cle in front may not be detected.

WARNINGIf the ACC does not switch off in the situa-tions described, serious accidents and inju-ries may occur.

● Always switch off the ACC in critical sit-uations.

NoteIf you do not switch off the ACC in theaforementioned situations, you may com-mit a legal offence.

Special driving recommendations

Fig. 279 Vehicle on a bend. Motorcyclistahead, out of range of the radar sensor.

Fig. 280 Vehicle changing lanes. Onevehicle turning and another stationary.

The ACC has certain limitations inherent tothe system. Certain reactions, under certaincircumstances, may be unexpected or comelate from the driver's point of view. So pay at-tention in order to intervene if necessary.

The following situations require maximum at-tention:

Starting driving after a stopping phase(only with automatic transmission)After a stopping phase, the ACC may begindriving when the vehicle in front moves off››› .

282


OvertakingWhen the turn signal lights up before the ve-hicle starts to overtake, the ACC acceleratesthe vehicle automatically and thus reducesthe distance from the vehicle in front.

When the vehicle moves to the overtakinglane, if the ACC does not detect another ve-hicle in front, it accelerates until it reaches theprogrammed speed.

System acceleration can be interrupted atany time by pressing the brake or moving thethird lever to position ››› Fig. 276 3 .

Driving through a bendWhen entering or leaving some curves, theradar sensor may cease to sense the vehicledriving in front of it, or react to a vehicle in theadjacent lane ››› Fig. 279 . The vehicle maybrake unnecessarily or stop reacting to thevehicle in front. In this case, the driver has tointervene by accelerating or interruptingbraking by applying the brake or pushing thethird lever to position ››› Fig. 276 3 .

Driving in tunnelsWhen driving through tunnels the radar sen-sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun-nels.

Narrow or misaligned vehiclesThe radar sensor can only detect narrow ve-hicles or vehicles that circulate out of align-ment when they enter its range ››› Fig. 279 .In these cases, you should brake as necessa-ry.

Vehicles with special loads and accesso-riesSpecial loads and accessories of other vehi-cles that jut out over the sides, backwards orover the top may be out of the ACC's range.SEAT recommends disconnecting it.

Other vehicles changing lanesVehicles changing lanes a short distanceaway from your own can only be detectedwhen they are within range of the sensors. Asa consequence, the ACC will take longer toreact ››› Fig. 280 . Brake yourself as neces-sary.

Stationary vehiclesThe ACC does not detect stationary objectswhile driving, such as traffic tails or damagedvehicles.

If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns ormoves over and there is a stationary vehiclein front of it, the ACC will not react to it››› Fig. 280 . Brake yourself as necessary.

Vehicles driving in the opposite directionand vehicles crossing your pathThe ACC does not react to vehicles ap-proaching from the opposite direction or ve-hicles crossing your path.

Metal objectsMetal objects, e.g. guard rails or sheets usedin road works, can confuse the radar sensorand cause the ACC to react wrongly.

Factors that may affect how the radarsensor operatesIf laser sensor operation is impaired, due toheavy rain snow or mud, the ACC is deactiva-ted temporarily. A message will be displayedstating this. If necessary, clean the radar sen-sor ››› Fig. 275.

When the radar sensor begins to operateproperly, the ACC will become available. Themessage will turn off and the ACC may bereactivated.

ACC operation may be affected by a strongradar reverse reflection, for example in aclosed car park. SEAT recommends discon-necting it.

Trailer modeWhen driving with trailer the ACC controlsless dynamically. »

283

Driving

Overheated brakesIf the brakes overheat, for example on longand steep descents, the ACC may be deacti-vated temporarily. A message will be dis-played stating this. In this case, adaptivecruise control cannot be activated.

Cruise control may be reactivated once thebrake temperature has dropped. The mes-sage will disappear. If the message ACC notavailable remains on for quite a long time itmeans that there is a fault. Contact a speci-alised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership.

WARNINGIf you do not pay attention to the Pressthe brake message, the vehicle may moveand crash into the vehicle ahead. Beforedriving off again, check that the road isclear. The radar sensor may not detect ob-stacles on the road. This could cause anaccident and serious injuries. If necessary,apply the brake.

Lane Assist*

Introduction

Fig. 281 On the windscreen: field of vision ofthe Lane Assist system.

Using the camera located in the windscreen,the Lane Assist system detects the possiblelines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in-voluntarily approaches a dividing line it hasdetected, the system notifies the driver with acorrective steering movement. The purpose isnot only to warn the driver, but also to keepthe vehicle inside the lane. This movementcan be over-regulated at any time.

No warning is produced with the turn signalsactivated, given that the Lane Assist systemunderstands that a lane change is required.

Control lamp

or It lights up yellow

Lane Assist system active but not available.The system cannot accurately recognize the lane.See page 286, The lane assist system is activebut it is not available (the control lamp is lit upyellow).

or It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.

or It lights up yellow

Error in the lane departure warning system. Take thevehicle to a specialised workshop to repair the fault.

Some control and warning lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.


284


Indications on the instrument paneldisplay

Fig. 282 On the instrument panel display: In-dication on the Lane Assist system display (ex-ample 1).

Fig. 283 On the instrument panel display: Indi-cation on the Lane Assist system display (ex-ample 2).

Status displayFig. 282 : The system is active, but notavailable, either because the minimumspeed has not been reached or becausethe lane lines are not recognised.Fig. 282 : The system is active andavailable, both lane lines are recognised.The steering angle is not being correc-ted at this moment.

–

–

Fig. 283 : The system is operational,the highlighted line 1 indicates thatthere was a risk of involuntarily crossingthe lane line and that the steering is be-ing adjusted to correct the angle.Fig. 283 : The two highlighted lines 1and 2 light up simultaneously whenboth lane lines are recognised and theLane Assist function is activated.

Operating mode

Steering wheel vibrationThe following situations can cause vibrationin the steering wheel and require the driver totake active control of driving:

● When the steering angle assist value re-quired to keep the vehicle in the lane is higherthan the system’s maximum operating value.● If the system ceases to display the lanelines while assisting with steering.

Switching the Lane Assist system on or off● Select the corresponding menu option us-ing the button for the driver assistance sys-tems ››› page 89.● OR: by using the Easy Connect system withbutton > Vehicle > SETTINGS >Driver assistance ››› page 92. »

–

–

285

Driving

Lane Assist with lane centring guideThe Lane Centring Guide function is inten-ded to keep the vehicle in the centre of thelane.

If the driver has a tendency to veer slightly offcentre in the lane, the system adapts to driverpreferences.

● The Lane Centring Guide function is ac-tivated/deactivated in the Easy Connect sys-tem using the button > Vehicle >SETTINGS ››› page 92.

Automatic deactivation: the Lane Assist sys-tem can be automatically deactivated ifthere is a system malfunction. The controllamp disappears.

Hands-Off FunctionIn the absence of steering wheel activity thesystem alerts the driver with acoustic signalsand a text message on the dash panel askingto actively take over the steering.

If the driver does not react to this, the systemalso alerts the driver with a little shaking mo-tion through the brakes and, if the vehicle hasit, activates the Emergency Assist function››› page 288.

In vehicles without Emergency Assist, theadaptive lane guidance function will be disa-bled after the corresponding warnings to thedriver.

The lane assist system is active but it is notavailable (the control lamp is lit up yellow)● When driving at speeds below 65 km/h (38mph).● When the Lane Assist system does not de-tect the dividing lines of the road. For exam-ple, in the event warnings indicating roadworks, and snow, dirt, moisture or reflections.● When the radius of a curve is too small.● When no road markings can be seen.● When the distance to the next marking totoo great.● When the system does not detect any clearand active steering movement during a longperiod of time.● Temporarily, in the event of very dynamicdriving styles.● If a turn signal is activated.● With the stability control system (ESC) inSport mode or switched off.

Switching off the Lane Assist system in thefollowing situationsDue to the limits of the Lane Assist system,switch it off in the following situations:

● When more attention is required of the driv-er● When driving in a sporty style● In unfavourable weather conditions

● On roads in poor condition● In areas of road works

WARNINGThe intelligent technology in the Lane As-sist system cannot change the limits im-posed by the laws of physics and by thevery nature of the system. Careless or un-controlled use of the Lane Assist systemmay cause accidents and injury. The sys-tem is not a replacement for driver aware-ness.● Always adapt your speed and the dis-tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-bility, weather conditions, the condition ofthe road and the traffic situation.● Always keep your hands on the steeringwheel so it can be turned at any time.● The Lane Assist system does not detectall road markings. The road surfaces, roadstructures or objects in poor condition canbe incorrectly detected as road markingsunder certain circumstances by the LaneAssist system. In such situations, switch theLane Assist system off immediately.● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.● When the area of vision of the camerabecomes dirty, covered or is damaged, theLane Assist system function can be affec-ted.

286


CAUTIONIn order to avoid influencing the operationof the system, the following points must betaken into account:● Regularly clean the area of vision of thecamera and keep it in a clean state, withoutsnow or ice ››› Fig. 281.● Do not cover the area of vision of thecamera.● Check that the area of vision of the wind-screen camera is not damaged.

Note● The lane departure warning system hasbeen exclusively developed for driving onpaved roads only.● If the Lane Assist system does not work asdescribed in this chapter, do not use it andcontact a specialised workshop.● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

Traffic Jam Assist



Traffic Jam Assist helps the driver keep thecar within its lane and to move in convoy incase of traffic congestion or slow traffic.

Traffic Jam Assist is an additional function ofLane Assist ››› page 284 and combines LaneAssist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) ››› page 276. Therefore, it is essentialthat you read these two chapters carefullyand note the limitations of the systems andthe information about them.

Operation of Traffic Jam AssistAt speeds of below 60 km/h (40 mph), TrafficJam Assist can maintain a (temporary) dis-tance preset by the driver with respect to thevehicle ahead and help stay within the lane››› .

To do this, the system automatically controlsthe accelerator, brakes and steering, andslows the vehicle, stopping it fully if neces-sary, when faced with a vehicle in front that

has stopped. It automatically moves off againwhen the vehicle ahead moves.

Traffic Jam Assist is designed only for use onmotorways and wide roads. Therefore, neveruse it in city traffic.

Technical requirements for using TrafficJam Assist● Lane assist must be activated: button > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Driverassistance > Lane assist system››› page 92.● Adaptive lane guidance must be activated:button > Vehicle > SETTINGS >Driver assistance > Lane assist sys-tem● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) must beconnected and active ››› page 279.● The speed must be below 60 km/h(38 mph).

Traffic Jam Assist is not active (the LaneAssist control light turns yellow)● If any of the conditions mentioned onpage 287, Technical requirements for us-ing Traffic Jam Assist are no longer met.● If any of the conditions required for opera-tion of the Lane Assist are not met››› page 284. »

287

Driving

● If any of the conditions necessary for theadaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are nolonger fulfilled ››› page 276.

Situations where traffic jam assist has tobe disconnectedDue to the limitations of the system, TrafficJam Assist must always be switched off in thefollowing situations:

● When more attention is required by thedriver.● When driving in a very sporty style.● In adverse weather conditions, e.g. in caseof snow or heavy rain.● When driving on roads in poor condition.● In sections with roadworks.● In city journeys.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intoTraffic Jam Assist cannot defy the laws ofphysics; it only works within the limits of thesystem. Accidents and severe injury mayoccur if Traffic Jam Assist is used negli-gently or involuntarily. The system is not areplacement for driver awareness.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitthe visibility, weather, road and traffic con-ditions.

● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in city jour-neys.● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist if there ispoor visibility, for example, in case of snow,ice, rain or loose gravel, or on steep or slip-pery sections or flooded roads.● Do not use Traffic Jam Assist offroad oron roads where the surface is not firm. Traf-fic Jam Assist has been designed for use onpaved roads only.● Traffic Jam Assist does not react to peo-ple or animals or vehicles crossing yourpath or that approach you head-on downthe same lane.● If Traffic Jam Assist does not reducespeed sufficiently, brake the vehicle imme-diately by applying the pedal.● If the vehicle continues to move when youwish it to stop after a driver interventionprompt, brake the vehicle by applying thepedal.● If driver intervention is requested on thedash panel display, immediately resumecontrol of the vehicle.● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering atany time. The driver is always responsiblefor keeping the vehicle in its own lane.● Always be prepared to take charge ofdriving (accelerating or braking) yourself.

Note● If Traffic Jam Assist does not work as de-scribed in this chapter, stop using it andcontact a specialised workshop.● If the system is faulty, take it to a special-ised workshop and have it checked.

Emergency Assist


Emergency Assist detects whether there is in-activity by the driver and can automaticallykeep the car within the lane and stop it alto-gether if necessary. This way the system canactively help avoid an accident.

Emergency Assist is an additional function ofLane Assist ››› page 284 and combines LaneAssist functions with Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) ››› page 276. Therefore, it is essentialthat you read these two chapters carefullyand note the limitations of the systems andthe information about them.

Operation of Emergency AssistEmergency Assist detects when the driverceases to perform any activity and repeated-ly requests that he/she regain active controlof the vehicle, through the use of optical and

288


acoustic warnings and by applying thebrakes.

If the driver continues to do nothing, the sys-tem automatically takes over the accelerator,brakes and steering in order to brake the ve-hicle and keep it in its lane ››› . When theemergency assistant is actively regulating,the hazard lights turn on ››› page 124.

If the remaining braking distance is sufficient,if necessary the system slows down the vehi-cle until it stops completely and automati-cally switches on the electronic parkingbrake ››› page 292.

Connecting and disconnecting Emergen-cy AssistThe Emergency Assist is switched on auto-matically when the Lane Assist is switched on››› page 284.

Technical requirements for using the Emer-gency Assist● The adaptive cruise control (ACC) must beswitched on ››› page 276.● The Lane Assist must be switched on››› page 284.● The selector lever must be in the D/S posi-tion or in the Tiptronic selector gate.● The system must have detected a laneseparation line on both sides of the vehicle››› Fig. 283.

The following conditions may cause theEmergency Assist not to react or to switchoff automatically:● If the driver accelerates, brakes or movesthe steering wheel.● If any of the conditions mentioned in››› page 289, Technical requirements forusing the Emergency Assist are not fulfilled.● If any of the conditions required for opera-tion of the Lane Assist are not met››› page 284.● If any of the conditions necessary for theadaptive cruise control (ACC) to work are nolonger fulfilled ››› page 276.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe Emergency Assist cannot overcome thelimits imposed by the laws of physics; it on-ly works within the limits of the system. Thedriver is responsible for driving the vehicle.● Adapt your speed and safe distance tothe vehicle in front of you at all times to suitthe visibility, weather, road and traffic con-ditions.● Keep your hands on the wheel at all timesto be ready to intervene in the steering atany time.● The Emergency Assist alone cannot al-ways avoid accidents or serious injuries.● If the operation of the Emergency Assistis impaired, for example if the radar sensor

of the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or theLane Assist camera are covered or havelost their settings, the system may inter-vene inopportunely in braking or in steer-ing.● The Emergency Assist does not react topeople or animal or vehicles crossing yourpath or which approach you head-on in thesame lane.

WARNINGIf the Emergency Assist Intervenes inoppor-tunely, serious accidents and injuries mayoccur.● If the Emergency Assist does not operateproperly, switch off the Lane Assist››› page 284. Doing so will also switch offthe Emergency Assist.● Have the system checked by a special-ised workshop. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership for this.

Note● Automatic interventions by the Emergen-cy Assist on the brakes may be interruptedby pressing the accelerator or brake or bymoving the wheel.● Hazard warning lights that come on auto-matically can be switched off by pressingthe accelerator or the break, moving thesteering wheel or pressing the hazardwarning light switch. »

289

Driving

● If this occurs, the Emergency Assist maydecelerate the vehicle until it comes to acomplete stop.● When the Emergency Assist is activated,it is only available again after the ignitionhas been switched off and back on again.

Braking and parking

Braking system

Control lamps

It lights up red

Brake fluid level too low ››› page 339 or fault in thebrake system. Do not carry on driving!

It lights up red

Electronic parking brake ››› page 292; OR handbrake applied ››› page 293.The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-leased.

It lights up yellow

Front brake pads worn.Contact a specialised workshop immediately.

WARNING● If the brake warning lamp does not goout or if it lights up when driving, the brakefluid level in the reservoir is too lo so thereis a risk of an accident ››› page 339, Brakefluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.Obtain technical assistance.● If the brake warning lamp lights up to-gether with the ABS lamp this could bedue to an ABS fault. When this function

fails, the rear wheels can lock up. Undercertain circumstances, the rear of the vehi-cle may skid, with the danger of losing con-trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.● If the lamp lights up, alone or accom-panied by a warning message on the in-strument panel display, please go immedi-ately to a specialised workshop to checkthe brake pads and to replace them if theyare worn.

Information about the brakes

New brake padsFor the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200miles), new brake pads have not yet reachedtheir maximum braking capacity, and need tobe “run in” first. However, you can compen-sate for the slightly reduced braking effect byapplying more pressure on the brake pedal.Avoid overloading the brakes while runningthem in.

WearThe rate of wear on the brake pads dependsa great deal on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is aparticular problem in urban traffic and shortstretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking forceand the environmental conditions (e.g.

290

Braking and parking

temperature, air humidity, etc.) noises may beproduced when braking.

Wet roads or road saltIn certain situations (for example, on drivingthrough flooded areas, in severe downpoursor after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-tion could be delayed if the discs and padsare damp, or frozen in winter. In this case thebrakes should be “dried” by pressing thebrake pedal several times.

At high speed and with the windscreen wipersactivated, the brake pads will briefly touchthe brake discs. This takes place, althoughunnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervalsto improve the response time of the brakeswhen they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also betemporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven forsome distance without using the brakes whenthere is a lot of salt on the road in winter. Thelayer of salt that accumulates on the discsand pads can be removed by gently apply-ing the brakes a few times.

CorrosionThere may be a tendency for corrosion toform on the discs and dirt to build up on thebrake pads if the vehicle is used infrequentlyor the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rusthas formed on the disks, it is advisable to

clean off the pads and disks by braking firmlya few times at a moderately high speed ››› .

Fault in the brake systemIf the brake pedal travel should ever increasesuddenly, this may mean that one of the twobrake circuits has failed. Drive immediately tothe nearest specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-member that you will have to apply morepressure on the brake pedal and allow forlonger stopping distances.

Low brake fluid levelMalfunctions can occur in the brake system ifthe brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluidlevel is monitored electronically.

Brake servoThe brake servo increases the pressure youapply to the brake pedal. It works only whenthe engine is running.

WARNINGAny anomaly in the brake system can in-crease the braking distance, with the re-sulting risk of an accident.● New brake pads and discs must be run inand do not have the correct friction duringthe first 200 km (124 miles). This reducedbraking capacity may be offset by pressingon the brake pedal a little harder.

● If you are driving on roads which havebeen salted, braking effectiveness may bedecreased.● Brakes can overheat if used excessivelyon slopes. Before driving down a long steepslope, it is advisable to reduce speed andchange down into a lower gear or range.Therefore, using the engine brake relievesthe brakes.● Gentle continuous braking causes thebrakes to overheat and the braking dis-tance will increase. Apply and then releasethe brakes alternately.● Apply the brakes heavily to clean thebrake system only in a suitable traffic situa-tion. Do not put other road users in danger:there is risk of causing an accident.● Ensure the vehicle does not move while inneutral, when the engine is stopped. Thebraking distance is increased considerablywhen the brake servo is not active.● If the brake is subjected to high stresses,vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency ofthe brakes.● Non-standard or damaged front spoilerscould restrict the airflow to the brakes andcause them to overheat. Before purchasingaccessories please read the relevant in-structions. »

291

Driving

CAUTION● Never let the brakes “drag” by leavingyour foot on the pedal when it is not neces-sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-sulting in longer stopping distances andgreater wear.● Before driving down a long, steep gradi-ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-lect a lower gear. This makes use of enginebraking and relieves the brakes. If you stillhave to use the brakes, it is better to brakefirmly at intervals than to apply the brakescontinuously.

Note● If the brake servo is out of action, for ex-ample when the car is being towed, you willhave to press the brake pedal considerablyharder than normal to make up for the lackof servo assistance.● If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-cessories such as a front spoiler or wheelcovers, it is important that the flow of air tothe front wheels is not obstructed, other-wise the brakes can overheat.

Electronic parking brake*

Fig. 285 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: electronic parking brake button

The electronic parking brake replaces thehandbrake.

Applying the electronic parking brakeThe electronic parking brake can be activa-ted whenever the vehicle is at a standstill,even when the ignition is switched off. Acti-vate it whenever you leave or park the vehi-cle.

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 285 button.● The parking brake is activated when thecontrol light of button ››› Fig. 285 (arrow) ison and the red control lamp on the instru-ment panel is always on.● Release the button.

Disconnecting the electronic parkingbrake● Switch the ignition on.● Press the button ››› Fig. 285. At the sametime step hard on the brake pedal or, if theengine is running, press the accelerator pedalslightly.● The control lamp of button ››› Fig. 285 (ar-row) and the red control lamp on the in-strument panel go out.

Automatic release of the electronic park-ing brake upon moving offThe electronic parking brake is automaticallyswitched off when starting if, after the driver'sdoor is closed and the driver's seat belt fas-tened, any of the following situations takeplace:

● In vehicles with automatic transmission: agear range is engaged or the vehicle isswitched to another one and the acceleratorpedal is lightly pressed.● In vehicles with manual transmission: theclutch pedal is pressed fully before startingoff and the accelerator is pedal lightly press-ed.● To facilitate certain manoeuvres there areexceptions that allow the automatic parkingbrake to be released without the driver's seatbelt being fastened.

292

Braking and parking

The parking brake can be prevented from be-ing automatically released by continuouslypulling up the ››› Fig. 285 switch whenstarting off.

The electronic parking brake is not discon-nected until the button is released. Thiscan facilitate starting off when a heavy loadis towed ››› page 308.

Automatic activation of the electronicparking brake when exiting the vehicle in-correctlyIn vehicles with automatic transmission, theelectronic parking brake is activated auto-matically when exiting the vehicle incorrectlyif:

● The selector lever is in the D/S or R positionor in the Tiptronic selector gate.● AND: the vehicle is stationary.● AND: the driver door is open.

Emergency brake functionOnly use the emergency brake function if youare unable to stop the vehicle with the footbrake ››› .

● Pull and hold the ››› Fig. 285 button inthis position to forcefully stop the vehicle. Atthe same time, an acoustic warning can beheard.

● To stop the braking process, release the button or press the accelerator.

WARNINGThe improper use of the electronic parkingbrake can cause accidents and serious in-jury.● Never use the electronic parking brake tostop the vehicle, unless it is an emergency.Braking distances can be considerably lon-ger, since, under certain circumstances,only the rear wheels brake. Always use thefoot brake.● Never accelerate from the engine when agear range or a gear is engaged and theengine is running. The vehicle could move,even if the electronic parking brake is acti-vated.

CAUTIONTo prevent the vehicle from unintentionallymoving when parking it, first apply theelectronic parking brake and then removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

Note● In vehicles with a manual gearbox, re-leasing the clutch and accelerating at thesame time automatically disconnects theelectronic parking brake.

● If the vehicle battery is flat, it will not bepossible to disconnect the electronic park-ing brake. Use the jump-start ››› page 47.● When the electronic parking brake is ap-plied or released, noises may be heard.● The system performs automatic and au-dible tests sporadically in the parked vehi-cle if some time elapses without the elec-tronic parking brake being used.

Handbrake

Fig. 286 Handbrake between the front seats.

The handbrake should be applied firmly toprevent the vehicle from accidentally moving.Apply the handbrake when you leave yourvehicle and when you park.

Applying the handbrake– Pull the handbrake lever up ››› Fig. 286. »

293

Driving

Releasing the handbrake– Pull the lever up slightly and press the re-

lease knob in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 286 and guide the handbrake leverdown fully ››› .

Always pull the handbrake all the way up, toavoid driving off while the brake is on ››› .

If you drive faster than 6 km/h (4 mph) withthe handbrake on, the following message*will appear on the instrument panel: HAND-BRAKE ON. You will also hear an audiblewarning.

WARNING● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi-cle when it is in motion. The braking dis-tance is considerably longer, becausebraking is only applied to the rear wheels.Risk of accident!● Failure to fully lower the handbrake levercan affect the operation of the system, andcan also cause heating and wear of therear brakes.

CAUTIONAlways apply the handbrake before youleave the vehicle. In addition, engage firstor rear gear in the gradient function, or setthe selection lever to P.

Auto Hold Function

Fig. 287 In the lower part of the centre con-sole: Auto Hold function button.

The control lamp on button ››› Fig. 287 re-mains on while the Auto Hold function is con-nected.

Once connected, the Auto Hold function as-sists the driver in keeping the vehicle station-ary at repeated intervals or for a certain peri-od of time with the engine running, for exam-ple, when going up a slope, when stopped attraffic lights or in heavy traffic with intermit-tent stops.

When connected, the Auto Hold function au-tomatically prevents the vehicle from rollingwhen stationary without pressing the brakepedal.

After detecting that the vehicle is stationaryand the brake pedal has been released, the

Auto Hold function holds the vehicle. The driv-er can lift their foot off the brake pedal.

When the driver touches the acceleratorpedal or accelerates slightly to continue driv-ing, the Auto Hold function releases the brake.The vehicle moves according to the slope ofthe road.

If the vehicle is stationary and one of the con-ditions required by the Auto Hold function isimpaired, it disconnects itself and the button'scontrol light goes out ››› Fig. 287. The elec-tronic parking brake connects automatically,if necessary, to park the vehicle safely ››› .

Conditions for keeping the vehicle station-ary with the Auto Hold function● The driver door must be closed.● The driver's seat belt must be fastened.● The engine is running.

Switching the Auto Hold function on andoffPulse button ››› . The control lamp onthe button goes out when the Auto Hold func-tion is switched off.

294

Braking and parking

Automatically engaging and disengagingthe Auto Hold functionIf the Auto Hold function was switched on withthe button before disconnecting the igni-tion, the function will remain on after theignition is re-connected.

If the Auto Hold function was not switched on,it will automatically remain off next time theignition is engaged.

The Auto Hold function connects automat-ically if the following conditions are met(all points must be met at the same time››› ):

The vehicle is kept stationary with thebrake pedal on a flat surface or on aslope.The engine rotates “correctly”.

The Auto Hold function is automaticallyturned off if the following conditions aremet:

If any of the conditions mentioned on››› page 294, Conditions for keepingthe vehicle stationary with the Au-to Hold function are no longer met.If the engine is running irregularly or ananomaly is detected.If the engine is turned off or stalls.Manual gearbox: The clutch and the ac-celerator are pressed at the same time.

1.

2.

1.

2.

3.4.

Automatic gearbox: If the accelerator ispressedAutomatic gearbox: If any of the tyreshas only minimal contact with theground, e.g. in the case of axle articula-tion.

WARNINGThe smart technology incorporated intothe Auto Hold function cannot defy thelaws of physics; it only works within the lim-its of the system. The greater convenienceprovided by the Auto Hold function shouldnever tempt you to take any risk that maycompromise safety.● Never leave the vehicle running and withthe Auto Hold function switched on.● The Auto Hold function cannot alwayskeep the vehicle stationary uphill or down-hill or stop it sufficiently, for example, onslippery or frozen surfaces.

NoteBefore entering a car wash, always switchoff the Auto Hold function, because if theelectronic parking brake is automaticallyconnected, it may cause damage.

5.

Hill driving assistant3 Valid for vehicles without the Auto Hold func-tion

The hill driving assistant helps the driver tomove off and upward on a hill, both forwardsand backwards, when the vehicle is station-ary.

The system maintains brake pressure for ap-proximately two seconds after the foot is tak-en off the brake pedal, to prevent the vehiclefrom moving when it is started. During these 2seconds, the driver has enough time to re-lease the clutch pedal and accelerate with-out the vehicle moving and without having touse the handbrake, making start-up easier,more comfortable and safer.

These are the basic operation conditions:

● being on a ramp or hill/slope,● driver door closed,● vehicle completely stationary,● engine running and foot on the brake,● having a gear engaged or being in neutralfor a manual gearbox, or with the selectorlever at positions D/S or R for an automaticgearbox.

WARNING● If you do not start the vehicle immediate-ly after taking your foot off the brake pedal,the vehicle may roll back under certain »

295

Driving

conditions. Depress the brake pedal or usethe hand brake immediately.● If the engine stalls, depress the brakepedal or use the hand brake immediately.● When following a line of traffic uphill, ifyou want to prevent the vehicle from rollingback when starting off, hold the brake ped-al down for a few seconds before startingoff.

NoteThe Official Service or a specialist work-shop can tell you if your vehicle is equip-ped with this system.

Stabilisation and brake as-sistance systems

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the ESC or ABS, or disconnection caused bythe system.The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If theABS fails, the lamp also lights up.

Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.

It lights up

ASR manually deactivated.

Or: ESC in Sport mode ››› page 298.

It lights up

ABS faulty or does not work.

The control lamps light up together when theignition is switched on and should turn off af-ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the timetaken for the function check.

Brake assist systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)The ESC helps to improve safety. It reducesthe tendency to skid and improves the stabili-ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESCdetects critical handling situations, such asvehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspinon the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicleby braking individual wheels or by reducingthe engine torque. The warning lamp willflash on the instrument panel when the ESC isintervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), thetraction control system (ASR), electronic dif-ferential lock (EDS), electronic torque control(XDS) and tractor-trailer sway mitigation*.

ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle bychanging the torque.

The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spinis desirable ››› page 298.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-der braking until the vehicle has reached avirtual standstill. You can continue to steer thevehicle even when the brakes are on full.Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do notpump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedalpulsate while the ABS is working.

If the running gear or brake system is modi-fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-verely limited.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)The brake assist system can reduce the re-quired braking distance. The braking force isautomatically boosted if you press the brakepedal quickly in an emergency. You mustkeep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-ger has passed.

Traction control system (ASR)In the event of wheelspin, the traction controlsystem reduces the engine torque to matchthe amount of grip available. This helps thecar to start moving, accelerate or climb agradient.

296

Braking and parking

Electronic differential lock (EDL)When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakesthe spinning wheel and directs the power tothe other driven wheel. This function is activeup to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheelfrom overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch onagain automatically when the brake hascooled down.

Tractor-trailer sway mitigation*If the vehicle is pulling a trailer, it will controlthe following: tractor-trailers tend to sway.When the swaying of the trailer is felt by thevehicle and detected by the ESC, it will auto-matically brake the towing vehicle within thelimits of the system and mitigate the sway.Tractor-trailer sway mitigation is not availablein all countries ››› page 314.

Electronic engine torque management(XDS)When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen-tial allows the outer wheel to turn at a higherspeed than the inner wheel. In this way, thewheel that is turning faster (outer wheel) re-ceives less drive torque than the inner wheel.This may mean that in certain situations thetorque delivered to the inner wheel is toohigh, causing the wheels to spin. On the other

hand, the outer wheel is receiving a lowerdrive torque than it could transmit. This cancause a loss of grip on the drive axle, in thiscase the front axle, which results in under-steer or “lengthening” of the trajectory.

The XDS can detect and correct this effectvia the sensors and signals of the ESC.

Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the insidewheel and counter the excess driving torqueof that wheel. This means that the requestedtrajectory is much more precise.

XDS works in combination with the ESC and isalways active, even when ASR is disconnec-ted, or when the ESC is in Sport mode or dis-connected.

Multi-collision brakeIn an accident, the multi-collision brake canhelp the driver by braking to avoid the risk ofskidding during the accident and causingother collisions.

The multi-collision brake works for front, sideor rear accidents, when the airbag controlunit records its activation level and the acci-dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h(6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes thevehicle, as long as the accident has not dam-aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on-board network

The following actions control automatic brak-ing during the accident:

● When the driver presses the accelerator,the automatic braking does not take place.● When the braking pressure through press-ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys-tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brakeautomatically.● Multi-collision braking will not be availableif ESC is malfunctioning.

WARNINGDriving at high speed on icy, slippery wetground can result in loss of vehicle controland serious injury to the driver and passen-gers.● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS and the electron-ic torque control system cannot exceed thelimits imposed by the laws of physics. Al-ways bear this in mind, especially on wet orslippery roads. If you notice the systemscutting in, you should reduce your speedimmediately to suit the road and trafficconditions. Do not be encouraged to takerisks by the presence of more safety sys-tems. If you do, an accident may occur.● Please remember that the accident riskalways increases if you drive fast, espe-cially in corners or on a slippery road, or ifyou follow too close behind the vehicle infront of you. The ESC, ABS, brake assist,EDS and the electronic torque control sys-tem cannot prevent accidents: risk of acci-dents! »

297

Driving

● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).Despite the control systems, the drivenwheels could spin, affecting the stability ofthe vehicle: risk of accident!

Note● The ABS and ASR will only operate cor-rectly if the four wheels have identicaltyres. Any differences in the rolling radiusof the tyres can cause the system to re-duce engine power when this is not desired.● The regulating processes of the systemscan make noises due to their operation.● If the warning lamp or lights up,there could be a fault ››› page 89.● Any modifications made to the vehicle(for example, to the engine, brake system,running gear or to the combination ofwheels and tyres) may affect the operationof the ABS, ASR and EDS.

Connecting and disconnecting theESC and ASR

Fig. 288 Centre console: Button for switchingon/off the ESC and ASR

The ESC is switched on automatically whenthe engine is started, and only works whenthe engine is running and includes the ABS,EDS and ASR systems.

The ASR function should only be switched offin situations in which traction is insufficient.

Depending on the finishes and versions, thereis the possibility of disconnecting only theASR or activating the ESC in “Sport” mode.

Disconnecting and connecting the ASR● The ASR can be disconnected and connec-ted using the Easy Connect system

››› page 92. In vehicles with a driver informa-tion system* the corresponding indication willbe displayed.

When the ASR is disconnected, the controlwarning light lights up on the instrumentcluster.

Disconnecting and connecting the ESC in“Sport” mode● In “Sport” mode, the ESC can be discon-nected and connected using the Easy Con-nect system ››› page 92. In vehicles with adriver information system* the correspondingindication will be displayed.

When “Sport” mode is connected, the inter-ventions of the ESC to stabilise the vehicle,and the anti-slip regulation (ASR1)) interven-tions are limited. In addition, the controllamp lights up on the instrument panel.

Disconnection of the ESC*In some versions of the model, besides thetraction control system (ASR), the electronicstability programme (ESC) can also beswitched off.

● Press the button ››› Fig. 288 for approxi-mately 1 second to switch to ESC Sportmode.

1) In vehicles with 4-wheel drive, the ASR is dis-connected completely ››› .

298

Braking and parking

● Press the button ››› Fig. 288 for approxi-mately 3 seconds to switch off the ElectronicStability programme (ESC), including the ASRfunction. The control lamp lights up and theESC OFF message is displayed permanentlyon the instrument panel display.● The ASR and ESC function are reconnectedby pressing the button ››› Fig. 288.● OR: Activate or deactivate the ESC Sport orESC in the Easy Connect system ››› page 92.The control lamp and the ESC OFF text onthe instrument panel switch off.

WARNINGThe ESC Sport mode should be activatedonly when traffic conditions and the abilityof the driver allow it. Danger of skidding!● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilisingfunction will be limited to allow for a sporti-er drive. The driving wheels could spin andthe vehicle could skid.● If the ESC is deactivated, the vehicle sta-bilisation function is not available.

Note● If the ASR is disconnected or the Sportmode is selected, cruise control* will beswitched off.● In ESC OFF mode, the ESC will be tempo-rarily reactivated to assist the driver duringbraking and will then switch back to pas-

sive mode when the brake pedal is re-leased (depending on the model version).

Parking

To park the vehicle

When parking your vehicle, all legal require-ments should be observed.

Always note the following points when park-ing the vehicle:

● Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› .● Set the parking brake ››› page 293 or con-nect the electronic parking brake››› page 292.● For an automatic gearbox, move the selec-tor lever to position P.● Switch the engine off and remove the keyfrom the ignition. Turn the steering wheelslightly to engage the steering lock.● With a manual gearbox, engage first gearon flat ground and slopes, or even reversegear on hills, and release the clutch pedal.● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys withyou.

Additionally, on steep slopes and inclinesBefore switching off the engine, rotate thesteering wheel so that if the vehicle shouldmove, it will be held by the kerb.

● On slopes, turn the front wheels so thatthey are against the edge of the kerb.● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre ofthe road.

WARNING● Avoid parking the vehicle where the hotexhaust system could ignite inflammablematerials, such as dry grass, low bushes,spilt fuel or flammable materials.● Do not leave passengers inside a closedvehicle, they may not be able to opendoors or windows. Locked doors hinder thepossibility of a rescue.● Children should not be left alone in thevehicle. They could tamper with the hand-brake or the gears, which could cause thevehicle to move without control.● Depending on weather conditions, it maybecome extremely hot or cold inside thevehicle. This can be fatal.

NoteIn vehicles with automatic transmission, thekey can only be removed from the ignitionwhen the lever is in position P.

299

Driving

Help with parking and ma-noeuvring

Parking aid parking and ma-noeuvring (ParkPilot)

Introduction


These assist systems help you when parkingand manoeuvring:

– Park assist plus. It is an assistant that givesa visual and audio warning of obstacles de-tected in front and behind the vehicle››› page 301.

– Rear parking aid. An audio assistant thatwarns about obstacles detected behind thevehicle ››› page 304.

WARNING● Always pay attention, by looking directly,to traffic and the area around the vehicle.Assistance systems are not a replacement

for driver awareness. Responsibility alwayslies with the driver.● The sensors have blind spots in which ob-stacles and people are not detected. Payspecial attention to children and animals.● Always keep visual control of the sur-roundings: use the mirrors for additionalhelp.

CAUTIONParking distance warning system functionscan be affected by different factors thatcan cause damage:● Under certain circumstances, the systemdoes not detect or display certain objects:– Chains, trailer draw bars, bars, fences,

posts and thin trees.– Objects that are located above the

sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.– Objects with certain surfaces or struc-

tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-der snow.

● Certain surfaces of objects and gar-ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-sors' signals. The system cannot detectthese objects or people wearing suchclothes correctly.● Sensor signals may be affected by exter-nal sound sources. This may prevent themfrom detecting people or objects.● If the system warns you of the proximityof a low obstacle, please note that after

being detected by the system, the obstaclein question may disappear from the meas-urement sensors as the vehicle moves clos-er, and the system will no longer warn of itspresence. In certain circumstances, ob-jects such as high kerbs that could damagethe underside of the vehicle are not detec-ted.● If the parking distance warning system isignored, the vehicle could suffer considera-ble damage.● Damage to the radiator grille, bumper,wheel arch and vehicle underbody canmodify the orientation of the sensors. Thiscan affect the parking aid function. Havethe function checked by a specialisedworkshop.● A number plate or number plate holderwith dimensions that exceed the space forthe number plate, or a cured or deformednumber plate can cause false detections ora loss of visibility for the sensors.

Note● The display on the Easy Connect screenshows a slight time delay.● In certain situations, the system can givea warning even though there is no obstaclein the detected area;– rough or cobbled surfaces or with long

grass,

300

Help with parking and manoeuvring

– external ultrasound sources, such asother vehicles equipped withultrasound systems,

– downpours, heavy snow, hail or denseexhaust gases,

– if the number plate is not perfectly se-cured to the bumper surface,

– in gradient changes.● In order to guarantee good operation,keep the sensors clean, free of snow andice, and do not cover them with stickers orother objects.● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-ment for cleaning, do not apply it directly,unless you do so very briefly, and alwayskeep a distance of more than 10 cm away.● Fitting certain accessories to the front ofthe vehicle, such as a plate holder with ad-vertising, may interfere with the operationof the Park Assist.● We recommend that you practice park-ing in an area without traffic.● The volume and tone of the signals andindications can be changed ››› page 305.● In vehicles without an infotainment sys-tem, these parameters can be modified in aSEAT Official Service or in a specialisedworkshop.● Please observe information on towing atrailer ››› page 305.

Parking System Plus*

Description

Fig. 290 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-nect system screen.

Parking aid plus assists the driver by givingvisual and audio warnings about obstaclesdetected in front of and behind the vehicle.

The bumpers are fitted with sensors. When anobstacle is detected, it is indicated by audiblesignals and in the Easy Connect system››› Fig. 290.

When moving close to an obstacle, it is possi-ble to know if the obstacle is in front of the ve-hicle or behind it by choosing differentsounds.

The approximate measurement range of thesensors is:

1.20 mA

0.60 m1.60 m0.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequencyof the audible signals will increase. The signalwill sound continuously at around 0.30 m:Stop!

If separation is maintained, the warning vol-ume reduces after about 4 seconds.

Parking Aid operation

Fig. 291 Centre console: parking aid button.

Manually connecting and disconnectingthe parking aid● Press the button once. »

B

C

D

301

Driving

Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-play (the audible sounds remain active)● Press a button on the main menu of the fac-tory-assembled infotainment system.● OR press the BACK function button.

Automatic connection of Parking Aid● Select reverse gear.● OR: If you drive forward at a speed of lessthan 15 km/h (9 mph) and you encounter anobstacle, it is detected when it is approx. lessthan 95 cm. away. If the automatic connec-tion is activated, a reduced display is shown››› Fig. 292.● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis-tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approxdepending on whether or not an obstacle isdetected)

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid● Move the selector lever to position P.● OR: drive forwards at 15 km/h (9 mph) orfaster.

Temporary suppression of sound in Park-ing Aid● Press the function button.

Change from reduced view to full view● Select reverse gear.● OR: press the car icon on the reduced view.

● OR: if the vehicle moves back a certain dis-tance (between approx. 10 and 20 cm approxdepending on whether or not an obstacle isdetected).

Switch to the reverse assist image (RearView Camera “RVC”)● Select reverse gear.● OR press the RVC function button.

A short confirmation signal will be heard andthe button symbol will light up when the sys-tem is switched on.

Automatic activation

Fig. 292 Miniature indication of automatic ac-tivation.

When the parking aid plus connects auto-matically, a diagram of the vehicle and the

segments will appear on the left of the dis-play ››› Fig. 292.

It only operates every time the speed is re-duced below 15 km/h (9 mph) for the firsttime.

If it is switched off using the button, one ofthe following actions must be taken for it toreactivate automatically:

● Switch off the ignition and switch it onagain.● OR: drive forward at over 15 km/h (9 mph)approx.● OR: move the lever into position P and packagain.● OR: switch the automatic activation on andoff in the Easy Connect system.

The automatic activation of the parking aidcan be switched on and off in the Easy Con-nect system ››› page 92:

● Switch the ignition on.● Select: infotainment button > Ve-hicle > SETTINGS > Parking and ma-noeuvring.● Select Automatic activation. If the boxis checked , the function is connected.

If activated automatically, an audible soundwarning will only be given when obstacles infront are at a distance of less than 50 cm. ap-prox.

302


CAUTIONThe automatic connection of the ParkingAid only works when you are driving slowly.If driving style is not adapted to the circum-stances, an accident and serious injury ordamage may be caused.

Visual indication segments

Fig. 293 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-nect system screen.

The optical indication of the segments worksas follows:

White segments: the obstacle is morethan approx. 30 cm away from the pathor in the direction opposite to travel.They are also displayed when the elec-tronic parking brake is activated.

–

Yellow segments: the obstacles lie onthe vehicle’s path and are at a distanceof less than approx. 30 cm away.Red segments: obstacles are less thanapprox. 30 cm away.

With the Media System Plus, Navi System orNavi System Plus, yellow lines show the ex-pected trajectory based on turns of the steer-ing wheel.

If an obstacle is located in the vehicle’s way,the corresponding audible warning willsound.

When the penultimate segment is displayed,the vehicle has reached the collision zone. Inthe collision zone, the obstacles are repre-sented in red, including those out of the path.Stop the vehicle! ››› in Introduction onpage 300, ››› in Introduction onpage 300 !

Setting the indications and audiosignals

The indications and audio signal settings arein Easy Connect* ››› page 92.

Automatic activation on – off.

–

–

Front volume*Volume in the front and rear area.

Front sound settings/sharpness*Sound tone in the front area.

Rear volume*Volume in the rear area.

Rear sound settings/sharpness*Sound tone in the rear area.

Adjust volumeWhen the parking aid is switched on, the vol-ume of the audio source will be reduced, de-pending on the selected option.

Error messages

If a an error or fault message appears on theinstrument panel in Parking assist, there is afault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-necting the ignition, it will not be indicatednext time the parking aid is connected.

If a rear sensor is faulty, only the obstacles inthe areas A and B are displayed››› Fig. 290. If a front sensor is faulty, only theobstacles in the areas C and D will be dis-played. Symbol is displayed. »

303

Driving

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci-alised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Trailer mode

On vehicles with a factory-fitted trailer hitch,when the trailer is connected, the rear sen-sors will not activate when reverse gear is en-gaged or button is pressed. Therefore, anyobjects behind or to the side of the vehiclewill not be indicated on the screen and noaudio signals will sound.

The screen will only display objects detectedat the front, and the vehicle's trajectory willbe hidden.

Manoeuvre braking function*3 Only valid with Parking System Plus

The emergency braking function is used tominimise damage in the event of a collision.

Depending on the equipment, if the ParkingAid is active, the braking while manoeuvringfunction activates emergency braking when itdetects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path thatcould cause a collision, driving forwards or inreverse.

The function will not brake if the Parking Aid isactivated automatically. For the system tooperate, manoeuvring speed must be be-

tween 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear.

Following an intervention, the braking whilemanoeuvring function will be inactive in thesame direction of travel for 5 metres. Oncethe gear is changed, or the selector lever’sposition is changed, the function will be ac-tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply.

The manoeuvre braking function is set in theEasy Connect system with button >Vehicle > SETTINGS > Parking and ma-noeuvring.

● on – permits the use of the braking whilemanoeuvring function.● off – does not permit the use of thebraking while manoeuvring function.

Temporary suppression of emergencybraking● When the function is deactivated with theManoeuvre braking button that appears onthe Parking assist screen of the Easy Con-nect system.● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid orbonnet are opened.

Rear parking aid*

Description

The rear parking aid is an audible assistantthat warns of obstacles located behind thevehicle.

There are sensors integrated in the rearbumper. When they detect an obstacle, youare alerted by audible warnings and visuallyon the Easy Connect system.

Make particularly sure that the sensors arenot covered by adhesives, residues, dirt andthe like, as this could affect the system's op-eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 360.

The approximate measurement range of therear sensors is:

0.60 m1.60 m

As you approach the obstacle, the frequencyof the audible signals will increase. The signalwill sound continuously at around 0.30 m:Stop! ››› in Introduction on page 300,››› in Introduction on page 300!

If the separation is maintained, the warningvolume is reduced after about 4 seconds.

Side area:Central area:

304


Parking Aid operation

Parking Aid connection● Select reverse gear.

Parking Aid disconnection● Place the selector level in position P, N or D(for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re-verse (for manual gearboxes).

Setting the indications and audio signalsThe indications and audio signal settings arein Easy Connect* ››› page 92.

● Rear volume*: volume in the rear area.● Rear sound settings/treble*: soundtone in the rear area.● Lower volume: when the parking aid isswitched on, the volume of the audio sourcewill be reduced, depending on the selectedoption.

Error messagesIf a an error or fault message appears on theinstrument panel in Parking assist, there is afault.

If the fault doesn't disappear before discon-necting the ignition, it will not be indicatednext time the parking aid is connected.

We recommend taking the vehicle to a speci-alised workshop to have the fault repaired.

Towing deviceIn vehicles equipped with a towing bracketdevice from the factory, when the trailer isconnected, the parking aid will not be activa-ted when reverse gear is engaged.

Reverse Assist (Rear ViewCamera)*

Operating and safety warnings


WARNING● The reverse assist does not make it possi-ble to precisely calculate the distance fromobstacles and nor can it overcome the sys-tem's own limits, hence its negligent usemay cause serious accidents and injuries ifused without due care. The driver should beaware of his/her surroundings at all timesto ensure safe driving.● The camera lens expands and distortsthe field of view and displays the objectson the screen in a way that is different from

reality. Distance perception is also distor-ted.● Due to the screen resolution or light con-ditions, some items may be blurry or notdisplayed at all. Take care with thin posts,fences, railings or trees that might not beseen on the screen and could damage thevehicle.● The reverse assist has blind spots whereit cannot see people or objects. Monitor thevehicle's surrounding area at all times.● Keep the camera lens clean, free of iceand snow, and do not cover it.● The system is not a replacement for driv-er awareness. Supervise the parking ma-noeuvre and the vehicle's surrounding areaat all times.● Do not be distracted from the traffic bylooking at the screen.● The images are only two-dimensional.Protruding objects or holes in the road, forexample, are more difficult to detect ormay not be seen at all.● Vehicle load modifies the representationof the guide lines ››› Fig. 296. The width rep-resented by the lines decreases with vehi-cle load. Pay special attention to the sur-roundings when the inside of the vehicle ofthe luggage compartment are loaded.● In the following situations, objects or oth-er vehicles appear to be further away orcloser than they actually are. Pay specialattention: »

305

Driving

– If moving from a flat surface to a slopeand vice-versa.

– If the vehicle is heavily loaded.– When the vehicle approaches objects

that are not on the ground surface orthat protrude from it. These objectsmay be outside the camera angle whenreversing.

Note● It is important to take great care and payspecial attention if the driver is not familiarwith the system.● Reverse assist will not be available if therear lid is open.

Usage instructions

Fig. 295 In the rear bumper: location of the re-verse assist camera.

A camera on the rear bumper aids the driverwhen reverse parking or manoeuvring››› Fig. 295

The camera image is viewed together withorientation lines projected on the Infotain-ment system screen. Part of the bumper canbe seen at the bottom, which can be used bythe driver as a reference point.

Rear assist settingsRear assist offers the user the possibility tochange the image's brightness, contrast andcolour settings.

To change these settings:

● Stop the vehicle in a safe place withoutswitching off the ignition or the infotainmentsystem.● Apply the parking brake.● Select reverse gear.● Press the function button displayed onthe screen.● Make the desired adjustments on the menuby pressing the –/+ function buttons or bymoving the scroll button.

Requirements for parking and manoeu-vring with the rear assistThe system should not be used in the follow-ing cases:

● If the image displayed is not very reliable oris distorted, or if the lens is dirty.● If the area behind the vehicle is incomplete.● If the vehicle is heavily loaded.● If the position of the camera has changedafter a rear-end collision. Have the systemchecked by a specialised workshop.

Familiarising yourself with the systemTo familiarise yourself with the system, theorientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-ommends practising in a place without toomuch traffic or in a car park when there aregood weather and visibility conditions.

Cleaning the camera lensKeep the camera lens clean and clear ofsnow and ice:

● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-based glass cleaning product and clean thelens with a dry cloth.● Remove snow using a small brush.● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.

CAUTION● Do not use abrasive cleaning products toclean the camera lens.● Do not use hot or warm water to removeice or snow from the camera lens, as itcould be damaged.

306


Parking and manoeuvring with re-verse assist

Fig. 296 Display on the Easy Connect systemscreen: guide lines.

Meaning of the orientation lines ››› Fig. 296Lateral lines: extension of the vehicle(approximately in its total width) on theroad.End of the side lines: approx. 2 m behindthe vehicle on the road.Intermediate line: approx. 1 m behind thevehicle on the road.Horizontal red line: a safe distance ofapprox. 40 cm at the rear of the vehicleon the road.

1

2

3

4

Switching the system on and off● Reverse assist is connected by a contactwhen engaging reverse gear.● The system switches off 8 seconds afterdisengaging reverse gear and immediatelyafter removing the contact.● The camera will stop transmitting imagesabove the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with re-verse engaged.

In combination with the parking aid plus sys-tem ››› page 301, the camera image will nolonger be displayed when reverse gear is dis-engaged, and the system will display the op-tical information provided by the parking aidsystem.

It is also possible to hide the reverse assist im-age:

● By pressing one of the Infotainment systembuttons on the display.● OR: by clicking on the miniature vehicleshown on the screen.

If you wish to display the rear assist imageagain:

● Disengage and re-engage reverse gear.● OR: Press the RVC function button1)

Parking manoeuvre● Stop the vehicle in front of a space and se-lect reverse gear.● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheelso that the side lines lead towards the park-ing space.● Guide the vehicle into the parking space sothat the side lines run parallel to it.

1) The RVC button will only be displayed when re-verse gear is engaged.

307

Driving

Towing bracket device*

Trailer mode

Introduction

Take into account country-specific regula-tions about driving with a trailer and the useof a towing bracket.

The vehicle has been developed primarily forcarrying people, although it can also be usedto tow a trailer if fitted with the correspondingtechnical equipment. This additional load hasan effect on the useful life, fuel consumptionand vehicle performance and in some casescan reduce the service intervals.

Driving with a trailer requires more force fromthe vehicle, and thus more concentrationfrom the driver.

In winter, winter tyres should be fitted on boththe vehicle and the trailer.

Maximum vertical load technically permit-ted on the coupling deviceThe maximum technically permitted verticalload of the trailer’s drawbar on the hitch ofthe towing device is 80 kg.

Vehicles with the Start-Stop systemIf the vehicle has a factory-fitted towingbracket or one that is retrofitted by SEAT, the

Start-Stop system operates as normal. Nospecial characteristics need to be taken intoaccount.

If the system does not recognise the trailer orthe trailer bracket has not been retrofitted bySEAT, the Start-Stop system must be discon-nected by pressing the corresponding buttonin the lower part of the centre console beforedriving with the trailer, and it should remainoff for the rest of the journey ››› .

Vehicles with driving profile selectionIf you are going to be towing a trailer, the useof the Eco driving profile is not recommen-ded. You are advised to select another of theavailable driving profiles before beginning todrive with a trailer.

Trailer weight/drawbar loadNever exceed the authorised trailer weight. Ifyou do not load the trailer up to the maximumpermitted trailer weight, you can then climbcorrespondingly steeper slopes.

The maximum trailer weights listed are onlyapplicable for altitudes up to 1000 m abovesea level. Since higher altitude decreases en-gine performance and the ability to climbslopes, the tow load decreases proportional-ly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer com-bination must be reduced by 10% for every1000 m of altitude. When possible, operatethe trailer with the maximum authorised

drawbar load on the ball joint of the towingbracket, but do not exceed the specified lim-it.

WARNINGNever use the trailer to transport people,since it would put their life in danger and isalso prohibited.

WARNINGUndue use of the towing bracket maycause injury and accidents.● Only use the towing bracket if it is in aperfect state of repair and is properly se-cured.● Never modify or repair the towing bracketin any way.● In order to reduce the danger of injury inthe event of rear-end collisions and toavoid injury to pedestrians and cyclistswhen parking the vehicle, cover or removethe tow hook when you are not using a trail-er.● Never fit a towing bracket “with weightdistribution” or “load compensation”. Thevehicle has not been designed for this typeof towing bracket. The towing bracketcould fail and the trailer could be releasedfrom the vehicle.

308


WARNINGDriving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects can affect drivingproperties and even cause an accident.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or straps that are suitable and ingood condition.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity aremore likely to overturn than those with alow one.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Take great care when overtaking.● Reduce speed immediately if you noticethat the trailer is swaying, however slightly.● Never drive at more than 80 km/h(50 mph) when towing a trailer (or at morethan 100 km/h (60 mph) in exceptional cir-cumstances). This also applies in countrieswhere driving at higher speeds is permit-ted. Take into account the speed limit forvehicles with trailers in the correspondingcountry, as it could be less than the speedlimit for vehicles without a trailer.● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket has been retrofittedby a non-SEAT workshop, the Start-Stop

system must be disconnected manuallywhenever driving with a trailer. Otherwisethe brake system could be damaged andcould consequently cause a serious acci-dent or injury.● Always disconnect the Start-Stop systemmanually when using a towing bracket thathas not been fitted by a SEAT workshop.

Note● Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, al-ways deactivate the anti-theft alarm››› page 100. Otherwise, the tilt sensorcould cause the alarm to go off.● Do not drive with a trailer for the engine'sfirst 1000 km ››› page 266.● SEAT recommends that, if possible, thetow hook be removed or covered when it isnot going to be used. In the event of a rear-end collision, the damage to the vehiclecould be greater if the tow hook is fitted.● Some retrofitted towing brackets coverthe rear towing eye. In these cases, thetowing eye should not be used for tow-starting or for towing other vehicles. Forthis reason, if the vehicle has been retrofit-ted with a towing bracket, always keep thetow hook in the vehicle when you remove it.

Technical requirements

Vehicles that are factory-fitted with a towingbracket meet all the technical and legal re-quirements for driving with a trailer››› page 315.

If the vehicle is retrofitted with a towingbracket, only a bracket that is authorised forthe maximum authorised load of the trailerthat is to be towed may be fitted. The towingbracket must be suitable for the vehicle andthe trailer and must be properly secured tothe vehicle's chassis. Only use a towingbracket that has been authorised by SEAT forthis vehicle. Always check and take into ac-count the towing bracket manufacturer's in-structions. Never fit a towing bracket “withweight distribution” or “load compensation”.

Towing bracket fitted on the bumperNever fit a towing bracket to the bumper or tothe area where the bumper is mounted. Thetowing bracket should not impair the bum-per's function. Do not make modifications orrepairs to the exhaust system or the brakesystem. Make regular checks to ensure thatthe towing bracket is secure.

Engine cooling systemDriving with a trailer increases the load on theengine and cooling system. The cooling sys-tem should have sufficient coolant and be »

309

Driving

prepared for the additional effort involved indriving with a trailer.

Trailer brakesIf the trailer has its own brake system, pleasetake the relevant legal requirements into ac-count. Never connect the trailer's brake sys-tem to the vehicle's brake system.

Tow cableAlways use a cable between the vehicle andthe trailer ››› page 310.

Trailer tail lightsThe trailer's rear lights should comply withthe statutory safety regulations ››› page 310.

Never connect the trailer's rear lights directlyto the vehicle's electric system. If you are notsure that the trailer's electrical connection iscorrect, have it checked by a specialisedworkshop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.

Exterior mirrorsIf you cannot see the area behind the trailerwith the exterior mirrors of the towing vehicle,additional mirrors will have to be installed inaccordance with the regulations of the coun-try in question. The exterior mirrors should beadjusted before you start driving and mustprovide a sufficient field of vision at the rear.

Trailer maximum electricity consumptionNever exceed the values indicated!

Brake lights (total) 84 Watts

Turn signal (on each side) 42 watts

Side lights (on each side) 50 Watts

Reverse lights (in total) 42 Watts

Rear fog light 42 Watts

WARNINGIf the towing bracket is wrongly fitted or isnot the right one, the trailer could becomedetached from the vehicle and cause seri-ous injury.

CAUTION● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor-rectly connected, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.● If the trailer absorbs excessive electriccurrent, the vehicle's electronic systemmay be damaged.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces. Only use the connections intended forproviding electric current to the trailer.

Hitching and connecting a trailer

Fig. 297 Schematic representation: assign-ment of the pins of the trailer's electrical sock-et.

Pin Meaning

1 Left turn signal

2 Rear fog light

3 Earth for pins 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8

4 Right turn signal

5 Rear light, right

6 Brake lights

7 Rear light, left

8 Reverse lights

9 Permanent live

10 Live charge cable

11 Earth for pin 10

310


Pin Meaning

12 Unassigned

13 Earth for pin 9

Power socket for trailerThe vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole powersocket for the connection between the trailerand the vehicle. With the engine running,electrical devices on the trailer receive powerfrom the electrical connection (pin 9 and pin10 of the trailer power socket).

If the system detects that a trailer has beenconnected, the consumers on the trailer willreceive electricity through this connection(pins 9 and 10). Pin 9 has a permanent live.This powers, for example, the trailer's interiorlighting. Electrical devices such as a fridge ina caravan only receive electrical power if theengine is running (through pin 10).

To avoid overloading the electrical system,you cannot connect the ground wires of pin3 , pin 11 or pin 13 to each other.

If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, youwill need to use an adapter cable. In this casethe function corresponding to pin 10 will notbe available.

Tow cableThe tow rope must always be securely fixedto the towing vehicle and loose enough so

that the vehicle can handle turns smoothly.However, make sure that the cable does notrub on the ground while driving.

Trailer tail lightsAlways check the trailer's rear lights to ensurethey are working correctly and that theycomply with the relevant safety regulations.Make sure that the maximum permissiblepower that can be absorbed by the trailer isnot exceeded ››› page 310.

Include in the anti-theft alarmThe trailer is included in the anti-theft systemif the following conditions are met:

● If the vehicle is factory-equipped with ananti-theft alarm and towing bracket.● If the trailer is electrically connected to thetowing vehicle through the trailer power sock-et.● If the electrical systems of the vehicle andtrailer are in perfect condition and have nofaults or damage.● If the vehicle is locked with the key and theanti-theft alarm is activated.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig-gered if the electrical connection with thetrailer is cut off.

Before hitching or unhitching a trailer, alwaysturn off the anti-theft alarm. Otherwise, the tiltsensor could cause the alarm to go off.

Trailers with LED tail lightsFor technical reasons, trailers fitted with LEDrear lights cannot be connected to the anti-theft alarm system.

When the vehicle is locked, the alarm doesnot go off when the electrical connectionwith the trailer is cut if it has rear lights withlight-emitting diodes.

If the Eco driving profile was selected whenhitching the trailer, this will automaticallyswitch to the Normal profile. If the systemcannot detect the attached trailer or if thetowing bracket has been retrofitted by an au-to repair shop other than SEAT, you mustmanually select the Normal profile beforeyou start driving with a trailer attached. To re-connect the Eco profile once the trailer hasbeen unhitched, switch the ignition off andback on once.

WARNINGIf the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, it may lead to an excessiveamount of current supplied to the trailer,which can cause abnormalities in the entirevehicle electronic system, as well as acci-dents and serious injuries. »

311

Driving

● Ensure that any repairs that need to becarried out on the electrical system arecarried out by a specialised workshop.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem directly to the electrical connectionsof the tail lights or any other power sour-ces.

WARNINGContact between the pins of the trailerpower socket can cause short circuits,overloading of the electrical system or fail-ure of the lighting system, and consequent-ly can cause accidents and serious injuries.● Never connect the pins of the trailer pow-er socket to each other.● Make sure any work on bent pins is car-ried out by a specialised workshop.

CAUTIONDo not leave the trailer connected to thevehicle when parked; place it on its supportwheel or its supports. If the vehicle rises orfalls due, for example, to a variation of theload or a burst tyre, increased pressure willbe placed on the towing bracket and thetrailer, and both the vehicle and the trailercan be damaged.

Note● In case of anomalies in the electrical sys-tems of the vehicle or trailer, as well as in

the anti-theft alarm system, have them in-spected by a specialised workshop.● If the trailer accessories consume energythrough the power socket to the trailer andthe engine is turned off, the battery will dis-charge.● If the vehicle battery is running low, theelectrical connection with the trailer will beautomatically cut.

Trailer loading

Technically permissible maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the couplingdeviceThe technically permissible maximum trailerweight is the weight that the vehicle can tow››› . The vertical load on the coupling is ex-erted vertically from above on the hook of thetowing bracket.

The information on the maximum trailerweight and vertical load on the coupling de-vice contained in the type plate of the towingbracket are experimental values only. Thecorrect figures for your specific model, whichmay be lower than these figures, are given inthe vehicle documentation. The information inthe vehicle documentation takes precedenceat all times.

To promote safety while driving, SEAT recom-mends making the most of the maximum ver-

tical load technically permissible on thecoupling device ››› page 308. An insufficientvertical load has a negative influence on thebehaviour of both the vehicle and trailer.

The vertical load increases the weight on therear axle, reducing the vehicle's carrying ca-pacity.

Gross combination weight of the towingvehicle and trailerThe gross combination weight is the actualweight of the loaded vehicle plus the actualweight of the loaded trailer.

In some countries trailers are classified intodistinct categories. SEAT recommends ob-taining information from a specialised work-shop regarding which type of trailer is mostsuitable for your vehicle.

Trailer loadingThe weight of the towing vehicle and trailermust be balanced. In order to do this, theload must be as close as possible to the max-imum vertical load technically permissible onthe coupling point, and it must be evenly dis-tributed between the back and front of thetrailer:

● Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavyobjects are as near to the axle as possible orabove it.● Secure the trailer load properly.

312


Tyre pressureSet the tyre pressure of the trailer tyres in ac-cordance with the trailer manufacturer's rec-ommendations.

When towing a trailer, inflate the tyres of thetowing vehicle with the maximum allowablepressure ››› page 348.

WARNINGIf the maximum permissible axle weight, themaximum load technically permissible onthe coupling point, the maximum author-ised vehicle weight or the gross combina-tion weight of the towing vehicle and trailerare exceeded, accidents and serious inju-ries may occur.● Never exceed the values indicated!● The actual weight on the front and rearaxles must never exceed the maximum per-missible axle weight. The weight on thefront and rear axles must never exceed themaximum permissible weight.

WARNINGA shift in weight could jeopardize the stabil-ity and security of the towing vehicle andtrailer, which could lead to accidents andserious injuries.

● Always load the trailer correctly.● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or straps that are suitable and ingood condition.

Driving with a trailer

Adjusting the headlightsThe front part of the vehicle may be raisedwhen the trailer is connected and the lightmay dazzle the rest of the traffic.

Adapt the height of the headlights using theheadlight range adjuster ››› page 1251).

Specific features of driving with a trailer● If your trailer has an overrun brake, brakegently at first and then rapidly. This will pre-vent the jerking that can be caused by thelocking of trailer wheels.● Due to the gross combination weight of thetowing vehicle and trailer, the braking dis-tance increases.● When going down a slope, go into a lowergear (if using a manual gearbox or the tip-tronic automatic gearbox mode) to take ad-vantage of the braking power provided by the

engine. Otherwise, the braking system couldoverheat and even fail.● The trailer weight, as well as the gross com-bination weight of the towing vehicle andtrailer, change the centre of gravity and theproperties of the vehicle.● If the towing vehicle is empty and the traileris loaded, then the load distribution is incor-rect. Under these conditions, drive slowly andwith extra caution.

Hill starts with a trailerDepending on the slope of the hill and thecombination weight of the towing vehicle andtrailer, the vehicle might start rolling back-wards slightly when you first start up.

For hill-starting with a trailer, do the following:

● Press and hold the brake pedal.● Press the button once to disconnect theelectronic parking brake ››› page 292.● If the vehicle is equipped with a manualgearbox, push the clutch pedal all the waydown.● Put the vehicle into first gear or turn the se-lector lever to position D/S ››› page 254. »

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LEDxenon headlights.

313

Driving

● Pull out the button and hold it in that po-sition to immobilise the towing vehicle andtrailer with the electronic parking brake.● Release the brake pedal.● Start driving slowly. To do this, in the case ofa manual gearbox, slowly release the clutchpedal.● Do not release the button until the en-gine has sufficient power to start driving.

WARNINGIf a trailer is pulled incorrectly, this maylead to loss of control of the vehicle andserious injury.● Driving with a trailer and transportingheavy or large objects will change the ve-hicle handling and braking distances.● Always drive cautiously and carefully.Brake earlier than usual.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions. Slow down, especiallywhen driving down hills or slopes.● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion. Avoid sudden braking and manoeu-vres.● Take great care when overtaking. Reducespeed immediately if you notice that thetrailer is swaying, however slightly.● Never attempt to “straighten” the towingvehicle and trailer while accelerating.

● Take into account the speed limit for vehi-cles with a trailer, as it could be lower thanfor vehicles without a trailer.

Stabilisation of the towing vehicleand trailer combination

The stabilisation of the vehicle and trailercombination is an additional function of theelectronic stability control (ESC).

If the vehicle and trailer stabilisation systemdetects that the trailer is weaving, it takes ac-tion on the steering control to reduce theweaving of the trailer.

Vehicle and trailer combination stabilisa-tion requirements● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow-ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with acompatible towing bracket.● The ESC and ASR are active. The controllamp or is not lit up on the instrumentcluster.● The trailer is connected to the towing vehi-cle through the trailer power socket.● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h(approx. 37 mph).● The maximum vertical load technically per-missible is not being exceeded on the cou-pling device.

● The trailer has a rigid draw bar.● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equippedwith a mechanical overrun brake.

WARNINGThe enhanced safety provided by the elec-tric stability control of the vehicle and trail-er should not lead you to take any risks thatcould compromise your safety.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with caution when the road isslippery.● When adjusting any settings, stop accel-erating.

WARNINGThe electric stability control for the vehicleand trailer may not correctly detect alldriving conditions.● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili-sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al-so switched off.● The stability system does not always de-tect light trailers, so it may not stabilisethese correctly.● When driving on surfaces with poor grip,the trailer can even interfere with the sta-bility system.● Trailers with a high centre of gravity cantip over without having previously weaved.

314


● If a trailer is not attached, but a connec-tor is plugged into the power socket (e.g.installation of a bicycle rack with lights),repeated automatic braking may occur inextreme driving conditions.


Description

Fig. 298 The towing device supports trailers /tow hook / key

Depending on the country or version, the re-movable hook of the towing device is underthe cover of the load area of the luggagecompartment.

The tow hook is fitted and removed by handand is supplied with a key.

13-pin connectorSafety lugHook housingHook housing capProtective cap of the ball headRemovable tow hookLocking leverLock coverRelease boltLockLocking ballsKey

Operation and conservationPut the cover on the housing cavity so thatdirt cannot get in.

Before hooking up a trailer, always check theball head and apply suitable grease if neces-sary.

Use the protective cap to store the tow hook.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Clean the housing cavity surfaces and treatthem with an appropriate conservation prod-uct.

WARNING● Before each journey with the tow hook fit-ted, make sure that it is correctly adjustedand attached in its housing.● If the tow hook is not properly fitted andattached, do not use it.● Do not use the towing bracket device fortowing if it is damaged or has missing parts.● Do not modify or adapt the towing deviceconnection.● Never unhook the tow hook while thetrailer is hitched.

CAUTION● Handle the tow hook with care in order toavoid damaging the bumper paintwork.● The top part of the hook housing isgreased ››› Fig. 298 3 . When using the de-vice, make sure that it has not been re-moved.

Note● Contact a specialised workshop if youlose your key.● Towing the vehicle with the tow hook››› page 49.

315

Driving

Placing in the standby position

Fig. 299 Tow hook reserve position

Fig. 300 Reserve position: position verification

Before assembling it, place the tow hook inthe standby position with the following twosteps.

● Insert and turn the key in the direction of thearrow ››› Fig. 299 1 until the hole in the keyfaces upwards (arrow).● Grab the tow hook under the protectivecover.● Press the release bolt ››› Fig. 299 B in thedirection of arrow 2 , while pressing lever Cin the direction of arrow 3 as far as it will go.● The lever will remain blocked in this posi-tion.

Verification of the reserve position● Key ››› Fig. 300 A is in the released posi-tion (the key hole is facing upwards).● The release bolt ››› Fig. 300 B can bemoved.

● Lever ››› Fig. 300 C is in the lower position.

When adjusted in this way, the tow hook isready to be installed.

CAUTIONThe key cannot be removed or turned in thestandby position.

316


Fitting the tow hook

Fig. 301 Putting the tow hook in place. Step 1.

Fig. 302 Putting the tow hook in place. Step 2.

Step 1.● Remove the hook housing cap ››› Fig. 2984 downwards.● Put the tow hook in its standby position››› page 316.● Hold the tow hook from below and fit it intothe hook hosing in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 301 1 until it is heard to fit into place››› .

Lever ››› Fig. 301 A automatically turns inthe direction of arrow 2 upwards, and the re-lease bolt B moves outwards (its red andgreen parts are visible) ››› .

If lever A does not turn or the release bolt Bdoes not come out, the tow hook should beremoved by turning the lever as far as possi-ble downwards from the housing cavity, andthe tow hook’s support surfaces and the cavi-ty should then be cleaned.

Step 2.● Turn the key to the right just half a turn, untilthe hole in the key faces downwards››› Fig. 302 1 .● Remove the key 2 .● Place the cover B on the lock 3››› Fig. 302 ››› .● Check that the tow hook is correctly fixed inplace ››› page 318, Safety check.

WARNING● Keep your hands away from the leverwhen fitting the tow hook to avoid trappingyour fingers ››› Fig. 301 A .● Do not try to force the lever up to turn thekey. The detachable ball would not be se-cured properly! »

317

Driving

CAUTION● After removing the key, place the coverover the lever's lock. If the lock becomessoiled it will be impossible to insert the key.● Keep the device's housing cavity clean.Dirtiness can prevent the tow hook frombeing safety secured!● If the device is removed, always placethe cap in the hook's housing.

Safety check

Fig. 303 Tow hook fixed correctly

Make sure that the tow hook is correctly at-tached before each use.

Tow hook fixed correctly:● The tow hook will not fall out of the housingcavity after a strong “impact”.● Lever A is facing upwards ››› Fig. 303.

● The red and green part of the unlockingbolt B is completely visible ››› Fig. 303.● The key has been removed.● Cover C is over the lock ››› Fig. 303.

WARNING● Keep your hands away from the leverwhen releasing the tow hook to avoid trap-ping your fingers ››› Fig. 303 A .● The towing device should only be used ifthe tow hook has been properly locked inplace!

Removing the tow hook

Fig. 304 Removing the tow hook

318


Fig. 305 Removing the tow hook

● Remove cover A from lock 1 ››› Fig. 304.● Insert key B in the lock 2 ››› Fig. 304.● Turn the key to the left 3 just half turn, untilthe hole in the key is facing upwards››› Fig. 304.● Hold the tow hook from below.● Press the release bolt A in the direction ofarrow 1 , and at the same time press lever Bas far as it will go in the direction of arrow 2››› Fig. 305.

Now the tow hook has been released andfalls freely. If this does not occur, press withthe other hand from above.

The tow hook is now in the standby positionand is therefore ready to be reinserted intothe hook housing ››› .

● Fit cover 4 ››› Fig. 298 onto its housing.

WARNING● Never remove the tow hook while thetrailer is hitched.● Never leave the tow hook loose in the lug-gage compartment. It could cause damagein the even of sharp braking, and even jeop-ardise passenger safety!

CAUTION● If the lever is not pressed down as far as itwill go, after removing the tow hook it willcontinue upwards and will not lock into itsstandby position. The tow hook must re-main in this position before being fittedagain.● Store the device in the reserve positionwith the key inserted and with the sameside facing upwards. Risk of damaging thekey!● When operating the lever, do not applytoo much pressure (for example, do notstand on it)!

Note● Before extracting the tow hook, we rec-ommend fitting the protective cover overthe ball head.● Remove dirt from the tow hook beforestoring it with the vehicle tools.

Connecting the trailer

Fig. 306 Turning the 13-pin connector

● Grip the connector in area A and remove itin the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 306.● Remove the protective cap from the ballhead ››› Fig. 298 5 .● Attach the trailer to the ball head.● Open the cover of connector A and con-nect the trailer ››› Fig. 306.● Hook the trailer retention cable into thesafety eyelet ››› Fig. 306 B . When hooked,the retaining cable must curve in all trailerpositions in front of the vehicle (sharp curves,reverse, etc.).

Follow these steps in reverse to unhitch thetrailer.

WARNING● Never use the safety lug to tow! »

319

Driving

● After hooking up the trailer and connect-ing the socket, check that all the trailer'srear lights are working properly.

Note● If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting,check the fuses on the instrument panel››› page 54.● The contact between the retainer cableand the safety lug may give cause wear inthe lug. This wear does not stop it from op-erating properly and is not a fault. It is ex-cluded from the warranty.● When hitching and unhitching the trailer,the vehicle's handbrake should be applied.

Retrofitting a towing bracket

Description

Fig. 307 Limits and attachment points for ret-rofitting a towing bracket.

SEAT recommends that towing brackets beretrofitted at a specialised workshop. For ex-

ample, it may very well be necessary to ad-just the cooling system or mount thermal pro-tection plates. SEAT recommends visiting aSEAT dealership for this.

If a towing bracket is retrofitted, the distancespecifications should always be kept in mind.

The distance between the centre of the ballhead and the road ››› Fig. 307 C must neverbe less than that indicated. This also applieswhen the vehicle is fully loaded, including thetechnically permissible maximum verticalload on the coupling device.

Distance specifications ››› Fig. 307:Attachment points (lower part of the vehi-cle)65 mm (minimum)350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehicle)1040 mm317 mm319 mm (Leon) / 596 mm (Leon Sportour-er ST)

WARNINGIf the cables are improperly or incorrectlyconnected, this may lead to malfunctionsin the entire vehicle electronic system, aswell as to accidents and serious injuries.● Never connect the trailer's electric sys-tem to the electrical connections of the taillights or any other unsuitable power

A

B

C

D

E

F

320


sources. Only use suitable connectors toconnect the trailer.● The towing bracket should be retrofittedonly at a specialised workshop.

WARNINGIf the towing bracket is badly fitted or un-suitable, the trailer may separate from thevehicle while driving. This could cause seri-ous accidents and fatal injuries.

Note● Only use towing brackets that have beenapproved by SEAT for the model in ques-tion.● In some versions, the fitting of a conven-tional towing hook solution is not recom-mended. Please consult your TechnicalService.

321

Practical tips

Practical tips

Checking and refilling lev-els

Refuelling

Refuelling

Fig. 308 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attach-ed.

The fuel tank flap is on the rear right of thevehicle.

The flap that covers the tank cap is unlockedand locked automatically using the centrallocking.

● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on theleft side.● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left.

● Place it in the space on the hinge of theopen flap ››› Fig. 308.● Start refuelling. The tank is full as soon asthe pump’s automatic nozzle cuts off the fuelsupply. Do not try to put in more fuel after thenozzle cuts out, as this will fill the expansionchamber in the fuel tank.● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right asfar as it will go.● Close the lid.

The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv-en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tankflap. Further notes on fuel can be found at››› page 324.

The capacity of your vehicle's fuel tank is giv-en in ››› page 372.

Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy-bridsEvery 6 months it is necessary to run on pet-rol until the control lamp switches off, andthen the tank must be refilled. This is neces-sary to ensure that the system works proper-ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv-ing with petrol.

WARNINGFuel is highly flammable and can cause se-rious burns and other injuries.● When refuelling, turn off the engine andturn off the ignition for safety reasons.

● Do not smoke when filling the fuel tank ora canister. Naked flames are forbidden inthe vicinity due to the risk of explosion.● Observe legislation governing the use,storage and carrying of a spare fuel canis-ter in the vehicle.● For safety reasons we do not recommendcarrying a spare fuel canister in the vehi-cle. In an accident the canister could bedamaged and could leak.● If, in exceptional circumstances, youhave to carry a spare fuel canister, pleaseobserve the following points:– Never fill fuel into the spare fuel canis-

ter if it is inside or on top of the vehicle.This could cause an explosion. Alwaysplace the canister on the ground to fillit.

– Insert the filling nozzle as far as possi-ble into the spare fuel canister.

– If the spare fuel canister is made ofmetal, the filling nozzle must be in con-tact with the canister during filling. Thishelps prevent an electrostatic chargebuilding up.

– Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in theluggage compartment. Fuel vapour isexplosive. Risk of fatal accident!

322

Checking and refilling levels

CAUTION● If any fuel is spilt onto the vehicle, itshould be removed immediately. It couldotherwise damage the paintwork.● Never run the tank completely dry. Thecatalytic converter can be damaged.● When filling the fuel tank after having runit completely dry on a vehicle with a dieselengine, the ignition must be switched on forat least 30 seconds before starting the en-gine. When you then start the engine it maytake longer than normal (up to one minute)to start firing.

For the sake of the environmentDo not overfill the fuel tank, it may causethe fuel to overflow if it becomes warm.

NoteThere is no emergency mechanism for themanual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec-essary, request assistance from special-ised personnel.

NoteDiesel vehicles are fitted with a protectivedevice that prevents the insertion of thewrong fuel hose1). It is only possible to re-fuel with Diesel nozzles.

● If the pump nozzle is worn, damaged, or ifit is very small, it is possible that it will notbe able to open the protective device. Be-fore trying to insert the pump nozzle byturning it, try a different pump or requestspecialist help.● If you fill the tank from a reserve fuel can-ister, the protective device will not open.One way to resolve this is to pour the fuel invery slowly.

Refuelling natural gas

Fig. 309 Tank cap open: gas filler mouth 1 ,filler mouth retainer 2 .

Before refuelling, the engine and the ignition,mobile telephone and heating must beswitched off separately ››› .

Read the instructions on how to use the natu-ral gas pump carefully.

RefuellingThe natural gas filler mouth is behind the fueltank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth››› Fig. 309.

● Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth1 .● Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gasfiller mouth.● The fuel tank will be full when the pumpcompressor automatically cuts the supply.● If you wish to finish refuelling in advance,press the button on the pump to stop the flow.

If the ambient temperature is very high, thenatural gas pump’s overheating protectiondisconnects it automatically.

Closing the fuel tank cap● Check that the mouth retainer 2 of the gasfiller is not trapped with the filler. If this hap-pens, replace it in the filler mouth.● Insert the plug in the filler mouth.● Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear itclick into place. »

1) Depending on country323

Practical tips

WARNINGNatural gas is a highly explosive, easilyflammable substance. Incorrect handlingof the natural gas can cause accidents se-rious burns and other injuries.● Before refuelling with natural gas, en-gage the filling mouth correctly. If you cansmell gas, stop refuelling immediately.● Read and take note ››› in Natural gason page 327.

WARNINGThe vehicle is not suitable for liquefied nat-ural gas (LNG) or liquefied petrol gas (LPG),so LNG or LPG should not be used underany circumstances. Liquid gas can causean explosion of the natural gas tanks andcause severe injuries! .

WARNINGIf the vehicle underbody touches theground or in the event of a rear collision,there could be damage to the natural gastanks. If damaged, natural gas tanks arefull of fuel and can explode, causing seri-ous or fatal injuries.● Even if you don't notice the smell of gas,take the vehicle to a specialised workshopimmediately and have the natural gas sys-tem checked. Do not refuel natural gas

again until the natural gas system has beeninspected.

Note● The filling nozzles of natural gas pumpscan differ in the way they are operated. Aska qualified employee at the petrol stationto do the refuelling if you do not know how.● Noises heard when refuelling are normaland do not indicate damage in the system.● The vehicle natural gas system is pre-pared both for refuelling with a small com-pressor (slow refuel) and a large compres-sor (fast refuel) at natural gas service sta-tions.

Fuel types

Identification of fuels1)

Fig. 310 Identification of fuels according toEuropean Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/

Fuels are identified by different symbols onthe pump and on your vehicle's tank flap. Theidentification serves to prevent confusionwhen choosing the fuel.

Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-nol). The number indicates the percent-age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio-diesel). The number indicates the per-centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”means, for example, a proportion of bio-diesel of max. 7%.

1

2

1) Depending on country324


Natural gas: “CNG” means CompressedNatural Gas.

Type of petrol3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol engines

The correct grade of petrol is listed inside thefuel tank flap.

The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-verter and must only be run on unleadedpetrol. The petrol must comply with thestandard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuelswith a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled(E10)1). The types of petrol are differentiatedby using the octane numbers (RON) or viathe anti-knock index (AKI).

Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol ornormal 91 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available, normal 91octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight powerloss) may be used.

Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes atleastYou should use super 95 octane petrol (91AKI) at least.

3 If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case onlyuse moderate engine speeds and a lightthrottle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol orsuper 95 octane petrol at leastWe recommend refuelling with super plus 98octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight powerloss).

If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case onlyuse moderate engine speeds and a lightthrottle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-ble.

CAUTION● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g.E30 - E100 button must not be used. Thefuel system would be damaged. Exception:vehicles with Totalflex engine ››› page 326,Ethanol fuel.● A single refuelling with leaded fuel orother metal additives entails a permanentdeterioration of the effectiveness of thecatalytic converter.

● Only use fuel additives that have beenapproved by SEAT. The products that con-tain substances to increase the octane rat-ing or decrease knocking may contain met-al additives that damage the engine andcatalytic converter. This type of productsmust not be used.● Do not use fuels shown in the pump ascontaining metals. LRP (lead replacementpetrol) fuels contain high concentrations ofmetal additives. Risk of engine damage!● High engine speed and full throttle candamage the engine when using petrol withan octane rating lower than the correctgrade for the engine.

Note● Fuel with an octane rating higher than theone required by the engine can be used.● In countries in which there is no sulphur-free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-phur content fuel.

1) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.

325

Practical tips

Ethanol fuel3 Valid for: vehicles with Totalflex engines

You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en-gines1) by label on the fuel tank lid with withthe marking “Petrol/ethanol”.

Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run withunleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any highpercentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-led in the same way as petrol refuelling.

Also consider that ››› page 325, Type of pet-rol

NoteSEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de-crease impurities that using E100 ethanolfuel might have left in the engine.

Diesel3 Valid for: vehicles with diesel engines

Please note the information on the inside ofthe fuel tank flap.

We recommend you use Diesel according tostandard EN 590.

The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-tures, thus affecting the start or operation ofthe engine. Ask your service station attendantif their diesel is suitable for winter use.

Water in the fuel filter2)

If your vehicle has a diesel engine and isequipped with a fuel filter with a water sep-arator, the instrument panel may display thefollowing warning: Water in the fuelfilter. If this is the case, take the vehicle toa specialised workshop so that they candrain the fuel filter.

CAUTION● Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol,heating oil, other fuels or thinning agentsas they can cause severely damage thefuel system and the engine.● If the wrong fuel has been filled, do notstart the engine under any circumstances.Risk of damaging the fuel system and theengine! Obtain technical assistance.

Natural gas3 Valid for: vehicles with natural gas engines

Natural gas can be compressed or in liquidform, addition to others.

Use of compressed natural gas (CNG)Vehicles with a natural gas engine must onlybe working with CNG (Compressed NaturalGas CNG), or with a mixture of biomethane ifit complies with Regulation EN 16723-2.

Fuels such as liquefied natural gas (LNG), liq-uefied petroleum gas (LPG) or hithane (mix-ture of hydrogen and methane) should not beused to fill the tank.

Natural gas quality and consumptionNatural gas is divided into the groups H and Ldepending on its quality.

Gas type H has a superior heating power andinferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide contentthan type L. The higher the heating power ofthe natural gas, the lower the consumptionwill be.

The engine management automaticallyadapts to the natural gas used according toits quality. Therefore, different quality gasescan be mixed in the tank, without the need for

1) This motor is only available in some markets.2) Depending upon country.

326


comprehensive draining before applying adifferent quality gas.

Updated information relating to natural gasquality is displayed on the instrument panel››› page 74.

Regular checks of the natural gas systemThe natural gas tanks may be damaged orcorroded by external factors. The walls of thegas tanks are weakened by deformations,damage or corrosion. The vehicle owner musthave a specialised workshop check (visualcheck) the gas system at least once every4 years. Natural gas tanks must be replacedat a specialised workshop.

WARNINGFailure to act when you can smell gas in thevehicle or when refuelling can cause seri-ous injuries.● Stop the vehicle immediately.● Switch the ignition off.● Open the doors to appropriately venti-late the vehicle.● Extinguish cigarettes immediately.● Move away from the vehicle or switch offobjects that may cause sparks or a fire.● If you continue to smell gas, do not con-tinue driving!● Seek specialist assistance. Have the faultrepaired.

● If necessary, warn the emergency serv-ices.

WARNINGDamaged, corroded or rusted tanks can re-sult in serious injury or even death.● Have the natural gas deposits checked atleast every 4 years (visual check).● Natural gas tanks have a limited servicelife. Have the natural gas tanks replacedwhen required. You can obtain further infor-mation about this at SEAT dealers or speci-alised workshops.

AdBlue®

Information about AdBlue®


The consumption of AdBlue® depends onyour personal driving style, the temperatureof the system and on the outdoor tempera-ture when the vehicle is used.

AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11 °C (+13°F). The system has heating elements thatguarantee its operation even at low tempera-tures.

The capacity of the AdBlue® tank is approx.11 litres.

When the range is less than 2400 km theinstrument panel screen displays a messagerequesting an AdBlue® refill.

If this message is ignored, the yellow warninglamp will come on when the remainingrange is less than 1000 km. The indicationthat in XXX km it will no longer be possible torestart the engine will appear on the instru-ment panel display.

If the yellow indicator lamp is ignored, whenremaining range of 0 km is displayed, it willno longer be possible to restart the engine.The red warning lamp will light up.

AdBlue® is a registered brand of the GermanAssociation of the Automotive Industry (VDA)and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (DieselExhaust Fluid).

CAUTIONFilling the AdBlue® tank excessively cancause damage to the tank.

327

Practical tips

Control and warning lamps

It lights up red

The engine cannot be restarted! The AdBlue levelis too low.Stop the vehicle in a suitable, safe and flat area thentop up with the minimum required quantity of AdBlue››› page 328.

and They light up red

The engine cannot be restarted! Fault in theAdBlue system.Contact a specialised workshop. Have the systemchecked there.

It lights up yellow

The AdBlue reserve is low.Refill AdBlue within the next kilometres (or miles) thatare indicated ››› page 328. SEAT recommends con-tacting a specialised workshop.

and They light up yellow

There is a fault in the AdBlue system or unsuitableAdBlue fluid has been used.Contact a specialised workshop. Have the systemchecked there.

Several warning and control lamps shouldlight up for a few seconds when the ignition isswitched on, signalling that the function is be-ing verified. They will switch off after a fewseconds.


Fill AdBlue®

Fig. 312 AdBlue tank cap.

Operations prior to refillingPark the vehicle on a flat surface and turn offthe ignition. If the vehicle is on a slope or on acurb, the level indicator may not detect therefill properly.

If a warning message about AdBlue® levelsappears on the dash panel display, fill atleast the minimum amount required (ap-prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amountwill the system detect that AdBlue® has beenadded and you will be able to start the en-gine again. The maximum amount that canbe refilled is 11 litres.

Fill with a refill bottleOnly use AdBlue® that complies with ISO22241-1. Only use original containers.

● Open the tank cover ››› Fig. 312.● Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an an-ti-clockwise direction.● Please observe the manufacturer's instruc-tions, indicated on the refill bottle.● Check the expiry date.● Remove the cap of the refill bottle.● Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank fillerneck vertically and screw the bottle on byhand, by turning it in a clockwise direction.● Press the refill bottle in the direction of thefiller neck and hold it in this position.● Wait until the contents of the refill bottlehave been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Donot compress or break the bottle!● Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di-rection and gently pull it upwards ››› .● The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liquidcomes out of the bottle.● Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc-tion until it is tightly closed.● Close the fuel tank flap.

Operations before driving● After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig-nition.

328


● Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec-onds for the system to detect the fluid load.● Make sure you wait for at least 30 secondsbefore starting the engine!

Refilling the dispenser with AdBlueValid for vehicles with selective catalytic re-duction.

● Open the tank cap.● Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise››› Fig. 312.● Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for thefirst time.● Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwiseuntil you hear a click.

WARNINGAdBlue® should only be stored in the origi-nal container, which should be tightlyclosed and kept in a safe place.

CAUTION● When refilling, the nozzle grip should bealigned downward. Otherwise the nozzlewill not connect automatically.● Do not try to add any more additive afterthe nozzle has stopped for the first time.The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBluecould spill out.

● Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO22241-1. Only use original containers.● Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or ad-ditives. Any type of damage caused bysuch a mixture will not be covered by thewarranty.● Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank.This could result in engine damage.● Do not carry the refill bottle inside thevehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera-ture changes or damage to the bottle), theAdBlue® may damage the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of the refill bottle in an environ-ment-friendly manner.

NoteYou can buy refill bottles that are adequatefor AdBlue® use at SEAT dealerships .

Engine management andemissions control system

Introduction

WARNING● Due to the high temperatures reached bythe exhaust gas scrubbing system, you

should not park your vehicle near a surfacethat can catch fire easily. Fire hazard!● Do not apply wax underneath the vehiclearound the area of the exhaust system: Firehazard!

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the emission control system.Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

Flashes

Combustion failures that can damage the catalyticconverter.Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-cialised workshop to have the engine checked.

It lights up

Particulate filter blocked ››› page 330.

It lights up

Fault in the petrol engine management.Have the engine checked as soon as possible by aspecialised workshop.

When the ignition is switched on, the (ElectronicPower Control) lights up and should go off once theengine has started. »

329

Practical tips

It lights up

Diesel engine preheating system.The engine can be started straight away when thelamp switches off.

Flashes

Fault in the diesel engine management.Have the engine checked as soon as possible by aspecialised workshop.

NoteWhile the control lamps , , or areon, there might be faults in the engine, fuelconsumption may go up and the enginemight lose power.

Catalytic converter

To maintain the useful life of the catalyticconverter● Only use unleaded petrol with petrol en-gines.● Never run the fuel tank dry.● When changing or adding engine oil, do notexceed the necessary amount ››› page 336,Topping up the engine oil.● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jumpleads if necessary ››› page 47.

If you should notice misfiring, uneven runningor loss of power when the car is moving, havethe vehicle inspected by a specialised work-shop. In general, the emissions warning lamp will light up when any of these symptomsoccur. If this happens, any unburnt fuel canenter the exhaust system and escape into theatmosphere. The catalytic converter can alsobe damaged by overheating.

CAUTIONNever run the fuel tank completely dry be-cause an irregular fuel supply can causeignition faults. This allows unburnt fuel toenter the exhaust system, which couldcause overheating and damage the cata-lytic converter.

For the sake of the environmentEven when the emission control system isworking perfectly, there may be a smell ofsulphur from the gases on occasions. Thisdepends on the sulphur content of the fuelused. This can quite often be avoided bychanging to another brand of fuel.

Particulate filter3 Valid for: vehicles with petrol or diesel particu-late filters

The particulate filter eliminates most of thesoot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor-

mal driving conditions the filter cleans itself. Ifthe filter does not clean itself (e.g. if shortjourneys are made continuously), it becomesblocked with soot and the following indica-tion is displayed to the driver: Particu-late filter: cleaned while the vehi-cle is moving. See Manual. The partic-ulate filter needs cleaning (regeneration).

Regeneration of the petrol particulate fil-ter (only for 2.0l TSI engines)Requirements for the regeneration journey:the engine is at operating temperature.

● Drive at a speed of at least 80 km/h ››› ● Completely remove your foot from the ac-celerator pedal for a few seconds to let thevehicle roll with the gear engaged.● Consider the legal speed limits as well asthe recommended gears.● Repeat this procedure (accelerate and letroll) until the control lamp turns off.

This procedure involves an autonomous par-ticulate filter cleaning process and may takesome time.

If the warning lamp does not turn off, go im-mediately to a specialised workshop to repairthe fault.

330


Regeneration of the petrol (except the TSI2.0l engine) and diesel particulate filterRequirements for the regeneration journey:the engine is at operating temperature.

● Drive at a speed of between 50-120 km/h(31-75 mph). This increases the temperatureand burns the soot in the filter ››› .● Consider the legal speed limits as well asthe recommended gears.● End the regeneration journey once the con-trol warning lamp has gone out.

If the warning lamp stays on after 30 minutesof running in regeneration mode, have a spe-cialised workshop repair the fault

WARNINGAlways adjust your speed to suit the weath-er conditions, roads, braking distance andtraffic if the particulate filter is in its regen-eration phase. Route recommendationsshould never make you disregard eachcountry's specific traffic regulations.

CAUTION● When the exhaust system detects thatthe particulate filter is close to saturation,the self-cleaning function of this systemrecommends optimal driving for this func-tion.● Due to the high temperatures caused bythe regeneration of the particulate filter, it

is possible that the radiator fan will acti-vate after stopping the engine, even it itsoperating temperature has not beenreached.● Noise, smells and high idle speeds canoccur during regeneration.● Always use the correct engine oil and thecorrect fuel to make sure the useful life ofthe particulate filter is not affected. Alsoavoid making short trips all the time.

Engine compartment

Working in the engine compart-ment


Always be aware of the danger of injury andscalding as well as the risk of accident or firewhen working in the engine compartment(e.g. when checking and refilling fluids).

Always observe the warnings listed belowand follow all general safety precautions.

The vehicle's engine compartment is a po-tentially hazardous area ››› .

WARNINGWhen work is done in the engine compart-ment, injuries, burns, accidents and evenfires can occur.● Switch the engine off, remove the keyfrom the ignition and apply the electronicparking brake. If the vehicle has a manualgearbox, place the lever in neutral; if it hasan automatic gearbox, place the selectorlever in position P. Wait for the engine tocool down.● Never open the bonnet if you see steamor drips of coolant being released from theengine compartment. Wait until no steamor coolant can be seen before opening thebonnet.● Keep children away from the enginecompartment.● Never spill liquids used for vehicle opera-tion on the engine compartment, as thesemay catch fire (e.g. the antifreeze in cool-ant).● Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec-trical system, particularly at the pointswhere the jump leads are attached››› page 47. The battery could explode.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan may »

331

Practical tips

start up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.● Never cover the engine with additional in-sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk offire!● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolantexpansion tank when the engine is hot. Thecooling system is under pressure.● Protect face, hands and arms by cover-ing the cap with a large, thick rag to protectagainst escaping coolant and steam.● Always make sure you have not left anyobjects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, inthe engine compartment.● If you have to work underneath the vehi-cle, you must use suitable stands addition-ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk ofaccident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient forsecuring the vehicle and there is a risk ofinjury.● If any work has to be performed when theengine is started or with the engine running,there is an additional, potentially fatal,safety risk from the rotating parts, such asthe drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc.,and from the high-voltage ignition system.You should also observe the following:– Never touch the electrical wiring of the

ignition system.– Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing

and long hair do not get trapped in ro-tating engine parts. Danger of death.Before starting any work remove jewel-

lery, tie back and cover hair, and weartight-fitting clothes.

– Never accelerate with a gear engagedwithout taking the necessary precau-tions. The vehicle could move, even ifthe handbrake is applied. Danger ofdeath.

● Observe the following additional warn-ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-trical system is necessary:– Always disconnect the battery from the

on-board network.– Do not smoke.– Never work near naked flames.– Always keep an approved fire extin-

guisher immediately available.

For the sake of the environment● Inspect the ground underneath your vehi-cle regularly so that any leaks are detec-ted at an early stage. If you find spots of oilor other fluids in the area where it wasparked, have your vehicle inspected at theworkshop.● Service fluids leaks are harmful to the en-vironment. For this reason you should makeregular checks on the ground underneathyour vehicle. If you find spots of oil or otherfluids, have your vehicle inspected in aspecialised workshop.

NoteIn right-hand drive vehicles* some brakefluid reservoirs are on the other side of theengine compartment ››› Fig. 316.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 314 Release lever in the driver's footwellarea.

Fig. 315 Cam under the bonnet

332


Opening the bonnetThe bonnet is released from inside the vehi-cle.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure thatthe windscreen wiper arms are in placeagainst the windscreen.

● Open the door and pull the lever under thedashboard ››› Fig. 314 1 .● To lift the bonnet, press the release catchunder the bonnet upwards ››› Fig. 315 2 . Thearrester hook under the bonnet is released.● The bonnet can be opened. Release thebonnet stay and secure it in the fixture de-signed for this in the bonnet.

Closing the bonnet● Slightly lift the bonnet.● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in itssupport.● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fallso it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not pressdownwards. Open it again and let it fall asmentioned above.

WARNINGMake sure that the bonnet is properlyclosed. If it opens when driving, it cancause an accident.

CAUTIONTo avoid damage to the bonnet and to thewindscreen wiper arms, only open it whenthe windscreen wipers are in place againstthe windscreen.

333

Practical tips

Checking levels

Fig. 316 Diagram for the location of the various el-ements.

From time to time, the levels of the differentfluids in the vehicle must be checked. Neverfill with incorrect fluids, otherwise seriousdamage to the engine may be caused.

Coolant expansion tank ››› page 338Engine oil level dipstick ››› page 336Engine oil filler cap ››› page 336Brake fluid reservoir ››› page 339Battery (under the cover) ››› page 341Windscreen washer reservoir››› page 340

1

2

3

4

5

6

NoteThe layout of parts may vary depending onthe engine.

Engine oil

General notes

The engine comes with a special, multi-gradeoil that can be used all year round.

Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-tial for the correct operation of the engineand its long useful life, when topping up or

changing oil, use only those oils that complywith VW standards.

We recommend that the oil change be doneby a technical service or specialised work-shop.

If the engine oil level is too lowYou can get information about the correct en-gine oil for your vehicle at your workshop.

If the recommended engine oil is not availa-ble, in the event of an emergency you canchange the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 Lof the next oil until the next oil change:

334


Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00,VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 orAPI SN.Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00,VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.

Have the oil changed by a specialised work-shop.

Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00could increase consumption and the vehicle’sCO2 emissions.

Recommended by SEAT

SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil toguarantee high SEAT engine performance.

Vehicles with diesel particulate filter*Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ashformation, may be used in diesel enginesequipped with particulate filter. Using othertypes of oil will cause a higher soot concen-tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-fore:

● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.● Only in exceptional circumstances, if theengine oil level is too low ››› page 336 andyou cannot obtain the oil specified for yourvehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil

–

–

(once) conforming to the specificationsVW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l)››› page 334.

Engine oil additivesNo type of additive should be mixed with theengine oil. The deterioration caused by theseadditives is not covered by the warranty.

NoteBefore a long trip, we recommend findingan engine oil that conforms to the corre-sponding VW specifications and recom-mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, thecorrect engine oil will always be availablefor a top-up if needed.

Engine oil specifications

Diesel engines

Engine type Type ofService

Specifica-tion

With particulatefilter (DPF)a)

Set Serviceand FlexibleService Inter-vals

VW 507 00

Without particu-late filter (DPF)

Set ServiceIntervals

VW 505 01b)

VW 506 01b)

a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you maydamage the engine.b) If the quality of the fuel available in the countrydoes not fulfil the EN 590 (for diesel) standard.

Warning lamp

It lights up red

Do not carry on driving!Engine oil pressure too low.Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil level.

If this warning lamp starts to flash, and is accom-panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en-gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add moreoil ››› page 336.

If the warning lamp flashes although the oil levelis correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine atidle speed! Obtain technical assistance. »

335

Practical tips

It lights up yellow

Check the engine oil level as soon as possible.Replace oil as soon as you have the opportunity todo so ››› page 336.

It flashes yellow

Fault in the oil level sensor.Have the check done by a specialised workshop. Un-til then it is advisable to check the oil level every timeyou refuel.


Checking the engine oil level

Fig. 317 Engine oil dipstick.

The engine oil dipstick indicates the level ofthe oil.

Checking oil level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until theoperating temperature is reached and thenstop.

– Wait for about two minutes.

– Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick witha clean cloth and insert it again, pushing itin as far as it will go.

– Then pull it out once more and check the oillevel ››› Fig. 317. Top up with engine oil ifnecessary.

The oil must leave a mark between zones Aand C . It can never go above zone A .

● Zone A : do not add oil.● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the levelin that zone.● Zone C : add oil until zone B .

Depending on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con-sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oilconsumption is likely to be higher for the first5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil levelmust be checked at regular intervals, prefera-bly when filling the tank and before a journey.

WARNINGAny work carried out in the engine com-partment or on the engine must be carriedout cautiously.● When working in the engine compart-ment, always observe the safety warnings››› page 331.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area A , do not startthe engine. This could result in damage tothe engine and catalytic converter. Con-tact a Technical Service.

Topping up the engine oil

Fig. 318 In the engine compartment: Engine oilfiller cap.

336


Before opening the bonnet, read and observethe warnings ››› in Working in the enginecompartment on page 331.

Topping up engine oil● Unscrew cap from engine oil filler opening››› Fig. 318.● Carefully add oil in small quantities (nomore than 0.5 l).● To avoid adding too much oil, whenever youadd a certain amount, wait about 2 minutesand recheck the oil level ››› page 336.● If necessary, add some more oil.● When the oil level reaches at least zone››› Fig. 317 B , unscrew the engine oil fillercap carefully ››› .

The position of the oil filler opening is shownin the corresponding engine compartment il-lustration ››› page 334.

Engine oil specification ››› page 335.

WARNINGOil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oilcomes into contact with hot engine compo-nents when topping up.

CAUTIONIf the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 317 A ,do not start the engine. This could result in

damage to the engine and catalytic con-verter. Contact a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe oil level must never be above zone››› Fig. 317 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn inthrough the crankcase breather and leakinto the atmosphere via the exhaust sys-tem.

NoteBefore a long trip, we recommend findingan engine oil that conforms to the corre-sponding VW specifications and recom-mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, thecorrect engine oil will always be availablefor a top-up if needed.

Engine oil change

We recommend that you have the engine oilchanged by a Technical Service.

WARNINGOnly change the engine oil yourself if youhave the specialist knowledge required!● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob-serve the warnings ››› page 331.● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oilmay cause burn injuries.

● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries,such as acid burns, caused by splashes ofoil.● When removing the oil drain plug withyour fingers, keep your arm horizontal tohelp prevent oil from running down yourarm.● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes intocontact with engine oil.● Engine oil is poisonous! Used oil must bestored in a safe place out of the reach ofchildren.

CAUTIONNo additives should be used with engine oil.This could result in engine damage. Anydamage caused by the use of such addi-tives would not be covered by the factorywarranty.

For the sake of the environment● We recommend that you change the en-gine oil and the filter at a technical servicecentre.● Never pour oil down drains or into theground.● Use a suitable container when drainingthe used oil. It must be large enough to holdall the engine oil.

337

Practical tips

Cooling system

Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture ofwater and at least 40 % of the additiveG12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixturegives the necessary frost protection down to-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloyparts of the engine cooling system againstcorrosion. It also prevents scaling and con-siderably raises the boiling point of the cool-ant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent-age of additive must always be at least 40 %,even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-tection is not required.

If for weather reasons further protection isnecessary, the proportion of additive may beincreased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-tifreeze protection will diminish and this willworsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixtureof distilled water and at least 40 % of theadditive G12evo for optimal protectionagainst corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13(TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G),G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11(green blue) engine coolants decreases pro-tection again corrosion and should be avoi-ded.

WARNINGIf there is not enough anti-freeze in thecoolant system, the engine may fail lead-ing to serious damage.● Ensure that the percentage of additive iscorrect for the lowest expected ambienttemperature in the zone in which the vehi-cle is to be used.● When the outside temperature is verylow, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-cle would be immobilised.

CAUTIONThe original additives should never bemixed with coolants which are not ap-proved by SEAT.● If the fluid in the expansion tank is notpurple but is, for example, brown, this indi-cates that the G12evo additive has beenmixed with an inadequate coolant. Thecoolant must be changed as soon as possi-ble if this is the case!

For the sake of the environmentCoolants and additives can contaminatethe environment. If any fluids are spilled,they should be collected and correctly dis-posed of, with respect to the environment.

Refilling coolant

Fig. 319 In the engine compartment: markingon coolant expansion tank.

Fig. 320 Engine compartment: coolant expan-sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the enginecompartment ››› page 334.

Top up coolant when the level is below the (minimum) mark.

338


Checking coolant level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Switch the ignition off.

– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-pansion tank. When the engine is cold, thecoolant level should be between the marks››› Fig. 319. When the engine is hot, it maybe slightly above the upper mark.

Topping up coolant– Wait for the engine to cool down.

– Cover the coolant expansion tank cap witha cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left››› .

– Top up the coolant only if there is still cool-ant in the expansion tank, otherwise youcould damage the engine. If there is nocoolant in the expansion tank, do not con-tinue driving. You should obtain professionalassistance ››› .

– If there is still some coolant in the expansiontank, top up to the upper mark.

– Top up with coolant until the level becomesstable.

– Screw the cap back on correctly.

If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe-cialised workshop to have the cooling systemexamined.

WARNING● The cooling system is under pressure. Donot unscrew the cap on the coolant expan-sion tank when the engine is hot: risk ofburns!● Store the antifreeze in its original con-tainer and keep it out of reach of children.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.

CAUTIONIf you run out of coolant in the expansiontank, park the car in a safe place and donot continue driving. Obtain technical as-sistance.

Brake fluid

Check and refill the brake fluid

Fig. 321 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-ervoir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment ››› page 334.

Checking the brake fluid levelThe brake fluid level must be between the and markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes downnoticeably in a short time, or drops below the mark, there may be a leak in the brakesystem. Seek specialist assistance. A warninglight on the instrument panel display monitorsthe brake fluid level ››› page 89.

In right-hand drive vehicles the brake fluidreservoir is on the other side of the enginecompartment. »

339

Practical tips

Changing brake fluidWe recommend that you have the brake fluidchanged by a Technical Service.

WARNINGIf the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-ble/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys-tem may fail or braking power may be re-duced.● Check the brake system and the brakefluid level regularly!● When the brake fluid is used and brakesare subjected to extreme braking forces,bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys-tem. These bubbles can significantly re-duce braking power, notably increasingbraking distance, and could result in the to-tal failure of the brake system.● Be sure to always use the correct brakefluid. Only use brake fluid that expresslymeets the VW 501 14 standard.● You can buy VW 501 14 standard brakefluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT OfficialService. If none is available, use only high-quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925CLASS 4 standards, or USA StandardsFMVSS 116 DOT 4.● The replacement brake fluid must benew.● Brake fluid should be stored in the closedoriginal container in a safe place out ofreach of children. Risk of poisoning!

CAUTIONBrake fluid should not come into contactwith the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

For the sake of the environmentBrake fluid is an environmental pollutant.Collect any spilt service fluids and allow aprofessional to dispose of them.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking the level of the windowwasher tank and refilling it

Fig. 322 In the engine compartment: windowwasher tank cap.

The window washer tank is in the enginecompartment ››› page 334.

Check the water level in the windscreenwasher reservoir regularly and top up as re-quired.

The container for the windscreen washercontains the cleaning fluid for the wind-screen, the rear window and the headlightwasher system*.

● Open the bonnet ››› page 331.● The window washer tank is marked with the symbol on the cap.● Check there is enough windscreen water inthe reservoir.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-screen and headlights. We recommend thatyou always add a product to the windscreenwasher fluid.

Recommended windscreen wipers● For the hottest seasons we recommendsummer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-ter).● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion ofmixture in the washer fluid tank.

The capacity of the window washer tank canbe found in ››› page 372.

340


CAUTIONIf the water from the windscreen washerdoes not contain enough anti-freeze, it mayfreeze on the windscreen and rear window,reducing forward and rear visibility.● In winter, ensure the windscreen washercontains enough anti-freeze.● In cold conditions, you should not use thewindscreen wiper system unless you havewarmed the windscreen with the ventila-tion system. The antifreeze could freeze onthe windscreen and reduce visibility.

CAUTIONNever mix an unsuitable antifreeze or othersimilar additives with the windscreen wash-er water. A greasy layer may be formed onthe windscreen which will impair visibility.● Use clean water with a window cleanerrecommended by SEAT.● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze tothe water in the reservoir.

CAUTION● Do not mix cleaning products recommen-ded by SEAT with other products. Thiscould lead to flocculation and may blockthe windscreen washer jets.● When topping up service fluids, make ab-solutely certain that you fill the fluids intothe correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-

ids could cause serious malfunctions andengine damage!● Not having windscreen wiper fluid re-duces visibility through the windscreen,and leads to loss of visibility in headlightsin models with headlight washer.

Battery

General information

The battery is located in the engine compart-ment and is almost maintenance-free. It ischecked as part of the Inspection Service.Nevertheless, check the terminals are cleanand have the correct tightening torque, espe-cially in summer and winter.

All work on batteries requires specialistknowledge. Please refer to a SEAT OfficialService or a workshop specialising in batter-ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never tryto change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-erwise explosive gas is released from the bat-tery that could cause an explosion.

Battery warning indications

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse anysplashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking areprohibited.

The battery should only be charged in a well-ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

Disconnecting the batteryThe battery should only be disconnected inexceptional cases. When the battery is dis-connected, some of the vehicle's functionsare lost. These functions will require resettingafter the battery is reconnected.

When disconnecting the battery from the ve-hicle on-board network, disconnect first thenegative cable and then the positive cable.

Deactivate the anti-theft alarm* before youdisconnect the battery Otherwise the alarmwill be triggered.

If the vehicle is not used for long periodsThe vehicle has a system for monitoring thecurrent consumption when the engine is leftunused for long periods of time ››› page 344.Some functions, such as the interior lights, orthe remote door opening, may be temporarilydisabled to prevent the battery from runningflat. These functions will come back on as »

341

Practical tips

soon as the ignition is switched on and theengine started.

Winter conditionsDuring the winter, the starting power may bereduced, and if necessary, the battery shouldbe charged ›››

WARNINGAlways be aware of the danger of injuryand chemical burns as well as the risk ofaccident or fire when working on the bat-tery and the electrical system:● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,skin and clothing from acid and particlescontaining lead.● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wearprotective gloves and eye protection. Donot tilt the batteries. This could spill acidthrough the vents.● Neutralise any electrolyte splashes onthe skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu-tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. Ifacid is swallowed by mistake, consult adoctor immediately.● Fires, sparks, open flames and smokingare prohibited. When handling cables andelectrical equipment, avoid causing sparksand electrostatic charge. Never short thebattery terminals. High-energy sparks cancause injury.● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-leased when the battery is under charge.

The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.● Keep children away from acid and bat-teries.● Before working on the electrical system,you must switch off the engine, the ignitionand all electrical devices. The negative ca-ble on the battery must be disconnected.When a light bulb is changed, you need on-ly switch off the light.● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by un-locking the vehicle before you disconnectthe battery! The alarm will otherwise betriggered.● When disconnecting the battery from thevehicle on-board network, disconnect firstthe negative cable and then the positivecable.● Switch off all electrical devices beforereconnecting the battery. Reconnect firstthe positive cable and then the negativecable. Never reverse the polarity of theconnections. This could cause an electricalfire.● Never charge a frozen battery, or onewhich has thawed. This could result in ex-plosions and chemical burns. Always re-place a battery which has frozen. A flatbattery can also freeze at temperaturesclose to 0°C (+32°F).● Ensure that the vent hose is always con-nected to the battery.

● Never use a defective battery. This couldcause an explosion. Replace a damagedbattery immediately.

CAUTION● Do not expose the battery to direct sun-light over a long period of time, as the in-tense ultraviolet radiation can damage thebattery housing.● If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-ditions for a long period, protect the bat-tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will bedamaged.

Warning lamp

It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It should go out when the enginehas started running.

If the control lamp lights up while driving,the alternator is no longer charging the bat-tery. You should immediately drive to thenearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipmentthat is not absolutely necessary because thiswill drain the battery.

342


Checking the battery electrolytelevel

The electrolyte level should be checked reg-ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-tries and in older batteries.

● Open the bonnet and then lift the coverthat protects the front part of the battery››› in Working in the engine compart-ment on page 331.● Check the colour display in the "magic eye"on the top of the battery.● If there are air bubbles in the window, tapthe window gently until they disperse.

The position of the battery is shown in thecorresponding engine compartment diagram››› page 334.

The “magic eye” indicator, located on the topof the battery changes colour, depending onthe charge state and electrolyte level of thebattery.

There are two different colours:

● Black: correct charge status.● Transparent/light yellow: the battery mustbe replaced. Contact a specialised work-shop.

Charging or changing the battery

If you often drive short distances or if the ve-hicle is not driven for long periods, the batteryshould be checked by a specialised work-shop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you haveproblems starting the vehicle, the batterymight be damaged. If this happens, we rec-ommend you have the vehicle batterychecked by a Technical Service where it willbe re-charged or replaced.

Charging the batteryThe vehicle battery should be charged by aspecialised workshop only, as batteries usingspecial technology have been installed andthey must be charged in a controlled environ-ment.

Replacing a vehicle batteryThe battery has been developed to suit theconditions of its location and has specialsafety features. If the battery must be re-placed, consult a technical service for infor-mation on electromagnetic compatibility, thesize and maintenance, performance andsafety requirements of the new battery inyour vehicle before you purchase one. SEATrecommends you have the battery replacedby a technical service.

Start-Stop systems (››› page 251) are equip-ped with a special battery. Therefore, it mustonly be replaced with a battery of the samespecifications.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy ››› page 344.The power management function ensuresthat the battery is charged much more effi-ciently than on vehicles without a powermanagement system. To maintain this func-tion after replacing the battery, we recom-mend that the replacement battery used is ofthe same make and type as the original fittedbattery. To make proper use of the powermanagement function after the battery hasbeen changed, have the battery coded to thepower management mode at a specialisedworkshop.

WARNING● Always use only maintenance free bat-teries that do not run flat alone and whoseproperties, specifications and size corre-spond to the standard battery. The specifi-cations are indicated on the battery case.● Before starting any work on the batteries,you must read and observe the warnings››› in General information on page 342.

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances suchas sulphuric acid and lead. They must be »

343

Practical tips

disposed of appropriately and must not bedisposed of with ordinary household waste.

Energy management

Optimisation of the starting ca-pacity

The power management controls the distri-bution of electrical energy and thus helps toensure that there is always enough poweravailable to start the engine.

If a vehicle with a conventional electrical sys-tem is left parked for a long time, the batterywill gradually lose its charge because certainelectrical devices, such as the electronicgearbox lock continues to draw current evenwhen the ignition is off. In some cases theremay not be enough power available to startthe engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligentpower management system to control thedistribution of electrical energy. This signifi-cantly improves reliability when starting theengine, and also prolongs the useful life of thebattery.

The main functions incorporated in the powermanagement system are battery diagnosis,residual current management and dynam-ic power management.

Battery diagnosisThe battery diagnosis function constantlyregisters the condition of the battery. Sensorsdetect the battery voltage, battery currentand battery temperature. This enables thesystem to calculate the current power leveland charge condition of the battery.

Residual current managementThe residual current management reducespower consumption while the vehicle isparked. It controls the supply of power to thevarious electrical devices while the ignition isswitched off. The system takes the battery di-agnosis data into consideration.

Depending on the power level of the battery,switch off the individual electrical devicesone after the other to prevent the batteryfrom losing too much charge and to ensurethat the engine can be started reliably.

Dynamic power managementWhile the vehicle is moving, this function dis-tributes the available power to the variouselectrical devices and systems according totheir requirements. The power managementensures that on-board systems do not con-sume more electrical power than the alterna-tor can supply, and thus maintains the maxi-mum possible battery power level.

Note● Neither is the power management systemable to overcome the given physical limits.Please remember that the power and use-ful life of the battery are limited.● When there is a risk that the vehicle willnot start, the alternator power failure orlow battery charge level warning lamp willbe shown ››› page 89.

Flat battery

Starting ability has first priority.

Short trips, city traffic and low temperaturesall place a heavy load on the battery. Inthese conditions a large amount of power isconsumed, but only a small amount is sup-plied. The situation is also critical if electricaldevices are in use when the engine is not run-ning. In this case power is consumed whennone is being generated.

In these situations you will be aware that thepower management system is intervening tocontrol the distribution of electrical power.

When the vehicle is parked for long peri-odsIf you do not drive your vehicle for a period ofseveral days or weeks, the power manage-ment will gradually shut off the electrical de-vices one by one or reduce the amount of

344

Wheels

current they are using. This limits the amountof power consumed and helps to ensure reli-able starting even after a long period. Someconvenience functions, such as remote vehi-cle opening, may not be available under cer-tain circumstances. These functions will berestored when you switch on the ignition andstart the engine.

With the engine switched offFor example, if you listen to the sound systemwith the engine switched off the battery willrun down.

If the energy consumption means there is arisk that the engine will not start, a text willappear in vehicles with a driver informationsystem*.

This driver indicator tells you that you muststart the engine so that the battery can re-charge.

When the engine is runningAlthough the alternator generates electricalpower, the battery can still become dis-charged while the vehicle is being driven. Thiscan occur when a lot of power is being con-sumed but only a small amount supplied, es-pecially if the battery is not fully charged ini-tially.

To restore the necessary energy balance, thesystem will then temporarily shut off the elec-trical devices that are using a lot of power, or

reduce the current they are consuming. Heat-ing systems in particular use a large amountof electrical power. If you notice, for instance,that the seat heating* or the rear windowheater is not working, they may have beentemporarily switched off or regulated to alower heat output. These systems will beavailable again as soon as sufficient electri-cal power is available.

You may also notice that the engine runs at aslightly faster idling speed when necessary.This is quite normal, and no cause for con-cern. The increased idling speed allows thealternator to meet the greater power require-ment and charge the battery at the sametime.

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

– When driving with new tyres, be especiallycareful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

– If you have to drive over a kerb or similarobstacle, drive very slowly and as near aspossible at a right angle to the obstacle.

– Check from time to time if the tyres aredamaged (punctures, cuts, cracks ordents). Remove any foreign objects em-bedded in the treads.

– Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

– Replace any missing valve caps as soon aspossible.

– Mark the wheels before taking them off sothat they rotate in the same direction whenput back.

– When removed, the wheels or tyres shouldbe stored in a cool, dry and preferably darkplace. »

345

Practical tips

Low profile tyresLow profile tyres have a wider tread, a largerwheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-ly than standard tyres, for instance due tostrong knocks, potholes, manhole covers andkerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important››› page 348.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drivewith special care when driving on roads inpoor condition.

Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.

If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-pact or have been damaged, have a special-ised workshop check whether or not it is nec-essary to change the tyre.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damageDamage to tyres and rims is often not readilyvisible. If you notice unusual vibration or thecar pulling to one side, this may indicatethat one of the tyres is damaged. Reducespeed immediately if there is any reason tosuspect that damage may have occurred. In-spect the tyres for damage. If no externaldamage is visible, drive slowly and carefullyto the nearest specialised workshop andhave the car inspected.

Foreign objects inserted in the tyre● Do not remove foreign bodies if they havepenetrated through the tyre wall!● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobilitysystem, where necessary seal the damagedtyre as shown in section ››› page 38. Use aspecialised workshop for repair or replace-ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyre treadwraps around the foreign body and provision-ally seals the tyre.

Tyres with directional tread patternAn arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-ways note the direction of rotation indicatedwhen mounting the wheel. This makes surethat optimal use is made of tyre properties interms of aquaplaning, grip, excessive noiseand wear.

Subsequent fitting of accessoriesIf you wish to change or fit wheels, rims orwheel trims, we recommend that you consultwith a SEAT Official Service centre for adviceregarding current techniques.

Speed symbolsThe speed rating indicates the maximumspeed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph)max. 160 km/h (99 mph)max. 170 km/h (106 mph)max. 180 km/h (112 mph)max. 190 km/h (118 mph)max. 200 km/h (124 mph)max. 210 km/h (130 mph)max. 240 km/h (149 mph)max. 240 km/h (149 mph)max. 270 km/h (168 mph)max. 300 km/h (186 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” fortyres with a maximum authorised speedabove 240 km/h (149 mph).

WARNING● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur-ing the first 500 km. Drive particularlycarefully to avoid possible accidents.● Never drive with damaged tyres. Thismay cause an accident.● If you notice unusual vibrations or if thevehicle pulls to one side when driving, stopthe vehicle immediately and check thetyres.● Never use old tyres or those with an un-known history of use.

PQRSTUHVZWY

346

Wheels

New wheels and tyres

It is best to have all wheels and tyres servicedby a specialised workshop. There they havethe required knowledge, the special tools andthe corresponding spare parts.

● Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If youhave installed new tyres, drive the first 500km carefully and at a moderate speed.● All four wheels must be fitted with tyres ofthe same type, size (rolling circumference)and, if possible, tread pattern.● When changing tyres, do not change justone; change at least two on the same axle.● If you want to equip your vehicle with acombination tyres and rims that are differentto those fitted in the factory, inform your spe-cialised workshop before purchasing them››› The sizes of the rims and tyres approved foryour vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformityor COC document1)). The vehicle documen-tation varies depending on the country of res-idence.

If the type of spare wheel is different form thenormal wheels — e.g. in the case of wintertyres or particularly wide tyres — the sparewheel should only be used temporarily in the

event of a puncture, and the vehicle shouldbe driven with care. Refit the normal roadwheel as soon as possible.

In vehicles with four-wheel drive, the 4 wheelsmust be fitted with tyres of the same brand,type and tread so that the traction system isnot damaged by a difference in the numberof turns of the wheels. Therefore, in the eventof a puncture, only a spare wheel with thesame perimeter as normal tyres should beused.

Manufacturing dateThe manufacturing date is also indicated onthe tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of thewheel):

DOT ... 2218 ...it means, for example, that the tyre was man-ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.

WARNING● Use only combinations of tyres and rims,as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved bySEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam-aged, causing an accident.● For technical reasons it is not possible touse wheels of other vehicles; in some casesnot even wheels from the same vehiclemodel should be used.

● Always ensure that the tyres you havechosen have adequate clearance. Whenselecting replacement tyres, do not relyentirely on the nominal tyre size marked onthe tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-fer significantly depending on the manu-facturer. Lack of clearance can damagethe tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en-danger road safety. Risk of accident!● Only use tyres that are over 6 years old inan emergency, and drive with due care.● The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-hibited use can cause accidents or candamage your vehicle.● If decorative hubcaps are subsequentlyfitted, make sure that they allow enough airin to cool the braking system. Risk of acci-dent!

For the sake of the environmentOld tyres must be disposed of according tothe laws in the country concerned.

Note● A SEAT Service Centre should be consul-ted to find out whether wheels or tyres ofdifferent sizes to those originally fitted bySEAT can be fitted, and to find out about »

1) COC = certificate of conformity.347

Practical tips

the combinations allowed between thefront axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).● Never mount used tyres if you are notsure of their “previous history”.

Tyre life

Fig. 323 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-ing habits will increase the useful life of yourtyres.

● Check tyre pressure at least once a month,and also prior to any long trip.

● The tyre pressure should only be checkedwhen the tyres are cold. Do not reduce thepressure of warm tyres.● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-ried by the vehicle ››› Fig. 323.● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,save the modified tyre pressure ››› page 352.● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear fromtime to time.

Tyre pressureThe tyre inflation pressures are listed on asticker on the rear of the front left door frame››› Fig. 323.

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-rect inflation pressures are very important,especially at high speeds.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure canbe adjusted to medium load to improve driv-ing comfort (tyre pressure ››› Fig. 323).When driving with comfort tyre pressure fuelconsumption may increase slightly.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If thevehicle is going to carry the maximum load,the tyre pressure should be increased to themaximum value indicated on the sticker››› Fig. 323.

Do not forget the spare wheel when checkingthe tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-flated to the highest pressure required for theroad wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary sparewheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18) inflate to apressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyrepressure label ››› Fig. 323.

Driving styleFast cornering, heavy acceleration and hardbraking (squealing tyres) all increase tyrewear.

Wheel balanceThe wheels on new vehicles are balanced.However, certain circumstances may lead toimbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,as they otherwise cause excessive wear onsteering, suspension and tyres. A wheel mustalso be rebalanced when a new tyre is fittedor if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignmentIncorrect running gear alignment causes ex-cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of thevehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, youshould check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-ficial Service.

348

Wheels

WARNINGUnsuitable handling of the wheels andtyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los-ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-out.● The driver is responsible for ensuring thatall of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-ted to the right pressure. The recommen-ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label››› Fig. 323.● Check tyre pressures regularly and en-sure they are maintained at the pressuresindicated. Tyre pressure that is too lowcould cause overheating, resulting in treaddetachment or even burst tyres.● When the tyres are cold, tyre pressureshould be that indicated on the label››› Fig. 323.● Regularly check the cold inflation pres-sure of the tyres. If necessary, change thetyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while theyare cold.● Regularly check your tyres for damageand wear.● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type oftyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentUnder-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-sumption.

Tread wear indicators

Fig. 324 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Fig. 325 Interchanging tyres.

Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can befound on the base of the original tyre treads,ordered at regular intervals and runningacross the tread ››› Fig. 324. The letters "TWI"or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre markthe position of the wear indicators.

The minimum permitted profile depth1) havebeen reached when the tyres have worndown to the wear indicators. Replace thetyres with new ones ››› .

Changing wheels aroundTo ensure that the wear is equal on all tyresthe wheels should be changed round fromtime to time according to the system››› Fig. 325. The useful life of all the tyres willthen be about the same time. »

1) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.

349

Practical tips

WARNINGThe tyres must be replaced at the latestwhen the tread is worn down to the treadwear indicators. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● Particularly in difficult driving conditionssuch as wet or icy roads. It is important thatthe tyre tread be as deep as possible andbe approximately the same on the tyres ofboth the front and the rear axles.● The scant driving safety due to insuffi-cient tread depth is particularly evident invehicle handling, when there is a risk of“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of waterand when driving through corners, andbraking is also adversely affected.● The speed has to be adapted according-ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing controlover the vehicle.

Wheel nuts

The wheel nuts are matched to the rims.When installing different wheels (for instancealloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it isimportant to use the correct wheel nuts withthe right length and correctly shaped boltheads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-

curely and that the brake system functionscorrectly.

The wheel nuts must be clean and turn easily.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel nuts* ››› page 42.

WARNINGWheel nuts should never be greased oroiled.● Use only wheel nuts which belong to thewheel.● If the prescribed torque of the wheel nutsis too low, they could loosen whilst the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If thetightening torque is too high, the wheel nutsand threads can be damaged.

CAUTIONSee ››› page 45 to find out the recommen-ded tightening torque for wheel nuts forsteel and alloy rims.

Winter tyres

– Winter tyres must be fitted on all fourwheels.

– Only use winter tyres that are approved foryour vehicle.

– Please note that the maximum permissiblespeed for winter tyres may be lower thanfor summer tyres.

– Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-fective when the tread is worn down.

– After fitting the wheels you must alwayscheck the tyre pressures. When doing so,take into account the correct tyre pressureslisted on the rear of the front left door frame››› page 348.

In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-siderably improve vehicle handling. The de-sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com-pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on iceand snow. This applies particularly to vehiclesequipped with wide section tyres or withhigh speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y onthe sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-proved for your vehicle. The sizes of thesetyres are specified in the vehicle's documents(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)).The vehicle documentation varies dependingon the country of residence.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-ties when the tread is worn down to a depthof 4 mm.

1) COC = certificate of conformity.350

Wheels

The performance of winter tyres is also se-verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread isstill much deeper than 4 mm.

A code letter indicating the speed limit isstamped on all winter tyres ››› page 346.

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speedsmust have an appropriate sticker attachedso that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick-ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv-ice and specialised workshop. Please notethe regulations to this effect in your country.

“All-weather” tyres can also be used insteadof winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-ratingPlease note that the generally applicable240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyreswith the letter V is subject to technical re-strictions; the maximum permissible speedfor your vehicle may be significantly lower.The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-pends directly on the maximum axle weightsfor your car and on the listed weight rating ofthe tyres being used.

It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service tocheck the maximum speed which is permissi-ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car onthe basis of this information.

WARNINGExceeding the maximum speed permittedfor the winter tyres fitted on your car cancause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.

For the sake of the environmentWhen winter is over, change back to sum-mer tyres at an appropriate moment. Intemperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform-ance will be improved if summer tyres areused. Fuel consumption, wear and noiseswhile driving will all be reduced.

Snow chains

Snow chains must only be fitted to the frontwheels, even on vehicles with four-wheeldrive.

● Check that they are correctly seated afterdriving for a few yards; correct the position ifnecessary, in accordance with the manufac-turer's fitting instructions.● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).● If there is a danger of being trapped de-spite having mounted the chains, it is best todisable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC››› page 298, Connecting and disconnect-ing the ESC and ASR.

Snow chains will improve braking ability aswell as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may onlybe used with the following wheel rim/tyrecombination.

195/65 R15Chains with links of maximum 15 mm

205/55 R16

225/45 R17Chains with links of maximum 9 mm

225/40 R18

225/35 R19 Chains with links of maximum 7 mm

Other dimensions do not allow chains

Remove any central wheel trims and the rimring before fitting snow chains.

WARNINGThe use of unsuitable or incorrectly fittedchains could lead to serious accidents anddamage.● Always the appropriate snow chains.● Observe the fitting instructions providedby the snow chain manufacturer.● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION● Remove the snow chains to drive onroads without snow. Otherwise they will »

351

Practical tips

impair vehicle handling, damage the tyresand wear out very quickly.● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch-ed if the chains come into direct contactwith them. SEAT recommends the use ofcovered snow chains.

Tyre pressure loss indicator

Control lamp

It lights up

The inflation pressure of one or more wheels is muchlower than the value set by the driver, or the tyre hasstructural damage.In addition, a audible warning sounds and a textmessage is displayed on the instrument panelscreen. Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible. Check all tyres and pressures. Replaceany damaged tyres.

Flashes

System faultThe control lamp flashes for approximately 1 minuteand then lights up permanently.If the tyre is inflated correctly, switch the ignition offand on again. Re-calibrate the tyre pressure loss in-dicator ››› page 353. If the fault continues, go to aspecialised workshop.

Several control and warning lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on while the function is verified. They willswitch off after a few seconds.


Tyre monitor system

Fig. 326 Instrument panel: warning of loss oftyre pressure.

Fig. 327 Glove compartment: tyre pressureloss control switch.

The tyre monitor indicator compares wheelrevolutions and, with this information, thetread of each wheel using the ABS sensors.

If the rolling circumference of one or morewheels has changed, the tyre monitoring indi-cator will indicate this on the instrument pan-el through a warning lamp and a warning tothe driver ››› Fig. 326. When only one specifictyre is affected, its position within the vehiclewill be indicated.

Loss of pressure: Check lefttyre pressure!

Wheel tread changeThe wheel diameter changes when:

● Tyre pressure is changed manually.● Tyre pressure is insufficient.● The tyre structure is damaged.

352

Wheels

● The vehicle is unbalanced because of aload.● The wheels on an axle are subject to aheavier load (e.g. with a heavy load).● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.● The temporary spare wheel is fitted.● The wheel on one axle is changed.

There may be a delay in the reaction of thetyre monitoring indicator or it may not indi-cate anything under certain circumstances(e.g. sporty driving, snow-covered or un-paved roads, or when driving with snowchains).

Calibrating the tyre monitoring indicatorAfter changing the tyre pressure or replacingone or more wheels, the tyre monitoring indi-cator must be recalibrated. Do the same, forexample, when the front and rear wheels areswapped.

● Switch the ignition on.● Store the new inflation pressure in the EasyConnect system with the button >Vehicle > SETTINGS > Tyres ››› page 92 .● Vehicles without the Easy Connect system:press and hold button ››› Fig. 327 untila sound is heard.

When driving, the system self-calibrates thetyre pressure provided by the driver and thewheels fitted. After a long journey with varied

speeds the programmed values are collectedand monitored.

With the wheels under very heavy loads, thetyre pressure must be increased to the totalrecommended tyre pressure before calibra-tion ››› Fig. 323.

WARNINGWhen the tyres are inflated at differentpressures or at a pressure that is too lowthen a tyre may be damaged resulting in aloss of control of the vehicle and a seriousor fatal accident.● If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im-mediately and avoid any sudden turning orbraking manoeuvre. Stop when possible,and check the tyre pressure and status.● The tyre monitoring system can only op-erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla-ted to the correct pressure when cold.● If a tyre has not been punctured and itdoes not have to be changed immediately,drive to the nearest specialised workshopat a moderate speed and have the tyrechecked and inflated to the correct pres-sure.

Note● Driving for the first time with new tyres ata high speed can cause them to slightly ex-pand, which could then produce an airpressure warning.

● If excessively low tyre pressure is detec-ted with the ignition on, an audible warningwill sound. In the event that there is a faultin the system, an audible warning willsound.● Driving on dirt tracks for a long period oftime or driving in a sporty style can tempo-rarily deactivate the TPMS. The controllamp shows a fault, but disappears whenroad conditions or the driving style change.● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoringsystem. Regularly check your tyres to en-sure that the tyre pressure is correct andthat the tyres are not damaged due topuncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents.Remove objects from the tyres only whenthey have not pierced the tyres.● The tyre monitoring indicator does notfunction when there is a fault in the ESC orABS ››› page 296.

353

Practical tips

Spare wheel

Location and use of the temporaryspare wheel

Fig. 328 In the luggage compartment: loadfloor raised.

Fig. 329 In the luggage compartment: removethe subwoofer.

The temporary spare wheel is stored underthe floor panel in the luggage compartmentand is attached by a thumbnut.

The temporary spare wheel has been de-signed to be used for short periods of time.Have the tyres checked and replaced assoon as possible at a SEAT Official Service orat a specialised workshop.

The spare wheel must not be switched for aspare wheel from another vehicle.

Removing the temporary spare wheel● Lift and hold up the floor panel to removethe temporary spare wheel ››› page 143››› page 142.● Turn the thumb wheel anti-clockwise››› Fig. 328.

● Take out the temporary spare wheel.

Getting the spare wheel out of vehicleswith BEATS Audio 10 speakers (with sub-woofer)*To remove the spare wheel, you must first re-move the subwoofer.

● Vehicles without a variable floor in the lug-gage compartment: pull the floor of the lug-gage compartment (carpet) upwards to get itout.● Vehicles with a variable luggage compart-ment floor: lift and secure the floor storagecompartment as explained in ››› page 143››› page 142.● Disconnect the subwoofer ››› Fig. 329 1speaker cable.● Turn the securing wheel in an anti-clock-wise direction ››› Fig. 329 2 .● Remove the subwoofer speaker and thespare wheel.● When re-mounting the spare tyre, place thesubwoofer on the base of the wheel rim withcare. When doing so, the tip of the “FRONT”arrow on the subwoofer should point forward.● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro-tate the securing wheel clockwise so that thesubwoofer system and wheel are firmly inplace.

354

Wheels

ChainsFor technical reasons, snow chains must notbe used on the temporary spare wheel.

If you have a puncture on one of the frontwheels when using snow chains, fit the tem-porary spare wheel in place of one of the rearwheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheelthat you have removed and replace thepunctured front wheel with this wheel.

WARNING● After fitting the temporary spare wheel,check the tyre pressures as soon as possi-ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci-dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the backof the left front door frame ››› Fig. 323.● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph)when the temporary spare wheel is fittedon the vehicle: risk of accident!● Never travel more than 200 km using atemporary spare wheel.● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering: risk of accident!● Never use more than one temporaryspare wheel at the same time, risk of acci-dent.● No other type of tyre (normal summer orwinter tyre) may be fitted on the compacttemporary spare wheel rim.● If you are driving using the spare wheel,the ACC system could automatically

switch off during the journey. Switch off thesystem when starting off.

355

Maintenance

Maintenance

SEAT Maintenance Pro-gramme

Service intervals

Service work and the Digital Main-tenance Plan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-tenance Plan”)The SEAT dealership or a specialised work-shop records Service receipts in a centralsystem. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-mentation of the service history, it is possibleto reproduce the services performed anytime. SEAT recommends requesting a Servicereceipt after every service carried out con-taining all the services carried out on the sys-tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt isreplaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-able in some markets. In this case, yourSEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-rent documentation of the work.

Service worksIn the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEATauthorised service or specialised workshopdocuments the following information:

● When each one of the services was carriedout.● Whether a specific repair has been sugges-ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the nearfuture.● If you have expressed a special request forthe maintenance. Your Service Advisor willwrite the work order.● The components or fluids that werechanged.● The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid untilthe next inspection. This information is docu-mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service mayvary from one vehicle to another. A special-ised workshop will be able to provide specificinformation on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic cause an accident and severe in-juries.

● Make sure that any repairs are carriedout by a SEAT authorised service or speci-alised workshop.

CAUTIONSEAT cannot be held liable for any damageto the vehicle due to insufficient work or oflack of availability of spare parts.

NoteRegular services on the vehicle not onlymaintain its value, but also its correct oper-ation and road safety. For this reason, con-duct the services in accordance with SEATguidelines.

Set Service or Flexible Service In-tervals

Services are classified as oil change serviceand inspection. The service interval displayon the instrument panel display serves as areminder of the next service.

Depending on the features, the engine andthe conditions of use of the car, either theFixed service or the Flexible service will beapplied for an oil change service..

356

SEAT Maintenance Programme

How to know which type of service needsto his vehicle● Check the tables below:

Oil change servicea)

PR No. Type ofservice Service interval

QI1

Fixed

Every 5000 km or after1 yearb)

QI2 Every 7500 km or after1 yearb)



QI6 Flexible According to the service in-terval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.b) Whatever happens first.

Inspection Servicea)

According to the service interval display

a) The data are based on normal conditions of use.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-fications of the engine oil according to theVW standard ››› page 335.

Particular characteristics of the FlexibleServiceRegarding the Flexible Service, the oilchange service only has to be performedwhen the vehicle needs it. To calculate whenyou have to carry out this service, take intoaccount the individual conditions of use andpersonal driving style. A major component ofthe flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-stead of conventional engine oil.

Bear in mind the information about the speci-fications of the engine oil according to theVW standard ››› page 335.

If you do not want to the flexible serviceyou can select the fixed service However,a fixed service may affect service costsThe Service Advisor will gladly advise you.

Service interval displayAt SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-ted by the service interval display on the in-strument panel ››› page 85 or in the Vehiclesettings menu of the infotainment system››› page 92.

The service interval display gives informationfor service dates that involve an engine oilchange or an inspection. When the time forthe corresponding service comes, additionalwork required, such as the change of brakefluid and the spark plugs, can be carried out.

Information about the terms of use

The service intervals and groups are usuallybased on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-verse conditions of use, some of the workmust be carried out before the next serviceperiod or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

● The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.● Frequent short trips.● Letting the engine idle for a long period oftime, as in the case of taxis.● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.● Frequent driving with a trailer (dependingon equipment).● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with alot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).● Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the followingparts (depending on equipment):

● Dust and pollen filter● Air Care allergen filter● Air filter● Toothed chain● Particulate filter● Engine oil »

357

Maintenance

The Service Advisor of your specialisedworkshop will gladly inform you about theneed of performing service work betweennormal service intervals, always consideringthe conditions of use of your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic and cause accidents and severeinjuries.● Have the services conducted at author-ised SEAT services or specialised work-shops.

CAUTIONSEAT cannot be held liable for any damageto the vehicle due to insufficient work or oflack of availability of spare parts.

Service sets

Sets of services include all the maintenanceworks needed to ensure the safety and thesmooth running of the vehicle (depending onthe conditions of use and the features ofthe vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, oroperating fluids). Maintenance services aredivided into inspection and review services.Consult the details of the jobs required foryour vehicle at:

● Your SEAT authorised service● Your specialised workshop

Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-opment of components) the sets of servicesmay vary. Your SEAT authorised service orspecialised workshop is always receiving up-dates in time.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-ceived for their vehicles and approved bySEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.These parts correspond exactly to the manu-facturer's requirements in terms of design,accuracy of the measurements and materi-als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have beenconceived exclusively for your vehicle. For thisreason, we always recommend the use ofOriginal SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot beheld liable for the safety and suitability ofparts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

Approved spare parts, following the manu-facturer's requirements, are an additionalservice to you, offering the possibility of re-

placing complete sets, such as: light engine,gearboxes, heads, control units, electricalcomponents, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are thesame as the factory parts, which are also ap-proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT OriginalAccessories and SEAT approved accessoriesfor your vehicle. The reliability, safety andsuitability of these accessories have been in-spected specifically for this type of vehicle.SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety andsuitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility

Since the moment you purchase your SEATvehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefitsand coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase,your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long asyou carry out the recommended Inspection

358

Vehicle maintenance

and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-ised Service.

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to afault or an accident, our assistance serviceswill help you keep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT MobilityService differs depending on the country inwhich the vehicle was purchased. For furtherinformation ask your SEAT dealership or theSEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfectcondition of new vehicles. Check the pur-chase agreement or complementary addi-tional documentation provided by your Tech-nical Service to see the conditions and theterms of the warranty. Consult further infor-mation in this regard in your SEAT OfficialService.

Vehicle maintenance

Maintenance and cleaning

Basic observations

Regular and careful care helps to maintainthe value of your vehicle. In addition, it maybecome a prerequisite to demand the war-ranty in the event of corrosion damage anddeficiencies in the paint coat of the body-work.

Specialised workshops have the necessarycare products. Please follow the instructionsfor application on the packaging.

WARNING● Cleaning products and other materialsused for car care can be damaging to yourhealth if misused.● Always keep care products in a safeplace, out of the reach of children. Dangerof poisoning!

For the sake of the environment● When purchasing car care products,chose products that are compatible withthe environment.● The waste from car-care products shouldnot be disposed of with ordinary householdwaste.

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resinor anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, themore damage it can cause to the surface.High temperatures, for instance strong sun-light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt usingplenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, birddroppings or tree resin, use a lot of water anda microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaning equipmentWhen washing the vehicle with a high-pres-sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-structions for the equipment. This appliesparticularly to the operating pressure and thedistance between the spraying water. Do notaim the jet directly to the side window gas-kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-ses, soundproofing material, sensors* orcamera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-pressure cleaner. »

359

Maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water outin a direct stream or one that has a rotatingjet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed60°C.

Automatic car washesSpray the vehicle before starting the carwash.

Make sure that the windows and the panor-amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreenwipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-structions of the car wash tunnel operator,especially if your vehicle has detachableparts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by handClean your vehicle from top to bottom with asoft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint byhandTo prevent damage to the vehicle whenwashing it, first remove the thicker dust anddirt. To remove traces of insects, grease andfingerprints, it is best to use a special cleanerfor matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. Toavoid damaging the surface of the paint, donot apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it witha neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of waterand then leave it to dry. Remove traces ofwater with a leather cloth.

WARNING● Only wash the vehicle with the ignitionswitched off or according to the specifica-tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Riskof accident!● When cleaning the underbody or the in-side of the wheel arches, protect yourselffrom sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk ofcut!● After cleaning the brakes could act moreslowly due to moisture or, in winter, the iceon the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-dent! In this case the brakes should bedried by pressing the brake pedal severaltimes.

CAUTION● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to re-tract the exterior mirrors to prevent themfrom being damaged. Electric exterior rear-

view mirrors must always be folded/de-ployed electrically!● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.Risk of damaging the paint job!● Do not use sponges, abrasive householdsponges or similar to clean insect remains.Risk of damaging the surface!● Vehicle parts with matte paint:– Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!– Never select washing programs that in-

clude the use of wax. This could dam-age the appearance of matte paint.

– Do not put stickers or magnets on partswith matte paint, as removing themmay damage the paint.

For the sake of the environmentThe car should only be washed in specialwash bays. These places are prepared toprevent oily water from getting into thepublic drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individualcomponents of the vehicle can be checked inthe following tables. The contents should beunderstood merely as a recommendation. Goto your specialised workshop if you have

360

Vehicle maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed.Take he general considerations into account››› in Take special care with... onpage 364.

Cleaning the exterior

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with a sol-vent-free cleaning productCamera lenses: soft cloth withan alcohol-free cleaning prod-uct

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spraywith no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water

Brake abrasiondust

Acid-free special cleaningproduct

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if asteel cleaning product is re-quired


Paint

Problem Solution

Paint flawsCheck the paint's colour codein an authorised service and re-store with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rusttank

Apply rust remover and thenapply hard wax. Go you yourspecialised workshop if youhave any queries

Problem Solution

Corrosion Have your specialised work-shop take care of this

The water doesnot create drop-lets on the cleanpaint

Maintain with hard wax (atleast 2 times a year)

No shine de-spite sober main-tenance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and ap-ply paint preservative after-wards if the wax used does notcontain preservative ingredi-ents

Tanks, e.g. insectremains, birddroppings, treesap, road salt

Immediately soften with waterand remove with a microfibrecloth

Fat-based dirt,e.g. cosmeticproducts orsunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-tral soap solutiona) and a softcloth


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain-ted parts ››› page 359 »

361

Maintenance

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)


Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner andthen dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona)


Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos-sible solvent-free plastic clean-er


Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystaldisplay cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth withneutral soap solutiona)


Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), al-lowed to dry before retracting


Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Particles of dirtstuck to surfaces

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutralsoap solutiona)

Problem Solution

Grease-baseddirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solutiona).Absorb the dissolved greaseand paint particles drying withan absorbent cloth, in case youmust treat it with water after-wards

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry withan absorbent cloth, if applica-ble, apply neutral soap solutionafterwardsa)


Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soapsolutiona)

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothDry stains: stain remover suita-ble for leather

Grease-baseddirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothand suitable stain remover forleatherDry stains: grease solventspray

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable forleather

362

Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution

Care Apply preservative cream regu-larly to protect from sunlight.Use a colour preservative if re-quired


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights witha dry cloth or sponge.● Do not use cleaning products that containalcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasiveproducts.● If the protective coating on the paint of therim has been damaged due to stone impacts,scratches, etc., the damage should be re-paired immediately.

Camera lenses● Do not use hot or warm water to remove iceor snow from the camera lenses. Risk ofcracking the lens!● To clean the camera lens, never use abra-sive cleaning products or products with alco-hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows● Remove snow and ice from windows andexterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. Toavoid scratches, the scraper should only bepushed in one direction and not moved toand fro.● Never remove snow or ice from windowsand rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.Risk of cracks on the windows!● To prevent damage to the heating of therear window, do not put stickers over theheating elements.

Covers/trims● Do not use cleaning products or chromebased cleaning agents.

Paint● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dustbefore applying wax or care products. Risk ofscratches!● Do not apply wax or care products if thevehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk ofdamaging the paint job!

● The ambient rust deposits must not be re-moved through friction. Risk of damaging thepaint job!● Remove cosmetic products and sunlightimmediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!

Displays/instrument panel● The screens, the instrument panel and thetrim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk ofscratches!● Make sure that the instrument panel isswitched off and cooled down before clean-ing.● Make sure that no liquid leaks between theinstrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-age!

Control panels● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts● Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.● Seat belts and their components must nev-er be cleaned with chemical products, norshould they be allowed to come into contactwith corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,ask your specialised workshop to replace thebelt in question. »

363

Maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-er● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantaraleather with leather cleaning products, sol-vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removersor similar products.● If the stain is very hard to remove, take thevehicle to a specialised workshop to have itremoved there. This will prevent damage.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damagethe seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcrofasteners are closed.

Natural leather● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,spot removers or similar products on leather.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight forlong periods, otherwise it may tend to losesome of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

longed period in the bright sun, it is best tocover the leather.

WARNINGDo not use water-repellent coatings on thewindscreen. In bad visibility conditionssuch as humid weather, darkness or whenthe sun is in its lowest point, visibility maybe impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-ings can also cause the windscreen wiperblades to make noise.

Note● Remains of insects can be removed muchmore easily with previously treated paint.● Regular car care treatments can preventdeposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationaryfor a long period of time, contact a qualifiedworkshop. They will gladly inform you aboutthe necessary measures, such as anti-corro-sion protection, Service and storage.

Also take into account instructions regardingthe vehicle's battery ››› page 341.

Accessories and modifi-cations to the vehicle

Accessories, spare parts andrepair work

Introduction

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailerfor advice before purchasing accessoriesand replacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-ard of active and passive safety. For this rea-son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi-cial Service for advice before fitting accesso-ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT OfficialService has the latest information from themanufacturer and can recommend accesso-ries and replacement parts which are suita-ble for your requirements. They can also an-swer any questions you might have regardingofficial regulations.

We recommend you to use only SEAT acces-sories and Genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT hastested these parts and accessories for suita-bility, reliability and safety. SEAT OfficialServices have the necessary experience andfacilities to ensure that the parts are installedcorrectly and professionally.

364

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it isdriven, such as a cruise control system orelectronically-controlled suspension, mustbe approved for use in your vehicle and bearthe e mark (the European Union's authorisa-tion symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit-ted which do not serve to control the vehicleitself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptopor ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration inthe European Union).

WARNINGAccessories, for example telephone hold-ers or cup holders, should never be fittedon the covers, or within the working rangeof the airbags. Otherwise, there is a dangerof injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-dent.

Technical modifications

Unauthorised modifications to the electroniccomponents, software, wiring or data transferin the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.

You will appreciate that your SEAT dealershipcannot be held liable for any damagecaused by modifications and/or work per-formed incorrectly.

We therefore recommend that all work shouldbe performed by a SEAT Official Service us-ing genuine SEAT parts®.

WARNINGIncorrectly performed modifications orother work on your vehicle can lead to mal-functions and cause accidents.

Radio telephones and office equip-ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)Any retrofit installations of radio transmittersin the vehicle require prior approval. SEATgenerally authorises in-vehicle installationsof approved types of radio transmitters provi-ded that:

● The antenna is installed correctly.● The aerial is installed on the exterior of thevehicle (and shielded cables are used to-gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).● The effective transmitting power does notexceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-shop will be able to inform you about optionsfor installing and operating radio transmitterswith a higher transmitting power.

Mobile radio transmittersCommercial mobile telephones or radioequipment might interfere with the electron-ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.This may be due to:

● No external aerial.● External aerial incorrectly installed.● Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portablemobile telephones or radio equipment insidethe vehicle without a properly installed exter-nal aerial ››› .

Please note also that the maximum range ofthe equipment can only be achieved with anexternal aerial.

Business equipmentRetrofit installation of business or privateequipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-ded the equipment cannot interfere with thedriver's immediate control of the vehicle andthat any such equipment carries the mark.Any retrofit equipment that could influencethe driver's control of the vehicle must have atype approval for your vehicle and must carrythe e mark.

WARNINGMobile telephones or radio equipmentwhich is operated inside the vehicle without »

365

Maintenance

a properly installed external aerial cancreate excessive magnetic fields thatcould cause a health hazard.

Note● The posterior fitting of electric and elec-tronic equipment in this vehicle affects itslicence and could lead to the withdrawal ofthe vehicle registration document undercertain circumstances.● Please use the mobile telephone/radiooperating instructions.

366

Information for the user



Information stored by thecontrol units

Storage of accident data (EventData Recorder)

Your vehicle has an event data recorder(EDR).

The EDR’s function is to record data in theevent of a mild or serious accident. These da-ta are used to support the analysis of how dif-ferent vehicle systems behaved.

The EDR records, over a reduced time range(normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv-ing data and data from the restraint systems,such as:

● How different vehicle systems worked.● Whether the driver and the occupants werewearing their seat belts.● How hard the acceleration or brake pedalwas pressed.● Vehicle speed.

These data will provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances of the accident.

Data from the driving assist systems are alsorecorded. This includes data such as whetherthe systems were inactive or active and ifsuch action had an impact on the vehicle’sdynamic behaviour, changing its path in theaforementioned situations, accelerating ordecelerating the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle equipment, this in-cludes data from systems such as:

● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)● Emergency brake assistance system (FrontAssist).● Park Pilot system● Lane Assist

The EDR data are only recorded in specificaccident situations. No data are recorded innormal driving conditions.

No audio or video data inside or around thevehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan-ces are personal data such as name, age, orgender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties(such as criminal proceedings authorities)may relate the contents of the EDR data toother data sources and create a personalreference in the context of an accident inves-tigation.

In order to read the EDR data it is necessaryto access (if legally permitted to do so) thevehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter-face while the vehicle is switched on.

SEAT will not have access to EDR data unlessthe owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lesseeor hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-ceptions to this, depending on legal or con-tractual provisions.

Due to legal requirements in safety-relatedproducts, SEAT may use the EDR data forfield research and in order to improve vehiclesystem quality. Any data used for the purpo-ses of research will be treated anonymously(in other words, no reference will be made tothe vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer).

Other important information

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manufac-ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re-cycling● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling.● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling.● Increased use of single-grade materials. »

367


● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials● Use of recycled materials.● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.● Reduction of volatile components, includingodour, in plastic materials.● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.● Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-cle transport.● Use of solvent-free adhesives.● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).● Improvement in the quality of waste water.

● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).● The use of water-soluble paints.

Recycling of electrical or electron-ic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) thatare not permanently fitted in the vehicle mustbe marked with the following symbol:

This symbol indicates that EED must not bediscarded as home waste but through selec-tive waste collection.

Information about the EU Di-rective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declara-tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-clare that they comply with Directive2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declarationis available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you toassociate the name of the device in the dec-laration of compliance with the features ofthe vehicle and the terminology used in theon-board documentation.

Features of thevehicle

Name of the deviceaccording to the dec-laration of compli-ance

Radiofrequency re-mote control (vehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477,FS94

Radio frequency re-mote control (auxili-ary heater)

Sender STH SEAT -50000914

Telestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

368




Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys-tem

MQB-B B

Radar sensors for as-sistance systems

ARS4-B

MRRevo14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474

Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

WCH-185

5G0.980.611

Connection to the ex-ternal antenna of thecar

UMTS/GSM-MMC

UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2

LTE-MBC-EU



Instrument panel eNSF

Immobilizer integrated indashboard moduleinstrument cluster

Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Bigfamily

Antennas KSA Small Fam III

5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG720166002

8S7.035.503.B



Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.2256F9.035.2253V5.035.577.A7N0.035.552.J7N0.035.552.K7N0.035.552.Q5F4.035.2255F4.035.225.A5F4.035.225.B5F9.035.2255F9.035.225.A5F9.035.225.B575,035,225575.035.225.A575.035.225.B5FJ.035.2255FJ.035.225.A5FJ.035.225.B

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, allrelevant components must include the ad-dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo-nents that, due to their size or nature, cannotinclude a sticker are listed below, as long as itis legally required: »

369


Radioelectricalequipment fittedin the vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radiofrequency remotecontrol key

Della KGaA Hueck & Co.Rixbecker Straße 7559552 Lippstadt,GERMANY

Radio frequency re-mote control (auxiliaryheater)

Digades gmbHÄußere Weberstraße 2002763 Zittau, GERMANY

Webasto Thermo &Comfort SEFriedrichshafener Str. 982205 Gilching, GERMANY

Radioelectricalequipment fittedin the vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radar sensors for as-sistance systems

ADC Automotive DistanceControl Systems GmbHPeter-Dornier-Straße 1088131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbHPostfach 16 6171226 Leonberg,GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

Auxiliary heating868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

370


Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Bluethooth2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Alhambraand Tarraco

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm

Tarraco




LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 703-748 MHz 23 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Radar sensors for assistance systems76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

371

Technical data

Technical data

Indications about thetechnical data

Important information

Introduction

The values indicated in the technical datamay differ depending on optional equipmentor version of the model, as well as in the caseof special vehicles and equipment for certaincountries.

The information in the official vehicle docu-mentation takes precedence at all times.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerlyused to denote engine power.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

CZ Cetane number, indication of the die-sel combustion power.

RON Research octane number, indication ofthe knock resistance of petrol.


Vehicle ID numberThe vehicle ID number can be found in thefollowing places:

● In the infotainment system using button > Vehicle > SETTINGS > Serv-ice > Vehicle ID number.● One the vehicle's data label.● In front, under the windscreen.● To the right in the engine compartment.

Type plateThe type plate is located on the vehicle’s righthand door frame. Vehicles for certain exportcountries do not have a type plate.

Fuel consumption

Approved consumption values are derivedfrom measurements performed or supervisedby certified EU laboratories, according to thelegislation in force at the time (for more infor-mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) andapply to the specified vehicle characteristics.

The values relating to fuel consumption andCO2 emissions can be found in the documen-

tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-cle at the time of purchase.

Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions de-pend on the equipment/features of each indi-vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-mental conditions, load or number of passen-gers.

Filling capacities

Tank level

Petrol and die-sel engines

Vehicles with front-wheel drive:50 l, 7 l reserve

Vehicles with four-wheel drive:55 l, 8.5 l reserve

Natural gas en-ginea)

approx. 17.3 kgAdditional petrol tank: 9 l, of

which approx 7.6 l is a reserve

a) The capacity depends on the efficacy and charac-teristics of the natural gas pumps. The capacity indi-cated is based on a minimum loading pressure of 200bar.

372

Indications about the technical data

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-tainer

Versions withoutheadlight washersystem

approx. 3 litres

Versions withheadlight washersystem

approx. 5 litres

Weights

Load on the roofThe maximum authorised roof load for yourvehicle is 75 kg.

Empty weight, total weight, axle loadsThe empty weight of the vehicle with driver(75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU)1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment canincrease the empty weight, which means thatthe possible useful load decreases propor-tionally.

Trailer weightThe maximum permitted drawbar load on theball head of the towing device is 80 kg.

WARNINGThe values indicated for the maximum per-mitted weights must not be exceeded.There is a risk of accident and damage!

373

Technical data

Engine specifications

Petrol engines1.0 EcoTSI Start-Stop 1.5 Start-Stop ACT®

Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon Leon Sportourer ST

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/5,000-5,500 96 (131)/5,000-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/2,000-3,500 200/1,400-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement(cm3) 3/999 4/1,498

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual manual manual

Top speed (km/h) 195 (V) 196 (V) 203 (V) 207 (V)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec-onds) 9.8 10.1 9.4 9.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,720 1,780 1,780 1,840

374


Petrol engines1.5 Start-Stop ACT® 2.0 TSI Start-Stop

Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon Sportourer ST

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 213 (290)/5,400-6,500 221 (300)/5,300-6,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 380/1,950-5,300 400/2,000-5,200

No. of cylinders/displacement(cm3)

4/1,498 4/1,984 4/1,984

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ Super 98 / Super 95 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual DSG manual DSG DSG DSG DSG / 4Drive

Top speed (km/h) 215 (V) 213 (VI) 215 (IV) 215 (V) 250 (VI) 250 (VI) 250 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec-onds) 8.2 8.3 8.2 8.3 6.0 6.3 4.9

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,780 1,790 1,840 1,860 1,920 2,020 2,090 »

375

Technical data

Natural gas / petrol engine1.5 TGI Start-Stop

Leon Leon Sportourer ST

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 96 (131)/5,000-6,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/1,400-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,498

FuelCNG

Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual automatic manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 206 (VI) 206 (VI) 206 (VI) 206 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 10.1 9.9 10.1 10

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,810 1,840 1,850 1,880

Diesel engines1.6 TDI Start-Stop 2.0 TDI Start-Stop

Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon Leon Sportourer ST

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 85 (115)/3,250-4,000 110 (150)/3,500-4,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,250 340/1,750-3,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,598 4/1,968

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual manual manual DSG manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 197 (V) 194 (V) 215 (VI) 211 (VII) 215 (VI) 212 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (sec-onds) 9.8 10.6 8.5 8.4 8.8 8.7

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,870 1,920 1,850 1,890 1,940 1,980

376


Dimensions

Fig. 330 Dimensions.

Leon Leon Sportourer ST Leon X-Perience

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 861/785 861/1,052 861/1,060

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,636 2,636 2,630

D Length (mm) 4,282 4,549 4,551

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,533/1,5041,549/1,520

1,541/1,5041,547/1,510

G Width (mm) 1,816 1,816 1,816

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,459 1,454b) 1,481b)

Turning radius (m) 10.9

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.b) Dimension to the roof bars.

377

Index

IndexNumbers and Symbols4Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

AABS

see Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 364Active cylinder management (ACT)

status indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277function to prevent overtaking on the right . 281indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278special driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

AdBluecontrol and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328minimum filling capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Adjustfront seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Adjusting the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 25description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Air conditioningClimatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 184Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 39Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Anti-trap functionsunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118sunshade blind (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338App

SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Apple CarPlay™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183Aspects to think about before starting the ve-

hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11ASR

see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Assistance systems

ACC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Auto Hold function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288emergency braking (Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . 272parking aid Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304road sign detection system messages . . . . . . 78traffic jam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Audible warning

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Auto Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Auto Hold Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

379

Index

Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

disconnecting the Auto Hold function . . . . . 294Automatic dipped beam headlight control . . . 119Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258emergency release of the selector lever. . . 262ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258launch-control program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259operating fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255steering wheel with shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . 257tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 257towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

AUX-IN multimedia socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Average fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

BBackrest of the front passenger seat

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Backrest of the rear seatfolding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 153Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Blown bulbschange a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Bluetooth®connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331, 334opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Braking system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

CCamera

cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

CapacitiesAdBlue tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327natural gas tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323window washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Caresee Cleaning the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Central armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103emergency lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Cetane index (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64tail light in the bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Change the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Changing the main beam headlight bulbs

daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Checking levelsengine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Childproof lockselectric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Child seatsgroup classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36

Cleaning the vehiclehigh pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 359special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363vehicle exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361vehicle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362wash the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157380

Index

Clocksset the time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Clutch (lamp) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Communication between the Infotainment

System and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185WLAN access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Connectivity Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277adBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 298audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290cruise control (GRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290emissions control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296, 298fuel reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329, 330press on the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272, 277refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 322replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Controls and displaysoverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Controls on the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Convenience close function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Convenience open function

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Cooling system

check the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338

Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

DDAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

see: RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179Deactivation of cylinders

see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . . 72Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Delayed shutdown (Infotainment system) . . . 169Diesel

engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

Display of road signs on the instrument panelactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Disposalseat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Distance controlsee Adaptive Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

child lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Downhill assistance function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Downhill assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Drink holder

bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Driver

see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

381

Index

Driver alert system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Driver information system

lap timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Driving

driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 269with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313, 315, 319

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Driving mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269Driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265DSG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206, 212

settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

EE10

see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92EDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Electric

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Electrical accessories

see Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Electronic engine torque management

(XDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 250Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . 296Emergencies

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Emergency Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289see Emergency Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Emergency braking assist system

indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274radar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275temporarily deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Emergency braking warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Emergency locking of the front passenger

door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Emergency openingdriver's door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Emergency operationfront passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Emissions control systemAdBlue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344Engine

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47noises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246start (driver instructions with the mechani-

cal contact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Engine and ignition

automatic ignition disconnection . . . . . . . . . . 247emergency start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 248switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331, 334battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

382

Index

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338check the level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85G12evo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338temperature indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Engine failurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Engine oilchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 337checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 335

Engine oil pressurecontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Enlarge

the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Environment

ecological driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Environmental tiprefuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154, 364ESC

electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . 296multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Sport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Exhaust gases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Exterior lighting

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Exterior mirrors

driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

FFabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Factors that have a negative influence on

safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Filling capacities

fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372window washer tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Filling the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 123Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Frequency bandAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Front Assist

see Emergency braking assist system . . . . . 272Front drink holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Front fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Fuel

diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Fuel consumptioninertia disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267why does consumption increase? . . . . . . . . . 329

Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Fuel tank capopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Fuel tank flapopening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170383

Index

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 55, 56preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 55recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

GGALA (speed-dependent volume) . . . . . . . . . . . 174Gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Gearbox DSG

see Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Gear change

engage the gears (manual change) . . . . . . 254manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

Gear indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262Glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

HHandbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

see also Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . 292Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 17Head-protection airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Headlights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 135Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

IIdentification of fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324Identifying letters on engine (LDM)

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Inertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260Information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243CD or DVD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206change the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170checkboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212DVD settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173FM, AM, DAB settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169image settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213infotainment buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172input window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Internet access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Media settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214navigation settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225on-screen keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 166phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224rotary/push buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163scroll button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171scroll (screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171search on lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . 193share a WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187sound distribution (Balance and Fader) . . . . 174station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233text entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194updating navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175voice control settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178volume and sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174wait time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187WLAN audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

384

Index

Infotainment system: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334, 356Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 69

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89digital (SEAT Digital Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69indications on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 74menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85use with the multifunction steering wheel . . . 88use with the wiper lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 72Instrument panel lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Interferences caused by mobile phones . . . . . 169Interior door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Interior mirror

anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Interior monitoring and the anti-tow system

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Interlock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

position points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

KKeyless Access

Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Keyless Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Press & Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 104

Keyless Access lock and ignition system:see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Keyless Entrysee Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Keyless Exitsee Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Keysassign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99instructions for the driver (mechanical con-

tact) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 110vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Kick-down

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258driving profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

LLane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Lap timerlap times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Launch-control (automatic transmission) . . . 259Leather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Lift the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Light Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Light range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118control lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123daylight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120fog light with cornering light function . . . . . . 123headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125instrument lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118motorway light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

385

Index

switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Loading the luggage compartmentfastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 138positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 146

Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Lock and unlockin the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 138emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 126net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 148retractable shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140storing the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 142variable luggage compartment floor . 142, 143

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 143Luggage compartment shelf

storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139, 142Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

MMain beam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356

Maintenance frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Malfunctions

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Media

changing track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201playback modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202playback order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200requirements for data media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197select track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204switching the Media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203unreadable CD or DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

MEDIAsettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Mirrors

adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130see also Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Mobile phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Mobile Signal Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Multi-collision brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Multifunction steering wheel

with voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244My Beat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

NNatural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323LNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323, 326special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214change view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221entering the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217import vCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216my destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219navigation with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224offroad navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226predictive navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223road signs indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218selecting the destination on the map . . . . . . 217settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225special destinations (POI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221traffic bulletins (TRAFFIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222updating the installing navigation data . . . . 216

Net bagluggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Net for luggageluggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

386

Index

Net partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 148Noise

adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292refuelling natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346, 350

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

OOctane (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70

partial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Offroad Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 323windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109in the locking cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322, 323windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Operating faultautomatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Operation in winterbattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128heated windscreen washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . 128salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Original accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Overview (right hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

PPainting the vehicle

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Panoramic roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Panoramic sliding sunroof

see Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Parking aid

automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302braking during the manoeuvre . . . . . . . . . . . . 304fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303, 305parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361setting the indications and audio sig-

nals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303, 305surroundings warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Parking aid systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301, 304

Parking brakeautomatic connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292emergency brake function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Parking distance warning systemsee Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301, 304

Parking (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . 258ParkPilot

see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300, 301, 304Particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13, 14Petrol

additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Power sockets

trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Power steering

see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . 263Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Preheating system

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Preheat the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248Press & Drive

start button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Properties of oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

RRadar sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273, 278

387

Index

Radiofrequency change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189indications and icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192save station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

RADIOadditional DAB services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191additional DAB stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191automatic playback (SCAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194DAB memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191DAB operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191DAB radio text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191DAB slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191DAB station information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191DAB transmission standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191indication of station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190selecting, tuning and saving stations . . . . . . 193set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195station tracking by RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190tracking of DAB stations on FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Radio-operated remote controlsee Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Radio screen: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Radio text (RDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Raise the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190automatic station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190RDS Regional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Rear fog lightcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112, 113Rear mounting

towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Rear seat

fold down with the remote unlocking lever . 137folding down and raising the backrest . . . . . 136

Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Recognition of road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Refuelling

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82gas tank indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84natural gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323opening the fuel tank flap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Remote control key

unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Retractable shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Reverse assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306usage instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Reverse assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 70, 82

Road signsshown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Road signs detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78limited operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79shown on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79windscreen damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149fix the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Rotary/push knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Rotation direction

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

SSafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Safety

child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Safety instructions

head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

388

Index

using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30using seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Save fuelinertia mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15fitting the seat belt strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 21safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

SEAT Digital Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70information profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70navigation map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162SEAT Media Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

data transmission and control functions . . . 186Seats

adjusting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136electric settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133fitting the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13removing the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Seat's Mobility Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Selective catalytic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Selector lever (automatic gearbox)

emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

ServiceDigital Maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356service sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356set service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356terms of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Service Menu

identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74restart the oil service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74restart Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Service notification: consult . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . . . 257Side airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Signal amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364

Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354Special characteristics

AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313volume reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298SSD

see Jukebox (SSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer

combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Start-Stop system

disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254driver indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251stopping and starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . 251the engine does not turn off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251the engine starts by itself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Starting up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Start the engine by towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Station

set a station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Station names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Station tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

ACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267active cylinder management status (ACT) . . 72adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

389

Index

compass indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 72ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Emergency brake assistance system (Front

Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272gear-change recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72identifying letters on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72road signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78SEAT Drive Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 255service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80tyre control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 76

Steeringcontrol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Steering assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Steering wheel

adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95shift paddles (automatic transmission) . . . . 257

Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152on the front passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Storage compartment accessoriessee Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Storage of accident data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Storing objects

bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312net bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149, 150trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . 146

Sun blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

anti-trap function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Sunshade blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117, 132anti-trap function (glass roof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Switchhazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

TTail light bulbs in the bodywork

remove the tail light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Tail lights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Tail lights on the rear lid

remove the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 63Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Telephone

Bluetooth® profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Bluetooth® settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241enter telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238favourites (quick access to the phone

book) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233indications and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 234settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242short messages (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240user profile settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Temperature indicatorexterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Timeadjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 80

Tiptronic (automatic transmission) . . . . . 255, 257To change the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99To park the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 35, 36Torque

wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Towable loads

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312390

Index

Tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311Tow hook

fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317place in the reserve position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318safety check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315operation and conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Towing devicefitting later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 51rear towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49, 51tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50with towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Traffic information (TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Traffic Jam Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287situations where it has to be disconnected . 288

Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308, 315adjusting the headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 319exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310hitching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310LED tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311

loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304, 305power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311retrofitting a towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320safety lug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail-

er combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311technical requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309towable loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312towing cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310, 311trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . 308, 312

Trailer modesee Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Trapdoor for transporting long objects . . . . . . 146Trips abroad

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Turning the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Tyre Mobility System

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Tyre monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Tyre pressure loss indicator

tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Tyresaccessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

UUnlock and lock

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104with the central locking switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244connecting external data media . . . . . . . . . . 207error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

VVanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Variable luggage compartment floor . . . 142, 143Vehicle

data label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372parking on inclines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

391

Index

raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . 104vehicle ID number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Vehicle batteryassisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47charge level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 341electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343winter operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Vehicle carewiper blade service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Vehicle dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Vehicle wallet compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Vertical load on the tow hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

loading the trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Voice control

available languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

WWarning symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Washing the vehicle

conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 359high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 359

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43, 350anti-theft device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 43caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Wheelschange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 44changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354wheel nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Windows

automatic opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114convenience closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114convenience opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Window washerwindow washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Window washer water

check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340filling quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Winter conditionssunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350four-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

Wiper and rear window wiper bladescleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Wiper bladescleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Wireless Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244Wireless charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

connect external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

XXDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

392

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.19


Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

Owner’s manualSEAT Leon

5F0012720BN

Ingl

és 5

F001

2720

BN (

11.19

)

SEA

T Le

on I

nglé

s (11

.19)

Documents

(11.19) Owner’s manual Leon SEAT Leon SEAT · 2019. 10. 8. · Owner’s manual SEAT Leon 5F0012720BN Inglés 5F0012720BN (11.19) SEAT Leon Inglés ... SEAT Official Service: Service